TrimbleRealWorks 11.0 User Guide PDF
TrimbleRealWorks 11.0 User Guide PDF
TrimbleRealWorks 11.0 User Guide PDF
Welcome 13
Start Page........................................................................................................................... 76
Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................ 77
Toolbars.............................................................................................................................. 77
Ribbon ................................................................................................................................ 77
Windows ............................................................................................................................. 78
Tools and Commands ........................................................................................................ 93
Customize the User Interface ........................................................................................... 110
Customize the Quick Access Toolbar............................................................................... 115
Set the Unit of Measurement for Length ....................................................................................... 120
Set the Preferences ...................................................................................................................... 121
Viewer Preferences .......................................................................................................... 122
HD Display Preferences ................................................................................................... 123
Tools Preferences ............................................................................................................ 123
Navigation Preferences .................................................................................................... 125
General Preferences ........................................................................................................ 126
Units Preferences ............................................................................................................. 127
Print Preference................................................................................................................ 128
Improvement Program Preferences ................................................................................. 128
Close Trimble RealWorks ............................................................................................................. 130
Index 1719
13
Welcome
RealWorks Viewer
This is a software tool for visualizing and exploring as-built data acquired by
laser scanning technologies. In general, such a data set contains a 3D point
cloud and optionally a collection of 2D images. This software tool allows you to
load as many point clouds as needed. Each point of a point cloud can contain
not only its 3D coordinates, but also other attributes such as intensity and
surface normal. You can visualize a point cloud in 3D, rotate, pan or zoom
in/out in order to explore it in detail. Visualization can be enhanced in different
ways: points shaded by intensity, by color or by its normal, according to a view,
etc. You can also compare a 3D point cloud with 2D images (if available).
When images are registered with the 3D point cloud, you can visualize both
data sets from the point of view from which the images were captured.
Tip: RealWorks Viewer is free. You can download it from the Trimble website.
You only need to fill the form that will come after clicking the link to download.
Note: RealWorks Viewer requires an RWP project file and its associated RWP
folder. For more options relating to collaborating and sharing, see the Publisher
function in certain modules.
14 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
RealWorks
This software tool provides you with a set of tools for processing 3D point
clouds and 2D images in order to obtain the necessary information for your
applications (or projects). Generally, this processing can be divided into three
modes: Registration, OfficeSurvey™ and Modeling.
In Registration, you can register scans with respect to other scans and/or
with respect to a set of survey points. The registration method is either
target-based or cloud-based. When some targets have been used, you
can first check and modify them. Then the Target-Based Registration Tool
automatically registers them simultaneously. The results are validated
through registration errors, which can be saved in a report. You can also
use the Geo-Referencing Tool to put the scanned data into a known
coordinate system.
All RealWorks products can support a huge amount of points. The user is able
to precisely control which points are loaded into memory and thus which are
available for editing with all the regular tools. All RealWorks products include
tools for managing Trimble FX data; importing TZS scans, automatically
creating station(s) on import with link to TZS; creating scans, extracting targets,
registering the created stations, creating sampled scans with spatial resolution,
converting to Trimble LASERGen format.
This chapter lists all the new features, and the improvements that are in each
version of RealWorks.
18 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In RealWorks 11.0
Automation:
o Import & Register tool: Import, extract and register in one step
o Improved performance of extraction from TZF scans
o Optimization for high-end multi-core processors, e.g., AMD
Ryzen
o Auto-classify Indoor: Improved wall detection
User Interface:
o New layout: Simpler WorkSpace
o New layout: Tools
o Window auto-hide and lock
o Toolbars now more visible
Visualization and Navigation:
o New Enhanced Ambient Shading mode for point clouds
o Adaptive point size
o Limit Box: Standard Views
o View Only This
o Support of GeForce 1080 graphics card
Registration:
o Target-Based Registration: Improved target auto-matching
o Target-Based Registration: Auto-match leveled stations with
only two targets
o Target-Based Registration: Auto-match traverse network
o Target-Based Registration: Improved auto-matching in case of
equidistant targets
o Topo points from station positions
Drawing:
o Smart picking for roadmarks
o Surface area property for closed planar polylines and planes
o Merge coplanar polylines
o Polyline Drawing: Custom drawing color
Modeling:
o Plant features now available with Advanced Modeler license
o Move mesh using manipulators
o Connect cylinders with cylinders and reducers
o Geometry snap in the Geometry Modifier
o View geometries with contours
User Interaction:
o Segmentation: Save the project while the tool is active
o Segmentation: Changes while the tool is active
o View-Based 2D Measurement in the Production mode
o Group naming
o Shortcut to delete geometries
General Enhancements:
o Unit for residual errors
o Scan Explorer point extraction: Auto-save option
o TZF Scan conversion to gridded E57/PTX/PTS: Low disk
warning
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 19
Storage Tank:
o Tank Inspection: Reference diameter and circumference in
roundness plots
o Tank Calibration: More visible reference line
In RealWorks 10.4.1
In RealWorks 10.3.2
In RealWorks 10.3.1
In RealWorks 10.2.2
In RealWorks 10.2
Ability to open a JXL format file coming from a Trimble SX10 instrument
which includes the following features:
View the images taken from the different types of camera (Overview,
Primary and Telescope) in the Station-Based mode,
Organize the taken images by stations, camera types, in specific
folders,
Colorize scans of a station with all images of a specific camera type,
Equalize all images of a station of a specific camera type,
Texture meshes,
Rectify images.
Export/Import of TDX format files:
The user can perform multi-point distance measurements.
The user can perform a distance measurement on screen.
Enhancement of the Cloud-Based Registration tool. The Registration
Visual Check feature is embedded with the tool.
Ability is offer to customize the Quick Access Toolbar, export the resulting
settings from a version of RealWorks and import them into another
version.
New tool: The Alignment Stationing feature lets the user define the
stations positions along a given polyline.
A stations alignment once done can be used in the Surface-to-Model
Inspection and Twin Surface Inspection tools.
Export an event log file.
Rotate the inspection map in case of vertical cylinder.
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 21
In RealWorks 10.1
The Find feature has been extended. In addition of being able to find an
item by Name, with a complete or partial name, you can now find by Type.
Ability to create Ortho-Images from imported ones.
Ability to modify the orientation and position of an Ortho-Image.
Add the elevation-based rendering to the "Cloud Rendering Settings"
window.
Ability to pick the origin of an elevation-based rendering
Inspection Map: ability to shift the naming of created/exported sections.
In case of a tunnel, the user has the ability to use the interval either in the
3D along the path or in the horizontal plane along the project path.
Feature Set: Ability to manage a feature code library out of the Feature
Set tool.
Registration Check: This feature offers a way to exchange information
between teams to quickly and visually check the result of a registration.
Enhancement of the Limit Box feature by letting the user to record and
exchange a limit box.
Close Project: You can select a project and choose Close from the pop-up
menu.
Merge Clouds: You can select some clouds and choose Merge Clouds
from the pop-up menu.
The Create In feature has been removed from the Segmentation tool.
Model Group as a new group
Ability to perform an arc measurement and its complementary on the shell
of a tank.
Ability to export an arc measurement.
22 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In RealWorks 10.0
In RealWorks 9.1.2
In RealWorks 9.1.1
In RealWorks 9.0
The Close button is removed from the WorkSpace window and in the List
Window.
Measurement Tool: Add a new way to measure an orientation by picking
three points.
Add to ability to change the diameter of pipe(s).
Station Markers
TSIP program added in Preferences.
Information about the graphic card in use in the About dialog.
Information about the OpenGL version number in the About dialog.
The extraction feature is removed from the Clipping Box Extraction Tool
when the tool is as a sub-tool.
Export TZF Scans as JPG Images with color and/or intensity layer(s).
The Start Page appears in place of the 3D View. It comes up after you
launch the software. From this page, you can have access to different
useful links.
The extraction of corners ability is added to the Target Analyze Tool.
Warns about warranty expiration or close to expiration.
Automatic rotation center mode
Ability to pick the highest (or lowest) point on a region around the position
of the mouse.
Ability to manually enter a value when rotating a geometry in the
Geometry Modifier Tool.
Ability to change the center of the manipulator in the Cloud-Based
Registration Tool.
Ability to change the width of all polylines.
Ability to compute power line from scan data.
Ability to draw a freehand selection.
Add a POSITIVE/NEGATIVE colorization mode in the inspection map.
Add reverse button to change the increment direction in inspection map
analyzer.
Change slices name definition to take into account the distance to the first
slice.
Export sections in Autocad (DWG/DXF)
Automatic or manual inversion of axes in a difference plot when inspecting
a map resulting from a cylindrical projection.
Color Coded by Elevation
Adaptive sampling (spatial sampling (keep details))
Brighter luminance
Add the ability to assign the buttons of a mouse for navigating or
manipulating objects in the 3D View.
In the Mesh Editing Tool, the user can create matched images from
colored TZF Scans and use them for texturing purposes.
Import of RSP project files from Riegl's RiSCAM PROTM
Import of Z+F scan files (with.zfs extension).
Ability to refine the registration of stations based on its point clouds
instead of TZF Scans.
26 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In RealWorks 8.1.1
New Tools:
In RealWorks 8.0.3
In RealWorks 8.0.2
New Tools:
In RealWorks 8.0.1
A station can now contain several TZF scans within, with one set as Main
Scan.
The ten last opened files are listed at the bottom of the File menu. As a
shortcut, each of them can open by selecting it from this menu.
Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans: The feature is now called Generate
Default Key Plan (Top View). The option used to compute the Key Plan is
not based on the Elevation information but on the Cloud Rendering option
chosen within RealWorks.
Target-Based Registration Tool:
Targets matched together and target groups are renamed. Instead
of keeping their default name or TargetX (when they are extracted)
and mTargetX where X is an order, they are renamed as XXX. XXX
starts at 001 and is incremented by one.
Stations that are not selected as the input of the Target Based
Registration Tool are now removed from the Registration Details
dialog.
Target Analyzer Tool:
The Re-fit and Fit buttons are replaced by an icon.
The Flat Target icon has been changed in the Fitting Tool.
RealWorks no longer needs to disable the Aero function in Windows.
Graphics Card: 1GB, or higher 3D Open GL 3.2
Sub-Project Manager and Partial Loading Manager are both removed from
RealWorks 8.0 as the notion of Sub-Project and Partial Loading Manager
do not exist anymore. A Point Loading Manager system has been added.
TZF Scans can be exported to E57 format as regular grid data sets.
PTX format file with several scans in the same station: A TZF Scan is
created for each scan in the same station in the RealWorks project.
Features removed from RealWorks 8.0:
Erase Points from the Edit menu,
Reduce Number of Points When Moving from the Preferences/Viewer
dialog.
Project files saved in a version older than 5.0 are not supported
anymore.
The file formats listed below are removed from the Open dialog:
PPF Trimble proprietary PointScape project file format,
DCP Trimble proprietary PocketScape project file format,
SOI Trimble proprietary format for scanned files.
RealWorks Plant as licensing module removed
New Tools:
In RealWorks 7.2.2
In RealWorks 7.2.1
In the Auto-Extract and Register feature, the user can choose and set a
station as Reference Station.
In the Target-Based Registration Tool, targets are matched automatically.
The By-hand method has been removed.
Scan/Target Creator Tool: Polygonal Selection by adding (or subtracting,
or intersecting) has been removed, TZF scans can be open directly from
the Scan Target Creator Tool, and the load percentage for scans is now
20 million points.
The Scan/Target Creator Tool has been removed from 7.2
The Complete Station By Adding New Scans feature has been removed.
When opening a TZS format file, the conversion to the TZF format is now
obligatory. Declining the conversion will close the current open project.
Import of Riegl file format (3dd) has been removed.
TZF scans cannot be open in a 2D Viewer.
Discontinuity Display rendering removed from the 3D View toolbar.
The Export as Point Cloud for AutoCAD (PTC) feature has been removed
from 7.2.
New Tools:
In RealWorks 7.1
RealWorks supports now a new type of file called Trimble Scan File which
gathers two kinds of formats: TZS and TZF.
Filtering by zone is enabled when creating sampled scans from TZF/TZS
scans or when converting from TZF/TZS scan files to BSF.
Conversion of proprietary scanner data files: TZS, FLS, iQscan and PTX
to TZF.
New naming convention for ortho-images when splitting them into several
pieces.
In the Fitting Tool, the user can now fit a set of points with a Vertical
Cylinder or a Horizontal Plane.
New Tools:
In RealWorks 7.0
In the Segmentation Tool, the user can now draw a Circular Selection.
In the Frame Creation Tool, the user can set an axial entity's axis as X (or
Y or Y) Axis of the frame to create.
In the Measurement Tool, some additional measurement methods have
been added.
In the Scan/Target Creator Tool, the user can create a Point Target by
picking a point from a loaded TZS format file.
The user can use the Find Best Extrusion facility in the 3D Plane Tool to fit
a plane in order to calculate an Extrusion in the Cloud Based Modeler Tool
or 2D Section in SteelWorks Tool
Etc.
New Tools:
The user can display the 3D position and the name of each station in the
3D View.
And if required, display the Network Visual(s) of a single (or all stations).
The user can color the point cloud using station-based images.
A new licensing system has been implemented: HASP
The user can open a Trimble TSPX format file, a common project format
file between RealWorks and Trimble Business Center.
Etc.
In RealWorks 6.5.3
New Tools:
The user can now convert TZS formats files to PTX (or PTS) format files.
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 33
In RealWorks 6.5.1
In the SteelWorks Creator Tool, the user can now edit point cloud(s)
thanks to a Point Cloud Manager.
In the Scan/Target Creator Tool, the Spherical Target extraction is not
limited to spheres for which the radius is equal to 38.10 mm.
In the Measurement Tool, three new types of measurements have been
added. The user can now measure a distance in a horizontal plane, along
a vertical axis or a clearance distance.
The user is able to configure the mouse buttons for Zoom In or Zoom Out.
The user is able to open or drag and drop TZS format files within
RealWorks.
In the Export Inspection Vertical Slices (or Horizontal Slices) feature, the
user can choose the unit of measurement to represent values.
New Tools:
In this chapter, the user will find the information about the system
requirements, program installation, activation and how to contact Trimble.
37
System Requirements
Hereafter are detailed the requirements that are required for running Trimble
RealWorks, Trimble Scan Explorer and Trimble Web Viewer.
Trimble RealWorks
To run Trimble RealWorks, the system requirements are as shown.
Note: Always update graphics card drivers before using Trimble 3D Spatial
Imaging office software.
Note: The given procedure is based a NVIDIA graphics card, please refer to
the documentation that comes with your graphics card because the procedure
may vary from one manufacturer to another.
4. From the Manage 3D Settings panel, first click on the Global Settings tab.
5. From the Preferred Graphics Processor drop-down list, choose High
Performance NVIDIA processor.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 41
9. If required, click on the "Select the preferred graphics processor for this
program" pull-down arrow.
10. Again, choose "High Preform NVIDIA Processor" from the list.
11. In the "Specify the settings for this program" panel, select "Prefer
Maximum Performance" from the "Power Management Mode" line.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 43
1. With the Downloads panel expanded, click on the Update Network License
Utility link.
2. Once the download completed, click .
48 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Licensed Features
The main tools and functionalities included in the Trimble RealWorks software
and their inclusion in the available Editions are detailed in the Trimble
RealWorks support notes, which can be downloaded from the Trimble 3D
Laser Scanning http://www.trimble.com/3d-laser-
scanning/realworks.aspx?dtID=overview& website.
If you have a HASP license file, keep the Complete option and click Next.
The Select Program Folder dialog appears.
If you have a Trimble OG&C's license file, choose the Custom option and
click Next. The Select Features dialog opens.
12. You should select a program folder inside which Setup will add program
icons. You can keep the given program folder, type a new one in the
Program Folder field or select an existing one from the Existing Folders
field.
13. Press Next. The Ready to Install the Program dialog appears.
14. Press Install. The Setup Status dialog opens and files are installed. The
Setup Type dialog appears.
15. Select the type(s) of file you wish Trimble RealWorks to take in charge.
Four types are available: NEU and ASC are an ASCII format file
extension, JXL is an extension of text files exported from Trimble Survey
Controller™, Survey Manager™ or Survey Pro™ software. TZS is an
extension of files from Trimble's LASERGen. TSPX is a Trimble Survey
Project file.
16. Click Next. The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog appears. You have
successfully installed RealWorks on your computer.
17. Click Finish to complete the installation*.
Note: These catalog files are necessary in the case you want to model point
clouds with constraints in tools like the SteelWorks Creator.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 51
Note: The table files, installed during the installation of RealWorks, can be
reached from a direct link in the user interface. Refer to the Locate Tables (on
page 1585) section.
52 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Select Modify and click Next. You can add new components in your
program or select currently installed components to remove.
Select Repair and click Next. All program components installed in the
previous setup will be re-installed.
Select Remove and click Next. All installed program components will be
removed.
9. If Remove has been selected, the Confirm Uninstall dialog appears; click
Finish to end the uninstall procedure.
Tip: You can also use the Add/Remove tool via your Windows® control panel.
Note: Updating, when carried out frequently, may generate residual files on
your hard disk. To minimize such eventualities, we recommend that you
completely remove Trimble RealWorks from your hard disk and perform a new
installation procedure.
54 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Installing Trimble RealWorks 55
License Files
There are at least two license types the user can use with RealWorks: OG&C
and HASP.
Caution: You are not able to use the Advanced Tank version of RealWorks
with an OGC license. To use this version (of RealWorks), you must change
your OGC license to a HASP license.
56 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Start and then select Trimble PPP License from your desktop. The
Trimble Power, Process and Plant - Client License Configuration Tool
dialog appears with the Configuration tab opens by-default.
a) Un-check the Use Local License option. The Local License File
field and the Browse button both become dimmed. The Server
Hostname field is enabled.
b) Enter a server name in the Server Hostname field.
c) If required, click Ping in the Server Diagnostics dialog to
diagnose the server.
Or
3. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The Trimble Power,
Process and Plant - Client License Configuration Tool dialog opens.
4. Do as described in the "Enter a Trimble Power, Process and Plant License
File" topic.
5. Click Save and Close.
Note: The License Manager allows you to view and manage the licensing
information.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 59
1. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.
Or
2. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager
dialog opens.
Automatic: This is the default search option. This allows searching for a
license by first checking whether a HASP hardware key is connected to a
USB port on your computer. If not found, it checks whether a "Detachable
License" is installed on your computer. If not found, it checks whether a
multi-user license is available on a HASP network key. Optionally, you can
specify a network server in the License Server drop-down list; otherwise,
all network servers are searched.
Local Hardware: This option allows searching for a license installed on a
HASP hardware key connected to a USB port on your computer.
Local Software: This option allows searching for a "Detachable License"
when using a multi-user license installed on your computer.
60 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Connect your HASP hardware USB key into a USB port of your computer.
2. Ensure that no other HASP hardware USB keys are connected and
RealWorks is running.
3. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.
Or
4. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager dialog
opens.
5. Check that the key ID displayed in the Features list matches the key ID for
this upgrade.
6. Click the Upgrade button. The Upgrade License dialog opens.
7. Enter the 19-digit code.
8. Click the Upgrade button. The Upgrade License dialog closes.
1. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.
Or
2. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager dialog
opens.
3. In the Features panel, you may check:
1. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.
Or
2. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager dialog
opens.
3. In the License Manager dialog, click the HASP Admin Control Center link
located in the lower-left corner of the dialog. The Sentinel Admin Control
Center page is displayed in a browser window.
4. In the Options panel, select Configuration. The Configuration for Sentinel
License Manager on "Computer_Name" appears.
5. Select the Detachable Licenses tab.
6. Check the Enable Detaching of Licenses option.
1. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.
Or
2. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager dialog
opens.
3. Click the Check Out button. The Check Out License dialog opens.
4. Enter the number of days.
5. Or first, click on the Expiration pull down arrow.
6. And then, select an expiration date from the calendar.
7. Click the OK button. The Check Out License dialog closes.
Note: The Check Out option must be selected on the host machine from which
the license will be detached.
64 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Start button on the taskbar and then All Programs / Trimble /
Trimble RealWorks 11.0 / Network License Update. The Update Network
License dialog opens.
Or
2. Click on the Network License Update icon on your desktop. The Update
Network License dialog opens.
Note:
You should download the Trimble Update Network License Utility from the
Trimble 3D Laser Scanning website and install it on your computer.
You need to have an Internet connection to proceed to the update.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 65
RealWorks notifies the user when the license file is close to expiration date or
when the license file is expired.
Tip: Click on the Trimble icon. This opens the License Manager dialog. By
this way, you can update your license.
66 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: Click on the Trimble icon. This opens the License Manager dialog. By
this way, you can update your license.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 67
Contact Trimble
For information regarding this (or other) Trimble software product(s), please
visit the Trimble website at www.trimble.com.
This chapter guides you through the steps you will take after installing the
software on your computer, from the startup of the software, through the tour of
the user interface in order to be familiar with it, to the opening of your first
project.
71
A Start Page also opens. From the Start Page, you can get started working
with the software, access to different links like checking for updates, etc.
72 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: A warning appears in the case you try to open a project from the link
in the Start Page, with a tool (or feature) that is in use.
Note: Refer to the Performing Basic Operations chapter for more information
about the different file formats that RealWorks can handle.
Getting Started with RealWorks 73
In the Ribbon layout, to switch from Production to Registration and vice versa,
click on the Configuration pull-down arrow on the Quick Access Toolbar.
In some rare situations, you may not be able to change of configuration. This is
because the Configuration option has been unchecked in the Quick Access
Toolbar.
74 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
User Interface
When you start a session of RealWorks session, you can see the main window
with its working sub-window components and the Start Page (not illustrated).
After you open a project, these components will activate so you can start
working with them. You can customize the settings of the different components
inside the main window.
When you start RealWorks for the first time, the Ribbon layout (on page 75) is
set default as well as the Head Always Up option. This last one has the
Ribbon Layout
A session of RealWorks looks like the following example, when the Ribbon
layout has been chosen:
Tip: For both situations, use the following combination of keys Ctrl + Alt + F9.
76 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Start Page
The Start Page , included in the software, displays when you start the
software for the first time. This page will appear each time you start the
software again until the option in the Preferences / General dialog remains
checked. This page includes many useful links.
Trimble RealWorks Support This link brings you to the Trimble Global Support & Service
web page.
Video demos on YouTube This link brings you to the official channel of RealWorks on
YouTube.
Online Help (F1) This links opens the online help file.
Release Notes This links brings you the Trimble Technical Support page,
from which you can release notes, documentation, etc.
Trimble RealWorks News A panel inside which you can find all new news about
Trimble RealWorks, as well as a link to download the last
version of Trimble RealWorks
Note: Links with an asterisk in parenthesis are not available in the Viewer
version of RealWorks.
Getting Started with RealWorks 77
Menu Bar
In the Menus and Toolbars layout, RealWorks provides you with a set of tools
and commands. The menu bar, always open and displayed on the top of the
user interface, contains all available tools and commands that you can use.
This bar is composed of main menus that you have to drop-down in order to
reach the tool (or command) you wish to use. For some tools (or commands),
you may need to go to the sub-menu to reach them.
Some main menus will be automatically added (or deleted) according to the
processing modes you are actively using. Many tools and commands can also
be reached from the toolbars, or the pop-up menus, by tapping on the screen
(when using a touchscreen), and waiting until a square appears then releasing.
Toolbars
In the Menus and Toolbars layout, the RealWorks user interface is composed
of different toolbars. Each of them has specific uses. By default, all toolbars are
not open when you start RealWorks. Those that are opened are displayed
either horizontally under the menu bar or vertically beside the WorkSpace
window. You can move each toolbar to any location within the user interface,
open or close them.
Ribbon
A ribbon is a command bar that organizes RealWorks's features into a series
of tabs, at the top of the user interface. By adopting the ribbon layout, the user
finds a modern way to find, understand and use commands and tools efficiently
in order to perform a task or a series of tasks.
78 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Vertical Toolbar
A toolbar located vertically on the right side of the 3D View, gathers the most
used icons offering by this way a quick access to each of them, and avoiding
the user swapping from tab to tab. This toolbar cannot be either customized
nor undocked from its position.
Windows
RealWorks main window has several components, which are described
hereafter.
Getting Started with RealWorks 79
Start Page
The Start Page disappears after you load a project in RealWorks, but you still
have access to it by selecting Start Page from the Window menu (or from
the Support tab).
Tip: You can use the Ctrl + F4 key combination to close the Start Page.
80 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
WorkSpace
The WorkSpace window (always opened when the user interface appears) is
the one located under the tabs and comprises a set of tabs. This window is
used for organizing data hierarchically in a tree called Project Tree. This main
tree is subdivided into sub-trees called Scans, Targets, Models and Images.
Each of them is used for organizing certain types of data from a loaded project.
To display a sub-tree, click the corresponding tab.
Only one tab can be displayed at any given moment. The Images tab can be
found in OfficeSurvey, Modeling and Registration (or in Production and
Registration). You can move this window to any location within the user
interface, or resize it.
Note: The Cross button has been removed from the top right corner of the
WorkSpace window. You are not able to close the window with this button but
you can still close it through the View tab, in the Windows group.
Caution: When the WorkSpace window is un-docked, you can use the Alt and
F4 combination to close it. First ensure that the WorkSpace window is
selected, otherwise, you close RealWorks and you lose all of your changes.
Note: You can change the orientation of the WorkSpace window to display the
inner panels side-by-side horizontally (or vertically), by clicking the Toggle
Side-by-Side / Top-Bottom View icon
Getting Started with RealWorks 81
List
The List window, which was formerly a separate window, is now merged down
with the WorkSpace window as a panel. It is used to display the content of a
selected group of the Project Tree. Each object node shown in this window is
identified by its icon, its name and its other properties. You can display it side-
by-side with the WorkSpace panel horizontally (or vertically), by clicking the
Toggle Side-by-Side / Top-Bottom View icon.
Note: Because the number of points for a point cloud is often large and the
symbol (Digit Grouping Symbol) used for grouping the digits makes that
number unreadable; you now can customize this symbol by first opening the
Regional and Language Options in the Control Panel (of Windows®) and then
selecting Customize and Digit Grouping Symbol. This change will be
memorized and used for the next session of RealWorks and will affect the
display of the numbers of points in that window.
Caution: The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the List window has been
removed in RealWorks 8.0.
Caution: When the WorkSpace window is un-docked, you can use the Alt and
F4 combination to close it. First ensure that the WorkSpace window is
selected, otherwise, you close RealWorks and you lose all of your changes.
The version 9.2 of RealWorks introduces the concept of layers, one per object
node, whatever its type. A column, named Layer, is added in the List window.
You may see it only in OfficeSurvey and Modeling (or in Production).
82 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: You cannot modify the layer of an object from the List window.
Getting Started with RealWorks 83
Property
This window is used to list the properties of a selected object and is divided
into two columns. The left one lists the titles of each property and the right one
shows property values (either fixed or modifiable). The properties in gray are
fixed and those in black are modifiable. Properties are classified by category
such as General, Content, Geometry, etc.
You can shrink each category of properties by hiding its content. To do this,
click on the Shrink button. By default, the Property window is not displayed in
the user interface. You have to open it by using the command from the main
Window menu or from the pop-up menu after selecting an object. You can
move this window to any location in the user interface, or close, reduce and
restore it.
Note: Because the number of points for a point cloud is often large and the
symbol (Digit Grouping Symbol) used for grouping the digits makes in that
number unreadable; you now can customize this symbol by first opening the
Regional and Language Options in the Control Panel (of Windows®) and then
selecting Customize and Digit Grouping Symbol. This change will be
memorized and used for the next session of RealWorks and will affect the
display of the numbers of points in the Property window.
Tip: You can select and copy any value from the Property window by using the
Ctrl + C keys.
Caution: The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the Property window has
been removed in RealWorks 8.0.
84 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The version 9.2 of RealWorks introduces the concept of layers, one per object
node, whatever its type. A line, named Layer, is added in the Property window.
You may see it only in OfficeSurvey and Modeling (or in Production). You are
able to change the layer of an object from this window.
Getting Started with RealWorks 85
Selection List
The Selection List window is used to list the selections done from the Project
Tree* or from the 3D View. By default, the Selection List window is not
displayed within the user interface. You have to open it by selecting Selection
List Window from the Window menu (or from Windows group on the View tab).
You can move this window to any location in the user interface, or close it.
Caution: The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the Selection List window
has been removed since RealWorks 8.0.
Warning: Be aware that when you enter some tools like e.g. the Orientation in
the Registration module, the objects you selected as the input of the tool and
listed in the Selection List window are removed from the window. When you
leave the tool, the selection is lost.
Note: (*) All the selected items do not appear in the List window. There are
some exceptions. Please, refer to the Selection Mechanism (see "Select
Data" on page 511) in the WorkSpace (see "WorkSpace Window" on page
511) window.
The version 9.2 of RealWorks introduces the concept of layers, one per object
node, whatever its type. A column, named Layer, is added in the Selection List
window. You may see it only in OfficeSurvey and Modeling (or in Production).
Note: You cannot modify the layer of an object from the Selection List window.
86 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: Please, refer to the section related to the Specific Station Marker(s) of a
station (or set of stations).
Getting Started with RealWorks 87
Classification Layers
The Classification Layers window can be used to manage the layers within
your project. You are able to create a new layer, or delete, rename or change
the color of an existing layer as well as the edition its properties. By default, the
Classification Layers window is not displayed within the user interface. You
have to open it by selecting Classification Layers from the Window menu (or
from the Windows group on the View tab). You can move this window to any
location in the user interface, or close it.
By default, the Limit Box window is not displayed within the user interface. You
have to open it by selecting Limit Box from the Window menu (or from the
Windows group on the View tab), or from any tool that handles the limit box
visualization. You can move this window to any location in the user interface,
or close it.
Tip: The Limit Box window can also be open with the Limit Box Extraction
(or Limit Box Mode) toolbar.
Getting Started with RealWorks 89
3D View
The 3D View is always open at the right side of the user interface under the
tabs. You can move, reduce and restore it in the same way as for the other
windows but you cannot close it. This window is mainly used for displaying (or
hiding) the 3D representation of a selection from the Project Tree. An
orthonormal Reference Frame and a Scale are displayed respectively at the
bottom right and bottom left corners of this window. By default, the window
background is gray dark with a gradient effect. You can customize it to suit
your preference.
With a certain type of tools, the 3D View can be split in two or three sub-views.
The top sub-view remains the 3D View, and the other(s) can be a 3D View, or
a 3D View locked in 2D, or a graph. The View Manager at the bottom right
corner of the user interface lets you to organize them as you wish.
View Manager
The View Manager enables to navigate through the different aspects that may
have the 3D View when you use a certain type of tools. It appears as a toolbar
at the bottom right corner of the 3D View and is composed of two sets of icons.
In the sub-view mode (two horizontal sub-views, two vertical sub-views or three
sub-views), the sub-view with a yellow edge is the active sub-view. In the one
view mode, the view in full is always the active view.
Note:
The Hide View icon can only be selected from the pop-up menu (or from
the 3D View / Layout menu).
A sub-view, once expanded in full, cannot be hidden. That's why the Hide
View icon is dimmed.
2D Grid
In the 2D View mode, there is by default a 2D Grid superposed on the current
sub-view. This grid helps the user to have a metric scale of objects displayed
within the sub-view.
Note: The 2D View mode only appears when using some tools, like e.g. the
Cutting Plane tool, where data (resulting from the use of this category of tools)
needs to be represented in 2D.
Note:
Hiding the 2D Grid from the current sub-view will display the scale.
Whatever the view (3D View or current sub-view) you select, you should
be in Parallel to be able to display the scale.
92 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Change a Size
There are seven pre-defined and square sizes: 0.1x0.1, 1x1, 5x5, 10x10,
50x50, 100x100 and 1000x1000. All are expressed in the current unit of
measurement. The current size is displayed at the bottom left corner of the
sub-view.
To Change a Size:
Customize a Size
You can define a size which be either square (the same resolution in horizontal
and in vertical) or not.
To Customize a Size:
We will not discuss in detail these two constraint modes here. For more
information, refer to the Displacement Modes section.
In the classic Menus and Toolbars layout, all tools and commands can be
found in the menu bar, and most of them can also be found in various toolbars.
In the Ribbon layout, all of them can be on the tabs. In the next topics, we will
discuss in more detail the organization of the tools and commands.
94 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Menu Bar
The menu bar is a series of aligned menu titles. This series changes
depending on the processing mode you are in. You drop down a menu by
clicking on its title, and then you can select a command.
File: This menu is a standard menu that contains Open, Close, and other
file related commands. This menu also contains tools for loading Trimble
FX controller files, converting TZS to BSF, etc. It is available in the
Registration mode.
Edit: This menu gives access to object editing operations such as cut,
copy and paste, undo, redo, find, etc. and access to advanced functions
and preferences.
Tools: This menu contains common tools that you can use no matter
which processing mode you are in.
Plant*: This menu contains tools for modeling pipes and structural
steelworks.
OfficeSurvey: This menu contains all available tools related to the
OfficeSurvey™ mode.
Registration: This menu contains all available tools related to the
Registration mode.
Modeling*: This menu contains all available tools related to the Modeling
module.
Media Tools: This menu contains tools for computing video and capturing
snapshots.
Display: This menu gives access to object display and hide functions in
the 3D View window.
3D View: This menu gives access to different visualization parameters
(rendering, view, etc.) in the 3D View window.
Window: This menu allows user to organize the user interface.
Help: This menu gives access to online help.
Note: (*) The Plant and Modeling menus are not present in RealWorks Base.
Toolbars
Icons are the graphic representation of tools and commands in the toolbars.
They are organized into different toolbars according to their similarity in terms
of function.
Getting Started with RealWorks 95
Main
Under the Main toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:
Open
Connect to Mobile Device
Open Scan Explorer
Open SketchUp
Save
Print
Undo
Redo
Display
Under the Display toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:
Display Cloud
Display Geometry
Hide Cloud
Hide Geometry
Hide All
Limit Box Mode
Lighting Direction
96 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3D View
Under the 3D View toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:
View Alignment
Under the View Alignment toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:
Zoom On Selection
Center On Point
Zoom Extents
Center of Rotation Defined by Cursor Position
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Front
Back
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Object Front
Object Back
Object Left
Object Right
Object Top
Object Bottom
Go to Shooting Position
98 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Auto-Extract Targets
Auto-register using Planes
Target-Based Registration
Refine Registration Using Scans
Cloud-Based Registration
Georeferencing
Target Analyzer
Orientation
Generate Key Plan from Current View
Registration Report (Target-Based)
Limit Box Extraction
Measure
Getting Started with RealWorks 99
Move Label
Segmentation
Sampling
Auto-Classify Clouds
Limit Box Extraction
Measure
Cutting Plane
Contouring
Profile/Cross-Section
EasyProfile
2D-EasyLine
Polyline Drawing
Catenary Drawing
Alignment Stationing
2D-Polyline Inspection
Volume Calculation
Twin Surface Inspection
Surface to Model Inspection
Inspection Map Analyzer
Floor Inspection
3D Inspection
3D Inspection Analyzer
Fitting
Mesh Creation
Mesh Editing
Ortho-Projection
Multi-Ortho-Projection
Image Rectification
Feature Set
Edit Library
100 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Segmentation
Sampling
Auto-Classify Clouds
Limit Box Extraction
Measure
Cloud-Based Modeler
Geometry Creator
Geometry Modifier
Intersect
Duplicate
Plane Bounding
Windows
Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Windows toolbar:
WorkSpace window
List window
Property window
Selection List Window
Classification Layers
Limit Box
Station Maker List
Ribbon/Toolbar
Export Logs
Cascade
Tile Vertically
Tile Horizontally
Close All Windows
Getting Started with RealWorks 101
Working Frame
Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Working Frame toolbar which only
appears when you select the related command:
UCS Creation
Press: To:
CTRL + 0 Open a file
CTRL + S Save a project
CTRL + Z Undo the last action
CTRL + Y Redo the last action
CTRL + X Cut the selected object
CTRL + C Copy the selected object
CTRL + V Paste the selected object
Del. Delete the selected object
CTRL + F Access to the Find function
CTRL + M Merge two selected clouds
Home Zoom Extents
X Center on Point
Geometry Renderings
You can use the following shortcut key for displaying the edges of displayed
models.
Press: To:
O Display the edges of displayed models
102 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Cloud Renderings
You can use the following shortcut keys when applying Cloud Rendering
options to clouds.
Press: To:
1 Render cloud(s) in white color
2 Render cloud(s) in Cloud color
3 Render cloud(s) in Station color
4 Render cloud(s) in Scan color
5 Render cloud(s) in Grey Scaled Intensity
6 Render cloud(s) in Color Coded Intensity
7 Render cloud(s) in True color
8 Render cloud(s) in Color Coded Elevation
Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in
the 3D View.
Standard Views
You can use the following shortcut keys when changing the Standard View.
Press: To:
Ctrl + 5 Bring the standard view to Front
Ctrl + 0 Bring the standard view to Back
Ctrl + 8 Bring the standard view to Top
Ctrl + 2 Bring the standard view to Bottom
Ctrl + 6 Bring the standard view to Right
Ctrl + 4 Bring the standard view to Left
Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in
the 3D View.
Press: To:
J Show (or hide) station markers
K Show (or hide) station marker labels
Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in
the 3D View.
Getting Started with RealWorks 103
Press: To:
B Apply a gray-scale intensity with color overlay
Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in
the 3D View.
View Manager
You can use the following shortcut keys when the View Manager toolbar opens
at the bottom of the 3D View.
Press: To:
F11 Set the active sub-view in full mode
CTRL + F11 Replace the current view by the next one (only available in full mode)
SHIFT + F11 Hide all open windows except the 3D View window or display them if
hidden
Picking Parameters
You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar
appeared to pick with constraints in the 3D View (in XYZ Coordinate System).
Press: To:
Shift + X Lock the X coordinate
Shift + Y Lock the Y coordinate
shift + Z Lock the Z coordinate
You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar
appeared to pick with constraints in a 2D View (in Cartesian System).
Press: To:
Shift + H Lock the H coordinate
Shift + V Lock the V coordinate
You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar
appeared to pick with constraints in a 2D View (in Polar System).
Press: To:
Shift + A Lock the Angle coordinate
Shift + D Lock the Distance coordinate
104 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Head Always Up
You can use the following shortcut key for selecting (or deselecting) the Head
Always Up option.
Press: To:
U Select the Head Always Up option
Press: To:
R Rotate
T Pan
E Modify Shape
Move the Limit Box Up (1) (2)
Move the Limit Box Down (1) (2)
Move the Limit Box Right (1)
Move the Limit Box Left (1)
Page Up Move the Limit Box Back (1)
Page Down Move the Limit Box Forward (1)
Esc. Leave the Box Extraction Tool
Note:
(1) These keys are only available in the Pan mode. Be sure that NUM
LOCK is unpressed (or is Off).
(2) Along the axis which is the closest to the vertical.
Getting Started with RealWorks 105
Press: To:
F4 Launch the Limit Box Mode
R Rotate
T Pan
E Modify Shape
Move the Limit Box Up (1) (2)
Move the Limit Box Down (1) (2)
Move the Limit Box Right (1)
Move the Limit Box Left (1)
Page Up Move the Limit Box Back (1)
Page Down Move the Limit Box Forward (1)
Esc. Leave the Box Extraction Tool
Note:
(1) These keys are only available in the Pan mode. Be sure that NUM
LOCK is unpressed (or is Off).
(2) Along the axis which is the closest to the vertical.
Segmentation
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Segmentation.
Press: To:
Shift and drag the Draw a freehand selection
mouse
I Keep points inside the defined fence
O Keep points outside the defined fence
P Create the fenced points as a cloud
Esc. Cancel the defined fence
Or
Leave the Segmentation Tool
Space Bar End fence
Double Click End fence
106 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fitting
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Fitting (on page 919).
Press: To:
I Keep points inside the defined fence
O Keep points outside the defined fence
P Create a fitted entity
Esc. Cancel the defined fence
Or
Leave the Fitting tool
Space Bar End fence
Double Click End fence
F Fit geometry to cloud
Cloud-Based Registration
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Cloud-Based Registration.
Press: To:
Esc. Leave the Cloud-Based Registration Tool
F Refine the registration
F5 Apply the registration
C Change the manipulator center location
Geometry Modifier
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Geometry Modifier.
Press: To:
Shift + E Change the shape of the selected entity
Shift + T Pan along the Home Frame axes
Ctrl + T Pan along its own axes
Shift + R Rotate around the center of the selected entity
C Change the location of the manipulator
Getting Started with RealWorks 107
SteelWorks Creator
You can use the following shortcut keys with the SteelWorks Creator.
Press: To:
Ctrl + H Select the H Section type
Ctrl + I Select the I Section type
Ctrl + U Select the U Section type
Ctrl + L Select the L Section type
Ctrl + T Select the T Section type
Tank Creation
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Tank Creation (see "Tank
Setup" on page 1529) / Tank Classification.
Press: To:
I keep points inside the defined fence
O Keep points outside the defined fence
P Assign the desired tank part
Toolbar/Ribbon
You can use the following shortcut keys to switch from Toolbar to Ribbon, and
vice versa.
Press: To:
Ctrl + F1 Minimize or restore the Ribbon
Ctrl + Alt + F9 Switch from Toolbar to Ribbon
Image Rectification
You can use the following shortcut key with the Image Rectification.
Press: To:
Shift + R Set image resolution
Magnifier
You can use the following shortcut key with the Magnifier (see "Magnifier Mode
- Clip and Zoom to Explore an Area of Interest" on page 500).
Press: To:
N Set the Magnifier mode
108 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Ortho-Projection
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Ortho-Projection (see
"Create Ortho-Images" on page 1100) tool.
Press: To:
Shift + C Define a projection plane by existing ortho-image
Shift + R Define resolution of ortho-image
Getting Started with RealWorks 109
Press: To:
A Add sample
Polyline Drawing
You can use the following shortcut key when a polyline is selected in the
Polyline Drawing tool.
Press: To:
Ctrl + Shift + D Duplicate manually a polyline
Press: To:
Ctrl + J Merge Coplanar polylines
Move Mesh
You can use the following shortcut key with the Move Mesh tool.
Press: To:
Shift + T Pan a mesh along the Home Frame axes
Shift + R Rotate a mesh around its center
C Change the manipulator location
110 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Windows
You can display (or hide) any window as required. Note that you cannot close
the 3D View. You can only reduce (or resize) it.
Getting Started with RealWorks 111
Display a Window
To Display a Window:
Or
Tip: You can also select a window to open from the Windows toolbar.
To Display a Window:
On the View tab, in the Windows group, click on e.g. the WorkSpace
Window icon to display the window.
112 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Hide a Window
To Hide a Window:
Tip:
You can also click on the Close button or right-click on the Title Bar (of
a Floating window) and select Hide from the pop-up menu.
You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a window (to
hide) from the pop-up menu by un-checking it.
Note: An open window has its icon highlighted in the drop-down menu.
Tip: You can also select a window to hide from the Windows toolbar.
To Hide a Window:
On the View tab, in the Windows group, click on e.g. the WorkSpace
Window icon to hide the window.
Undock a Window
To Undock a Window:
1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the window (to un-dock). A
good place to point is the title bar.
2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the window to a suitable
location in your working environment.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the window to its new location. It will
remain in this new place until you move it again (or close it).
Tip: A window, once moved from its Docking position, becomes Floating. You
can check its status by right-clicking on the Title Bar.
Getting Started with RealWorks 113
Dock a Window
To Dock a Window:
1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the window (to dock). A
good place to point is the Title Bar.
2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the window. A diamond
guide appears.
3. When the window reaches the location to dock, move the pointer over the
corresponding portion of the guide diamond. The desired area is then
shaded.
4. Release the mouse button to drop the window to its new location. It will
remain in this new place until you move it again (or close) it.
Tip: You can also right-click on the Title Bar of an undocked window and select
Docking from the pop-up menu. The window is then re-docked to its initial
position.
You can lock all window panels (once docked within the RealWorks user
interface) to avoid unintentional un-docked when double-clicking on a title bar
or when dragging and dropping a window.
• On the View tab, from the Windows group, click the Lock Windows
icon.
Toolbars
In the Menus and Toolbars layout, you can display (or hide) any toolbar as
required.
Display a Toolbar
To Display a Toolbar:
Tip: You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a toolbar (to
display) from the pop-up menu.
Hide a Toolbar
To Hide a Toolbar:
Tip: You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a toolbar (to
hide) from the pop-up menu.
Getting Started with RealWorks 115
Move a Toolbar
To Move a Toolbar:
1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the toolbar that does not
display a button (or drop-down list). A good place to point is the title bar.
2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the toolbar to a suitable
location in your window.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the toolbar to its new location. It will
remain in this new place until you move it again or close it.
Keep the Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon option unchecked
to display the toolbar at its default location, at the upper-left corner of the
user interface, next to the Trimble RealWorks button image.
Check the Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon option to display
the toolbar below the ribbon.
Tip: You can also choose Show Above the Ribbon or Show Below the Ribbon
from the Customize Quick Access Toolbar list.
Tip: You can also choose More Commands from the Support tab.
Getting Started with RealWorks 117
Or
3. Choose More Commands from the drop-down list. The Trimble RealWorks
dialog closes.
4. Click on the pull-down arrow and choose a tab from the drop-down list.
Note: Some tabs appear two times, like for example Home. This is because it
is in the Registration module and in the Production module.
118 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the Quick Access Toolbar, the commands are arranged in the order
where they were added.
1. From the Support tab, click on the Quick Access Toolbar pull-down arrow.
2. Choose Export Quick Access Toolbar from the dropped-down list. The
Export Quick Access Toolbar dialog opens.
3. Keep the default name which is "Commands".
4. Or enter a new name in the File Name field.
5. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
6. Click OK. The Export Quick Access Toolbar dialog closes.
1. From the Support tab, click on the Quick Access Toolbar pull-down arrow.
2. Choose Import Quick Access Toolbar from the dropped-down list. The
Import Quick Access Toolbar dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the *.qat file is located.
4. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
5. Click Open. The Import Quick Access Toolbar dialog closes.
1. From the Support tab, click on the Quick Access Toolbar pull-down arrow.
2. Choose Restore Defaults Commands from the dropped-down list. A dialog
opens.
3. Click Yes to restore the Quick Access Toolbar commands to the default
values.
4. Click No to keep the Quick Access Toolbar commands with the
customized values
120 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click inside the unit of measurement field at the bottom right of the user
interface. The Preferences / Units dialog opens.
2. Click on the Length pull-down arrow.
3. Choose a unit of measurement from the drop-down list.
4. Click OK. The Preferences / Units dialog closes.
Getting Started with RealWorks 121
Or
2. First right-click in the 3D View (except on a displayed object and not within
an open tool).
3. And then, select Preferences from the pop-up menu.
122 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Viewer Preferences
The preferences in the Viewer tab are described in the table below and allow
you to control the behavior and the aspect of the 3D View.
Background Color To change the background color of the 3D View window. The default
color is dark gray when you first start RealWorks. You can change it to
the color you prefer. In addition to this, you can apply a gradient effect to
this background color.
Highlight Color To change the color of the bounding box of selected objects. The default
color is yellow.
Info Box Opacity To define the transparency of the information box using a slider.
1. Click on the Viewer tab (if required). The Viewer dialog appears.
2. Set a preference.
3. Click Apply. The setting(s) will be applied and the Preferences dialog
remains open.
4. Click OK. The setting(s) will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.
Getting Started with RealWorks 123
HD Display Preferences
The preferences in the HD Display tab are described in the table below. They
enable to allocate a size to the VRAM and RAM. HD stands for High Definition,
RAM for Random Access Memory (volatile memory for the CPU) and VRAM
for Video Random Access Memory (volatile memory of the graphical card).
VRAM will be used for displaying points in HD mode. RAM is a cache memory
for displaying points in HD mode
The Advanced option has been chosen if you are an advanced user of
RealWorks because you need to adapt the VRAM and RAM values to the
specifications of your computer. Both allocated VRAM and RAM sizes should
be smaller than the physical RAM size. The allocated RAM size should be
larger than or equal to the allocated VRAM size. Higher values will optimize the
display performance of RealWorks but will also slow it down.
Tools Preferences
The preferences in the Tools tab are described in the table below and are
dedicated to the tools options.
Note: If you try to change the color of a drawing in progress while you are
using a tool like the Polyline Drawing tool, a warning message pops up and
prompts you to first close the tool.
Note: You can change the color of a fence in progress when using a tool like
the Segmentation tool.
Navigation Preferences
The preferences in the Navigation tab are described in the table below and are
dedicated to the navigation options in the 3D View.
Default Box Size To change the size of the clipping box in the Magnifier tool in a range
between 1 km and 1 mm. The default size is 1 cubic meter.
Auto-Centered To center the cropped area at the center of the screen in the Magnifier
tool when the option is activated.
Tip: You can use the U shortcut key instead of checking the Head Always Up
(Z Axis) option.
126 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
General Preferences
The preferences in the General tab are described in the table below.
Note: (*) A warning dialog opens and warns that you need to restart
RealWorks when changing the language setting. Otherwise the new language
setting will not be taken effect.
Getting Started with RealWorks 127
Units Preferences
The preferences in the Units tab are described in the table below. They allow
you to set the unit system to use in your project.
Tip: You are able to the change the unit of measurement for Length directly
within the user interface of RealWorks without having to open the Preferences
dialog. Please, refer to the Set the Unit of Measurement for Length (on page
120) topic.
Note: The US Gallons and Imperial Gallons have been added as units to
quantify a Volume.
128 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Print Preference
To Set a Print Preference:
No information will be collected that can be used to identity or contact you. You
can select not to participate in TSIP at any time.
Warning: You will be prompted to restart the software if you change the
improvement state.
Participate in TSIP
To Participate in TSIP:
Exit from the File menu or by clicking on the top right corner of
the user interface.
CHAPTER 3
This chapter is dedicated to all basic operations, like e.g. the opening and the
importation of project files into RealWorks.
133
Below are listed all the extensions and the application from which each
extension is from.
RealWorks Files
RWP is a proprietary format of Trimble. It is a project file format. The RWI
folder is a folder linked to the RWP format file. It contains all data files of a
project (RWC and RWV for versions of RealWorks before 8.0 and RWCX and
RWV for RealWorks 8.0). RWC and RWCX are cloud format files. RWV is an
image format file.
A project file saved in a version of RealWorks older than 5.0 is not supported
anymore in 8.0. When you try to open such a file, an error message appears.
When you open a project saved in a version of RealWorks older than 8.0, all
the project files are converted to the 8.0 format. The conversion takes a certain
amount of time and is temporary.
If you decide to save the project under the same name (after converting), the
conversion becomes definitive and cannot be cancelled. The project will be not
accessible with older versions of RealWorks. The conversion (of all project files
to 8.0 format) is only required one time. The next time you want to open the
project, no conversion is required and the loading of the project is accelerated.
If you decide to not save the project, the conversion is not applied and is lost (if
you close RealWorks). The next time you open the project in 8.0, the
conversion is required again.
Note: A project will be open even if the cloud format files (RWCX) are missing.
Only an error message will appear in that case.
Caution: There is a limit to the size of a TRW format file when you try to open
it with RealWorks 8.0. This limit, related to its size, is of 4 GB. If your file size is
bigger, you are able to open, not with RealWorks version 8.0, but only from
8.1. If you try to do so, the error message below appears.
Performing Basic Operations 135
RealWorks can import the Trimble TX8 3D scanner data using the High
Precision mode. To get the High Precision data, the Trimble TX8 3D Scanner
scans four times the same scene from the same station. The data should have
a smaller RMS error (measured on planes for example) and objects from the
first pass are kept. Moving objects from pass 2, 3 and 4 are totally removed if
not seen in the first pass. Four files are created, one standard TZF files and 3
other files containing information from pass 2, 3 and 4. Those file cannot be
opened directly in RealWorks.
RealWorks only sees the first TZF format file, not the TZFx ones. The
thumbnail and the preview are available for display only for the first TZF format
file. There is no change in RealWorks, neither in the workflow nor in the project
properties.
When you extract some data from the TZF files or open Trimble Scan Explorer,
the post-processing is triggered. The TZF files from the High Precision mode
are first detected and then merged into one. At the end, all the original files are
removed and only the processed TZF remains.
136 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: If your project file comes from the import of JXL format files from the
Trimble SX10 instrument, you are able to open it with RealWorks, only from the
10.1 version. If you try to do it with an earlier version, the error message below
appears. This restriction is due to the numerous images that the SX10
instrument can capture.
Performing Basic Operations 137
TZF Files
TZF is a proprietary format of Trimble. A file with such a format is essentially a
Trimble Scan File.
A project and a station* will be created and rooted under the Project Tree.
The project is named ProjectX where X is its order. The station takes the
name of the TZF format file.
A TZF Scan is also created and put under the station.
The project is not saved. The user has to save it manually.
Once saved, a project file and a folder are created. Both are named
according to the name given by the user, with a RWP extension for the
first and a RWI extension for the second. The RWI folder is empty of
content.
Tip: A TZF format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into
an existing project.
Note: (*) A Leveled Station is created and rooted in the Scans Tree for each
TZF format file tagged as Leveled, once open (or imported) into RealWorks.
You can preview a TZF format file as a Thumbnail in Windows Explorer. You
need to first enable the Thumbnail Preview in Windows Explorer and then to
set the icon view size to Medium Icons, Large Icons or Extra Large Icons.
Some new information has been added to TZF format files, in RealWorks 8.0.
This information, related to the instrument itself and to the scanning settings,
like Starting/Final Temperature (Internal) (in Celsius and Fahrenheit),
Atmospheric Correction PPM (Parts Per Million), Grid Steps, Instrument
Leveling and etc. appear when you display the properties of a TZF Scan (only
if the Property window is open).
138 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: The Extended range density is a level which only appears with an
optional upgrade (of the TX8 instrument). For more information about the
Extended feature, please refer to the Trimble TX6 / TX8 user manual.
Performing Basic Operations 139
Multiple Scans
When a set of TZF files belonging to the same station is open through the File /
Open command, a project and a station are created. A TZF Scan is created
per TZF file. All TZF Scans are put under the (same) station and only one is by
default a Main Scan.
Note: If you drag and drop a set of TZF files into RealWorks, you will get the
same result: a project with a station and a set of TZF Scans (one per TZF file).
All TZF Scans are placed under the station.
In the last case, the text "Converted from *.* file" appears in the Instrument
Name line. See [B].
[B]
Performing Basic Operations 141
Colored Scans
The new TX series has the capability to capture images thanks to its embarked
camera. These images can be taken in the Standard (or HDR) mode, with (or
without) the exposure correction. After loading the RWP project file into
RealWorks, you can check with which color acquisition mode and with which
type of exposure a scan has been acquired by displaying the properties of its
related TZF Scan in the Property window.
Note: All the TCF format files will be merged with the TZF files after the data
processing. So if the user hasn't made a copy of its original data sets, it is not
possible to go back.
TZS Files
A TZS format file is a Trimble Scan File. For each TZS format file, a warning
dialog appears and prompts you to proceed to the conversion to the TZF
format (or not).
Note:
The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration. The Scans
Tree is selected by default.
A TZS format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into
an existing project.
Caution: You cannot open TZF format files in RealWorks 7.0 or lower.
In the warning dialog, click No. If there is an open project, the project will
close. If there is no open project, nothing happens (no project is created).
Performing Basic Operations 143
Once completed, a project and a station are created and rooted under the
Project Tree. The project has the name given by the user. The station has the
name of the TZS format file.
A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name
given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for
the second. Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF extension is also
created.
144 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Once a TSPX format file has been open in RealWorks, a RealWorks project file
(with RWP as extension) and RWI folder are created and are added to the
previous list of files.
Note:
Any modification done within RealWorks is not taken back into Trimble
Business Center.
Only one Trimble Survey Project can be open in RealWorks at once.
Warning: Do not modify the items which compose a Trimble Survey Project. If
you decide to move the project to another location on your hard disk, move the
directory that includes all the files, not only the TSPX format file.
Performing Basic Operations 145
Stations
In Trimble Business Center, each station has a station node representation in
the Project Explorer panel. The representation matches the survey instrument
type and is followed by the point ID and an "S" number in parenthesis that
uniquely identifies the station.
Scans
In Trimble Business Center, all scans (Trimble Scanner Files (TSF)) are put as
a list after the imported data file node under the Imported Files node in Project
Explorer panel.
In RealWorks, each scan resulting from the measurement from a single station
point of view is stored under that station in the Scans Tree.
Performing Basic Operations 147
Points
In Trimble Business Center, each point in the project as a node representation
and all are put under the Points node in the Project Explorer panel.
Observations to and from the point are listed as observation nodes beneath it.
In RealWorks, each station contains all the measurements made from that
station in the field. All points are set as unmatched and put under the
Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. A point resulting from the measurement
from a single station is read as a Survey Point and is stored under that station.
A point resulting from the measurement of a set of stations is read as a
TopoPoint and stored under the TopoStation System folder.
148 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: Key-in points, GNSS points, etc. are also read as TopoPoints and stored
under the TopoStation System folder.
Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or Survey Point)'s 3D Labels by
clicking the Display 3D Labels icon in the Station Makers group on the View
tab.
Performing Basic Operations 149
Images
In Trimble Business Center, images taken from a station point of view are
stored under that station in the Project Explorer panel.
A JOB file (with *.job extension) is a binary file format. It can be a Trimble
Survey Controller job file or a Trimble Access job file. In the first case, if
Trimble Data Transfer© is installed on your computer, you can open a Survey
Controller™ JOB. If Trimble Data Transfer© is not detected on your computer,
you cannot open it as the "Job Files (*.job)" file of type line in the Open dialog
is not available. In the second case, you need to have Trimble General Survey
(Office Survey) installed on your computer. Trimble Data Transfer and Trimble
General Survey, both contain a converter. RAW file (with *.raw extension) is a
SurveyPro™ native ASCII (or TXT) file format.
Objects in the JobXML (or Job or RAW) format file are opened (or imported)
within the Scans Tree as follows:
Points surveyed from one station setup are imported as standard survey
points within each station,
GPS points and keyed-in points are imported as topo-points within the
TopoStation System folder,
Each station of the Instrument is opened (or imported) as leveled station,
Registered scans using the scanning capabilities of the Instrument are put
under their respective station,
Images taken from the Instrument are registered under the respective
station if the stationing is carried out when shooting the images. Images
are put with no link to the station under the Images Tree if stationing has
not been carried out when shooting the images.
152 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Points are surveyed with no altitude. These points are then opened (or
imported) with altitude 0 in RealWorks,
Linked images/scans are missing from the reading folder. When opening
(or importing) a JobXML (or Job or RAW) format file, it refers to external
files that contain scanning data and images respectively with the TSF
(Trimble Scanning File) extension and the JPG extension. These files are
supposed to be in the same folder than the JobXML (or Job or RW) file.
Missing TSF files are shown as null size scans and Missing images as
broken link images.
Performing Basic Operations 153
1 - Missing TSF file opened (or imported) as null 2 - Missing image file opened (or imported) as
size scan broken link image
Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or Survey Point)'s 3D Labels by
clicking the Display 3D Labels icon in the Station Makers group on the View
tab.
154 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: When you open a JOB file format, internally, the file is converted (to the
JXL format). An error message opens in case you do not have the last
converter installed on your computer. To have the latest version of the
converter, please download and install Trimble Installation Manager from the
Trimble web page (http://www.trimble.com/installationmanager/), and then
install Trimble Field Link Job File Converter.
Performing Basic Operations 155
And in folders, by station and then by camera type in the Images Tree.
When you open a JXL format file in RealWorks, two cases may occur: If there
are images in the file, the point cloud is automatically colorized using the color
information therein in these images, in this order: Overview first, followed by
Primary, and ended by Telescope. The colorization process cannot be
interrupted. If there is no picture, nothing happens. Only the point cloud is
imported.
Note: The user can stop the loading of points as well as its colorization by
pressing Esc. In the first case, no point will be loaded in RealWorks while in the
second case, the colorization in progress will be stopped. Points that are
already colorized remain colorized. Those that are not yet colorized remain un-
colorized.
156 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Copy the Geoid Grid File(s) (or Datum Grid File(s)) based on the geoid (or
datum) used in the project's coordinate system, and put them under the
Program Data\Trimble\Geo Data folder. Such files have the GGF (or DGF)
extension:
158 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: All measurements from a station, e.g. Survey Points or Scans will not
have the Combined Scale Factor applied. Only the coordinates of the Stations
and TopoPoints do have the Combined Scale Factor applied.
Note: The default scale factor value, which is displayed in the open dialog, is
the value of the last scaled project when importing a JOB (or JXL) format in the
current session. If no scaled import had been done, the default value is 1.0.
After applying the scale factor, the project is scaled and the values of the
entities should be the same as in Trimble Business Center.
Performing Basic Operations 159
ASCII Files
An ASCII format file may have ASC, NEU or XYZ as extension. There are in
general two sections in such a file. The first section is called Header in which
specific information about the nature of the file is stored. The second section is
a list of 3D Points. Each line contains a point represented by its X, Y, and Z
coordinates plus, optionally, other attributes such as intensity or color.
Tip: An ASCII format file can be either opened as single project or imported
into an existing one.
Note:
A file to open (or to import) containing some corrupted lines will be
ignored.
The processing mode will automatically switch to Production. The Models
Tree is selected by default.
160 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
With Wizard
This opens a Wizard which allows the user to choose the parameters to fit the
ASCII format file to open.
1. In the Open dialog, keep the Open Wizard for ASCII Files option checked.
2. Click Open. The Neutral Point Import dialog opens.
This dialog is composed of six parts: five for adjusting the parameters to import
the data and one for visualization.
Header You can ignore the first lines of an ASCII file by selecting the number of lines to
skip. These lines can be headers, comments or X,Y,Z coordinates that you do not
want to keep.
Units You have the choice between the Metric system and US/British system for the
values of X, Y, Z coordinates.
Select This part enables to display (or to not display) the information about the Intensity,
Content the Color and the Normal of loaded points.
If the Intensity option has been chosen, the user can customize the intensity
range. This means that intensity values larger than the value in the Max Intensity
field were replaced by 255 and those that are between 0 and the Max Intensity
value are mapped to the values from 0 to 255.
Data Type According to the option (or combination of options) chosen in the Select Content
panel, this part identifies fourteen different combinations of the attributes of a
point. When the user chooses:
If you select one of the options when you load an ASCII file without Intensity,
Color or Normal RealWorks indicates that the Intensity, Color or Normal cannot be
found and displays this error with three question marks between two brackets.
Performing Basic Operations 161
Preview Only the first thirty points are listed in the Preview panel.
Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O or click Open in the Main toolbar to
pop-up the Open dialog.
Note: (*) We assume that there is no project opened. If there is one opened,
the Add to Project option is enabled and default checked. You can then import
such a file into the already opened project.
Without Wizard
When you load an ASCII format without the Wizard, RealWorks attempts to
determine which separator is used and the different attributes of a point.
1. In the Open dialog, uncheck the Open Wizard for ASCII Files option.
2. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.
Note: An ASCII format file, when dragged and dropped into an open session of
RealWorks, is loaded without the Wizard.
162 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Files and folders on a Trimble TX5 Scanner's SD card are structured as shown
below. The FARO-LS format file is a signature file used to identity a SD card as
a Trimble TX5 Scanner's SD card. The Scans folder is a folder where all
acquired scans are stored in.
An acquired scan is composed of a set of files and folders. All are put in a FLS
folder under the Scans folder as illustrated below. The file to open is mainly the
FLS file in the FLS folder.
From a Trimble TX5 Scanner's SD card, the opening through the File / Open
menu is restricted to one FLS format file at a time. The Import FLS Files
feature avoids such restriction. Multiple selection of FLS files (or of FLS folder)
is now permitted.
In addition to the FLS format, RealWorks also supports the iQscan format.
Performing Basic Operations 163
1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog opens.
3. Select Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files (*.iQscan; *.fls) from the File of
Type field.
4. Do one of the following:
Or
Tip: You can also drag and drop a FLS file into RealWorks. This method is
limited to one FLS file at a time.
Caution: Do not rename the extension (FLS) of the folder which contains the
FLS format file to open. Otherwise, an error dialog opens and warns you that
the FLS format file has been removed (or deleted) from its previous location.
Note: A scan, acquired with colors, generates a colored file in the FLS format.
The TZF Scan, that results, is colored. You may see a colored preview in the
Property window (only if it is open) when displaying the TZF Scan's properties.
1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog opens.
3. Select Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files (*.iQscan; *.fls) from the File of
Type field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the IQscan file is located.
5. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
6. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.
Tip: You can also drag and drop several IQScan files into RealWorks.
Performing Basic Operations 165
For each file, a dialog appears and informs you that you need to first create
and save a project into the Trimble RWP format.
A project and a station are created and rooted under the Project Tree. You
have to a give a name to the project while the station takes the file name.
A TZF Scan is also created and put under the station.
166 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name
given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for
the second. Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF extension is also
created.
A file with the CRD extension is a coordinate file with five data fields (Point
number, Northing, Easting, Elevation and Description) in binary form. A file with
the CR5 extension is also a coordinate file but owned by TDS. A file with the
TXT extension is an ASCII text file. Each line of the text file can contain any
combination of Point number, Northing, Easting, Elevation and Description. All
point information should be on one line with the values separated by a comma,
space or other delineateers. All these parameters can be customized during
the loading phase in RealWorks.
The Surveying Network Import dialog which appears after opening a file is
composed of six parts: five for adjusting the parameters to import the data and
one for visualization. When you load a surveying network file, RealWorks
attempts to determine which separator is used and the different attributes of a
point. But you can customize these parameters:
Note: The Open Wizard for ASCII Files option in the Open dialog becomes
active and is default-checked if the file to import has a TXT extension; and
remains inactive (grayed out) for files with CRD and CR5 extensions.
Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or 3D Point)'s 3D Labels by
clicking the Display 3D Labels icon in the Station Makers group on the View
tab.
168 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: The processing mode will automatically swap to Registration. The Scans
Tree is by default selected.
Note: When you open a file to import topopoints, RealWorks does not create a
new Topographic Station if there is already one in the project. Topopoints from
different files will be under the same Topographic Station. Also, if there are
some points in your project, you cannot import new ones with the same names
and the same positions than those already exist.
Performing Basic Operations 169
Note:
The processing mode will automatically swap to Registration. The Scans
Tree is by default selected.
170 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
When importing a Surveying Network ASCII format file, you need to have
at least a station within your project. Otherwise the In a Station (Fill with
GeomPoints) option is dimmed.
Caution: You are able import points having the same names and the same
positions as much as you like.
Note: RealWorks will swap for the Registration processing mode after opening
such a file.
Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point's 3D Labels by clicking the
Display 3D Labels icon in the Station Makers group on the View tab.
Performing Basic Operations 171
AutoCAD Files
RealWorks can open drawings in DXF (Drawing eXchange Format) or DWG
(DraWinG) file format. The DXF file format is an ASCII file format which
describes CAD data defined by AutoDesk. This file format facilitates the
exchange of CAD data between two different programs. The DWG file format is
the binary file format from AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT.
1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog appears.
3. Select AutoCAD Files (*.dxf; *.dwg) from the File of Type field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the DXF (or DWG) format file is located.
5. Click on the DXF (or DWG) format file's name to select it.
6. Click OK. The DXF File Import (or DXF File Import) dialog opens.
7. Click on the DXF Unit of Length (or DXF Unit of Length) pull down arrow.
8. Specify a unit of measurement to apply from the drop down list.
9. Choose between Merge Each 3D Face of the Same Layer into a Mesh
and Merge Each 3D Point of the Same Layer into a Cloud.
10. Or check both options.
11. Click OK. The DXF File Import (or DXF File Import) dialog closes.
Caution: A warning message appears if the DWG (or DXF) format file to open
(or import) contains entities with no equivalent in RealWorks. These entities will
not be opened (or imported) in RealWorks.
Note: If there is no project open, you can only open a DWG (DXF) format file.
The Add to Project option in the Open dialog is dimmed.
172 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
A set of model groups is created and put under a project rooted under the
Models Tree. Each model group contains all 3D faces (or 3D points) of the
same layer - each opened as a mesh of two triangles (see A1) (or as a 3D
point object (see B1 and B2)).
A1 - A mesh has been created for each 3D face A2 - A mesh has been created for all 3D faces
of the same layer
There are two options in the DXF File Import (or DWG File Import) dialog. The
first when checked allows merging of all 3D Faces of the same layer into a
mesh (see A2) and the second all 3D Points into a Cloud (see B3 and B4)).
Performing Basic Operations 173
B3 - The Project Cloud contains points B4 - All 3D points of the same layer are opened
and merged as a unique point cloud
Note: For all 3D Points of the same layer, a station is created and rooted under
the Scans Tree.
IXF Files
A file of IXF format (Optech’s laser scanning systems - ILRIS - data format)
with ixf extension can be opened (or imported) in RealWorks. If no project is
open, the Add to Project option in the Open dialog is grayed out and you are
restricted to opening. If there is an opened project, the Add to Project option is
enabled and default checked. Each file will be opened (or imported) as
station(s) put in the Scans Tree and as points put in the current Project Cloud
in the Models Tree.
174 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: RealWorks is being able to support the new RIEGL's point pout
database format (RDB 2.0).
176 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the data has been acquired with no information of colors, only the ZFS format
files are required. They can be opened (or imported) directly into RealWorks. If
the data has been acquired with colors taken by a Z+F camera (integrated or
external), the three types of files have to be processed in the Z+F LaserControl
software which provides in return panoramic images, in PGN or JPEG format.
The colors information are then stored in the panoramic images. If the data has
been acquired with colors taken by an external digital camera on a nodal point
adapter, the images that come out the camera have to be processed in a 3rd
party software (PtGui, Autopano Giga).
Filter by Intensity
This filter, when it is chosen, discards pixels that are below the Min. value and
above the Max. value in terms of Intensity. These two values are defined in
percentage by the user. The default values depend on the type of the scanner.
Filter by Range
This filter, when it is chosen, discards pixels which are not in the defined range.
The filter is not active when the Min. and the Max. values are equal to zero.
This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels, which are on edges of objects
and therefore not valid. On edges you have mixed range values, these range
values are often between the foreground and the background (but also
possible in front or behind objects).
Filter Bottom
This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels from the bottom of the instrument
(Nadir) up to a user given angle.
This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels which have no valid neighbor.
This filter, when it is chosen, deletes the first scan lines of recording, marked
by the scanner as “bad” due to laser warm-up procedure at the early beginning
of the scan (first few scan-lines).
This filter masks pixels at the outer borders of the scan. The first and last line
and the first and the last pixel of each line are filtered.
This filter, when it is chosen, removes lines which show too big tilt changes.
Performing Basic Operations 179
The LAZ format is a compressed version of the LAS format. Everything that is
in a LAS file is also a LAZ file. The difference is that the LAZ format offers a
compression rate which is 5 to 20 times greater than the LAS format, thus
providing smaller files.
Note: LAZ files share the same version numbers as LAS files. RealWorks is
also able to import LAZ files from all of those versions.
Points in LAS/LAZ files can have intensity and/or color information. They can
also have none of them. RealWorks behaves as described below:
Note: LAS/LAZ format from 1.0 to 1.3 support at most 4 billion of points.
LAS/LAZ 1.4 does support virtually infinite point cloud size (over 4 billion of
points), however the current version of RealWorks does not support importing
LAS/LAZ files with more than 4 billion points.
The 1.2 and 1.4 LAS format versions support natively the classification of point
clouds. Both standards contain a slight difference in terms of number of layers.
The import of a LAS format file, in version 1.4, should not create any issues as
RealWorks sticks to the LAS 1.4 specification for point cloud classification. All
valid classes (or layers), once imported, will match the same valid classes in
RealWorks, with the same meaning.
The import of a LAS format file, in version 1.2, is a slightly different. All valid
layers from 1.2 which will match the same valid layers in RealWorks, except for
the layers ID 8 and ID 12 (from 1.2), which are "Reserved" layers in 1.4. They
will be then imported as an "Unclassified", layer (ID 1).
The LAZ file format is a compressed LAS 1.2 file. The same class limitation is
also applied to it. Importing from LAZ is the same as importing from LAS 1.2.
180 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: For LAS 1.4, in addition to meter distance units, you can now work with
international foot and US survey foot distance units.
E57 Files
The E57 format is a file format specified by the ASTM (American Society for
Testing and Materials), an international standards organization. It is compact
and vendor-neutral. It was developed for storing data (Point Clouds, images
and metadata) produced by 3D imaging systems such as laser scanners. Such
format enables data interoperability among 3D imaging hardware and software
systems and is not dependent on proprietary formats for storing and
exchanging data.
The E57 format supports two types of data: Gridded Data and Non-Gridded
Data. Gridded data is a data which is aligned in regular arrays. An E57 format
file can have an individual scan or several scans within.
Performing Basic Operations 181
Gridded Data
An E57 format file with gridded data can be open as a project or be imported
into an existing one. In the first case, an information dialog is displayed. This
dialog prompts you to create and save the project into the Trimble RWP
format.
A project and a station are created and rooted under the Project Tree. The
project is named according to the given name. The station takes the name
of the E57 format file.
In case of a multi-scans file, there are as many stations as there are scans
within the E57 file.
A project file and a project folder are created, both named according to the
given name, with the respective RWP extension and the RWI extension.
Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF extension is also created.
182 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In case of a multi-scans file, there are as many TZF Scan files as there are
scans within the E57 file.
Note: The conversion (of an E57 format file with gridded data) to a TZF Scan
file can fail. If this case occurs, the file is then considered as a non-gridded file.
Note: The project will be automatically saved at the end of the conversion(s).
The color information in an E57 format file are preserved when converting (the
E57 format file) to a TZF Scan.
Performing Basic Operations 183
Non-Gridded Data
An E57 format file with non-gridded data can either be opened as a new
project or imported into an existing project.
A project is created and rooted under the Project Tree. The project follows
the naming convention of ProjectX where X is its order.
Non-gridded data are imported as a Cloud. All of its points are put in the
Project Cloud.
A station and a scan are created in the Scans Tree.
A project file and a project folder are created, both named according to the
given name, with the respective RWP extension and the RWI extension.
Under the RWI folder, a RealWorks scan file with the RWCX extension is
also created.
Note: The project will not be saved. You have to save it manually.
184 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
PTX Files
PTX is a file extension for laser scanning files. It is ASCII based. If there is no
project, an information dialog appears for each PTX format file. This dialog
informs the user that he needs to first create and save a project into the
Trimble RWP format.
A project and a station will be created and rooted under the Project Tree.
The user has to a give a name to the project while the station takes the
PTX format file name.
A TZF Scan is also created and put under the station.
A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the
name given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI
extension for the second. Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF
extension is also created.
Note:
The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration. The Scans
Tree is selected by default.
A PTX format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into
an existing project.
The project created within RealWorks is saved in the database.
PTX format files may contain several scans in the same station. RealWorks
converts all the scans and creates TZF Scans, one per scan, in the same
station in the RealWorks project. The colors information in a PTX format file
are preserved when converting (the PTX format file) to a TZF Scan.
Performing Basic Operations 185
PTS Files
PTS is a file extension for laser scanning files. It is a non-gridded ASCII based
format. A project and a station per PTS format file will be created and rooted
under the Project Tree. The project is named ProjectX where X is its order. The
station has the PTS format file name. Under the station, a scan named ScanX
where X is its order is created. In case of a PTS file with multi-scans, each
scan is imported as a station.
Note: The processing mode will automatically switch to Production and the
Models Tree selected by default.
Caution: The created project is not saved in the database; the user has to
save it manually, otherwise it will be lost.
Once the project is saved, a RealWorks project file and a folder are created.
Both are named according to the name given by the user, with a RWP
extension for the first and a RWI extension for the second. Under the RWI
folder, a scan file with the RWCX extension is also created.
DotProduct Files
DP is an extension for highly compressed files provided by a DPI-7 System
from the DOT Product company. One file contains several registered frames
and RealWorks import them all at once in one single scan.
186 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
A Patch is a surface made from spline curves. NURB, stood for Non-Uniform
Rational Basis Spline, is a mathematical model commonly used in computer
graphics for generating and representing curves and surfaces.
Each FBX entity is not imported as it is but is first converted into a FBX mesh
and then into a RealWorks mesh entity, with the information of name, color,
position and orientation.
In the FBX format, the position and the orientation of an object are expressed
in a right-hand coordinate system with the Y-Axis directed to the Up.
RealWorks has also a right-hand coordinate system, but with the Z-Axis
directed to the Up instead. When exporting, a conversion will be performed so
that the views (Front, Up, Left) are identical in RealWorks and in the FBX
format.
The FBX File Import dialog opens when you import a FBX format file into
RealWorks. You have to determine in which unit of measurement the
coordinates in the FBX format file are expressed. Once imported, a mesh entity
is created and put under a folder in the Models tree.
Note: Once the RealWorks project is saved, a SQL database (a file with the
DMT extension) is created under the RWI folder. This database records all the
operations you perform on geometries.
Note: All FBX meshes are imported in RealWorks, but the hierarchy in the FBX
scene graph is ignored.
TDX Files
The TDX format is a format which enables the exchange of data between
Trimble Business Center and Trimble RealWorks. Scan data (scans, stations,
and leveling information, and images) is imported into RealWorks.
Performing Basic Operations 187
1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog opens with the Add to Project
option dimmed.
3. Select a file type from the File of Type field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.
5. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
6. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.
Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O (or click Open in the Quick Access
Toolbar) to pop-up the Open dialog.
You can also drag and drop to open a project file into RealWorks. If RealWorks
is not already open, this operation will open it. Only one project file can be
dragged and dropped at a time. If it is already open, you can drag and drop a
set (of project files).
If there is a project already open in RealWorks, the result is the same. But in
the first case, you can decide to open the project files into the open project (or
not). In the second case, you can only open the project files into a new project.
Note:
For files of certain types, you cannot drag and drop a set of projects into
RealWorks when there is no opened session.
Projects are ranked by alphabetic order in the Project Tree in the
WorkSpace. They are ranked from their opening order in the List window.
You can abort the opening of a project by pressing Esc.
When you open a project previously saved in RealWorks format or in
PointScape format or in JobXML format for which images are missing, a
warning message appears and all missing images are listed.
188 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: You can also open a project by selecting from Open an Existing Project
from the Start Page. When you try to do so within a tool that is already open, a
warning appears and prompts you to close the tool prior to loading a new
project.
Performing Basic Operations 189
1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog opens with the Add to Project
option dimmed*.
3. Select a type of file from the File of Type field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.
5. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
6. Keep the Add to Project option checked.
7. If there are several projects, click on the pull-down arrow.
8. Choose a project from the drop-down list.
9. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.
Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O (or click Open in the Quick Access
Toolbar) to pop-up the Open dialog.
190 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Connect a Trimble data collector to your desktop computer (or laptop). For
more details, please refer to the documentation that comes with your data
collector.
2. Power the Trimble data collector On.
a) On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
b) Select the Connect to Mobile Device icon. The Connection to
Mobile Device dialog opens and the Add to Project option is
available and default checked.
c) Navigate the Drive / folder where the file is located.
d) Click on the file to select it. The Open button becomes active.
e) Keep the Add to Project option checked.
Performing Basic Operations 191
f) Click on the pull down arrow and choose a project from the drop
down list.
g) Click on the Open button.
Note: The path to the file to open (or import) as well as the dialog box size are
persistent. This means that they remain unchanged till the user changes them.
192 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select Import FLS Files. The Import FLS Files dialog opens. All drives (of
your computer) are by default listed (when the dialog opens for the first
time).
3. Navigate to the Scans folder where all the FLS files are located.
4. Select the Scans folder. The Import button becomes enabled.
5. Do one of the following:
Click Import. The Import FLS Files dialog closes. All FLS files from the
Scans folder will be imported.
Or
Note: The Open button becomes enabled if the selection (from the Import FLS
Files dialog) is a drive (or a folder). It swaps from Open to Import when you
select a FLS folder (or a FLS file).
Note: The path to the FLS folders (or FLS files) to import in the dialog is
persistent. This means that it remains unchanged till you change it.
Performing Basic Operations 193
If there is one (or more) project(s) open in RealWorks, the Add to Project
option is enabled. You can then choose a project to import (the FLS files)
in from the drop-down list.
If there is no project, a dialog appears and informs you that you need to
first create and save a project into the Trimble RWP format.
A project and a set of stations (one per file) are created and rooted under the
Project Tree. You have to give a name for the project while each station is
named according to the file name.
A TZF Scan (one per file) is also created and put under its related station.
194 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name
given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for
the second. Under the RWI folder, a set of scan files with the TZF extension is
also created.
Caution: Do not rename the extension (FLS) of the folder which contains the
FLS format file to open. Otherwise, an error dialog opens and warns you that
the FLS format file has been removed (or deleted) from its previous location.
Note: When a scan has been acquired with color, the FLS file that results is
colored. The TZF Scan, created by opening (or importing) such FLS file, is
colored too. You may see the color information by displaying the TZF Scan's
properties (only if the Property window is open).
Tip: When importing FLS format files into an existing project, the project is
automatically saved once the import completed.
Caution: The Import FLS Files feature is not available in RealWorks Viewer.
Performing Basic Operations 195
Note: Only RGB TIF files can be imported into RealWorks. If you attempt to
import a TIF format image of a color space other than RGB, an error message
appears
Note: You need to have a project loaded in RealWorks. Otherwise, the Import
Image feature remains dimmed.
196 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Warning: A message appears if one (or more) TZF format file(s) is (or are)
missing in the project (loaded through RealWorks or if the project is not
compatible with Scan Explorer.
Note:
If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Tip: You can also open Scan Explorer first, and load a project into RealWorks.
Note: You will be prompted to close Scan Explorer first in case you intend to
merge two projects into RealWorks.
Note: Within Scan Explorer, the Create Entities in RealWorks and Create
Entities in SketchUp features are available with the Advanced Modeler,
Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank licenses. For more information, refer
please to the Trimble Scan Explorer documentation.
Note: It is now possible to open Trimble Scan Explorer from the main Trimble
RealWorks window without the need to first save the project.
Performing Basic Operations 197
If the selected project is unsaved, a dialog opens and prompts you to save
it.
If there are some TZF Scans in the selected project, you can Open
Trimble Scan Explorer and use the Create Entities in SketchUp feature for
extracting and sending entities to SketchUp.
Note: For more information related to the Create Entities in SketchUp feature,
please refer to the Trimble Scan Explorer for RealWorks documentation.
SketchUp closes by itself when you close RealWorks. If a change has been
done in the project, you will be asked to save the project, in RealWorks. If
some entities have been exported towards SketchUp, you will be asked to
save the project, in SketchUp.
If the connection between RealWorks and SketchUp is lost for any reason, a
warning dialog opens. First close the dialog and then select Reconnect to
RealWorks from Plugins menu, in SketchUp as illustrated below.
198 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the connection with RealWorks is broken, a dialog opens and prompts you to
first leave SketchUp and then restart it from RealWorks.
Open AutoCAD
The Open AutoCAD feature is enabled only if the AutoCAD 2015 (or
2016, or 2017, or 2018) program from AutoDesk is already installed on your
computer. Otherwise, it remains dimmed. The feature, when selected, starts
AutoCAD and opens a dialog with prompts. After choosing to load the Trimble
ARX (AutoCAD Runtime Extension) plugin into AutoCAD, a new Drawing file,
based on the current drawing template file, opens.
Note: If several versions of AutoCAD (2015, 2016, 2017 and 2018) are
installed on your computer, as only one instance of AutoCAD can
communicate with RealWorks at a time, AutoCAD 2018 is then considered.
Note: The Send to AutoCAD feature is dimmed if f you choose to not load the
Trimble ARX (AutoCAD Runtime Extension) plugin into AutoCAD.
200 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Send to AutoCAD
The Send to AutoCAD feature is enabled when a point cloud has been
selected, and if:
AutoCAD has been started from RealWorks (see Open AutoCAD (on
page 199)), and,
The connection between the Trimble ARX plugin and RealWorks is
established, and
A Drawing file, based on the current drawing template file, opens in
AutoCAD.
Recap Pro version 2018 from AutoDesk installed, with a valid license (trial
or permanent). Recap Pro does not need to be opened but you need to be
singed in first.
AutoCAD 2015 (or 2016 or 2017 or 2018) from AutoDesk already installed.
Note: When an object having both point cloud and geometry properties has
been selected, only the point cloud properties will be exported to AutoCAD.
The result of the export is a point cloud that displays in AutoCAD. After saving
the Drawing file, a DWG format file with a name given by the user and a folder
with RCP format file(s) are created.
Performing Basic Operations 201
Save Projects
A project, which has not been saved, has an asterisk beside its name in the
Project Tree. You can save the project into the existing project file by using the
Save command or into a new project file by using the Save As command.
Caution: When a project has already been updated from an older version of
RealWorks to the current version, saving it under the same name will make it
inaccessible under older versions of RealWorks.
Caution: You cannot save (or save as) a project in RealWorks Viewer.
Save a Project
To Save a Project:
Save a Project As
To Save a Project As.
1. Select either a saved project or an unsaved project from the Project Tree.
2. From the File tab, select Save As . The Save dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the project.
4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension is added automatically.
5. Click Save. The Save dialog closes.
Note: The TZF Scan Files Management dialog opens if the selected project
contains some TZF Scan files (within its RWI folder). You can then choose
between "Copy TZF Scan Files into the New Project" and "Do Not Copy TZF
Scan Files, Keep the Link to the Originals".
202 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Undo an Operation
You can undo the last operation when the Undo Operation command is
available. You can execute multiple-level undo, but its behavior varies
depending on whether you use a command or a tool. When you use a
command, the undo will delete its effects. When you are inside a tool, multiple
undo will be applied to all intermediate steps of the tool, including their
parameter settings and database operations. Once you exit the tool, multiple
undo will take effect only on the database operations carried out by all
operations of the tool.
To Undo an Operation:
Note:
You can also use the Ctrl + Z shortcut keys or click the corresponding icon
in the Main toolbar.
The Undo stack is limited to the value defined in Preferences.
Performing Basic Operations 203
Redo an Operation
If you decide to restore the last operation (or action) you carried out in
RealWorks, you can easily do so by using the Redo Operation command.
When the Redo Operation command is unavailable (dimmed), it means that
you cannot redo the last operation (or action).
To Redo an Operation:
Note: You can also use the Ctrl + Y shortcut keys or click the corresponding
icon in the Main toolbar.
204 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Close Projects
You can either close a selected project (or all projects). When the project(s) is
(or are) not saved, a warning will be issued. You will be prompted to save (or
not to save it (or them)). Note that there is one warning per open project and
Close All does not require selection.
Or
Organization of Data
A project contains original scanned data and images, and all objects created
from the scanned data. In order to make such data visible to users, we
organize them into a Project Tree under the WorkSpace window.
207
Project Tree
Each Project Tree is composed of four sub-trees called Scans, Models,
Targets and Images. At any given time, only one of them is displayed.
Tip: You are able to manage the layers that are in your project. Please, refer to
the Managing Layers (see "Working with Classification Layers" on page 541)
chapter for more information.
208 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Scans Tree
The Scans Tree is the first sub-tree of the Project Tree. It is only available in
the Registration mode. To display it, you have to click on its tab in the
WorkSpace window. This tree is used for organizing the scanning results
called Stations, Scans, and/or Images.
It may have as many levels as a project requires. A Scan and an Image are
always the leaves of the tree, while a Station is an internal node. It is important
to note that the content of a Station (Scans or Images) cannot be moved to
other Stations, nor can their position be changed inside a Station. This is to
preserve the scanning order.
Caution: Images from the Scans Tree cannot be deleted and Scans from
which all points have been deleted are erased.
Models Tree
The Models Tree is the first sub-tree of the Project Tree; it is available in the
OfficeSurvey and Modeling modes (or in the Production mode). You can
display it by selecting its related tab from the WorkSpace window. This sub-
tree is used for organizing models of a scene. The organization can be logical,
spatial or discipline-based (or simply a combination thereof), depending on the
purposes of a project.
The Models Tree may have as many levels as a project requires. You can
create, re-organize, delete, browse, search, locate or visualize objects in this
sub-tree. Each object node of this sub-tree may contain a point cloud, a
geometry or both. We call them the two representations of this object. By
default, only one representation is displayed:
For a project saved in a version of RealWorks older than 8.0, there is at least
one Sub-project attached at the root of the Models Tree and only one is active
at a time (the one in bold). After saving an old project in 8.0, all Sub-projects
are replaced by groups named "From "Sub-Project" name".
1 - The Models Tree in projects older than 8.0. 2 - The Models Tree in projects saved in 8.0.
210 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: A project created and saved directly in 8.0 has no notion of groups
(coming from Sub-Projects conversion).
Note: An object of any kind in the Models Tree has a layer, except for a folder.
Organization of Data 211
Targets Tree
The Targets Tree is the second sub-tree of the Project Tree in the Registration
processing mode. You can display it by selecting its related tab from the
WorkSpace window. It is used for organizing the registration entities (Targets,
Survey Points, Topo Points, etc.) matched or not.
Note: Refer to the Registration chapter for more details on the exact definition
of the registration entities and how they are organized and used.
Note: The Targets tab does not display if the open project does not contain
any target. If there are several projects open, and one of the projects contains
some targets, the related tab displays then.
212 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Images Tree
The Images Tree is the fourth and last sub-tree of the Project Tree. You can
display it by selecting its related tab from the WorkSpace window whatever the
mode you are in. This tree is used to organize (or browse) images taken by a
laser scanner’s on-board video camera (or other digital cameras). For
example, you can group together a set of images and use them for texturing a
part of the scene.
Note: You can view an image (or group of images) as thumbnail(s) in the List
window either by selecting first Database Browsing, then Thumbnails from the
Database toolbar.
Note: The Images tab does not display if the open project does not contain any
image. If there are several projects open, and one of the projects contains
some images, the related tab displays then.
Organization of Data 213
Project Cloud
A Project Cloud is a cloud node attached to the Models Tree in the
OfficeSurvey and Modeling modes (or in the Production mode). The aim of the
Project Cloud is to allow you to quickly find all points (or all unused points) of
the project.
Note: The contents of the Project Cloud are automatically displayed in the 3D
View after getting all points or getting remaining points.
Before 8.0, each Sub-project of a project has its own Project Cloud. Only
points belonging to the Project Cloud of the active Sub-Project are loaded.
The newly saved project has a unique Project Cloud with the same number of
points as the Project Cloud of the active Sub-Project of the old project.
Note: When you create a new project by importing TZF format file(s) (acquired
by a Trimble TX 3D scanner or from e.g. a TZS format file(s) conversion), you
may notice the number of points in the Project Cloud is equal to zero. This
number remains in this state until you perform your first extraction (of points)
from the TZF Scan(s).
Active Group
An Active Group is a group that you have selected. Note that an active group
can only be a project, a station, a group of models or a group of images.
Selecting an active group can be done in the Project Tree or in the List
window. By default, all new created objects will be put under this active group.
Organization of Data 217
WorkSpace
Project
Project, Opened
Unmatched target folder
Matched target folder
Station
Group of objects
Scans Tab
Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the
Scans tab.
Station, Unleveled
Station, Leveled
Station, Leveled and Setup
Scan
Image
Etc.
Organization of Data 219
Models Tab
Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the
Models tab:
Project cloud
Group
. Models Group
Model as cloud
Model of box shape
Model of cylinder shape
Model of fitted cylinder shape
Model of plane shape
Model of fitted plane shape
Model of circular torus shape
Model of fitted circular torus shape
Model of sphere shape
Model of regular cone shape
Model of fitted Polyline
Model of fitted composite curve
Model of fitted mesh
Model of point-to-point distance measure
Model of angular measure
Model of 3D point measure
Etc.
Images Tab
Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the
Images tab:
Image, Imported
Image, Matched
Image, OrthoPhoto
220 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Targets Tab
Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the
Targets tab:
Model Groups
A Model Group is a group inside which each entity is related to its neighbor. It
can contain everything except a group. If there is a group within, the Set as
Model Group feature is dimmed. If there are some fitted entities within (entities
with cloud and geometry properties), only those with geometry property will be
considered. A Model Group, by its nature, offers the advantage of moving or
duplicating the whole set as a unique block by just selecting one of its child
entity.
Duplication Rules:
With the Duplicator (see "Duplicate" on page 1414) tool, if the Model
Group contains some objects that cannot be duplicated, the warning below
is displayed:
And the Models Group is duplicated several times, not the same position in the
3D View but along the defined path. All are put under the Duplication folder:
Organization of Data 223
Note: In case there are some fitted entities within the Model Group, only the
geometry property of the entities is duplicated.
Editing Data
We have introduced a point cloud loading tool for supporting huge amount of
points. The user is able to precisely control which points are loaded into
memory and thus available for all the regular tools.
227
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No Yes (1)
Station No Yes (1)
Scan No No
Targets No No
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Project Cloud No No
Group No Yes (1)
Object No Yes (1)
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No Yes (1)
Images No Yes (1)
1. Select a group (or object node(s)) that you want to drag and drop.
2. Press and hold the left mouse button while you drag the object to its
destination.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the object.
Note: The cursor changes to when you try to drag and drop an item for
which the operation cannot be performed.
228 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No Yes (1)
Station No Yes (1)
Scan No No
Targets No No
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Project Cloud No No
Group No Yes (1)
Object No Yes (1)
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No Yes (1)
Images No Yes (1)
To Cut an Item:
Note:
You undo or redo the Cut operations you have previously performed.
Editing Data 229
You can also pick an object directly in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can use the following shortcut-keys: Ctrl + X for Cut and Ctrl + V for
Paste.
Note: The Cut command in the General group remains grayed out when you
select an item for which the cut cannot be performed.
230 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No No
Station No No
Scan No No
Targets No No
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Project Cloud No No
Group No Yes (1)
Object No Yes (1)
From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No No
Images No No
To Copy an Item:
The selected object (or group of objects) is duplicated. A copied object has as
name Copy of "Name_Of_The_Object_To_Copy".
Note:
Editing Data 231
You undo or redo the Copy operations you have previously performed.
You can also pick an object directly in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can use the following shortcut-keys: Ctrl + C for Copy and Ctrl + V for
Paste.
Note: The Copy command from the General group remains grayed out when
you select an item for which the copy cannot be performed.
232 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Delete an Item
This command can be used to delete objects from the RealWorks database. It
is important to note that you cannot delete a station, a scan or an image in the
Scans Tree, the unmatched target group in the Targets Tree and the Project
Cloud in the Models Tree.
To Delete an Item:
Note: You can also use the Del key instead of selecting the Delete command
from the menu bar.
Editing Data 233
Tip: You can also choose the New Group command from the pop-up menu in
the WorkSpace window.
234 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Change a Name
You can change the name of an object in two places: either in the
WorkSpace/List window, or in the Property window. You can rename all
objects except the project node itself, the Project Cloud and unmatched
targets.
1. Select an object from the Project Tree and right-click to display the pop-up
menu.
2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu. The Property window opens.
3. Click in the Name field. The selected object name becomes editable.
4. Enter a new name.
5. Press Enter.
Note: You can also select an object and use the F2 key to rename it.
235
Project
The Project group, on the Edit tab, in the Production and Registration modules,
gathers the features that apply a transformation to a project by changing its
UCS frame, by merging some of them, etc.
Note: The UCS Creation tool and the Set as Home UCS feature are not
available in the Registration module.
236 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Shift a Project
You can manually apply a shift to a project. It is not necessary to select it for
that. Any item in the Project Tree can be used. This tool can be used in any
processing mode (OfficeSurvey/Modeling (or Production), or Registration).
To Shift a Project:
For each project that has been modified and not yet saved, a dialog
appears and prompts you to save it.
If you choose No, projects (to merge) will be then closed and unsaved.
In the other hand, the merged project will take all changes (from the
projects (to merge) into account.
Caution: There is no undo once projects are merged together other than to not
save the merged project.
Scans Tree
Stations from different projects are merged under the same project and are
renamed according to the project they belong to.
1 - Stations from two different projects under the 2 - Stations under the merged project
WorkSpace window
238 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Models Tree
Objects (Group, Cloud, etc.) from different projects are merged under the same
project and are renamed according to the project they belong to.
1 - Objects from two different projects under the 3 - Objects under the merged project
WorkSpace node
2 - Merged project
Note: The Project Cloud of the merged project is the sum of all Project Clouds.
Editing Data 239
Targets Tree
Unmatched entities are merged under the same group (called Unmatched) and
matched entities (gathered in pairs) are put by order under the merged project.
Pairs sharing the same name and the same order than those in the first loaded
project (first from the Project Tree) have their number changed in order to
continue the numbering*.
Caution: (*) Only pairs are renumbered, not the entities inside.
240 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Images Tree
In the Images Tree, images of each tree are placed under a folder named after
the old project. If all images are named IMAGEX where X is an order, all are
renamed. The first image, from the first selected project and at the root of the
Image Tree, is renamed to IMAGE1, the second IMAGE2, and so on.
Note: Feature code libraries having the same name are also merged (Feature
codes of same name belonging to a library having the same name are
duplicated).
242 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Project Layers
When you select several projects you want to merge into one, the layer tables
will be also merged into one according two options:
The layers with the same ID will be merged into a unique layer. The name of
the merged layer will be the name of the layer belonging to the first project (in
selection).
Or
The layers won't be merged. The layers of the second (in order of selection),
third, etc. project will be added to the layers of the first project, in the layer
table by concatenation.
Project [A]:
Project [B]:
Editing Data 243
In the RWI folder of the merged project, RWV files from the first project (in
order of selection) have their name kept while those coming from the other
projects are renamed in order to continue the numbering. For RWC (or RWCX)
files, their name also changes according the name given by the user and
following the same numbering rule as for the RWV files.
Editing Data 245
246 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
With the Copy TZF Scan Files into the New Project option selected, TZF Scan
files which are located inside the RWI folder of the project(s) to merge are
copied into the RWI folder of the merged project.
With the Do Not Copy TZF Scan Files option, all TZF Scan files are not copied
into the RWI folder of the merged project. Link to the original TZF Scan files is
kept. Note that you can manually copy these TZF Scan files later by choosing
Copy Original TZF Scan Files into Project in the TZF Scan group.
248 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create an UCS
RealWorks enables to create any number of frames. Each of them may be
selected and set as Active Frame. When a frame is designated as the Active
Frame, all coordinates will be represented relative to this frame. This allows the
user to perform its modeling or to take measurements in any arbitrary default
frame and to represent them in a frame that better describes the data. The
UCS (User Coordinates System) Creation tool provides you with several
methods to create such frames and almost all of them are mainly based on
pickings; which can be constrained or free.
Editing Data 249
1. If needed, select an object (point cloud or geometry) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Project group, click the UCS pull-down arrow.
3. Choose UCS Creation from the list. The UCS Creation dialog opens as
well as the Picking Parameters toolbar.
Inside the UCS Creation tool, we distinguish two groups of methods to build a
frame: "Without Constraints" and "With Constraints". Below is a detailed
description of the UCS Creation tool.
A temporary frame in yellow appears in the middle of the scene. If the default
origin is too far from the displayed scene; RealWorks will prompt you to set it
so that it matches the scene’s center.
Tip: You can open the UCS Creation tool by clicking its related icon in the
Active Frame toolbar.
250 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Specify Coordinates
With this method, neither selection nor display is required.
To Specify Coordinates:
Pick Points
This method is not based on the selection but the display. A display can be
done before (or after) entering the UCS Creation tool and it should be of point
cloud (or of mesh) type.
To Pick Points:
The orientation of the yellow frame changes according to the new direction of
the chosen axis.
Fit an Axis
This method is not based on the selection but on the display. A display can be
done before (or after) entering the UCS Creation tool and it should be of point
cloud type; otherwise the three Fit Axis icons are dimmed.
To Fit an Axis:
Note: The Create Fitted Geometry icon in the Fitting toolbar which is dimmed
means that you are not able to save the result in the database.
Tip:
Instead of selecting Close Fence from the pop-up menu, you can also
double-click or press on the Space Bar of your keyboard to close the
fence.
Instead of clicking on an icon in the Fitting toolbar, you can also select its
related command from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key: I
for In, O for Out.
254 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You are able to perform a lasso selection by using the Shift.
1. Click the Pick Object Local Frame icon. The cursor takes the following
shape:
2. In the WorkSpace window, click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selected object.
4. Select Display Geometry from the pop-up menu.
5. Pick a point (free or constrained).
1 - The top picture shows a picked object 2 - Its associated local frame now becomes the
constructed frame and is shown in yellow
Note: Picking another object will cancel the frame you have just constructed.
Editing Data 255
1. Click e.g. the Take the Axis of an Axial Geometry as X-Axis icon. The
The values in the X-Axis field are updated with the values of the picked
entity's axis direction.
256 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The first picked point will be the origin of the frame you wish to create.
The second picked point will form with the first one the first vector.
The third picked point will form with the first one the second vector.
4. Click Reset to cancel the parameters of the new frame (if required).
Note: You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu or press Esc to
cancel the frame in progress.
Editing Data 257
2. Define the X-Axis, Y-Axis, and Z-Axis. For each, do one of the following:
Lock an Axis
To Lock an Axis:
1. Define e.g. the X-Axis and click the Lock X-Axis icon.
Note: If you open the Turn Around dialog, you may see the unlocked axes
dimmed (Y and Z in this example) and the locked axis (X) checked by default.
Editing Data 259
3. Define the Y-Axis and Z-Axis. For each, do one of the following:
Note: If you open the Turn Around dialog, you may see the unlocked axes
dimmed (Y and Z in the example) and the locked axis (X) checked by default.
260 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Turn Around Axis icon. The Turn Around dialog opens.
If the default unit of measurement has set in degrees; you do not need to
enter “°”.
You can change the default unit of measurement in the Preferences
dialog.
4. Click Apply. In the 3D View, you may see the yellow frame turns around
the selected axis and of the specified angle.
5. Click again Apply. The yellow frame turns again around the selected axis
and of the specified angle.
6. Click Close. The Turn Around dialog closes.
Note: If you can combine e.g. the Lock Z Axis feature with the Turn Around
Axis feature. In the Turn Around dialog; only the Z Axis is available as it is used
as a constraint and the others are dimmed.
Editing Data 261
1. Click the Build Frame From Geometry icon. The cursor takes the
following shape: .
2. In the 3D View, pick a geometry.
262 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
From a Box
A Box has six Faces, eight Vertices and twelve Edges. The position of the
point you picked on the box determines the Origin of the frame to create.
Normally this Origin should be on:
The Face (F) whose position is the lowest along the Z-Axis (of the current
frame).
The Vertex (V4) whose position is the closest to the picked point.
The Edge (E4) that is the most parallel to the Z-Axis (of the current frame)
gives the direction of the Z-Axis (of the frame to create).
Editing Data 263
From a Cylinder
A Cylinder has two Bases connected by a curved surface, and an Axis joining
the center of each base. No matter the position of the Point (P) that you picked
on the Cylinder, the Origin of the frame to be created should be on:
The Base (B) whose position is the lowest along Z-Axis (of the current
frame).
The Center (C2) of the Base (B2).
The Z-Axis of the frame to be created is the Axis of the cylinder while the X-
Axis and Y-Axis are randomly oriented.
264 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Base (B) whose position is the lowest along Z-Axis (of the current
frame).
The Center (C2) on the Base (B2).
The Z-Axis of the frame to be created is the Axis of the cylinder while the X-
Axis and Y-Axis are randomly oriented.
Editing Data 265
From an Extrusion
An Extrusion is an entity coming from the conversion of a 2D Sketch into a 3D
Object. The position of the point you picked on an extrusion determines the
Origin of the frame to be created. Normally this Origin should be on:
The Face (F) whose position is the lowest along the Z-Axis (of the current
frame).
The Vertex (V4) whose position is the closest to the Point (P) you picked.
Note: Press Esc (or select Close Tool from the pop-up menu) to leave the
UCS Creation tool.
Tip: Instead of clicking Create, you can also select Create Frame from the
pop-up menu.
Note: There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Set As Home UCS feature can be reached from the
UCS list, in the Project group.
267
TZF Scan
For a better usage in RealWorks, TZF Scans depending on their origin (issued
directly from a Trimble TX 3D scanner or converted from another format) may
require to improve their quality with post-processing or re-projection
operations. Other operations described in this chapter allow extracting 3D or
image information.
Data coming from a Trimble FX instrument is stored in a C3D format file. Such
data (in C3D format) once processed (in the Trimble FX Controller software) is
saved as a Trimble Scan File (with TZS file extension). Files with such
extension should now be converted to the TZF format, otherwise you cannot
open them.
In the Registration module, the operations related to the TZF Scans are
gathered on the Edit tab, in the TZF Scan group:
Warning: A message is displayed if one (or more) TZF format file(s) is (or are)
missing in the project (loaded through RealWorks or if the project is not
compatible with Trimble RealColor.
Note:
If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Note: For more information related to Trimble RealColor, refer please to its
FAQ.
Caution: An error message appears if the TZF Scan(s) to process is (or are)
read-only.
Note: Your graphic card must be Open CL 1.1 compatible (or higher) and the
driver up to date. Otherwise a warning (in the Processing TZF Scans dialog)
appears and post-processing TZF Scan(s) may take a long time.
Editing Data 269
Create Thumbnails
The Create Thumbnails feature allows you to create Thumbnails in batch
processing mode or not. In the batch processing mode, the user interaction is
not required and a set of Thumbnails is created (one per TZF file). Out of the
batch processing mode, the user interaction is required and one Thumbnail is
created for a given TZF file. A Thumbnail is a preview of a TZF file within
RealWorks.
To Create Thumbnails:
Note: If the selected project has not been yet saved in the database, you are
then prompted to do so. We advise you to save the project under the same
folder as the TZF format files.
By default, a Thumbnail is not shown in the 3D View. You need to toggle the
On/Off icon to On to display it as a thumbnail in the 3D View. You can then
drag and drop the thumbnail to any location within the 3D View. To hide the
thumbnail; you have choice between toggling Off the On/Off icon and clicking
on the Close button at the top right corner.
270 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Editing Data 271
For each TZF Scan, a set of six matched images is created, one for each face
of a cube map centered on the station location.
Each matched image is named after the name of the TZF scan followed by
information related to its orientation (Front, Back, etc.).
All created images are put under a folder named according to the station
name.
Each matched image has a size which is determined by the level of the used
TZF Scan as specified below:
Note: When you select a station with several TZF Scans, only the Main Scan
will be considered in the creation process.
Caution: A TZF Scan, for which the link to the TZF format file is broken, has
the following representation . You cannot copy such TZF format files into
the RWI folder.
Editing Data 273
Note:
You may see the path to a TZF format file by displaying its related
station's properties (see Input Data Path Name line).
(*) Trying to add new scans without changing the path to the TZF format
files will open a dialog which prompts you to continue with the remaining
stations or not.
274 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: When opening a project with TZF station(s) created out of RealWorks,
the correspondence(s) (from the TZF station(s) to the TZF format file(s)) will be
automatically updated only if the TZF format file(s) is (or are) in the RWI folder
(of the Project).
Editing Data 275
A warning appears showing the stations for which the required information is
missing.
1. Select a TZF Scan (or a station or a project with TZF Scan files within).
2. In the TZF Scan group, on the Edit tab, click the Re-Project TZF Scans
icon.
A progress bar appears at the bottom left corner of the user interface.
TZF Scans are processed one after the other (in the case a station (with
several TZF Scans or a project has been selected).
Note: When you perform an operation on a station, its leveling status is first
checked. If the station is Leveled, all its TZF Scans are automatically re-
projected. If the station is Unleved, the user has to re-project all the TZF Scans
manually as described above.
You can manually set a leveled station (with TZF Scans within) to unleveled.
This change (in the station leveling status) has no impact on the TZF Scans
themselves. The leveling information is still present in the TZF Scans. The TZF
Scans are automatically re-projected.
Editing Data 277
Note: The Re-Project TZF Scans feature is only available in the Registration
mode.
Note: If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the
Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
Note: (*) Only with TZF Scans coming from a Trimble TX instrument.
278 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Scans Tree, select the station(s) containing the TZF Scan(s) for
which the extraction is required.
2. In Registration, in the Scan group of the Edit tab, click the Create Sampled
Scans icon. The Sampled Scan Creation dialog opens.
3. In the Sampling panel, choose "Sampling by Step" from the drop-down
menu (if not done).
4. In the Step (in Pixels) field, enter One.
The sampling scan data process is launched for each TZF Scan selected.
Once finished, a scan is created per TZF Scan.
6. If required, display points of the Project Cloud by turning the bulb to On.
7. In the Cloud group, click the Segmentation icon. The Segmentation toolbar
appears.
8. Double-click on the "Points to Delete" folder to select it.
9. Select a portion of points to remove by fencing an area.
10. Create the set of points (by clicking Create).
11. Repeat the steps if required.
280 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
All created Clouds are put under the "Points to Delete" folder.
Tip: (*) With the Property window open, select the newly created folder. In the
Name line (of the Property window), enter a new name.
Remove Points
To Remove Points:
Caution: Points that are isolated (from the extraction) and eradicated (from the
TZF Scan(s)) are not deleted from the RealWorks project.
Tip: As the eradication of points is time consuming, we advise you to not apply
the operation for each point cloud (to remove) but once all point clouds (to
remove) have been created.
Tip: In the RWI folder, an image (PNG format) is created showing in red the
points that have been removed as a result of the eradication process. The
image file name is based the TZF file name.
Editing Data 281
In Registration, the input selection can be either: one station, a set of stations,
a group containing stations (a folder or the project). When a selection contains
at least one station that contains scans, the tool will be available. It will be
grayed out otherwise. Survey Points are not considered as scans (they don’t
count in the selection and they are not exported to TZF).
The Create TZF Scan dialog comes up with two modes: Automatic and
Advanced. The last mode in use is by default selected.
If the project is not saved yet, you will be prompted to save it (in the
RealWorks format).
Note: The images that will be taken into account that those that are inside the
stations. If your selection is a project and some of your images do not belong
to a station, you may see the number of images in the Create TZF Scan dialog
different from the number of images in the project.
282 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If there is no image in your selection, the dialog looks as illustrated below and
the Number of Images is equal to 0/0.
If there are images in your selection, but their type cannot be determined, the
dialog looks as illustrated below:
Editing Data 283
If there are images in your selection, and all have been acquired using a
Trimble SX10 instrument, all the types will be automatically selected. All points
will be colored with the images issued from the camera having the highest
priority. The Telescope camera is the higher in priority while the Overview
camera is the lowest.
284 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: The images that will be taken into account that those that are inside the
stations. If your selection is a project and some of your images do not belong
to a station, you may see the number of images in the dialog different from the
number of images in the project.
If there is no image in your selection, the dialog looks as illustrated below and
the Number of Images is equal to 0/0.
If there are images in your selection, but their type cannot be determined, the
dialog looks as illustrated below:
286 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If there are images in your selection, and all have been acquired using a
Trimble SX10 instrument, then you can choose the image type(s) to colorize
the points by using the corresponding option(s).
Editing Data 287
Note: The images that will be taken into account that those that are inside the
stations. If your selection is a project and some of your images do not belong
to a station, you may see the number of images in the dialog different from the
number of images in the project.
In the Automatic mode, TZF will be created with 5 layers (3 for the
positions, 1 for the intensity, one for color). The Default resolution* will be
used. TZF coverage will be based on the area that has been scanned: full
dome will be projected in the { [0, 2π[; [0, π[ } domain while smaller
scanned area will be projected accordingly to a smaller domain (TZF are
cropped). The Intensity layer will be cosmetically filled up with interpolated
values where there are small holes. Bigger holes will remain untouched.
In the Advanced mode; the resolution that will be used is the resolution
defined by the user. No negative value nor a value equal to zero can be
input.
288 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In the Automatic mode, the Default resolution will be used. All points will
be projected at the measured distance to pick up color. A small cosmetical
filtering will be applied to fill up small isolated holes. Bigger unmeasured
area will remain uncolored (black). This is to avoid any confusion when
proper coloring is not possible and when the TZF might be used for
measure in Trimble Scan Explorer. TZF will be cropped to fit the input
domain.
In the Advanced mode; the resolution that will be used is the resolution
defined by the user. No negative value nor a value equal to zero can be
input.
Editing Data 289
If a single station has been selected, a unique TZF Scan will be created in the
station and will be named Scan X where X is its order. X is equal to one if no
TZF Scan is available in the project. It will be incremented of one from the last
TZF Scan of the project, if there are some TZF Scans in the project.
If the whole project (or a set of stations) has (have) been selected, a unique
TZF Scan per station will be created. You may see the conversion in progress
by observing the status bar.
For each TZF Scan created, a TZF format file will be created under the RWI
folder. The TZF format file name is based on the name of the station. If a TZF
format file already exists with a certain name, the new one will be created with
an incremental suffix, i.e.: Station.tzf, Station (2).tzf, Station (3).tzf, etc.
In OfficeSurvey/Modeling or Production:
From a selection of clouds, points will be sorted by station. For each station, a
TZF Scan will be created. Created TZF name is based on the name of the
station and adds a "_cloud" suffix to it. If a TZF format file already exists with a
certain name, the new one will be created with an incremental suffix, i.e.:
Station_cloud.tzf, Station_cloud (2).tzf, Station_cloud (3).tzf, etc. You may see
the conversion in progress by observing the status bar.
291
Scan
In the Edit tab, the Scans group looks as illustrated below, in Registration:
And as shown below in Production where the Limit Box Extraction tool and the
Change Cloud Color feature are not present.
In the Scan group, click the Limit Box Extraction icon. The cursor
becomes as follows .
The Limit Box Extraction toolbar opens as well as the Picking Parameters
toolbar.
If an object has been selected (as input of the tool) and displayed in the 3D
View; the object remains selected with its limit box.
1 - Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside 3 - Select Limit Box Center Point
the Limit Box 4 - Change Limit Box Center Point
2 - Show Limit Box 5 - Limit Boxes
To be able to leave the Limit Box Extraction tool, you need to first define a
position by picking a point on the displayed objects, or select Close Center On
Point from the pop-up menu, or press Esc. and then choose either Close Tool
or Esc.
The Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate icons become enabled as well as the
Sampling field, the Extract Points from TZF Scans and Close Tool icons.
The Show Limit Box and Modify Shape icons become enabled and
selected.
A limit box is displayed centered on the picked point which is set to the
center of the screen.
The manipulator which appears with the limit box depends on the feature
that has been last used, i.e., among Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate.
If an object has been selected (as input of the tool) and displayed in the
3D View; the object remains selected with its bounding box.
Note: (*) To leave the picking mode, you can select Close Center on Point
from the pop-up menu.
1. Click the Select Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to show
the following .
2. Pick a point on displayed clouds and/or geometries.
The limit box is then centered on the picked point which is set to the center
of the screen.
Note: To leave the picking mode, you can select Close Center on Point from
the pop-up menu.
1. Click the Change Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to
show the following .
2. Pick a point on the displayed clouds and/or geometries.
1. Click the Modify Shape icon. A manipulator with six Face Handles
appears, one on each face of the limit box, and eight Corner Handles.
3. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box, uniformly in all directions.
296 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can also select Modify Shape from the pop-up menu.
Pan in a plane.
Pan along a direction.
Tip: You can also select Pan from the pop-up menu or use its associated
shortcut key T.
Tip:
You can use the following keys (, , , , Page Up, Page Down) on
your numeric keypad to move the limit box.
You can combine the use of the above keys with the Ctrl key to speed up
the movement of the limit box.
298 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Pan in a Plane
To Pan the Limit Box in a Plane:
1. Pick a Plane Handle to select it. A larger yellow Plane Handle is displayed.
2. Drag the Plane Handle in any direction on the plane to move the limit box
in that direction.
3. Drop the Plane Handle.
Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu or use its related
shortcut key R.
Editing Data 301
The limit box, with its manipulator (Size, Pan or Rotate), is displayed in the
3D View.
The Show Limit Box icon is highlighted in yellow.
The limit box, with the current manipulator, is removed from the 3D View.
The Show Limit Box icon becomes unselected.
302 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.
Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are displayed in the 3D
View.
The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon is
highlighted in yellow.
Editing Data 303
Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.
Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are hidden in the 3D View.
The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon
becomes unselected.
Or
In the Limit Box window (if open), a limit box object with a default name (New
Limit Box) is then created.
Tip: You can also right-click on a limit box and select Apply Limit Box from the
pop-up menu or double-click a limit box.
Tip: You can also right-click on a limit box and select Remove Limit Box from
the pop-up menu.
Editing Data 305
1. In the Limit Box window, click the Export icon. The Export a Limit Box File
dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where to store the file.
3. Input a name in the File Name field.
4. Click Save. The Export a Limit Box File dialog closes.
A file with the extension (.BOX) will be then created. This file will contain as
many limit boxes as the project contains.
1. In the Limit Box window, click the Import icon. The Import a Limit Box File
dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.
3. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
4. Click Open. The Import a Limit Box File dialog closes.
306 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Set the limit box to a position where you want to check loaded points*:
2. Do of the following:
Note: (*) It is advantageous to display the clouds and/or geometries that are
outside the limit box and/or all of the Station Positions of the project. This
allows you to easily know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud
and/or within all of the stations.
Editing Data 307
1. If required, set the limit box to a position where you want to extract more
points*:
2. Do one of the following:
Note: (*) It is advantageous to display the clouds and/or geometries that are
outside the limit box and/or all of the Station Positions of the project. This
allows you to easily know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud
and/or within all of the stations.
Note: When you clip a large region on a pure TZF Scan (with points that are
extracted), and apply either the Sampling By Step, or the Spatial Sampling, or
the Spatial Sampling (Keep Details), a dialog opens and prompts to first save
the project.
1. Click the Extract Points from TZF Scans icon in the toolbar.
2. Or select Extract Points from TZF Scans from the pop-up menu.
The extraction is then launched. RealWorks goes through all of the TZF
Scans in the project, from the first to the last. You can see the extraction
status of each in the status bar.
For TZF Scans inside the Limit Box, points are extracted and the process
for each can take some time.
At the end of the extraction:
Note: Be aware that the extraction can take time in case there are a lot of TZF
Scans inside the Limit Box and/or if the (sampling) parameter is too small.
Caution: If there is no TZF Scan inside the Limit Box, the extraction (of points)
is also launched. No point will be extracted.
1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations) or a TZF Scan (or a
set of TZF Scans).
2. In the Scan group, click the Create Sampled Scans icon. The Sampled
Scan Creation dialog appears.
3. Sample to the scan data.
4. And if required, filter the scan data.
5. Click Ok. The Sampled Scan Creation dialog closes.
You can add as many Sampled Scans as needed under a given station. If
a project has been selected, Sampled Scans (one per station) are created
in batch processing mode. If a station has been selected, only a Sampled
Scan is created and under the selected station.
Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Sampled
Scans (in that station) do not have the same color. Each has its own color.
Note:
If the selected project has not been yet saved in the database, you are
then prompted to do so. We advise you to save the project under the
same folder as the TZF format files.
Inside the RWI folder, a scan file (with RWCX extension) is created per
sampled scan named as follows ProjectName_StationX_ScanY.
Note:
If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Tip: You can also right-click on a TZF Scan and select Create Sampled Scans
from the pop-up menu.
312 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
The sampling will be applied to the entirety of the scan data. The number of
estimated points will be updated according to the defined parameter except
when using the Spatial Sampling or the Spatial Sampling (Keep Details). It is in
that case "Undefined". Note that the use of the Filter by Range has no effect on
the number of estimated points.
Filter by Range
The By Range allows you to define a distance (from the center of the FX
instrument) beyond which no point will be taken into account. This filter is only
applied to the scan data.
To Filter by Range:
1. Check the Filter by Range option. The Max Distance field becomes
editable.
2. Enter a value in the Max Distance field.
3. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.
Filter by Zone
The By Zone option allows filtering by defining a bounding box. The Min Point
and Max Point are the two extremities of a bounding box diagonal.
To Filter by Zone:
1. Check the By Zone option. The Min Point and Max Point fields become
editable.
2. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Min Point field.
3. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Max Point field.
Note:
There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.
This operation can take a significant amount of time in the case of large
datasets.
Editing Data 315
Note:
There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.
This operation can take a significant amount of time in the case of large
datasets.
316 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a project from the Project Tree (in any processing mode).
2. Or select a station (or a set of stations) from the Project Tree.
3. In the Scan group, click the Colorize Points icon. A dialog appears and
prompts you to continue or to abort the action.
4. Click Yes. The dialog closes.
If the current project comes from the import of a JXL format file, from the
Trimble SX10 instrument, the Image Type Selection dialog appears:
Note: The images that will be taken into account that those that are inside the
stations. If your selection is a project and some of your images do not belong
to a station, you may see the number of images in the dialog different from the
number of images in the project.
Note: You can select the three types at the same time.
Editing Data 317
Note: If no check box has been selected, a warning will open and no points will
be colored.
319
Point Cloud
In the Edit tab, the Cloud group looks as illustrated below, in the Production
mode:
An information box appears at the top right corner of the 3D View and
displays the sum total of points included in the selected object. The mouse
cursor shape changes; the arrow becomes a pointer. You can still
navigate (Zoom, Pan and Rotation) through the 3D scene, select or hide
objects (or groups) or change the active group before you start drawing a
fence. Once you start drawing, these commands become unavailable
except Pan.
If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option
(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View are hidden except the one selected. All of the displayed objects have
their bulb icon turned to Off.
If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed. All displayed objects have their bulb icon remained On, except
the one selected.
Tip: After opening the tool, the default selection method is the last used one.
Caution: (*) You can select several point clouds for entering the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud. In case of a single selection, the Project
Cloud can be selected as input of the tool.
Note: (**) The Box Selection feature becomes enabled only if the
Segmentation tool is used with the Limit Box Mode (see "Filter Data" on page
450).
Editing Data 321
Note: When using the Segmentation tool as a main tool, you can create a new
folder, move or delete an object from the Project Tree while doing a
segmentation. When using the Segmentation tool as a sub-tool, you are only
allowed to create new folder. Moving or deleting an object from the Project
Tree, while doing a segmentation, is not permitted.
Tip: You can change the color of a fence in the Preferences / Tools dialog.
This should be done before entering into the tool, otherwise a message pops
up.
Tip: You can use the Esc key to cancel the fence that you are drawing.
Note: If you select Close Tool (or New Fence from the pop-up menu) while you
have not finished drawing, your fence will be cancelled.
Tip: To start a new fence, you need to cancel the current one by selecting New
Fence from the pop-up menu.
Note: Even if the pop-up menu is displayed, the fence still snaps to the mouse
cursor. You have to terminate the fence to free it. When selecting In (or Out),
RealWorks will close automatically your fence and points inside (or outside)
this fence will be kept.
Caution: Be careful with the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting
Segmentation option in the Preferences dialog. If you decide to keep the option
unchecked, all displayed clouds remain displayed with the selected cloud after
entering the tool. You are able to fence, not only the selected cloud but also
those that are not selected (but only displayed). This may be confusing but
keep in mind that the displayed clouds are not taken into account in the fencing
result.
322 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar).
Tip: You can select Polygonal Selection from the pop-up menu.
Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar).
Tip: You can select Polygonal Selection from the pop-up menu.
Editing Data 323
Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar).
Tip: You can select Polygonal Selection from the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can select Rectangular Selection from the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can select Circular Selection from the pop-up menu.
324 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the In icon. Points inside the fence are kept. Points outside the
fence are unkept. This doesn't mean that they are not deleted from the
initial cloud but just hidden in the 3D View. The number of points inside the
fence is shown in the information box. You can also use the short-cut key I
to do this. If the fence does not contain any points, selecting In will not
take any points into account.
2. Or click the Out icon. Points outside the fence are kept while those that
are inside are unkept. The number of remaining points is shown in the
information box. You can also use the short-cut key O to do this. If the
fence does not contain any points, selecting Out will not take any points
into account.
3. Click Display Un-partitioned Points if you want to work with the same
cloud.
Editing Data 325
Tip: You can also select In (or Out) from the pop-up menu.
Note: After keeping points in (or out) the fence, you can rotate the scene to do
the selection from another point of view. Such combination allows you to do a
3D point selection (like to segment the cloud with a 3D polyhedron which is the
intersection of the extrusion of these 2D fenced polygons).
326 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Clouds sharing the same classification layer will be merged into the
segmentation result.
Editing Data 327
1. In the Limit Box group, click the Limit Box Mode icon. The Limit Box Mode
toolbar and the Picking Parameters toolbar open.
2. Define a Limit Box. For more information, refer to the Limit Box Mode (see
"Filter Data" on page 450) section.
3. If the clouds and/or geometries outside the Limit Box are displayed, hide
them by clicking . Otherwise, the Box Selection feature (in the
Segmentation toolbar) remains grayed-out.
With a fence drawn, choose e.g. In (I) . The working cloud is the
selected cloud. The number of points inside the fence is displayed in the
information box.
Editing Data 329
With a fence drawn, first click Box Selection to set the cloud inside the
Limit Box as the working cloud. And then choose e.g. In (I) . The
number of points inside the fence is equal to zero.
330 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: Instead of selecting Create from the pop-up menu, you can also press
the P key on your keyboard.
Note:
Selecting Create without closing the fence will close it automatically and a
new cloud object will be created from all points inside (or outside) this
fence.
The Create feature is always enabled after entering the tool even if there
is no drawn fence. This way, you can create a new cloud. It is based on all
points of the selected cloud.
Note: When using the Segmentation tool as a main tool, you can save your
project after creating the segmented clouds in the database.
Caution: You cannot save your result(s) when using the Segmentation tool as
a sub-tool. The Create button is dimmed.
Note: A dialog appears and asks if you really want to close the tool without
saving the result in the database (after a fencing only).
Editing Data 331
Note: In case of a single point cloud (as input), the point cloud, that will be
created from each method, will have the same layer than the selected one,
except when using the Ground Extraction method with the Keep Ground
option. In case of several point clouds, the created point cloud will have
"Unclassified" as layer.
332 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The sampling method which appears first is the last used one.
The Scan-Based Sampling, Random Sampling and Ground Extraction
methods work on disk', i.e., on the full data, independently of what is loaded in
the RAM. See [A].
The Spatial Sampling, Intensity-Based Sampling and Discontinuity-Based
Sampling methods work on what is loaded only in the RAM. See [B].
Tip: To leave the Sampling tool, you can select Close from the pop-up menu or
press Esc.
Caution: You are prevented from changing the number of loaded points inside
the Sampling tool. The Point Loading Manager is grayed out.
Editing Data 333
Caution: In case you enter the Segmentation tool after sampling a point cloud,
the number of points in the "Remaining" field is considered as the input of the
Segmentation tool. If you close the tool without performing any segmentation
operation on the point cloud, first you get back to the Sampling tool, and the
number of points upstream the Segmentation tool is then considered as the
"Initial" points.
334 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Spatial Sampling
Point clouds obtained by scanning from different positions and at different
distances are often not uniform in terms of point density. This method enables
to obtain a point cloud with a homogeneous density (that the user has to
define).
To Sample Spatially:
This dialog displays two numbers: Initial and Remaining. The Initial number is
the total number of points before sampling. The Remaining number
corresponds to the number of points after sampling. The unit of measurement
is set by default in millimeters; but you can change it when necessary in
Preferences.
Note: A negative value input the Distance Between Points field is automatically
converted to positive.
Editing Data 335
Random Sampling
This method consists in sampling a point cloud by using a percentage ratio
defined by the user, which will determine the amount of points that will be kept
in the initial point cloud. These points will be randomly selected from the
original point cloud.
To Sample Randomly:
In this method, there is no Preview. There are four ways to define the
percentage ratio. The first is to use a slider. The second is to select a
predetermined value among those pre-defined (25, 50, 75 and 100%). The
third is to enter a rate value manually and the fourth is to enter the number of
points in the Remaining field. Each time you define a new ratio, the sampling
will be performed dynamically, and the results (the number of points and the
final cloud - respectively in the dialog and in the 3D View) are displayed in real
time.
Note: When entering a value in the Rate or Remaining field, do not forget to
press Enter.
336 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Intensity-Based Sampling
This method can be used for sampling the selected point cloud according to
the intensity associated with each point. In RealWorks, the intensity value
ranges from 0 to 255. After selecting the Intensity Based Sampling method, the
selected point cloud will be rendered in Gray Scale Intensity.
A histogram window appears in the dialog. You can then use the two vertical
bars, which are shown as arrows at the bottom of the histogram in the figure
above, to define an intensity range so that all points with intensity within this
range will be kept. All points outside of this intensity range (called Unwanted
Points) will be un-kept and shown in red in the histogram and in the 3D View
(only if the Display Unwanted Points option is checked). To manipulate the two
vertical bars, you can either directly use the cursor to move them, or use the
picking mechanism (button on top of the histogram) to select an intensity level
from the displayed points.
Editing Data 337
A sub-point cloud whose name is "By Intensity (X)" is created under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order.
Note:
If the selected cloud contains points with no intensity information, these
points will not be taken into account.
If you switch from Gray Scaled Intensity to Color Code Intensity; the
selected Point Cloud is then rendered with a range of colors - from red to
blue with intermediate colors like orange, yellow and green. Points with
intensity of 0 are rendered in red; those with intensity of 128 are in yellow
and those with 255 are in blue.
338 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Scan-Based Sampling
On certain occasions, you need to create a sub-point cloud including all points
belonging to certain stations or scans. You can use this method to achieve this.
After selecting the method, the selected point cloud will be automatically
rendered according to the Scan Color.
A sub-window including the Scans Tree appears in the dialog. By default, all
elements (stations and scans) in this tree are On. You can turn Off a station, a
scan or a set of scans from this tree. The total number of points will be
changed accordingly and the point cloud displayed in the 3D View will be
updated.
If required, use the Expand All (or Collapse All ) icon to expand (or
shrink) the Scans Tree in the dialog.
If required, use to select all items from the dialog, to clear the selection
"On" items are shown in the 3D View and will be considered in the final result
Editing Data 339
"Off" items (white points) are hidden in the 3D View and won't be taken into
account in the final result
A sub-point cloud whose name is "By Scan (X)" is created under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order.
Tip:
You can select several stations (or scans or a mix of them) (from the
Scan-Based Sampling dialog) by using the Ctrl (or Shift) key combined
with the left clicking.
To select all items (scans and/or stations) at once (from the Scan-Based
Sampling dialog), select first an item and use then the Ctrl + A key
combination.
In this sub-tool, only stations and scans from the selected cloud are displayed
in the dialog, instead of all of the stations and scans of the project.
Tip: You can resize all the sampling dialogs horizontally, in particular the Scan-
Based Sampling dialog in order to be able to see all item names fully in case
they are too long.
340 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Discontinuity-Based Sampling
You may encounter discontinuities in a point cloud in three cases. First is when
some points of the cloud have opposite or different normal direction than the
rest. We call this discontinuity Edge. Second is when all the cloud points have
the same normal direction but some of them are separated by irregular
distance. We call this discontinuity Gap. The third case can be everything
except Edges and Gaps.
When loading a file of ASCII format, Edges and Gaps are un-generated. You
can use the Edge Detection tool to generate them. After selecting the
Discontinuity-Based Sampling method, the selected point cloud will be
automatically rendered in Discontinuity Display.
When selecting this method, the three discontinuity options are all checked.
The Keep Edge option (when unchecked) enables the removal of Edge
discontinuities from the point cloud. The Keep Gap option (when unchecked)
enables the removal of Gap discontinuities from the point cloud. The Keep
Others option (when unchecked) enables removal of all discontinuities except
Edges and Gaps.
A sub-point cloud whose name is "By Discontinuity (X)" is created under the
current project in the Models Tree. X is its order.
Editing Data 341
Detect Edges
The Edge Detection is based on a grid method. You should first define a
projection surface (mainly a plane) and then set its grid resolution. The grid
resolution is square - the same in both of the projection plane directions (length
and width).
To Detect Edges:
Applying the results after previewing them creates them in the database and
closes the Edge Detection dialog. Note that clicking Apply without previewing
the results cancels the generated discontinuities and clicking Cancel opens an
information box which prompts you to cancel or confirm the action you attempt
to do.
Note:
For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane tool.
When selecting (2), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears, it's up to you
to do a free picking or a constrained picking.
Editing Data 343
Topography-Based Sampling
The idea behind this method is to separate valid points from invalid points
inside a given point cloud. Because invalid points are more or less important
according to where they are on the point cloud, you need to be able to work
separately on them. This kind of situation occurs when the point cloud is a
scene presentation with threes, bushes and the like. In such a case, invalid
points are trees, bushes, etc. and valid points are the ground.
First, you should define a point cloud as reference. This means that this point
cloud remains unchanged whatever the operations you apply to it except when
deleting points or when replacing it by a new one. You can reload it as often as
required. If the point cloud you select comes from another sampling method or
results from a segmentation, the Only Wanted button is active. This means that
you can set this point cloud as a reference.
The result from the square-grid projection and the distance selection is a set of
invalid points (called Unwanted Points). These points will be un-kept and
shown in red in the 3D View - only if the Display Unwanted Points (Red) option
is checked.
6. Click Erase Unwanted. Invalid points will be deleted from the reference
cloud.
7. Click Reload Reference Points . The reference cloud is reloaded with
invalid points less.
8. Repeat the steps from 3 to 7 on another area of the reference cloud.
9. Click Create to save the result and click Close.
A sub-point cloud whose name is "By Topography" is created under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order.
Editing Data 345
Ground Extraction
The Ground Extraction feature lets the user extract the ground information from
an indoor (or outdoor) scan, whatever the shape of the ground (flat or no flat
surfaces).
It extracts a new point cloud region that includes only ground-level scan points,
as determined based on the geometry of the scene (not laser intensity). The
extraction algorithm assumes that the ground is locally horizontal (normals are
used if available) and locally flat (local planarity is computed). Since the
algorithm adapts its parameters automatically according to the density of the
point cloud, no input parameters are required.
After the extraction, all points, that are on the ground, have their color
unchanged and are called Ground points.
Those, that are not on the ground, are colored in red and are called Outlier
points.
Note: The Show Outliers (Red) option is automatically chosen (checked) when
applying the extraction.
Note: You are able to stop the extraction in progress by pressing Esc.
The number of points in the Remaining filed is diminished from the amount of
Outlier points.
1. Click the Pick Points button. The cursor has its shape changed to become
. The Pick Points button changes Compute.
2. Pick several points on the Outlier points.
In the 3D View, each picked point is used as seed to define a ground region,
which is added to the previously extracted ground.
348 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In the Ground Extraction dialog, the Remaining number is diminished from the
amount of points that correspond to the added regions. The Initial number
remains unchanged.
Note: To leave the picking mode, you can press Esc., select Cancel Picking
from the pop-up menu, or press on the Compute button.
Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the ground
extraction previously performed.
Click the Remove Ground button. In the 3D View, the Ground points are
hidden. In the Ground Extraction dialog, the number of Outlier points
becomes the Initial points. The Keep Ground and Remove Ground buttons
are dimmed.
Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the ground
extraction previously performed.
Editing Data 349
Click the Keep Ground button. In the 3D View, the Outlier points are
hidden. In the Ground Extraction dialog, the Remaining points, which is
also the Outlier points, becomes the Initial points. The Keep Ground and
Remove Ground buttons are dimmed.
Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the ground
extraction previously performed.
350 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: Concerning the Floor Extraction, from a technical point of view, the
algorithm is based on the geometry of the scene. In that sense, the result does
not depend on the laser intensity. The algorithm uses the hypothesis that the
floor is locally horizontal (normals are used if available) and locally flat (local
planarity is computed).
After the extraction, points on the floor have their color unchanged and are
called Floor points.
Those, that are not on the floor, are colored in red and are called Outlier points.
Note: The Show Outliers (Red) option is automatically chosen (checked) when
applying the extraction.
Note: You are able to stop the extraction in progress by pressing Esc.
Editing Data 351
The number of points in the Remaining field is diminished from the amount of
Outlier points.
1. Click the Pick Points button. The cursor has its shape changed to become
. The Pick Points button changes Compute.
2. Pick several points on the Outlier points.
In the 3D View, each picked point is used as seed to define a floor region,
which is added to the previously extracted floor.
In the Floor Extraction dialog, the Remaining number is diminished from the
amount of points that correspond to the added regions. The Initial number
remains unchanged.
Note: To leave the picking mode, you can press Esc., select Cancel Picking
from the pop-up menu, or press on the Compute button.
Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the floor
extraction previously performed.
354 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Click the Remove Floor button. In the 3D View, the Floor points are
hidden. In the Floor Extraction dialog, the number of Outlier points
becomes the Initial points. The Keep Floor and Remove Floor buttons are
dimmed.
Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the floor
extraction previously performed.
Editing Data 355
Click the Keep Floor button. In the 3D View, the Outlier points are hidden.
In the Floor Extraction dialog, the Remaining points, which is also the
Outlier points, becomes the Initial points. The Keep Floor and Remove
Floor buttons are dimmed.
Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the floor
extraction previously performed.
Caution: The classification process is carried out on disk over all 3D points. It
may take times with huge datasets.
356 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
By default, the six classes (Ground, Building, Poles and Signs, Electric
Lines, High Vegetation and Remaining) are all checked.
Choose a Class
To Choose a Class:
Choose a class:
Note: The algorithm works mainly on power lines from distribution corridors or
urban environments. It may not work properly on other use cases such as
Railway Electrification Systems.
High Vegetation includes trees, bushes and other vegetation higher than 1
meter.
Remaining is everything matching none of the aforementioned classes.
Note: You need to have at least a class checked in the dialog, except the
Remaining one. Otherwise, the Extraction button remains grayed-out.
Editing Data 357
The status of the extraction process is displayed at the bottom of the user
interface. When the process is complete, the Rendering option automatically
switches to Color Coded Classification. The points cloud regions, for which the
extraction succeeded, are created and classified as follows:
All the regions except the Remaining region display in the 3D View in the
color defined for the region according to the Classification Layers window,
i.e. the Ground region is brown by default.
Note: You can undo the extraction process by pressing the Esc key. In the
Classification Layers window, the assigned layers remain active after an undo.
Tip: After the extraction, and if required, you can use the Segmentation tool to
refine the result manually. Please, refer to the Assign a Classification Layer
to the Fenced Cloud (on page 326) topic for more information.
358 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
This tool is intended to work on point clouds containing a single floor. In case
of multiple floors, you must first manually separate each floor, e.g., using the
Scan-Based Sampling.
Caution: The classification process is carried out on disk over all 3D points. It
may take time with huge datasets.
By default, the five classes (Floor, Grating Floor, Ceiling, Walls and
Remaining) are all checked.
Editing Data 359
Choose a Class
To Choose a Class:
Choose a class:
Note: You need to have at least a class checked in the dialog, except the
Remaining one. Otherwise, the Extraction button remains grayed-out.
360 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The status of the extraction process is displayed at the bottom of the user
interface. When the process is complete, the Rendering option automatically
switches to Color Coded Classification (see "Color Point Clouds Based on the
Classification Information" on page 426). The points cloud regions, for which
the extraction succeeded, are created and classified as follows:
A unique cloud is created for Floor. It belongs to the Ground layer (ID 2).
A unique cloud is created for Grated Floor. It belongs to the Ground layer
(ID 2).
A unique cloud is created for Walls. It belongs to the Building layer (ID 6).
A single cloud is created for Ceiling. It belongs to the Ceiling layer (ID 66).
A cloud containing everything that does not match aforementioned
classes. This cloud is assigned to layer 1 (Unclassified).
All the regions except the Remaining region display in the 3D View in the
color defined for the region according to the LAS standard, i.e. the Ground
region is brown by default.
Note: You can undo the extraction process by pressing Esc. In the
Classification Layers window, the assigned layers remain active after an undo.
Tip: After the extraction, and if required, you can use the Segmentation tool to
refine the result manually. Please, refer to the Assign a Classification Layer
to the Fenced Cloud (on page 326) topic for more information.
Editing Data 361
If the selected clouds share the same layer, a new cloud is then created
with the name of Merge. It is put in the same layer than the selected
clouds.
If the selected clouds do not share the same layer, a new cloud is also
created but it is put in the "Unclassified" layer.
Tip: You can also use the following short-cut key Ctrl + M.
Tip: You can also select Merge Clouds from the pop-up menu.
362 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Or
4. With the Property window open, click in the Color of Cloud line.
5. Choose a color from the color palette.
6. Or define your own color by clicking Other.
363
Geometry
In the Edit tab, the Geometry group looks as illustrated below, in the
Production mode:
In the Registration module, the Geometry group is also present but the Delete
Geometry and Convert to Mesh features are not present.
Delete a Geometry
To Delete a Geometry:
Note:
You can also right-click on an object with both properties (cloud and
geometry) in the Models Tree (or in the 3D View) to display the pop-up
menu and select Delete Geometry.
You can also use the combination of keys CTRL + D.
364 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The refinement consists of splitting the vertices for which the length is greater
than the value set in the above field.
Tip: (*) You can also select a mesh as an input. In this case, a new refined
mesh is created and the selected mesh remains unchanged. You can compare
the properties of both. The number of vertices and the number of triangles are
changed consequently.
Editing Data 365
Or
4. With the Property window open, click in the Color of Geometry line.
5. Choose a color from the color palette.
6. Or define your own color by clicking Other.
Caution: You cannot change the color of all types of geometry. There are
some restrictions. An inspection map is also a geometry. You cannot change
its color.
367
The chosen color is then used for coloring the selected object.
Or define a color:
The defined color is used for coloring the selected object. It appears as a
reminder next to the Other button.
The chosen color is then used for coloring the selected object.
Or define a color:
The defined color is used for coloring the selected object. It appears as a
reminder next to the Other button.
1. Click e.g. on the Change Cloud Color pull-down arrow in the 3D View
toolbar. A color palette appears.
2. Click on the Other button. The Color dialog opens.
3. If required, click on the Define Custom Colors button.
4. Choose a box from the Custom Colors panel
5. Define a color.
6. Click the Add to Custom Colors button.
7. If required, repeat the steps from 4 to 6.
8. Click OK. The Color dialog closes.
Note: The defined colors, stored in the Custom Colors, are not kept between
different sessions of RealWorks.
Note: In Ribbon, the Change Cloud Color icon can be reached from the
Cloud group on the Edit tab.
Tip: You can use the CTRL + J shortcut or choose Merge Coplanar Polylines
from the Line Work group on the Drawing tab.
If the current project has some images which come from an instrument
other than the Trimble SX10, a dialog appears and asks to blend the
overlap regions of the images after adjusting the brightness. Jump to Step
C.
If the current project comes from the import of a JXL format file, from the
Trimble SX10 instrument, the Image Type Selection dialog appears:
Note: All of the images of the project will be taken, i.e., those that are inside
the stations as well as those that are outside.
c) Click Yes. This will adjust the brightness of the images and will
blend the overlapped regions.
d) Or click No. This will only adjust the brightness of the images.
Note: You can select the three types at the same time.
Note: You do not need to display (or open) the selected images to perform this
operation. The selected images need to belong to a station.
CHAPTER 6
Exploring Data
Or
1. In the Search group, click the Find icon. The Find dialog box opens.
2. In the Find What field, enter a name/or a partial name.
Or / and
3. From the Type list, choose a type. The number and the type of objects in
the Type list differ depending on the module you are using.
4. In the Registration module, the Type list looks as illustrated below:
5. In the OfficeSurvey - Modeling (or Production) module, the Type list looks
as illustrated below:
382 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Match Case: This option allows you to find an object with its name case-
matched to what was entered in the Find What field.
Current Directory: This option gives the choice to the user to search in the
current directory or in all directories.
7. Click Find. The found objects are displayed in the Find dialog.
In the Find dialog, you can perform a multi-selection, by using the Ctrl (or
Shift or Ctrl + A) key(s).
All the objects, selected from the Find dialog, are listed in the Selection
List window (if opened).
Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select Find from the
pop-up menu or use the short-cut key Ctrl + F.
Exploring Data 383
Visualize Data
The visualization of objects in the 3D View is like taking a photograph of a
virtual scene with a camera. The steps may typically be the ones given below
and each will be discussed separately.
All the options related to the data visualization are gathered in the Display
group, on the View tab.
Point Cloud
A point cloud is a set of 3D points. Each 3D point can contain not only its 3D
coordinates, but also other attributes such as Intensity and Surface Normal.
386 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
You have two ways to check if a cloud is displayed (or not) in the 3D View. The
first way is to use the Show Cloud icon in the Display group. It becomes active
when you select a cloud which is not displayed in the 3D View. It becomes
inactive when the selected cloud is already displayed. The second way is to
use the List window. A displayed cloud is turned-on .
Note:
You can also right-click in the WorkSpace (or List) window to get the pop-
up menu from which you can choose the Show Cloud command.
If you select a group node and display it, all leaf nodes under this group
node will be displayed. This avoids having to display them one by one.
Tip: You can use the D shortcut key for displaying a cloud, previously hidden.
The cloud should be initially selected in the 3D View.
Exploring Data 387
Note: You can also right-click on a cloud in the Project Tree (or in the 3D View)
so as to display the pop-up menu and select Hide Cloud.
Tip: You can use the H shortcut key for hiding a cloud, initially selected in the
3D View.
388 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Geometry
Display a Geometry
To display objects, you should first select them either from the WorkSpace
window or the List window. Once objects are selected, you have the following
options to display them. If the selected objects are group nodes, you can either
use the command Display Geometry from the Display group. You can also use
the drag-and-drop function to drop the selected objects in the 3D View. If the
selected objects are object nodes (or scan nodes), you can either use the
same methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name
of these selected objects in the List window. It is important to note that if the
selected objects have both the cloud and the geometry representations, only
the later one will be displayed when you use this box.
To Display a Geometry:
You have two ways to check if a geometry is displayed or not in the 3D View.
The first way is to use the Display Geometry icon in the Display group. It
becomes active when you select a geometry which is not displayed in the 3D
View and inactive when the geometry is displayed in the 3D view. The second
way is to use the List window. A displayed geometry is turned-on .
Note:
You can also right-click in the WorkSpace (or List) window to get the pop-
up menu from which you can choose the Display Geometry command.
If you select a group node and display it, all leaf nodes under this group
node will be displayed. This avoids having to display them one by one.
Exploring Data 389
Hide a Geometry
Hiding an object with geometric property consists of removing its
representation from the 3D View. For hiding an object, you have to select it
either from the WorkSpace window or the List window or directly from the 3D
View. If the selected object is a group node, you can either use the command
Hide Geometry from the Display menu or its corresponding icon in the Display
toolbar. If the selected object is an object node, you can either use the same
methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name of
these selected objects in the List window.
To Hide a Geometry:
Note: You can also right-click on an object with geometric property in the
Project Tree (or in the 3D View) to display the pop-up menu and select Hide
Geometry.
Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View in order to display the
pop-up menu and select Hide All.
390 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Image
You can display an image in two ways either as a thumbnail in the 3D View or
in a separated 2D window beside the 3D View. In the first case, you can only
display an image once at a time. You can use a tip to check if an image is
displayed or not; it consists of using the List window. An image when displayed
has an On-bulb icon at its left side. In the second case, you can open as many
images as required and no tip is available.
Note: An image (selected from the Images Tree) has its thumbnail displayed in
the Property window (if open).
Note: In the Ribbon layout, these features can be selected only from the pop-
up menu.
Exploring Data 391
Display an Image
Displaying an image consists of opening it as a thumbnail within the 3D View.
You can only display one image at once
To Display an Image:
In the List window, toggle the On/Off icon beside the image name to On.
Right-click on an image in the Images Tree and select Display Image from
the pop-up menu.
Resize: Place the mouse cursor anywhere on the thumbnail image frame.
Stretch or shrink the frame by dragging.
Change location: Place the mouse cursor over the Drag & Drop icon
on the thumbnail image. Drag and drop the thumbnail image to a suitable
location in the 3D view.
Zoom: Click in the thumbnail image and zoom it In or Out using the mouse
wheel (if existed).
392 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Hide an Image
The command enables to close an image that is open as a thumbnail in the 3D
View. You can only hide one image at once.
To Hide an Image:
Tip:
Select an image from the List window and toggle the On/Off icon to Off.
Move your cursor over the thumbnail image and click the Close icon.
Exploring Data 393
Open an Image
Once an image is open in a separated window, you can zoom an area of this
image In or Out using the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands, zoom the whole
image In or Out using the mouse wheel or by defining a zoom factor. If the
image is zoomed In more than the 2D window can display, you can pan it in
any direction in order to view the hidden areas.
To Open an Image:
3. To close the image window, click on the Close icon on the border of
its frame.
Station
You can display the position, name and properties of a station (or of all
stations) within a project. All the options related the station visualization are
gathered in the Stations Makers group, on the View tab.
Tip: You can use a shortcut key to hide (or display) all station Positions and all
station Labels. Both are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.
In the Station Markers group, click the Show Stations icon. The Show
Station Marker Labels and Station Maker List icons become enabled. All
station markers (shown as follows ) are displayed in the 3D View.
Tip: You can also select Show Stations from the 3D View toolbar.
Tip: You can jump from one station to another by double-clicking on the station
marker icon in the 3D View. The navigation mode will be automatically
switched to the Station Based navigation mode.
Note: If the Station Maker List window was open before choosing Show
Station Markers, it will be open after.
In the Station Markers group, select Show Stations . The Show Station
Marker Labels and Station Maker List icons become dimmed. All station
markers (shown as follows ) are removed from the 3D View.
Note: If the Station Maker List window was closed before choosing Show
Station Markers, it will stay closed after.
396 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In the Station Markers group, click the Show Station Marker Labels icon.
In the Station Markers group, click the Show Station Marker Labels icon.
1. In the Station Markers group, click the Show Stations icon. The Show
Station Marker Labels icon and the Station Maker List icon become
enabled.
2. Click the Station Maker List Window icon. The Station Maker List window
opens.
Note: Displaying the station marker of a specific station also displays its label
(if the label has been previously displayed).
398 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Station Markers group, click the Show Stations icon. The Show
Station Marker Labels icon and the Station Maker List icon become
enabled.
2. Click the Station Maker List icon. The Station Maker List window opens.
By default, all stations (or groups) from the project are checked.
If required, use Clear Selection to hide all station markers at once.
If required, use Expand All (or Expand ) to expand all groups (or a
unique group) from the tree.
If required, use Collapse All (or Collapse ) to collapse all groups (or a
unique group) from the tree.
Select a unique station from the tree.
Or select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift) key
combined with the left clicking.
Uncheck the station(s) for which you want to hide the station marker(s).
Note: Hiding the station maker of a specific station also hides its label (if the
label has been previously displayed).
Note: The J and K shortcut keys, respectively for Show Station Makers and
Show Station Maker Labels, cannot be used with the Station Maker List
window open.
Exploring Data 399
Or
4. In the Registration mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s) from the
List window.
5. Right-click to display the pop-menu.
6. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station).
Or
7. In the Registration mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s) from the
List window.
8. In the Target-Based Registration group, click the Display/Hide Network
Visuals (Selected Station) icon.
Note: For the steps from 4 to 6 and 7 to 8, you cannot view the network visuals
if the station marker(s) of the station(s) is (or are) not displayed.
Exploring Data 401
Or
3. In the Registration mode, select the same lonely (or set of) station(s) from
the List window.
4. Right-click to display the pop-menu.
5. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station).
Or
6. In the Registration mode, select the same lonely (or a set of) station(s)
from the List window.
7. In the Target-Based Registration group, click the Display/Hide Network
Visuals (Selected Station) icon.
Note: (*) You cannot get the pop-up menu when selecting a set of stations.
402 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In the Production mode, both the station markers and the Network Visuals are
shown.
In the Registration mode, each station is shown by its station marker, its height
(if existed), the registration targets that are inside as well as their height (if
existed).
1. In the Registration processing mode, first display all the station markers.
2. In the 3D View, right-click on a station marker.
3. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations) from the pop-menu.
Or
4. In the Registration processing mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s)
from the List window.
5. Right-click to display the pop-menu.
6. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations).
Or
Note: For the steps from 4 to 6 and 7, you cannot view the network visuals if
the station markers of the stations are not displayed.
Or
3. In the Registration mode, select any single (or set of) station(s) from the
List window.
4. Right-click to display the pop-menu.
5. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations).
Or
TZF Scan
A TZF Scan is 2D Map Data, linked to a TZF format file which can come from a
TZS, Faro, and etc. format file conversion or from a Trimble TX 3D Scanner. In
the first case, there is only one TZF Scan per station. It is by default a Main
Scan. In the second case, a station can contain more than one TZF Scan and
each can be either a Full Scan* or an Area Scan, with a Mode (or Density)
(Preview, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3 or Extended).
In a set of scans, if there is a unique Full Scan, this Full Scan is by default the
Main Scan. If there are two Full Scans, the highest in Density is by default the
Main Scan. If these Full Scans are equal in Density, the last (acquired) is by
default the Main Scan.
Note:
(*) A Full Scan is a 360°x158° scan.
(**) The Spacing parameter is the distance between two consecutive laser
spots.
The Extended range density is a feature that comes with an option
upgrade of the Trimble TX8 3D Scanner.
With a Trimble TX8 instrument, when scanning with the Extended ability, two
scans, identical but with different in terms of range, will be acquired. The first
scan will be a short range scan (from 0 to 120m) while the second scan is a
long range one (from 120 to 340m). The time to acquire a short range scan is
shorter than the time to acquire the long range one. The two TZF format files
will be created under the RWI folder. Now, with RealWorks 10, the two TZF
format files will be now merged into a single TZF format.
Resize: Place the mouse cursor anywhere on the thumbnail frame. Stretch
(or shrink) the frame by dragging.
Change location: Place the mouse cursor over the Drag & Drop icon.
Drag and drop the thumbnail image to a suitable location in the 3D view.
Zoom: Click in the thumbnail image and zoom in or out using the mouse
wheel (if existed). The thumbnail, once zoomed in, can be moved in any
direction.
Tip: You can toggle the bulb from to or click on the Close button.
406 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
The Set as Main Scan feature remains dimmed when selecting a Main
Scan.
The icon of the selected TZF Scan changes from to .
A Target selected from the List window is highlighted in the TZF Scan (once
open) as shown below.
408 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Inspection Map
An inspection map results from the comparison between two surfaces
(cloud/cloud, cloud/mesh, mesh/mesh and cloud (or mesh)/primitive, etc.). An
inspection map may have three shapes: Plane, Cylinder and Tunnel; this
depends on the surfaces selected for comparing and the projection type
applied to that comparison. Each inspection map has two directions (Vertical
and Horizontal) shown by its own red-and-green-axis frame and a color bar
associated to it.
To view which shape has an inspection map, display its properties in the
Property window and check for the Projection Type (Planar for a plane, Tunnel
for a tunnel and Cylinder for a cylinder).
If the loaded project contained an inspection map, you can display it in the 3D
View or open it in an independent window.
You can zoom the map In or Out. If it is bigger than the window can show,
you can pan it in any direction.
You can manage the ColorBar that is associated to the map, created a
new one, etc. Refer to the ColorBars section for more information.
Click on the Cross button at the top right corner of the window.
410 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In the List window, toggle the bulb icon beside an inspection map to On
to display it in the 3D View.
In the List window, toggle the bulb icon beside an inspection map to Off
to hide it in the 3D View.
ColorBar
A ColorBar is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to a
range of elevation values. It is always linked to an inspection map (or 3D
inspection cloud). You can create, edit, delete, rearrange, import or export a
ColorBar inside a comparison (or inspection) tool like e.g. the Twin Surface
Inspection* or outside a tool after you have opened an inspection map**.
Note:
(*) This tool is not present in RealWorks (Base) and Advanced.
(**) Outside a comparison (or an inspection), only an inspection map can
be opened in an independent window. A 3D inspection cloud cannot.
Exploring Data 411
Hide/Show a ColorBar
You can hide the current ColorBar and display it again. Doing this will remove
the red-and-green-axis frame and the scale from the "Inspection Map's Name"
window.
To Hide/Show a ColorBar:
Edit a ColorBar
The Edit ColorBar feature lets you edit the default (or current) ColorBar,
delete (or export) a ColorBar other than the default one, to import an existing
ColorBar into the project or to have access to the Advanced Options for
creating a new ColorBar or editing an existing one.
To Edit a ColorBar:
The levels are then computed based on the input value, as illustrated
below.
The number of levels can be checked by clicking Edit in the Advanced
Options panel.
Tip: You can also display the properties of an inspection map in the Property
window and check the Regular Intervals value in the ColorBar line as illustrated
below.
Exploring Data 413
414 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Import a ColorBar
You can use any TXT editor (WordPad for example) to create a ColorBar file
and import it into your current project. This file should contain a series of RGB
(Red Green Blue) and interval value pairs. The ColorBar once imported will be
automatically applied to the opened (selected) inspection map (or 3D
inspection cloud).
To Import a ColorBar:
Tip: It is not necessary to check the Existing ColorBar option. You can directly
click Delete. This will by-default select the option and delete the current
ColorBar.
Tip: It is not necessary to check the Existing ColorBar option. You can drop-
down the Existing ColorBar list. This will select the option by default.
Advanced Options
The Advanced Options feature lets the user create a new ColorBar or edit a
ColorBar other than the default one by defining its intervals which can be
regular or by choosing a color for each level.
A new ColorBar is created with a default name (COLOR_BAR) (or with the
name of one that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).
The Interval values in the Step - 1 field belong to the default ColorBar (or
to one that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).
The color of each Level is the level color of the default ColorBar (or of one
that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).
418 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Option for only keeping positive values 4 - The name of the current ColorBar or of a
2 - Field for defining the intervals which can be ColorBar to come
regular or not 5 - Field for defining the color of a level
3 - The number of levels in the current ColorBar 6 - The pull down arrow
or in a ColorBar to come 7 - The color palette
1. In Step 1, delete all the values that are in the field, below the Positive
Values Only option.
2. Enter several values in the field.
3. Validate by pressing Enter.
The input values must be ranked from negative to positive, from lower to
higher.
Each value must be separated by a semicolon, a comma, etc.
The number of levels is then updated according to the input values.
All of the levels are also updated in Step 2.
Note: If two ColorBars share the same name; the second (according to the
order of creation) is renamed with an increment number between brackets.
Tip: To create a ColorBar based on an existing one; click the Existing ColorBar
pull-down arrow in the ColorBar Editing dialog and select one from the drop-
down list.
420 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Switch to Cut/Fill ColorBar feature lets the user display an inspection
map with only two levels of information. All negative parts (of an inspection
map) are rendered in blue and those that are positive are rendered in red.
You can come back to the default ColorBar rendering by clicking Switch to
Default ColorBar.
The Switch to Default ColorBar feature lets you display an inspection map,
with the default ColorBar which is the one that comes with the inspection map
after it has been created.
1. From the Project Tree, select a polyline for which the stations are
displayed.
2. Right-click on the polyline and select Display Alignment Stationing from
the pop-up menu.
Exploring Data 423
Render Data
A Rendering defines how an object is going to be displayed. For example, a
geometry can be displayed in Wireframe or shaded surface. We introduce the
different options available for different object representations. A rendering will
be applied to all objects of the same type displayed in the 3D View. This
means that you cannot specify different renderings for different displayed
objects of the same type. For example, you cannot display a Geometry Object
A in Wire-Frame, and the Geometry Object B in Surface.
All the options related to the rendering are gathered in two places, in the
Rendering group on the View tab and on the vertical toolbar.
424 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree and display it.
2. In the Rendering group, click the Cloud Rendering pull-down arrow.
3. Select a rendering from the drop-down sub-menu.
For point clouds, you can combine the Normal Shading rendering with any of
the renderings named above (except for Point Size and Discontinuity Display)
in order to have a relief (or depth) display. In (A), the White Color rendering is
applied to the point cloud in selection. The Normal Shading information is
added to the White Color rendering in (B) and to the True Color rendering in
(C). When such a combination is applied, you can use the Lighting Direction
tool to modify the light source position. Note that such a combination reduces
by half the time required to display points.
Exploring Data 425
Tip: You can use a set of shortcut keys to swap from a Rendering option to
another. All are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.
Note: You are able to customize the brightness and the contrast of points by
using the Cloud Rendering Settings feature.
426 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: For the steps from 3 to 6, you can also use the Distance Measurement
Along Vertical Axis feature.
12. Click the OK button. The Cloud Rendering Settings dialog closes.
Caution: This feature does not require any selection. It is applied to all objects,
mainly point clouds, displayed in the 3D View.
Note: The current active frame determines the elevation direction. If required,
use the USC tool to change the elevation direction.
Tip: You can apply the Gray-Scale Intensity With Color rendering to a point
cloud that is displayed with the Color Coded by Elevation rendering.
By default, the Contrast slider and the Brightness slider are both at
halfway.
The Blending (True Color) slider is at the right end (True Color).
All of the parameters, once adjusted, become persistent. They remain
unchanged until you reset them by clicking the Default button.
The Blending (True Color) pane is enabled only if the True Color rendering
has been chosen.
430 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the Ribbon, the Cloud Rendering Settings option can be reached from
the Rendering group.
If Cloud Color, Station Color, Scan Color and Color Coded Elevation has
been chosen, you need to apply the Gray-Scale Intensity With Color
rendering too.
If Gray-Scaled Intensity or Color Coded Intensity has been chosen, the
Gray-Scale Intensity With Color rendering is not required.
If True Color has been chosen, the adjustment will have any effect. You
have to fist blend the intensity and color information.
3. In the Cloud Rendering Settings dialog, move the Contrast (or Brightness)
slider.
4. Click OK. The Cloud Rendering Settings dialog closes.
Exploring Data 431
The point cloud is displayed with both the Intensity and Color information. You
can adjust the Contrast and Brightness parameters as described in the
previous topic.
432 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree and display it.
2. In the Rendering group, click the Intensity-Based Blending icon.
Or
Note:
(*) Except for 2D slices created within the Cutting Plane, Contouring,
Profile/Cross-Section.
(*) Except also for inspection clouds displayed with its inspected color
(Cloud Color rendering) and working cloud created with the Tank
Calibration.
436 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
No Shading
The No Shading option is the default setting. In this mode the points are
displayed without lighting effect.
Normal Shading
The Normal Shading rendering mode shades each displayed point by using its
normal information.
Exploring Data 437
Ambient Shading
The Ambient Shading rendering mode shows how exposed each point in a
scene is to the ambient lighting. This mode’s best use case is when neither
color nor normal information is available.
This mode shades each point relative to the amount of ambient lighting it
receives. This shading reveals the details. Since it applies on all datasets - it
doesn't require normal information or intensity or color - this is the
recommended mode for most situations, combined with your favorite color and
visibility options. Please note that some point clouds may look too dark when
the Intensity-Based Blending is on (press B to remove it or put it back, see the
Render Point Clouds With Gray-Scale Intensity With Color (on page 434)
section).
No Filtering
The No Filters option is the default setting. In this mode, all points are shown
without visibility filtering.
Exploring Data 439
Caution: The Hide Background rendering cannot be used within the Tank Grid
Definition sub-tool, of the Vertical Tank Inspection tool.
Caution: The Hide Background rendering cannot be used with the Hidden
lines rendering for geometry. Selecting the Hide Background rendering
disables automatically the Hidden Lines option.
Outline
The Outline rendering mode is ideal for Keyplan-like visualization, e.g., for
checking the registration on walls by hiding the points whose normal faces the
screen (towards or backwards).
The same scene, viewed from Top, with the Outline and Normal Shading
renderings applied.
Render Geometries
There are five renderings applicable to a geometry displayed in the 3D View.
The Wireframe option renders a selected geometry in wire-frame. The Hidden
Lines option renders a selected geometry in wire-frame with hidden lines
removed. The Solid option renders a selected geometry as a smooth shaded
surface. The Solid - Classification (see "Color Geometries Based on the
Classification Information" on page 444) option displays the objects, of
geometry type, displayed in the 3D View with the colors of the layers they
belong to. The Textured option renders a selected geometry as a texture
mapped surface if such a mapping exists.
To Render Geometries:
Caution: There are some objects for which the Solid - Classification rendering
has no effect when it is chosen like e.g. an Inspection Map, a Measurement, a
Frame, a Volume, a Polyline, etc.
The Smooth Meshes option displays the surface meshes with a smooth
rendering (one color per triangle with gradient effect).
Exploring Data 447
This feature can be used only when the 3D scene displayed is in the
Perspective projection mode. It can be combine with any point cloud rendering
options and point size display. In this case, point size sets the minimal point
size and increases the size factor to apply on nearest points.
Point cloud displayed with the "Enhanced Ambient Shading" and "Adaptive
Point Size"
450 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Filter Data
The Limit Box Mode lets you create small sections for evaluating the
registration results, drawing polylines or just getting a clearer view of a specific
area. This mode can be used outside or inside a tool. In both cases, it is purely
a visualization mode. In the last case (inside a tool), you have to keep in mind
that the working cloud is not the cloud inside the limit box but the cloud from
the selection (that is required to enter the mode). If you want the working cloud
to be the cloud inside the limit box, you can select the Box Selection (see "Set
the Cloud Inside the Limit Box as a Working Cloud" on page 328) from the
Segmentation tool.
Tip: In RealWorks Viewer, there is no menu entry nor shortcut (F4) for the
Limit Box Mode feature. If there is a limit box previously stored in the project,
you can load it. If there is no limit box, you can import one even from a non-
related project. A limit box, once loaded, can be edited, deleted and exported.
Once the project is closed, all limit boxes which have been modified within that
Viewer session will be lost (apart from the exported ones).
Exploring Data 451
1. In the Limit Box group, click the Limit Box Mode icon. The cursor becomes
as follows .
2. Or use the F4 shortcut key instead.
The Limit Box Mode toolbar opens as well as the Picking Parameters toolbar.
If an object has been selected (as input in this mode) and displayed in the 3D
View; the object remains selected with its bounding box.
1 - Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside 3 - Select Limit Box Center Position
the Limit Box 4 - Change Limit Box Center Position
2 - Show Limit Box 5 - Limit Boxes
To be able to leave the Limit Box Mode, you need to first define a position by
picking a point on the displayed objects (or select Close Center On Point from
the pop-up menu, or press Esc.) and then choose F4 or Limit Box Mode from
the Display menu.
The Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate icons become enabled as well as the
Sampling field, the Extract Points from TZF Scans and Close Tool icons.
The Show Limit Box and Modify Shape icons become enabled and
selected.
A limit box is displayed centered on the picked point which is set to the
center of the screen.
The manipulator which appears with the limit box depends on the feature
that has been last used, i.e., among Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate.
If an object has been selected (as input of the tool) and displayed in the
3D View; the object remains selected with its Bounding Box.
Note: (*) To leave the picking mode, you can select Close Center on Point
from the pop-up menu.
1. Click the Select Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to show
the following .
2. Pick a point on displayed clouds and/or geometries.
The limit box is then centered on the picked point which is set to the center
of the screen.
Note: To leave the picking mode, you can select Close Center on Point from
the pop-up menu.
1. Click the Change Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to
show the following .
2. Pick a point on displayed clouds and/or geometries.
1. Click the Modify Shape icon. A manipulator with six Face Handles
appears, one on each face of the limit box, and eight Corner Handles.
3. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box, uniformly in all directions.
Exploring Data 455
Tip: You can also select Modify Shape from the pop-up menu.
Pan in a plane.
Pan along a direction.
Tip: You can also select Pan from the pop-up menu or use its associated
shortcut key T.
Tip:
You can use the following keys (, , , , Page Up, Page Down) on
your numeric keypad to move the limit box.
You can combine the use of the above keys with the Ctrl key to speed up
the movement of the limit box.
Exploring Data 457
Pan in a Plane
To Pan the Limit Box in a Plane:
1. Pick a Plane Handle to select it. A larger yellow Plane Handle is displayed.
2. Drag the Plane Handle in any direction on the plane to move the limit box
in that direction.
3. Drop the Plane Handle.
Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu or use its related
shortcut key R.
460 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The limit box, with its manipulator (Size, Pan or Rotate), is displayed in the
3D View.
The Show Limit Box icon is highlighted in yellow.
The limit box, with the current manipulator, is removed from the 3D View.
The Show Limit Box icon becomes unselected.
Exploring Data 461
Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.
Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are displayed in the 3D
View.
The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon is
highlighted in yellow.
462 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.
Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are hidden in the 3D View.
The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon
becomes unselected.
Or
In the Limit Box window (if open), a limit box object with a default name (New
Limit Box) is then created.
Exploring Data 463
Tip: You can also right-click on a limit box and select Apply Limit Box from the
pop-up menu or double-click a limit box.
Tip: You can also right-click on a limit box and select Remove Limit Box from
the pop-up menu.
1. In the Limit Box window, click the Export icon. The Export a Limit Box File
dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where to store the file.
3. Input a name in the File Name field.
4. Click Save. The Export a Limit Box File dialog closes.
A file with the extension (.BOX) will be then created. This file will contain as
many limit boxes as the project contains.
Exploring Data 465
1. In the Limit Box window, click the Import icon. The Import a Limit Box File
dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.
3. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
4. Click Open. The Import a Limit Box File dialog closes.
466 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Navigate Data
In the last session, we mentioned that the visualization of objects in the 3D
View is like taking a photograph with a camera. A photograph is a static view of
the scene being visualized. If we can modify the camera position continuously,
we can obtain the so-called object animation effects. We call this the
navigation of the scene. Here, the modification of the camera position will be
executed interactively by the user. In RealWorks, there are mainly three
different ways for navigating through a 3D scene: Examiner, Walkthrough and
Station-Based.
All the features related to the navigation are gathered in a group named
'Navigation', in the Ribbon.
2D Mouse
When you launch RealWorks for the first time, the default assignment for the
left button is Rotate, while the middle button is dedicated for Pan. You are able
to change these assignments in the Preferences / Navigation dialog.
Exploring Data 467
3D Mouse
Before using a 3D mouse, you need to connect it to a USB port of your
computer and place it properly, ideally on the opposite side of the 2D mouse,
and with the printed logo of 3DConnexion facing you and the cable toward the
screen. You also need to download the latest software package from the
3DConnexion website (at www.3dconnexion.com/drivers) and install it. All of
these operations need to be done with the Trimble RealWorks program closed.
You can customize the settings of your 3D mouse in the Advanced Settings
panel, which can be accessed via the 3DConnexion Properties, or by clicking
on the left button of the 3D mouse and selecting Properties from the Radial
Menu. Please, refer to the 3DConnexion documentation for more information.
Caution: The 3D mouse can be used anywhere, except in the Image Matching
when the adjustment constraints are activated, in the Segmentation when a
fence is started and the projection mode is Perspective and in the Annotate in
Trimble Scan Explorer, once an annotation has been drawn.
Touchscreen
You can use some gestures instead of a mouse to navigate through a scene
when your screen has the touch-sensitive capabilities.
468 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
When you start the software for the first time after you install it, the Head
Always Up option is by default selected. You can deselect the option in the
Preferences / Navigation dialog, or uncheck the option from the 'Navigation'
group on e.g. the View tab, or press the U shortcut key.
In a pure navigation mode in the 3D View, the Head Always Up option can be
chosen in order to preserve the vertical orientation of the scene. In some
situations, mainly inside a tool, this option, even if it has been chosen, cannot
Examiner
The Examiner mode is the base mode of the software, that is, it is the default
navigation mode when you start the software. In this mode, you turn the
camera around an object. These operations are actually obtained by moving
the scene with a mouse. In the 3D View, the navigation can be:
Note: If the Head Always Up option has been checked in the Preferences
dialog, its representation is displayed at the bottom right corner of the 3D
View.
Note: In the Examiner mode, you can be in any projection mode (Perspective
or Parallel).
1. Press the left button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape
.
2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the left button pressed to
rotate in that direction and around the center of the screen*.
.
3. Drag the mouse to the opposite side of the 3D View.
Note: (*) You can change the center of rotation using the Center on Point
feature.
Note: (*) You can change the center of rotation using the Center of Rotation
Defined by Cursor Position feature.
Tip: Try to not pull or push down the controller cap as you tilt.
Exploring Data 473
1. Rotate the controller cap clockwise to spin the object around the
vertical axis of the screen (clockwise)
Tilt the controller cap Left / Right to roll the displayed objects
around the axis perpendicular to the screen.
Tip: Try tilting the controller cap on its X axis (forwards / backwards) without
moving it on its Z axis (Left / Right).
Tip: You can also use the Q shortcut key instead to activate / deactivate this
feature.
Exploring Data 475
9. Pick a point anywhere in the 3D View, with the 2D mouse. The position of
the picked point will be then the center of the rotation.
10. Keep the Left button of the 3D mouse pressed and rotate the controller
cap. The displayed scene rotates around the picked point.
Tip: You can also use the Q shortcut key instead to activate / deactivate this
feature.
3. Spin one finger around the position to rotate around that position.
Pan in a Direction
Pan is the action of moving a displayed object in a plan parallel to the 3D View.
You are able to pan in any direction or from one side to another, or up and
down.
To Pan in a Direction:
1. Press the middle button of the mouse. The mouse takes the following
shape .
2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the button pressed to pan in
that direction.
Exploring Data 477
Tip: Keep the controller cap from moving side-to-side or from tilting.
1. Push the controller cap to the Right to move the object to the
right.
2. Push the controller cap to the Left to move the object to the left
Tip: Keep the controller cap from moving up / down and front / back.
Note: When you zoom in (or out), the focus is done from the position of the
cursor, instead of from the center of the screen.
478 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The mouse takes the following
shape .
2. Drag the mouse forward while holding both pressed to Zoom In. The
"camera" moves backward, and the scene is reduced.
3. Drag the mouse backward while holding both pressed to Zoom Out. The
"camera" moves forward, and the scene is enlarged.
4. Or use the mouse wheel.
Zoom (Angle)
1. First press the Ctrl key and the left and middle buttons together. The
mouse takes the following shape .
2. Drag the mouse forward while holding both pressed to Zoom In. The
"camera" does not move. Its angle is enlarged, the scene is zoomed out.
3. Drag the mouse backward while holding both pressed to Zoom Out. The
"camera" does not move. Its angle is reduced, the scene is zoomed in.
4. Or press the Ctrl key and use the mouse wheel.
Tip: You can reverse the mouse for zooming in the Preferences dialog.
Zoom (Angle)
1. First press the Ctrl key and then push the controller cap to Zoom
Out. The mouse takes the following shape .
2. Keep the Ctrl key pressed and pull the controller cap to Zoom In.
The mouse takes the following shape .
Note: You can reverse the controller cap motion for Zoom In and Zoom Out in
the Advanced Settings.
Or
The illustration below shows where you need to place the cursor in the 3D
View to activate a temporary constraint. There are eight areas in the 3D View,
illustrated by the letters A, B and C.
Exploring Data 481
1. Place the cursor anywhere along the right (or left) side of the 3D View, (A
areas in the 3D View).
2. Click on the LEFT button of your mouse.
3. Move your mouse from up to down and in reverse to rotate a scene
constrained under the horizontal direction.
Note: When using a touchscreen, drag one finger up and down to rotate a
scene constrained under the horizontal direction.
Rotate Around the Vertical Direction Constraint
To Rotate Around the Vertical Direction Constraint:
1. Place the cursor anywhere along the top of the 3D View, (B areas in the
3D View).
2. Click on the LEFT button of your mouse.
3. Move your mouse from right to left and in reverse to rotate a scene
constrained under the vertical direction.
Note: When using a touchscreen, drag one finger left and right to rotate a
scene constrained under the vertical direction.
482 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: When using a touchscreen, drag two fingers left and right to pan a
scene constrained under the horizontal direction.
Pan Along the Vertical Direction Constraint
To Pan Along the Vertical Direction Constraint:
1. Place the cursor anywhere along the right (or left) side of the 3D View, (A
areas in the 3D View).
2. Click on the middle button of your mouse.
3. Move your mouse from top to bottom and in reverse to pan a scene
constrained under the vertical direction.
Note: When using a touchscreen, drag two fingers up and down to pan a
scene constrained under the vertical direction.
Exploring Data 483
1. Place the cursor anywhere at one of the four corners of the 3D View, (C
areas in the 3D View).
2. Click on the left button of your mouse and move it clockwise and
anticlockwise and in reverse to rotate a scene constrained under an axis
perpendicular to the screen.
But you can right-click on a constraint mode icon at the right side of the status
bar. This displays a pop-up menu from which you can select a type of
constraint.
Tip: You can use the Alt key to slow down all navigations in the 3D View, free
or permanent constraint.
Note: To get the Standard Navigation mode back, you can double-click on
the constraint mode icon at the right side of the status bar.
Exploring Data 485
Note: When using a touchscreen, drag two fingers right and left to pan
along a horizontal axis constraint.
486 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: When using a touchscreen, drag two fingers up and down to pan
along a horizontal axis constraint.
Rotate Around a Horizontal Axis Constraint
To Rotate Around a Horizontal Axis Constraint:
Caution: The Screen Rotation feature is grayed-out if the Head Up option has
been checked in the Preferences / Navigation dialog.
Walkthrough
In the Walkthrough mode, you use the mouse movement to simulate a walking
through of the displayed scene. You cannot apply a constraint of any kind
(either temporary or permanent) in this navigation mode.
Note: If the Head Always Up option has been checked in the Preferences
dialog, is displayed in the bottom right corner of the 3D View.
Tip: If the Parallel mode is the current projection mode, choosing Walkthrough
will automatically swap the projection mode to Perspective.
To Use a 2D Mouse:
1. Press the left button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape
.
2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the button pressed to spin the
camera in that direction.
To Use a 3D Mouse:
To Use Gestures:
To Use a 2D Mouse:
1. Press the middle button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following
shape .
2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the button pressed to move
the camera along that direction.
Or
3. Use the (or ) arrow key to move the camera along that direction.
4. Use the Page Up (or Page Down) key to move the camera up (or down)
along the Z axis.
To Move Up to Down:
1. Pull the controller cap to the Up to move the camera from you.
2. Push the controller cap to the Down to move the camera toward
you.
Tip: Keep the controller cap from moving side-to-side or from tilting.
1. Push the controller cap to the Right to move the camera to the
right.
2. Push the controller cap to the Left to move the camera to the
left
Tip: Keep the controller cap from moving up / down and front / back.
To Use Gestures:
To Use a 2D Mouse:
1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The cursor takes the following
shape .
2. Drag the mouse forward while holding both pressed to Walk Inside a
scene (objects).
3. Drag the mouse backward while holding both pressed to Walk Out of a
scene (or objects).
Or
Or
Tip: You can reverse the mouse for zoom in the Preferences dialog.
To Use a 3D Mouse:
Station-Based
In the Station-Based mode, a scene is viewed from the viewpoint of one of the
stations, i.e., the instrument location for this station, and you can jump from
one station to another (if there is more than one). The Head Always Up
preference and the Perspective projection mode are both set.
The navigating through a scene is restricted to Rotate, Zoom In and Zoom Out.
You cannot apply a constraint of any kind (either temporary or permanent).
Exploring Data 493
The scene is viewed from the first station viewpoint (the first in the Project
Tree) with overlapped images in the background (see the upper illustration).
You can use the AutoSpin feature in the Preferences to endlessly turn a scene
around the station position. You can display (or hide) the position of the other
stations as well as their label in the 3D View. For more information, refer to the
Display (or Hide) all Stations (on page 394) and Display (or Hide) all
Station Marker Labels (on page 396) sections.
To display the first (or last) station, click the Go to First Station (or Last
Station) button.
To display the next (previous) station, click the Go to Next (or Previous
Station) button.
Click the current station button and choose another station from the drop-
down list (1). The current station is grayed out and has a check mark at its
side.
Double-click on a station marker .
Tip: In the Scans Tree, if you select a station from the Project Tree, right-click
and select Station-Based Mode from the pop-up menu; the selected scene will
be viewed from the selected station viewpoint. If no station has been selected,
the scene will be viewed from the first station viewpoint.
494 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: (1) Empty stations are not displayed in the 3D View, and do not
appear in the drop-down list.
1. Press the left button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape
.
2. Drag the mouse in a Direction while holding the button pressed to rotate in
that Direction and around the viewpoint of the current station.
Note: You can reverse the controller cap motion for rotating in the Advanced
Settings.
1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The mouse takes the following
shape .
2. Drag the mouse Forward* while holding both pressed to Zoom In.
3. Drag the mouse Backward* while holding both pressed to Zoom Out.
4. Or use the mouse wheel.
Note: (*) You can reverse the mouse for Zoom In and Zoom Out in the
Preferences.
1. Push the controller cap to Zoom In. The mouse takes the following
shape .
2. Pull the controller cap to Zoom Out. The mouse takes the following
shape .
Note: You can reverse the controller cap motion for Zoom In and Zoom Out in
the Advanced Settings.
Display/Hide Images
To Display Images:
Or
If the current project has no images; the Select Image Type dialog is empty
and looks as illustrated below:
If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:
If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble S1X0
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:
The station contains several image types and the images have a shift:
The station contains several image types but no image has a shift:
The station has one image type and the images have a shift:
The station contains one image type and no image has a shift:
498 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The default value is 15 m. The value you can input ranges between 0.5 m and
1000 m. This value will be applied not only to the current station but to all
stations of the project. The value will be kept inside the current session (of
RealWorks), but not from one session to another.
To Edit a Distance:
Note: In the Perspective mode, you can use any of the displacement modes
(Walkthrough, or Examiner or Station-Based).
Exploring Data 499
Note: The scale at the left down corner of the 3D View is only available in
Parallel.
Note: In the Parallel mode, you can only use the Examiner mode. If you
choose Parallel, the displacement mode will automatically swap to Examiner.
500 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Hover the mouse cursor over an area of interest on the displayed cloud.
2. Press and hold the N key. With the N key held pressed:
The 3D View shows you the area around the mouse cursor location. The
default size of the clipping box is 1 cubic meter. It can be changed in the
Preferences / Navigation.
If the Auto-Center option is activated, the cropped area is set at the center
of the screen, else it is not moved (i.e. it stays under the mouse cursor).
The Auto-Center option can be activated / deactivated in the Preferences /
Navigation.
If the current navigation mode is Station-Based (or WalkThrought), it
swaps automatically to Examiner.
If the current projection mode is Perspective, it swaps automatically to
Parallel.
If the current point size is less than 3, it is automatically set to 3, and is not
modified else.
3. Press the + key to widen the size of the clipping box by 10%.
4. Press the - key to reduce the size of the clipping box by 10%.
Note: The + and - keys are not changing the value of the box size in the
Preferences, these changes are applied only while the N key is pressed down
5. Press the * key to restore the size of the box as defined in the
Preferences.
6. Release the N key:
Note: This mode deactivates itself, if you can change the navigation mode. It
does not deactivate If you change the projection mode, and the canonical
views, and when you rotate, pan and zoom.
Note: This mode deactivates itself when you access the majority of tools,
except with the Measure and Segmentation tools.
Exploring Data 501
Tip: The magnifier mode enables you to quickly visualize a cross section view.
In particular, it is a powerful way to visually check the registration quality on
specific details.
502 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Front Looking parallel to + Y-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + X-axis left to right
Back Looking parallel to - Y-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + X-axis right to left
Left Looking parallel to + X-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + Y-axis right to left
Right Looking parallel to - X-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + Y-axis left to right
Exploring Data 503
Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on displayed objects)
and select Standard Views from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down
from which you can select a view.
Tip: You can use shortcut keys to swap from a Standard View to another. All
are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.
504 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the right button of your 3D mouse. The Radial Menu appears.
2. Choose among Front View, Top View and Right View from the Radial
Menu, with the 2D mouse.
Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on displayed objects)
and select Standard Views from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down
from which you can select a view.
506 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Zoom on Data
At any time while you navigate in the 3D View and in any navigation mode
(Examiner, Walkthrough or Station-Based), you can re-align your view frustum
by using the following functions: Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom on Selection,
Zoom Extents, Center on Point and Go to Shooting Position.
All the options related to the zooming features are gathered in a group named
'Zoom', in the View tab.
Zoom In.
Or Zoom Out.
Note: Before drawing a fence, pressing Esc will leave the Zoom In or Zoom
Out tool.
Tip: You can use the mouse buttons Left + Right to zoom in and out.
Exploring Data 507
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents feature enables to fit the whole displayed scene into the 3D
View (except in the Station-Based mode, where the field of view is limited).
Tip:
You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed
object) and select View Alignment from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu
drops down. Select then Zoom Extents.
You can use the short-cut key Home instead of selecting the Zoom
Extents command.
1. Click the right button of your 3D mouse. The Radial Menu appears.
2. Choose Fit from the Radial Menu, with the 2D mouse.
508 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Zoom on Selection
The Zoom on Selection feature enables to fit an object (or a set of objects) in
selection into the 3D View.
To Zoom on Selection:
Tip: You can right-click on an object (cloud or geometry) in the 3D View and
select Zoom On Selection from the pop-up menu and
Center on Point
The Center on Point feature enables to locate a center of rotation onto a
selected point (in the Examiner mode) or to merely view towards this point (in
the Station-Based or Walkthrough mode).
To Center on Point:
1. In the Zoom group, click the Center on Point icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears and the cursor becomes as follows .
2. Pick a point on the displayed objects.
Note: Before picking a point, press Esc will leave the Center on Point tool.
The selection and the picking are two mechanisms you guys need to
understand before you can effectively use RealWorks because both are linked
and the description of each is detailed hereafter.
511
Select Data
Selection is a very important concept. All commands and tools in RealWorks
will be applied only to the selected project/objects. It is thus clear that before
evoking a command and tool, you should first of all select the objects that you
want to operate on. It is also important to note that according to the nature of
the selected objects; only the applicable commands and tools will be available
(whether from the menus, the toolbars or the pop-up menu). In other words,
the applicability of tools and commands is context-sensitive.
WorkSpace Window
A selection in the WorkSpace window is done by picking an object by left
clicking it. It is important to note that you can only make a single selection here.
If you wish to perform a multi-selection, you need to do it in the List panel.
Models Tree
Selecting a project node will display its contents (Project Cloud, objects, and/or
group of objects) in the List panel. Selecting a group node will display its
contents (objects and/or groups of objects) in the List panel.
Scans Tree
Selecting a project node will display its contents (stations, group of stations,
scans, or images) in the List panel. Selecting a station node will display its
contents (scans, targets or images) in the List panel.
Images Tree
Selecting a project node will display its contents (images or group of images) in
the List panel. Selecting an image group node will display its contents (images
or group(s) of images) in the List panel.
512 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Targets Tree
Selecting an unmatched group node will display all unmatched targets in the
List panel. Selecting a matched group node will display all matched targets in
the List panel.
List Panel
A selection in the List panel consists of picking an object by left-clicking it. The
selected object will be highlighted in this window and also in the 3D View and
will be put in the Selection List window (if opened). To make a multiple-
selection, you can either combine the Shift key with left-clicking or Ctrl with left-
clicking. To select all objects in this window, you should use the following
combination Ctrl + A.
Selecting and Picking Data 513
3D View Window
In the 3D View, a selection consists of picking an object by left-clicking it (see
the Picking Mechanism (see "Pick Data" on page 516) section). The selected
object will be highlighted by its bounding box in this window and also in the List
window and will be put in the Selection List window (if opened).
If you wish to perform a multiple-selection, you can first press the Ctrl key and
then pick one-by-one each object or use one of the following methods:
Rectangular Selection (on page 514), Polygonal Selection (on page 514) or
Lasso Selection (on page 515). The method you chose is persistent; it remains
unchanged until you expressly ask to change. By using one of the three
methods, the selection in progress is always added to the previous one.
Tip: To select all displayed objects in this window, you should use the following
combination Ctrl + A.
Note: You can change the bounding box’s color in the Preferences dialog.
514 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Rectangular Selection
To Select With a Rectangular Fence:
If the rectangular fence, in dash, has been drawn from Left to Right, only
the objects whose bounding box is completely included in the rectangular
fence is selected.
If the rectangular fence, in dash, has been drawn from Right to Left, all the
objects which intersect the rectangular fence are selected.
Polygonal Selection
To Select With a Polygonal Fence:
All the objects which intersect the polygonal fence, in dash, are selected.
Lasso Selection
To Select With a Lasso Fence:
All the objects which intersect the lasso, in dash, are selected.
Clear a Selection
All selections done in the List window and in the 3D View will reside in the
Selection List window until you decide to clear them. To do so, use the Clear
Selection button in the Selection List window.
516 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Pick Data
As mentioned in the previous section, a picking is the action of selecting an
object displayed in the 3D View. This action can be more or less accurate. A
picking enables also the get the 3D position of a point in the 3D View. In that
case, the action should be accurate. The Picking Parameters is here to help
you to get this accuracy.
Note: (*) This tool is not present in Trimble RealWorks (Base) and Advanced.
Note: (*) In the X, Y Z Coordinate System or North, East and Elevation in the
North, East, Elevation Coordinate System.
Selecting and Picking Data 517
Note: The unit of measurement is set by default to Meters; you do not have to
enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (see Preferences).
Caution: No shortcut is available when you are in the North, East, Elevation
Coordinate System.
518 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3. Pick one point on the displayed object. Picking is locked in the X and Y
coordinates.
2. Go to the 3D View and pick one point. Picking is locked in that position.
Lock on Primitive
To Lock on a Primitive Center:
Note:
(*) The unit of measurement for H (or V) in Cartesian is set by-default in
Millimeter. You can change it in Preferences \ Units.
(**) The unit of measurement for the Angle (or Distance) in Polar is set by-
default in Degree (or Meter). You can change it in Preferences \ Units.
520 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: Instead of clicking on the H and V buttons; you can also use its related
shortcuts key H and V.
Tip: Instead of clicking on the Angle (or Distance) button; you can also use its
related shortcut keys Shift + A (or D).
Selecting and Picking Data 521
Tip: To avoid you from losing the Top view of the scene, we advise you to lock
the scene in the Screen Rotation position. By this way, when you
manipulate the scene and the Top view is always kept.
Tip: You can define another Z axis direction by using the USC tool.
Selecting and Picking Data 523
4. Drop-down the second pull-down arrow and choose the numbers of pixels
from the list. The number of pixels ranges from 5 Pixels to 20 Pixels.
5. Hover the cursor over a point.
Tip: To avoid you from losing the Top view of the scene, we advise you to lock
the scene in the Screen Rotation position. By this way, when you
manipulate the scene and the Top view is always kept.
Selecting and Picking Data 525
A Face of Curb Point is the most external (i.e. closest to the road) and highest
point on the sidewalk. It always corresponds to a real (acquired) 3D point in the
point cloud.
A Gutter Point, located on the road, is the closest point to the Face of Curb
point. In the case of occlusions, the Gutter point corresponds to a synthetic
(computed) point just below the Face of Curb point.
Vertical Curb:
526 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Inclined Curb:
Occluded Curb:
Limitations:
You are intended to work in a view in which both the sidewalk and the
road are visible. Ideally a view near to the Top View is the most natural for
this use case.
The algorithm is designed to extract real-world curbs and gutters with
heights between 1~2 cm and 20 cm.
If the curbs and gutters are occluded or contain too few points, the
snapping may fail.
Since the algorithm works locally, objects looking like curbs, e.g. stairs,
beams and low walls, might be detected by the algorithm.
Vegetation and noise near to curbs may produce false detection.
1. If required, bring the view to Top. In the view, both the sidewalk and the
road are visible.
2. In the Picking Parameters toolbar, drop-down the pull-down arrow and
choose Face of Curb Point from the list.
3. Pick a series of points by following the contour of the sidewalk. Each point
can be picked roughly around the Face of Curb Point, and internal
algorithm will compute a point on the closest curb.
528 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Selecting and Picking Data 529
1. If required, bring the view to Top. In the view, both the sidewalk and the
road are visible.
2. In the Picking Parameters toolbar, drop-down the pull-down arrow and
choose Gutter Point from the list.
3. Pick a series of points by following the contour of the sidewalk. Each point
can be picked roughly around the Gutter Point, and internal algorithm will
compute a point on the closest gutter.
530 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the picking is close enough to a corner, then the picking will fit on the
corner,
Selecting and Picking Data 531
Otherwise the picking result will be a point on the edge (most often
orthogonal projection on the edge).
Note: The resulting point is not necessary a point of the selected point cloud
but a computed point
CHAPTER 8
Load Data
We distinguish two types of data: data loaded on disk and data loaded in RAM.
The way the user is able to load (or unload) points in RAM can be done
through a field in the status bar. At any time, the user can enter a value
between 1 and 2000 (in Millions of Points) in the field and press Enter.
536 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Process Data
Some tools can work on disk, i.e., on the full data, independently of what is
loaded in the RAM (see [A]). Others work directly on the data loaded in the
RAM (see [B]).
In [A], the number of points used by the Scan- In [B], the number of points used by the
Based Sampling is equal to the whole data set. Intensity-Based Sampling is equal to what is
loaded in the RAM.
Here is a list of tools for which the need is to work on the full data, i.e., on disk.
In all the other tools, the deliverable will be produced with what is loaded in
RAM.
You can define the amount of points to use with a tool. A dialog appears in the
case the loading of requested points is not yet complete. You are then
prompted between waiting until the loading is complete and computing now the
amount of already loaded points.
Note: If you decide to compute now, your setting will be changed to the current
load.
538 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Display Points in HD
The HD Display is a new rendering motor in which is implemented a camera-based dynamic
display loading. It enables to dissociate the loading of points from its display. By this way, you
are able to display more points than what you load.
Managing the Loading and HD Rendering of Points 539
In the picture below, the HD Display has not been chosen. The display will be
limited to the loading value as long as you are in the tool.
If you activate the HD Display mode by clicking the HD button, you may have
some HD feedback to see more details. This is useful for picking a precise
point, visually checking, identifying an area of interest, etc.
540 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: The new display technology used a VRAM memory. You can define the
maximum VRAM and the cache RAM you want to allocate to this session in
Preferences / HD Display.
The behavior of the HD Display mode depends on the type of tool you are
using.
Manage Layers
You can manage the classification layers that are within your project, by
creating some new ones, deleting those you do not want anymore, changing its
properties, etc. A classification layer is defined by an ID, a name, a color, and
an activation state.
To Manage Layers:
1. Click the Add New Classification Layer icon. The Create New
Classification Layer dialog opens.
2. Enter a name in the Name field.
3. Drop-down the Color pull-down arrow.
4. Choose a color from the color palette.
Or
Caution: There is no restriction about the number you can input in the ID field.
You can of course exceed 255. But be aware in case this situation occurs,
some information may be lost when exporting to the LAS format because you
are out of the LAS classification range. It is under the user's responsibility to
maintain the layer IDs inside the LAS domain if he intends to export later on.
Working with Classification Layers 545
If there are some clouds associated to the selected layer, all the clouds
will be moved to the "Unclassified" layer and the selected layer removed
from the project.
If there is no cloud associated to the selected layer, only the selected layer
will be removed from the project.
4. Or click No to abort.
Tip: You can also use the DEL. key on your keyboard instead.
Edit a Layer
You can edit a classification layer by changing its properties, except for the
Layer 0.
To Edit a Layer:
Rename a Layer
You can rename any layer except those with the LAS IDs 0 and 1, and those
ranging from 19 and 63.
Or
Or
Advanced View mode: All classification layers are listed by alphabetical order,
except the two first ones, "Created, Never Classified" and "Unclassified" with
respectively the LAS ID "0" and "1". You can sort the classification layers by
clicking on the title of each column:
Name: Order the classification layers, except the LAS IDs 0 and 1 ones, from A
to Z or from Z to A.
Color: Gather all the colored (or uncolored) classification layers together.
LAS ID: Order the classification layers by increasing (or decreasing) order.
Active: Gather all the active (or inactive) classification layers together.
548 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the Classification Layers window, you are able to browse from the first
layer to the last layer by using the and keys on your keyboard or select
them all by using the Ctrl + A shortcut keys.
Tip: You are able to select and display the contents of several classification
layers.
Working with Classification Layers 549
Tip: You can select several layers by using the Shift (or Ctrl) key and display
(or hide) all the contents at once.
Note: The objects, once displayed, are not necessarily centered in the center
of the 3D View. We advise you to use the Zoom Extents feature to center
them.
Or
Or
Or
Or
Hide Others
If there are several objects, belonging to different layers, that are displayed in
the 3D View, you can select a layer and only keep the objects of the layer
displayed and hide the rest by selecting Hide Other Classification Layers .
552 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select an object (or several objects) having a layer from the Models Tree.
This object can be of any type, except a project.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
3. Select Change Classification Layer from the drop-down menu. The
Change Classification Layer dialog opens.
4. Click on the Select New Classification pull-down arrow.
5. Choose a layer from the drop-down list.
Working with Classification Layers 553
1. Select an object having a layer from the Models Tree. This object can be
of any type, except a project and a group.
2. Display the properties of the selected object.
3. Click on the Classification Layer line in the Property window.
4. Click on the pull-down arrow.
5. Choose a layer from the drop-down list.
554 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Basic Tools
Tools in RealWorks can be classified into two categories: basic tools and high-
level tools. The basic tools can be used alone or be open inside a high-level
tool to perform basic operations in the two following processing modes,
Registration* and OfficeSurvey/Modeling** (or Production), i.e., preparing data
for high-level tools. In such cases, you cannot save the result. In general, the
basic tools are represented by toolbars containing the operations arranged as
icons or dialogs.
Note: (*) In the Registration, only the Measurement tool, Limit Box Extraction
tool, Shift Project, Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans and Generate Key Plan
from Current View are available.
Note: (**) The Modeling processing mode is not present in RealWorks (Base)
and Advanced.
557
Measure Distances
This tool allows you to make point-to-point distance measurements, angular
measurements, point-to-scanning position measurements, orientation
measurements, etc. You can try as many measurements as you wish and for
those you need later on, you can create them as persistent objects in the
database. The created measurement objects will be put under the current
active group. Measurements are based on pickings which can be free (or
constrained).
558 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If you use the tool in the 3D View, the toolbar looks as shown below:
Note: Each type of measurement can be activated via its corresponding icon in
the Measurement toolbar or by selecting its related command from the pop-up
menu.
Basic Tools 559
Note: In the Ribbon, the Measure icon can be reached from the Cloud group,
on the Edit tab.
Measure a Distance
To perform a distance measurement, choose the appropriate type of
measurement by clicking on the associated icon. In each case, you should pick
two points except for the Vertical Clearance Measurement (Upward) (or
Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward)) where just one point is required.
560 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Measure a Distance
To Measure a Distance:
Once the second point is picked, the distance measurement and its projections
along the X, Y and Z axes are displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the
information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start
a new measurement; this information box updates automatically the
information inside.
Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
Basic Tools 561
The 3D scene is locked in 2D in the current viewing direction, with the 2D Grid
in superimposition (if not previously hidden).
3. Navigate in the 2D View and pick another point to assign the second
measurement point.
Once the second point is picked, the distance measurement is displayed in the
3D View. The 2D Grid (if displayed when picking the first point), disappears,
and the 3D scene is free from the 2D lock. At the same time, the information
box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new
measurement; this information box updates automatically the information
inside.
Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
562 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3. Navigate in the 3D View and pick another point on the selected object to
assign the second measurement point (B).
The measurement is performed between point (A) and the projection of point
(B) in the XY plane. The result and its projections along the X, Y and Z axes
are displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will display
the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement; this
information box updates the information inside automatically.
Length: Distance from point (A) to the projection of point (B) in the XY plane
Delta X: Delta distance between the two points along the X axis
Delta Y: Delta distance between the two points along the Y axis
Basic Tools 563
Delta Z: Delta distance between the two points along the Z axis
Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
564 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3. Navigate in the 3D View and pick another point on the selected object to
assign the second measurement point (B).
The measurement is performed between point (A) and the projection of point
(B) along the Z axis. The result is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time,
the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you
start a new measurement; this information box updates the information inside
automatically.
Length: Distance from point (A) to the projection of point (B) along the Z axis
Delta X: Delta distance between the two points along the X axis
Basic Tools 565
Delta Y: Delta distance between the two points along the Y axis
Delta Z: Delta distance between the two points along the Z axis
Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
566 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The distance measurement is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the
information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start
a new measurement; this information box updates the information inside
automatically.
Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
The distance measurement is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the
information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start
a new measurement; this information box updates the information inside
automatically.
Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
4. Pick a new point not necessary on the displayed object. A fitted circular
plane appears.
Basic Tools 569
Note:
The fitted (circular) plane will not to be created in the RealWorks database
once the measurement has been validated.
The 'Point-to-Fitted Plane' Distance Measurement feature is not present in
the toolbar when using the Measure tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-Based
Registration tool.
The set of points in the neighborhood of the first picked point is fitted with a
cylinder and its diameter is measured and displayed.
Basic Tools 571
Note: The fitted cylinder will not be created in the RealWorks database once
the measurement has been validated.
You can pick as many points as required. Each time a new point is added, the
measurement is updated in the 3D View and in the information box.
Tip: You can also select End Measurement Definition from the pop-up menu
instead of double-clicking.
Note: You can delete any node, regardless of its position along the
measurement, but two nodes must remain at the end.
Note: To cancel the current measurement, press Esc. or start picking new
points.
574 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Angular Measurements
To perform an angular measurement, choose the appropriate type of
measurement by clicking on the associated icon.
Basic Tools 575
Measure an Angle
To Measure an Angle:
Once the third point is picked, the angular measurement will be displayed in
the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will display the
measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement this
information box will update automatically the information inside.
3. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [B]. This point will form
with the first point the first segment of the angle.
4. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [C]. This point will form
with the first point the second segment of the angle.
Basic Tools 577
The angular measurement will not be performed between the vertex [A] and
points [B] and [C] but between the vertex [A] and the projections of point [B]
and point [C] in the XY plane. The result is displayed in the 3D View. At the
same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text.
Each time you start a new measurement; this information box updates the
information inside automatically.
3. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [B]. This point will form
with the first point the first segment of the angle to measure.
The angular measurement will be performed between the vertex [A], the point
[B] and the projection of point [B] in the XY plane. The result is displayed in the
3D View. At the same time, the information box will display the measurement
result in text. Each time you start a new measurement; this information box
updates the information inside automatically.
The angular measurement will be performed between the two axes of the
picked geometries. The result is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time,
the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you
start a new measurement; this information box updates automatically the
information inside.
Note: A warning message appears if the axes (of the geometries) are not
secant.
Basic Tools 581
Point Measurement
To perform a point measurement, there is only one method.
Measure a 3D Point
For a point-to-scanning position measurement, you need just one point.
To Measure a 3D Point:
Note: Press Esc (or select another type) to undo the measurement.
Tip: You can remove a measured point’s label by first selecting Rendering,
then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.
Orientation Measurements
To perform an orientation measurement, choose the appropriate type of
measurement by clicking on the associated icon.
582 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Measure an Orientation
This method lets you know the orientation of a given point on a sloping surface.
An orientation is expressed in the form of two angles. The measurement is as
follows. A plane (of circular shape) is extracted from the point. Two angles are
then calculated. The first angle called Elevation is formed by the extracted
plane and the YX plane of the active coordinate frame. The second angle
called North is formed by the extracted plane and the ZX plane of the active
coordinate frame.
To Measure an Orientation:
Once the second point is picked, the orientation measurement result will be
shown in the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will display the
measurement results in text. Each time you start a new measurement this
information box will update automatically the information inside.
Tip: Press Esc. (or select another type) to undo the measurement.
Note:
Because a measurement is based on point pickings, you cannot perform
an orientation measurement on an object of geometry type.
You can reverse the orientation of a measurement. To do this, right-click
anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Reverse
Orientation Measurement.
Note: The Orientation Measurement feature is not present in the toolbar when
using the Measure tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-Based Registration tool.
After picking the two first points, a temporary plane (of triangular shape) is
displayed. As long as you move the cursor over a point of the displayed object,
the temporary plane shape changes.
Once the third point is picked, the orientation measurement result will be
shown in the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will display the
measurement results in text. Each time you start a new measurement this
information box will update automatically the information inside.
Basic Tools 585
Tip: Press Esc. (or select another method) to undo the measurement.
Note:
You can perform an orientation measurement on an object of geometry
type.
You can reverse the orientation of a measurement. To do this, right-click
anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Reverse
Orientation Measurement.
Refine a Measurement
You can refine the measurement you have just performed by modifying the
picked points except for the point-to-scanning position measurement. For the
orientation measurement, you can enlarge/reduce the sphere diameter (or
move its center). For the point-to-point distance measurement, you can move
each end in order to extend (or shorten) its length. For the angular
measurement, you can move each of the ends to change its angle, etc.
To Refine a Measurement:
Tip: Before starting a measurement, press Esc (or click Close Tool in the
toolbar) to close the Measure tool. When a measurement is in progress, press
Esc to cancel it and start a new one.
Basic Tools 587
Save a Measurement
You can save the measurement you have just performed as a persistent object
in the RealWorks database. For each saved measurement, a geometric object,
with the "Unclassified" layer, is created and put under the active group in the
Models Tree. You can save as many measurements as you need without
leaving this tool. You can also export a measurement result as a report in
Excel format (*.CSV files).
To Save a Measurement:
Tip:
Press Esc (or select Close Tool from the pop-up menu) to leave the tool.
Press Enter (or select Create from the pop-up menu) to save the result.
Note: You should first close the Measure tool to be able to export a result in
the Excel file format. Otherwise, the Exportation Measurements command is
dimmed.
Caution: In the Registration mode, you are not able to save a measurement.
The Create icon is always grayed-out.
For the Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans feature, the option to render the
computed Key Plan is based on the Elevation information. The Elevation value
is calculated for each point based on its distance to the Projection Plane.
Points that are far away from the Projection Plane are rendered Red. Those
that are closer are rendered Blue.
Basic Tools 589
For the Generate Key Plan From Current View feature, the option to render the
computed Key Plan is not based on the Elevation information but on the Cloud
Rendering options (White Color, Cloud Color, Station Color, Scan Color, Gray
Scaled Intensity, Color Coded Intensity, Color Coded Elevation and True
Color). Points are rendered according to the chosen option.
From the 9.1 version of the software, a Key Plan has two new attributes which
can be viewed when displaying its properties. These attributes are the
Elevation Max and the Elevation Min of the data (point cloud) along the Z-Axis
of the current frame. When a Key Plan has been created with an earlier version
of RealWorks, i.e. before 9.1, these attributes are not available. But when you
load the Key Plan in RealWorks 9.1, they are automatically computed.
The attributes mentioned above are editable manually in the Property window.
This can be useful in case of a Key Plan with several floors because you are
able to filter the positions of the stations to keep only those belonging to one
level. The attributes of a Key Plan belong to the Key Plan, so that each is
editable individually, and the result is visible directly in Trimble Scan Explorer
(if the Filter Station Markers by Elevation Range option has been checked).
These attributes, once changed and saved, become persistent. This means
that you are not able to restore them to the default values.
Note:
(*) You should save your RealWorks project to be able to load the newly
computed Key Plan in Trimble Scan Explorer.
A file with the RWV extension is created per Ortho-Image. All RWV format
files are put under the RWI folder.
Tip: All Key Plans are created in the root of the Images Tree and have the
same name: Key Plan. Only its order indicated between brackets allows
differentiating one Key Plan from another Key Plan. To make this distinction
clearer and more obvious, we advise you to manually rename all Key Plans (in
the Name line of the Property window).
Basic Tools 591
Tip: You can export an Ortho-image from a Key Plan or the Key Plan itself
toward Trimble SketchUp. For more information, refer to the Export an Entity to
SketchUp (see "Send an Entity to SketchUp" on page 1586) topic.
Note:
When selecting a project with some TZF format files inside, it is not
necessary to be within a specific processing mode.
The Generate Key Plan From TZF Scans feature is dimmed when there is
no TZF scan in the project.
You can be in Parallel or Perspective as projection mode.
Note: (1) All TZF Scans (of the project) are used for computing Key Plan. (2) All
TZF Scans (of the station) are used for computing Key Plan. (3) Only that TZF
Scan is used for computing Key Plan.
Note: In the Ribbon, you can reach the Generate Key Plan From TZF Scans
feature from the Key Plan list, in the Scan Explorer group, on the Home tab.
592 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: You need to display only clouds from a single project. Otherwise an
error message appears.
If you are in the Perspective projection mode, a warning dialog opens and
warns you that the project mode has to be changed to Parallel to be able to
process to the Key Plan generation.
If you choose No, the process is then aborted. If you choose Yes, the
projection mode changes then during the operation and takes back its state
once finished.
Note: In the Ribbon, you can reach the Generate Key Plan From Current View
feature from the Key Plan list, in the Scan Explorer group, on the Home tab.
CHAPTER 11
When you load a file (of the following formats (SIMA and TXT with
Topopoints)) that was never saved in the RealWorks format; the Registration
processing mode is set by default. When you load a file, saved in the
RealWorks format and in the Registration processing mode, that file will be
opened with that processing mode.
When you are out of this processing mode and you need to use it, you have to
choose Registration from the Quick Access Toolbar, in the Ribbon:
You may meet the following message “The Survey Configuration load state will
be kept in the Registration configuration. Do you want to save the previous
Registration configuration load state?”.
The Registration module includes a broad range of tools. Some are basic tools,
like e.g. the Auto-Extract Targets and Target Analyzer features. By using them,
you can quickly register a project and analyze the results. Some are advanced
tools, like e.g. the Auto-Register Using Planes, Refine Registration using
Scans, etc. feature. By using them, you can register the scan data quickly and
automatically without having to place targets, and refine the registration.
Note: Tools are grouped according to their functionality, no matter the layout
chosen by the user.
595
Warning: Make sure the amount of memory (RAM) is enough when you
launch the Auto-Register Using Planes feature on a huge dataset. You need
about 90 Mb per TZF Scan.
596 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
You can select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift)
key combined with the left clicking. No preview is displayed.
Check all of the stations you need for your registration and uncheck those
are not necessary.
Note:
(1)
With at least two stations inside a group. Otherwise, if there is only a
unique station in a group, the tool is grayed-out.
(2)
With several stations, a unique group or a set of groups. Otherwise, if
the project has only a unique station within, the tool is grayed-out.
If the input does not contain at least two valid stations (with TZF Scan within), a
warning dialog is displayed and the Auto-Extract Targets tool is not launched
anymore.
Tip: If stations are gathered into a group, start by auto-registering first the
stations within the group together. Then once the stations within the group(s)
have been registered, auto-register all groups together.
598 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: If there is no TZF format file in one of the selected stations, the station is
automatically removed from the auto-registration process.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Auto-Register Using Planes feature can be reached
from the Scan-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
Reference Station
The Reference Station is the one whose position and orientation remain
unchanged through the Auto-Register Using Planes process. If a project (or a
set of stations) has been selected as input, the first station from the set of
stations (or from the project) is the default Reference Station. If a leveled
station has been chosen as input, this station is by default Reference Station.
If a project has been selected as input, all stations (of the project) are in
the Selection List.
If a set of stations has been selected as input, only the selected stations
(of the set) are in the Selection List.
Note: If a set of stations has been selected as input, the first selected station is
by default the Reference Station. The order (or selection) is preserved.
Tip: RealWorks can differentiate a station from a group (of stations). A group is
flagged as "(Group)" in the Auto-Register Using Planes dialog.
Tools in the Registration Module 599
Register Stations
To Register Stations:
Or
Stations that cannot be registered with the others are put under a folder named
"Non-Registered Stations".
600 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Group with registered stations among which 2 - Group with stations for the registration with
one of them is a Reference Station the Reference Station failed
3 - Group containing all stations that cannot be
registered with others
And/or
If the Generate a Preview Scan option has been checked, the Registration
Report dialog remains open. Sampled scans are then created. Again in
the Registration Report dialog, click OK. The Registration Report dialog
closes.
A - Common parts of the clouds are not yet B - Common parts of the clouds are
superimposed superimposed
Note: (*) The user can abort the registration (of stations) in progress by
clicking Esc. A dialog opens and prompts you to abort or not.
Note: Stations with several TZF Scans within, for which the registration with
the Reference Station fails, are put all together under the "Non-Registered
Stations" folder.
Tools in the Registration Module 601
Registration Report
The Registration Report dialog lists for each station (of the selection) the
following information:
How many station(s) each of them is registered with and the name of
each.
The deviation in a pair registered stations in the current unit of
measurement.
1 - Common points from Station_A to Station_B 2 - Common points from Station_B to Station_A
Note: An Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed
at the bottom left corner of the Registration Report dialog. This Overall Cloud-
to-Cloud Error allows weighting of each station error with respect to their
overlap percentage.
A new column, named Confidence, has been added in the Registration Report
dialog. This Confidence, applied to a pair of stations, is expressed in
percentage. It is the ratio between Coincident Points and Occlusion, in terms of
distance.
All Confidence rates, below 90%, have a red warning beside them. This
does not mean that the results are wrong. It is an indication that the results
should be analyzed more closely.
Tools in the Registration Module 603
1. In the Registration Report dialog, enter a name for the report file in the File
Name field.
2. Find a location where you want the report file to be stored.
3. Click Save. The Registration Report dialog closes.
Note: An Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed
at the beginning of the file, just before the list of stations. This Overall Cloud-to-
Cloud Error enables to weight each station error with respect to their overlap
percentage.
Note: The Confidence column has been also added to the RTF report. No red
warning appears next to the Confidence value.
Options
There is one option that comes after the registration (of stations). If it has been
chosen, the related process is then performed, otherwise nothing occurs.
604 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
If several stations have been selected as input, a set of Scans (one per
station) are created in batch mode, one after the other.
When you interrupt the Generate a Preview Scan step by pressing Esc, a
dialog opens and prompts you to abort or not.
Note:
You may not see anything happen in the 3D View if the option is not
checked.
The Generate a Preview Scan step is an optional step. If the Generate a
Preview Scan option has been checked, you will prompt to save the
current project in the RealWorks database, if it is not yet saved. If the
option has been kept unchecked, no prompt appears.
Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Scans (in
that station) have not the same color. Each has its own color.
Cloud-Based Registration
The purpose of this tool is to register two selected scanning stations (or two
station groups). The user has the choice between using an automatic method
or picking a pair of points from both the point clouds to initialize the registration.
Then the software can refine this registration by using the common parts of the
two point clouds. The registration error will be shown as an average distance
between the two point clouds. The user can also check the registration results
visually by using the Registration Visual Check (on page 779) tool. The Cloud-
Based Registration tool is available only in the Registration module. In order to
use this tool, you should select at least a set of two stations from the Scans
Tree.
Tools in the Registration Module 605
Caution: The leveling status of the input stations in the reference group may
affect the registration result when using either the automatic method, or the
manual method, or when performing a refinement after an initial registration.
Ideally and for a good result, the reference group should contain at least a
leveled station. If the aforementioned condition is not met, i.e., the reference
group has no leveled station and the moving group has some unleveled
stations, RealWorks cannot apply any rotation to the Z axis of the unleveled
stations and displays an error message to warn the user that he performs the
registration if he desires but the result cannot be as good as it should be.
The 3D View is split into three sub-views, two sub-views side-by-side and one
sub-view below. The left sub-view is surrounded by a frame in red. It displays
the Reference Cloud. The right sub-view is surrounded by a frame in green. It
displays the Moving Cloud. The two clouds keep the rendering that they had
before entering the tool. If you change the current rendering option for a new
one, it will be changed for the two clouds. The bottom sub-view displays the
registration result between the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud,
respectively in red and in green. Only one sub-view can be active at once. As
the default layout is three sub-viewers; you can use the View Manager to
display in one full view window or to switch from one sub-view to another.
Tools in the Registration Module 607
You are directly in the picking mode after entering tool. When you hover the
cursor over a sub-view, e.g. the bottom one, its size switches, from small to
large. When you hover the cursor over one of the side-by-side sub-views, the
size of both switches, from small to large, and so on.
You can manually resize each of the sub-views. Be aware that the new sizes,
become at first persistent, and then can disable the automatic tilting
mechanism of the sub-views. The condition for the mechanism to be enabled is
to have the height of the side-by-side sub-views two times smaller (or higher)
than the height of the bottom sub-view. If not, the mechanism is disabled.
608 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Because the refinement of the registration is based on the common parts of the
two selected stations (or groups), you can use the Segmentation to pre-select
these common parts or the Sampling (see "Sample Point Clouds" on page
331) to simplify the clouds for registration refinement. The Create command for
these two tools is disabled. This means that you cannot save the result.
For either the Reference Cloud or the Moving Cloud, click the
Segmentation (or Sampling) icon.
Inside a top sub-view, select Sampling Reference Points for the Reference
Cloud (or Sampling Moving Points for the Moving Cloud) from the pop-up
menu.
Inside the bottom sub-view, select Sampling Reference Points and/or
Sampling Moving Points) from the pop-up menu.
Note:
The fact of sampling (or segmenting) the Reference Cloud (or Moving
Cloud) updates the number of points (of the Reference Cloud (or Moving
Cloud)).
When a group of stations has been selected as input, all scans of the
group are displayed. The number of Points is the sum of all points of all
scans.
Caution: The number of points for the Reference Cloud (or for the Moving
Cloud), in the case of a group (or a station) with a large amount of points,
depends on the loading state defined in the status bar. Refer to the Point
Loading Manager chapter for more information.
Tools in the Registration Module 609
Note: When the Moving Cloud is too far from the Reference Cloud, i.e. more
than 10 km, a warning, as illustrated below, appears.
At the same time, the bottom sub-view which displays normally the registration
result between the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud, respectively in red
and in green is empty of contents.
If you choose Yes, the Moving Cloud is moved close to the Reference Cloud.
Both the clouds appear in the bottom sub-view. If you choose No, nothing will
be done.
610 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
When the sets of data have not enough overlap and/or not enough density
at the good place one dataset compared to the other similar place on the
other dataset.
If the datasets have a lot of similar potential areas to match without
discriminant places, e.g. in an indoor situation with a lot of rooms but
without furnitures insides. More the "Reference" grows, more mistakes
there are.
If the Z axis is far from the vertical.
If the result is good, to keep and save the result in the database (see Save
the Registration Result) (see "Save the Registration Result" on page
622).
If the result is good enough, to make a refinement (see Refine
Automatically the Registration (on page 615)).
If the result is not good, to make manual corrections by picking points (see
Register by Picking Points (see "Register Clouds by Picking Points"
on page 611)) or using the manipulators (see Refine Interactively the
Registration (on page 616)).
Note: An error message appears in case there are not enough points to
compute a reliable registration.
Tools in the Registration Module 611
The picking is done under constraint. If you have picked a point in one of the
top sub-view, it is not possible to pick another point inside the same sub-view.
You have to pick the point in the other sub-view.
612 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Once the first pair of points has been picked, the registration algorithm is then
run. The result is displayed on the bottom sub-view. At the same time, a tool-tip
is displayed to show that a registration has been computed. You can check the
quality of the registration based either on the clouds that are superimposed or
the computed error (see Check the Quality of the Registration (on page
620)). If the result is not good enough, you can return to the top sub-views in
order to continue picking a new pair of points and improve the current
registration.
Note: You can cancel the registration by selecting Undo. This brings you back
to the state you are in before picking points.
Caution: To help you to easily pick points, you can lock each sub-view from
rotating by selecting Screen Rotation from the 3D View / Mode menu. Be
aware that the view merged from the two sub-views is not locked any more.
Tools in the Registration Module 613
Once the second pair of points has been picked, the registration algorithm is
again run and the result is again shown on the bottom sub-view. If the result is
not again good enough, you can switch again to the top sub-views in order to
pick the third pair of points and improve the current registration.
Note: You can cancel the registration by selecting Undo. This brings you back
to the one point picking state.
Caution: To help you to easily pick points, you can lock each sub-view from
rotating by selecting Screen Rotation from the 3D View / Mode menu. Be
aware that the view merged from the two sub-views is not locked any more.
614 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Once the third pair of points has been picked, the registration algorithm is run
and the result is shown on the bottom sub-view. A tool-tip is displayed to show
you that a new registration has been computed. If the result is not again good
enough, you can proceed from the beginning until you get a result.
Note: You can cancel the registration by selecting Undo. This brings you back
to the two point picking state.
Caution: To help you to easily pick points, you can lock each sub-view from
rotating by selecting Screen Rotation from the 3D View / Mode menu. Be
aware that the view merged from the two sub-views is not locked any more.
Tools in the Registration Module 615
When the first pair of points has been picked and one of the features, like e.g.
Interactive Pan, has been chosen before picking, the manipulator will then be
positioned on the first picked point of the pair.
A Manipulator appears, not in the global coordinate system but in the local
coordinate system of the Moving Cloud. It has as center the center of the
Moving Cloud.
This manipulator has three secant Axis Handles, each with its own color
(red, green and blue). In addition to the handles, you can find three Plane
Handles.
At the same time, the Change Manipulator Center icon becomes enabled.
2. Pick an Axis Handle. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the Moving Cloud is highlighted in yellow. Those for which you
cannot are in mauve.
3. Move the Moving Cloud along that direction.
4. Pick a Plane Handle. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can
displace the Moving Cloud is highlighted in yellow.
5. Move the Moving Cloud in that plane.
Tip: You can easily switch from Interactive Rotation to Interactive Pan, and
vice versa, by just picking one of the Handles. Note that the cursor changes to
A Manipulator appears, not in the global coordinate system but in the local
coordinate system of the Moving Cloud. It has as center the center of the
Moving Cloud.
This manipulator has three Ring Handles, each with its own color (red,
green and blue). You can rotate the Moving Cloud around an axis passing
through the center of a ring and perpendicular to it.
At the same time, the Change Manipulator Center icon becomes enabled.
2. Pick a Sphere Handle. It turns to yellow. The axis around which the
Moving Cloud can be rotated is dotted and is in green.
3. Move the Moving Cloud around that axis.
Tip: You can easily switch from Interactive Pan to Interactive Rotation, and
vice versa, by just picking one of the Handles. Note that the cursor changes to
Note: You are not able to switch to Interactive Pan by just picking the Handle
in this specific case.
620 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Change Manipulator Center Location icon. The cursor becomes
as cross. This means that you are in the picking mode*.
2. Pick a point on the displayed clouds.
Note: (*) To leave the picking mode, you can either press Esc. or click again
the Change Manipulator Center Location icon.
Tip: You can set the center of a manipulator to a station position by picking on
its related triangle.
Note: (*) Clouds are always rendered in Red and Green, regardless of the
Rendering option(s).
The Error and Refine Error are expressed in the unit of measurement defined
in the Preferences dialog.
622 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If "Do Not Create Group" option has been chosen, the selected items are
registered together. The "Moving" item becomes the "Reference" item for
the next registration, and the item which comes after the "Moving" item
becomes the new "Moving" item.
If the "Add to the Reference" option has been chosen, the selected items
are registered together. If the "Reference" item is not a group but a station,
a folder named "Registered" is created. The registered items are then put
under the folder. See [A].
If the "Reference" item is a group, the registered items are gathered under that
folder. See [B].
Tools in the Registration Module 623
In both cases, the folder remains the "Reference" item and the item which
comes after the "Moving" item becomes the new "Moving" item.
If the "Merge With the Reference" option has been chosen, the selected
items are also registered together (as for the "Add to the Reference"
option), but the "Moving" item is merged with the "Reference" item.
Note: You can continue to register other stations without quitting the tool. If
you use the options above to put the stations just registered together, you can
use it to register with another station. In this way, you can structure the Scans
Tree in such a way that it reflects the history of your registration procedure.
Note: The "Add to the Reference" option is by default set after entering the
tool. If you choose an option from list, this option becomes persistent until you
change it for another one.
Note: If there is already a "Registered" folder, and you register two new items
with the option "Add to the Reference" or "Merge with the Reference", a new
"Registered" folder is then created two the number 2 in parenthesis.
624 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
When the stations are leveled, the feature keeps this constraint: the stations
will remain leveled in the process.
Tip: In some cases, where the scans have a high density and the overlap
areas are scanned from a long distance, it may be possible to obtain an even
better accuracy by setting the stations to 'unleveled'.
The stations can contain either a TZF Scan (TZF files) or only regular scans
(RWCX files), e.g., as obtained by extracting points from a TZF Scan or by
importing ungridded scan files. The feature uses two different algorithms to
refine the registration parameters, and automatically chooses which algorithm
to use depending on the stations:
If your project contains only TZF Scan(s) for each station, the feature
launches an algorithm that uses the TZF files.
If your project contains only RWCX files, the feature launches another
algorithm that uses RWCX files.
If your project contains both TZF Scan(s) for each station and RWCX files,
the TZF algorithm is launched (TZF has the priority).
If your project contains RWCX and only some TZF, the RWCX algorithm is
used.
Tools in the Registration Module 625
If a set of stations has been selected, the Refine Registration Using Scans
dialog opens.
If a project has been selected, a dialog opens and prompts you to process
with all stations (or not). Click Yes. The dialog closes and the Refine
Registration Using Scans dialog appears.
Note:
(1)
With at least two stations inside a group. Otherwise, the feature is
grayed-out.
(2)
With several stations, a unique group with at least three stations or a set
of groups. If the project has a unique station within, the feature is grayed-
out.
Warning: By principle, the Refine Registration Using Scans feature does not
refine within groups. If there are some groups in your input, a warning appears
and prompts you to continue or to abort the process. If you choose Yes, the
refinement will be performed between the groups, by using the proper stations
in them. This is visible in the report, where only the stations from different
groups will be matched.
Warning: If the input does not contain at least two valid stations, i.e. with valid
TZF Scans or regular scans, a dialog opens and the feature cannot be run.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Refine Registration Using Scans feature can be
reached from Scan-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
626 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The selected station (or group) has its name displayed in the Reference
Station field.
It is in bold in the selection list.
Caution: If the selection contains some leveled stations and the station
selected as Reference Station is not leveled, an error message appears and
prompts you to change the selection. If you wish to use an unleved station as
reference, you can set all the selected stations to unleved (by using
Registration / Modify Station / Force Unleved).
Tools in the Registration Module 627
If the selected station has a TZF Scan within, its preview and its name are
displayed in the dialog as shown below.
If there are several TZF Scans within, the preview of the Main TZF Scan is
displayed.
No preview is displayed in case the selected station has a TZF Scan for
which the link to the TZF file is broken.
In case of a group, the first station (from the group) or the first leveled
station (if existed) has its preview and name displayed.
628 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the selected station has no TZF Scan within but only regular scans, no
preview and no name are displayed in the dialog.
5. Check only the stations you wish to include in the computation and leave
the others unchecked.
Tip: You can select several stations (from the selection list) by using the Ctrl
(or Shift) key with the left clicking. There is no preview in that case.
Tools in the Registration Module 629
If the selected stations contain only TZF Scans, the links to the TZF files
are valid and the TZF files are not missing, the Refine Registration Using
TZF Scans method will be applied to the selection.
If the selected stations contain only regular scans, the Refine Registration
Using Extracted Scans method will be applied to the selection.
If the selected stations contain both (TZF Scans and regular scans), and
the links to the TZF files are valid and the TZF files are not missing, the
Refine Registration Using TZF Scans method will be applied.
If the selected stations contain both (TZF Scans and regular scans), and
some of the TZF links are broken or some of the TZF files are missing, the
dialog below opens:
If the selected stations contain both (TZF Scans and regular scans), and
some TZF links are broken or/and TZF files are missing or/and some
regular scans are missing, an error message appears:
The name of the station(s) it has been matched with. In the case of the
algorithm on the regular scans, this consists of a single station (pairwise
refinement).
For each pair of stations, the Cloud-to-Cloud Error and Coincident Points
percentage - in the current unit -, and the Confidence level.
The Coincident Points value is the amount of common points per pair (of
registered stations) is in percentage. The percentage in a pair (of registered
stations) is the same from one direction to the other (e.g. from Station_A to
Station_B or from Station_B to Station_A).
1 - Common points from Station_A to Station_B 2 - Common points from Station_B to Station_A
The Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed at the
bottom left corner of the Registration Report dialog. This Overall Cloud-to-
Cloud Error is the average of the errors on all the station pairs.
This Confidence value gives an idea of how reliable a pair is. It is expressed in
percentage. All Confidence rates, below 90%, have a red warning beside
them. This does not mean that the results are wrong. It is an indication that the
results may require a closer analysis.
Note: The Confidence level resulting from a refinement, for which the input
stations have unknown position, cannot be trust.
Orientation
The Orientation provides the user with tools to easily orientate a 3D scene after
it has been locally registered. It is assumed that, in most cases, the instrument
(used to acquire the 3D scene data) is leveled, and the Z axis is correct. The
Orientation then allows orienting the scene in 2D in order to re-define the X
and Y axis.
The 3D scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view (in the XY plane)
with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously).
A temporary yellow frame appears:
If only one station is displayed in the 3D View, the origin of the yellow
frame is the origin of the station.
If several stations are displayed in the 3D View, the origin of the
yellow frame is the origin of the last station (from the project).
If several stations (with a TZF scan in each) are registered and
displayed in the 3D View, the origin of the yellow frame matches the
origin of the Reference Station.
634 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: All the features present in the Orientation Tool toolbar can also be
reached from the pop-up menu.
Caution: You can enter in the tool without displaying anything in the 3D View.
But this has no sense because most of the tools (in the Orientation Tool) are
based on the picking on object(s).
Note: There is no way to unlock the 3D scene from the 2D lock after entering
the tool. Once you are in the 2D lock position, you can only Pan in the YZ
plane, Zoom In (or Out) along the Z axis or Rotate around the Z axis.
Note: A warning appears in the case the current frame is not the Home frame.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Orientation feature can be reached from Scan-Based
Registration group, on the Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 635
The Define Vertical Axis feature, from the Orientation toolbar, lets the user
define the vertical orientation (Z-Axis) of a non-leveled scan dataset, especially
for structured environments like buildings, e.g., indoor environments. Two
tools, independent but complementary, are available.
Click the Define Vertical Axis icon. The Define Vertical Axis toolbar
opens and the 3D scene is free from the 2D lock. The 2D Grid is hidden (if
not hidden previously).
Note: A warning appears in case a leveled station has been selected as input.
If you wish to modify the vertical orientation of a station, you need to set the
station to unleved (from the Registration / Modify station / Force Unleved
menu) before entering in the tool.
636 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: The automatic method is based on normal vectors, i.e., it will not work if
normals are not available and a warning message will appear.
Tools in the Registration Module 637
1. Click Define Vertical Axis by Picking Two Points . The cursor changes
Note:
To leave the picking mode, press Esc.
Picking should not be necessary on the displayed object.
Tip: To render the selection of points easier, we recommend that you switch to
the Based-Station mode.
The 3D scene is then rotated (in the XY plane and around the Z axis of the
current frame) so that this axis becomes horizontal.
Note:
(*) To leave the picking mode, press Esc.
Picking should not be necessary on the displayed object.
Note:
(*) To leave the picking mode, press Esc.
Picking should be the on displayed cloud. You may hear a warning sound
when picking an empty point.
Tip: You can select the 3D coordinates that appear in the Picked 3D Point field
(after picking a point).
1. Select at least two stations, a group (or set of groups), or a project with
TZF Scan within from the Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Registration Report (Scan-Based) .
The Registration Report Using TZF Scans dialog opens.
You can select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift)
key combined with the left clicking. No preview is displayed.
Check all of the stations you need for your registration and uncheck those
are not necessary.
Auto-Extract Targets
The Auto-Extract Targets feature allows the extraction of targets from TZF
Scans, to match those in common and to register the stations the extracted
targets belong to.
646 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project(1) created from TZF format
file(s)(2)) from the Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Auto-Extract Targets .
If a station (or set of stations) has (or have) been selected, the Auto-
Extract Targets dialog opens.
If a project has been selected, a dialog opens and prompts you to process
with all stations (or not). Click Yes. The dialog closes and the Auto-Extract
Targets dialog appears.
Note:
(1)
With a unique station (or a set of stations (or a set of groups)).
Otherwise, if the input is a project with only a unique group, the tool is
grayed-out.
If the input is a group (with a station (or a set of stations)), the tool is
grayed-out.
If there is no TZF format file in one of the selected stations, a dialog opens and
asks you if you wish to continue with the remaining station(s). Choosing "No"
will leave the tool.
If there is no TZF format file inside the whole selection, a warning message
appears with the text "No TZF Scan found in selected stations".
Tools in the Registration Module 647
Note: (2) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the
Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
Note: You need to have at least one Target Type checked to enable the OK
button. Otherwise, it remains dimmed.
Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Auto-Extract Targets feature can be reached from the
Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
648 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Check both options: Spherical Target and Black and White Flat Target.
2. Or only check one type.
3. If Spherical Target has been checked, the Diameter field becomes
enabled.
4. Input a value in the Diameter field according to the type of sphere you
used during data acquisition.
5. Or click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.
6. And choose a value from the drop-down list.
There are five predefined diameters: 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200
mm and 230 mm.
Note: Extracted targets are created in the database as Spherical Targets (or
Black and White Flat Targets) with Unmatched status. All of them are gathered
in the Unmatched folder under the Project node in the Project Tree and each
one is put under its related station. An extracted target is named TargetX
where X is an order, whatever its type.
Note: For targets of spherical type, you need to know their exact diameter. If
you enter a diameter (in the dialog) that is different from the diameter of the
scanned targets, nothing (or a very small number of targets) will be extracted
from the TZF Scans.
Tools in the Registration Module 649
Note:
If several stations have been selected as input, a set of Scans (one per
station) is created in batch mode, one after the other. You can interrupt
each of them by pressing Esc.
If the Generate a Preview Scan option has been checked, you will be
prompted to save the current project in the RealWorks database, if it is not
yet saved. If the option has been kept unchecked, no prompt appears.
Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Scans (in
that station) have not the same color. Each has its own color.
650 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
If a single station has been selected as input, no registration will occur.
If a project has been selected as input, the first station (of the project) is by
default the Reference Station.
Note: If a set of stations has been selected as input, the first selected station is
by default the Reference Station. The order (of selection) is preserved.
If there are enough targets inside each station (and at least three in common
between two stations), the auto-pairing of targets will be performed and the
Target-Based Registration dialog opens.
If the auto-pairing of targets succeeds, you may see the number of paired
targets in the Station List of the Target-Based Registration dialog. For a given
station, the Number of Targets is shown as X/Y. Y is the sum of targets and X
is the sum of matched targets. The Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based
Registration dialog is dimmed (because stations are registered). The
Registration Details dialog opens automatically with the Station View set by
default.
If there are not enough targets inside each station and/or if there are no
common targets between stations, the auto-pairing of targets will fail and the
Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration dialog is enabled. The
Registration Details dialog is not open.
Note: The Target-Based Registration dialog will not open if the input is a single
station.
652 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Target-Based Registration
The Target-Based Registration tool allows you to register a set of stations by
using targets. The targets could be those obtained while scanning, those
created manually during a registration, or those obtained by using traditional
surveying instruments such as Total Stations. The registration is based on a
least-squares adjustment method using the corresponding target observations
of each station. A registration report will be created after the registration. You
can check the registration quality based on this report. If any of the targets are
out of error tolerance, you can un-validate them and re-perform the
registration.
Match Leveled Stations with Only Two Targets: The matching algorithm used,
when starting the tool or when doing an Auto-Match All in the Registration
Details window, can match leveled stations using a minimum of two targets in
common. Please note that the two targets have to be at different heights. If not,
the algorithm will ignore the matching to avoid creating a wrong match.
For these reasons, it is always better to place the targets a bit randomly, at
varying heights.
Tools in the Registration Module 653
Note:
(1)
Among other stations. Otherwise, if the station is alone in the project,
the tool is grayed.
(2)
With a set of stations (or a set of groups). Otherwise, if the project has
only a unique station (or group (of stations) within) the tool is grayed-out.
Note:
If the input is a group with a unique station (or a group with a set of
stations) within, the tool is grayed.
If the loaded project contains some scans of spherical target type which
are not already fitted, RealWorks will prompt you to automatically fit each
of them with a geometry.
Caution: You cannot open the Target-Based Registration tool if the input is
only of Topographic Station type.
Note:
(1)
When a single station has been selected, the whole project is then taken
as the entry of the tool and the selected station becomes the Reference
Station.
(1)
You can also select two stations without TZF Scan inside.
Tip: You can also select Target-Based Registration from the pop-up menu.
If you enter into the Target-Based Registration tool with some stations that are
already been registered and some not, a dialog appears and asks to register
those that are not yet registered with those that are already.
Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
654 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the Ribbon, the Auto-Extract Targets feature can be reached from the
Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 655
By default, all selected stations are put in the Station List window. They are
listed not by the order of selection but by their order (of creation). All of them
are not displayed in the 3D View. The Reference Station is in bold.
Note: If there are several Topographic Stations within the project, only one is
assigned as the Reference Station.
Caution: An error message appears if the selection (as input of the tool)
contains a Topographic Station and this station has not been chosen as a
Reference Station.
Tools in the Registration Module 657
If there are enough targets inside each station and at least TWO in common
between two LEVELED stations (or THREE in common between two
UNLEVED stations), the auto-pairing of targets will be performed automatically.
If there are enough targets inside each station and at least TWO in common
between two REGISTERED groups and one of the groups is leveled, the
matching will be performed automatically.
The feature lets the user to register all the stations of a project together even if
there are no enough targets in common between some stations. In the below
picture, Station B and Station C share three targets in common, Station C and
Station A two targets only and Station B and Station A only one target in
common. Station B and Station C, having three common targets, will be
registered and automatically be put in group that will be used to register with
Station A.
If the auto-pairing of targets succeeds, you may see the number of paired
targets in the Station List of the Target-Based Registration dialog. For a given
station, the Number of Targets is shown as X/Y. Y is the sum of the targets and
X is the sum of the matched targets. The adjustment (of stations) is then
performed automatically without user interaction. The Adjust button (in Step 3
of the Target-Based Registration dialog) becomes dimmed. The Registration
Details dialog opens automatically with the Station View set by default.
658 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If there are not enough targets inside each station and/or if there are no
common targets between stations, the auto-pairing of targets will then fail and
the Adjust button (in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration dialog) is
enabled. The Registration Details dialog is not open. The auto-pairing of
targets can also fail even if there are not enough targets inside only in a station
in common with other stations.
If the extracted targets have already paired (Matched), they are gathered per
pairing group named XXX where XXX is its order. All pairing groups are rooted
in the Targets Tree. The target pairing information is still displayed in the
Station List as illustrated above. After entering into the tool, the stations are
automatically adjusted. The Adjust button in Step 3 is still enabled as the
stations are automatically registered.
If there is no target within each station, the tool opens too. For each selected
station, you may see the sum of targets Y and the sum of matched targets X,
both equal to zero. An information box with the "Reference station is not
registrable" text may appear.
Tip: In general, a station should have at least three targets inside. If one of the
stations is a Topographic Station and the other a Leveled Station, two targets
(per station) are enough.
Note: A pairing group (XXX where X is its order) is shown in the 3D View
with a label. The label's name is the group name and its color corresponds to
the one that you can find in each of the targets matched together. Unmatched
targets still remain in the Unmatched folder.
Tools in the Registration Module 659
Tip: Targets, extracted by using the Auto-Extract and Register method and
paired together immediately in the Target-Based Registration tool, are
renamed as well as their pairing groups. They are renamed as XXX. XXX
starts at 001 and is incremented by one. See [A]. If the Auto-Extract and
Register method is not combined with the Target-Based Registration tool,
paired targets are not renamed but only their pairing groups are. See [B].
Caution: Changing the current Reference Station to a new one will NOT reset
the adjustment information. The Adjust button, in Step 3, will stay grayed-out.
The Overall Residual Error is the average of all station residual errors. It is
displayed in Step 1 of the Target-Based Registration dialog below the Station
List. The smaller the Overall Residual Error, the more accurate the registration
of the stations.
Tools in the Registration Module 661
The Registration Details dialog automatically opens with the same Overall
Residual Error value.
662 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Registration Details dialog still opens automatically. The Residual Error is
not "Overall" but only for "Registered Stations". There is a value.
Tools in the Registration Module 663
The Registration Details dialog is not open. You have to open it manually by
click the Check button. The Residual Error is also not "Overall" but only for
"Registered Stations", and there is no value.
664 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Registration Details
What is a Fitting Error? An extracted target is in fact a set of points fitted with a
geometry. The accuracy of the fitting is given by this error (a distance value in
the current unit of measurement). This distance is the deviation from the fitted
geometry to the set of points. The shorter the distance, the more accurate the
fitting.
As a target does not belong to only one station but to several stations and the
fitting error (of this target) in a station differs from the fitting error in another
station. The Residual Error of a target is the average of all Fitting Errors (of this
target), each from a station observation.
A Target Group is a group inside which you can find all matched observations
of this target from different stations. The Residual Error in this case is the
average of all Fitting Errors of this target.
Toggle a registered station On. All targets of this station are On and have
their representation displayed in the 3D View.
Toggle a matched target On. Its representation is displayed in the 3D
View.
Registered Stations
The panel below the table displays for a registered station its name, the
number of station(s) it is linked to, the name of each linked station, the number
of common targets and the Mean Distance (in the current unit of
measurement).
Unmatched Targets
For an unmatched target, the panel displays its name and the station and
group the matched target belonging to.
Matched Targets
For a matched target, the panel displays its name, the station and group it
belonged to, the target(s) paired to it.
Tools in the Registration Module 669
1 - Station selected as input of the registration 2 - Targets belonging to the unmatched station
Note:
The Unmatch button is not available (dimmed) when selecting the
Unmatched Station tab.
The Unmatched Station tab is not present in the Registration Details
dialog if all the selected stations have been successfully registered
together.
Unregistered Stations
For an unregistered station, the panel below the table displays its name and
the "0 linked station(s) text".
Unmatched Targets
For an unmatched target, the panel displays its name and the station it belongs
to.
Toggle a pair of matched targets On. Both targets (one from each station)
are displayed in the 3D View.
Toggle a matched target On. Its representation is displayed in the 3D
View.
Note: The Unmatch button is not available (dimmed) when selecting the
Unmatched Target tab.
Auto-Match All
The Auto-Match All feature allows you to first un-adjust stations that had
previously been adjusted and then adjust them again. No selection is required.
Stations are those selected as the input of the Target-Based Registration (or
Auto-Extract Targets).
Note: The user can be in either the Station View or the Target View.
Auto-Match Station
The Auto-Match Station feature allows you to auto-adjust a selected station
from the Registration Details dialog. If the selected station is already adjusted,
it is then un-adjusted and adjusted again. If it is not already adjusted, it is then
automatically adjusted. A selection is required. It must be done in the Station
View from either the Matched Station tab or the Unmatched Station tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 673
Tip: You can perform two undo operations, one for the adjustment (of stations)
and one for the auto-pairing (of targets).
674 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Group. A dialog opens and asks you to apply all changes before
grouping stations.
2. Do one of the following:
Or
Click No. A new dialog opens and asks you to apply all changes to the
database.
Note: You can perform two undo operations, one for both the grouping and the
adjustment (of stations) and one for the auto-pairing (of targets).
Note: (*) Only stations registered to the Reference Station and the Reference
Station itself are grouped.
Target Analyzer
This tool helps you to analyze a project before you register the stations that are
inside. For each station, you can check if there are enough targets (either of
spherical type or of planar type), modify or delete those that are incorrectly
fitted, and/or create additional targets in the point cloud where such a target is
identified visually as having been scanned.
676 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Or
The Target Analyzer dialog opens as the fourth (or fifth) tab of the WorkSpace
window. It is composed of five parts. The first part allows you to select a station
for analyzing. The second part is to check targets/surveying points and scans
that are in the selected station. The third part is to repair (or correct) a given
target or to create a new one. The fourth part is to update the network(2). The
fifth part is to save the result, close the tool and give access to the online help.
The number of scans and targets in the selection appear in text below the
selection box.
Note:
If the input contains some scans of spherical target type which are not
already fitted, RealWorks will prompt you to automatically fit each of them
with a primitive.
(1)
If the TZF format files have not yet been processed, the Processing TZF
Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
(2)
This part is only available when launching the Target Analyzer tool
through the Target-Based Registration tool.
Tip:
When a single station has been selected, the whole project is then taken
as the entry of the tool.
You can also right-select on a project (or a group of stations(1) or a single
station(1) or a TZF Scan) from the Project Tree and Target Analyzer tool
from the pop-up menu.
Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
Tools in the Registration Module 677
Note: In the Ribbon, the Target Analyzer feature can be reached from the
Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
678 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Select a Station
If a set of stations has been selected as the input (of the tool), no matter in
which order has been selected each station, and the first from the list is the
one that is displayed in Step 1. The same rule is applied when selecting a
project.
For each station, the number of scans and the number of targets are displayed
as well as the Residual Error (in the current unit of measurement). If the station
has not yet been registered, its Residual Error is equal to Zero. By default, the
Main Scan within the selected station is displayed in a 2D Viewer as a 2D
Preview Image.
You can zoom an area of this 2D Preview Image In or Out using the Zoom In
and Zoom Out commands, zoom the whole image In or Out using the mouse
wheel or by defining a zoom factor. If the image is zoomed In more than the 2D
Viewer can display, you can pan it in any direction in order to view the hidden
areas.
Tools in the Registration Module 679
Spherical Targets, Black and White Flat Targets or Point Targets extracted
from a TZF Scan by using e.g. the Auto-Extract Targets and Register feature,
once created, are displayed within the TZF Scan. You can display (or hide) all
labels by clicking on the Show/Hide Labels icon.
Note: The 2D Viewer will not appear anymore when there is no TZF Scan
within the input (of the tool).
Caution: If there is no TZF format file inside the selected station, a dialog
opens and warns you that the TZF format file cannot be opened. It may be
absent, corrupted or blocked. The 2D Viewer disappears after closing the
warning dialog.
Tip: If a TZF Scan has been chosen (as input of the Target Analyzer tool), it is
then displayed in the 2D Viewer instead of the Main Scan.
680 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Focus on Targets
Targets and scans of the station selected in Step 1 are listed according to the
category they belong to. A target can be either of spherical shape or of flat
shape. It can also be a surveying point. Only fitted targets can be used for
registration (see the Target-Based Registration tool for full details). Fitted
targets are put together in the Fitted list and this list is accessed by selecting its
corresponding tab.
Similarly, unfitted targets and scans are respectively in the Not fitted and Scan
lists. The first item of the Fitted list is shown in the 3D View but none is
selected. The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View, which is
here to display the selected item, is blank. Both the Go to Next Target and the
Go to Previous Target in the dialog are dimmed.
Properties depend on where the selected item is. If the selected item belongs
to the Scan and Not Fitted lists, its name and number of points are listed in the
information box. If the selected item comes from the Fitted list, you will find two
other items of information (Standard Deviation (also called RMS error) and
Scanner Distance) in addition to its name and number of points. If the selected
item is from a leveled station, you will also see the Target Height and Scanner
Up Direction information.
To Focus on a Target:
1. If the station (selected in Step 1) has no TZF scan inside, Step 2 looks as
shown in [A].
2. If the station (selected in Step 1) has a TZF scan inside, Step 2 looks as
shown in [B].
3. Select an item from the current list. Both the Go to Next Target and the Go
to Previous Target buttons become enabled.
4. Click Go to Next Target (or Go to Previous Target) to navigate through the
list (of target).
5. Or press Down or Up on your keyboard.
[A] [B]
Tools in the Registration Module 681
A Target selected from Step 2 is highlighted in the TZF Scan and centered on
the 3D View and on the 2D Viewer as shown below.
Note:
You can only view the target height in the 3D View if its absolute value is
greater than zero.
You can first select any item from the current list and use Page Up and
Page Down. The first and last item of this list becomes consecutively
selected and its representation is shown in the 3D View.
682 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create/Edit Targets
If the station selected in Step 1 contains already fitted items, you can focus on
each item of the Fitted list from the first to the last. Visually compare each of
the selected item’s representations (points and geometry) in the 3D View and if
required check the RMS Error value in the information box. The smaller this
value, the more precise the fitting. Those that are not correctly fitted can be
modified or deleted. Step 3 (of the Target Analyzer dialog) appears as shown
in [A], [B] and [C] when selecting respectively a spherical item, a flat target and
a survey point.
[A] [B]
[C]
If already fitted items are not sufficient, you can create additional items with the
Fitting tool. You should first select an item from one of the two lists (Not Fitted
and Scans). If the selected item is from the Not Fitted list and is of spherical
shape (or flat shape (or survey point)), the dialog appears as shown in [D], (or
[E] (or [F])).
[D] [E]
[F]
If the selected item is from the Scans list, the dialog looks as shown in [G].
From each item of the Scans list, you can extract a 3D point as in the 3D Point
Creation tool.
[G]
Those, that are not correctly fitted and that belong to a leveled station (or from
a survey instrument), can also be modified and deleted. If the selected item is
from the Fitted list, you can edit its height (see [H] when selecting a flat item). If
it is either from the Not Fitted list or from the Scan list, you cannot edit any
height as the Target Height is grayed out (see [I] when selecting a flat item).
[H] [I]
Tools in the Registration Module 683
If the station selected in Step 1 contains fitted items extracted from a TZF
scan, the dialog looks as shown in [J] (for an un-leveled station) and [K] (for a
leveled station).
[J] [K]
684 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.
Note: The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept. If you
close the Fitting tool without creating the fitted geometry.
A set of points, once fitted, is put with its geometry in the Fitted list and under
the Unmatched folder of the Targets Tree and under the active group of the
Scans Tree. Undoing the fitting removes the set of points with its primitive from
the Fitted list, the Unmatched folder and the active group.
Tools in the Registration Module 685
Note: Please, be aware that the Flat Target icon looks like this .
Create a 3D Points
To Create a 3D Point:
Delete a Target
To Delete a Target:
To delete both the geometry and the points, click Delete Scan and Target.
To delete only the geometry, click Delete Target Only.
To cancel, click Cancel.
Tip: Instead of editing the Target Height value from the Target Analyzer dialog,
you can also do so in the Property window.
686 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
4. If the selected item is of flat type, the Fitting tool toolbar appears as shown
below.
Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Registration Module 687
Note: The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept if you close
the Fitting tool without creating the fitted geometry.
A target scan, once fitted, is removed from the Not Fitted list and put in the
Fitted list and under the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. Undoing the
fitting replaces the target scan again in the Not Fitted list and removes it from
the Unmatched folder.
688 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
4. If the selected item is of flat type, the Fitting toolbar appears as shown
below.
Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Registration Module 689
Note:
The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept if you close
the Fitting tool without creating the fitted geometry.
(*) If some points have been removed from the point cloud when fencing,
the Residual Error of the fitted item changes as well as the RMS, Standard
Deviation and Number of Points.
Please, be aware that the Flat Target icon looks like this .
690 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a fitted item (of flat type) from the Fitted list.
2. Click Show Manipulators to Modify Target Position . A Manipulator (with
two axis handles and a plane) appears.
3. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the geometry is highlighted in yellow and the one along which you
cannot displace it is in magenta.
4. Move the fitted geometry along that direction.
5. Click on the translucent plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you
can displace the fitted geometry turns to yellow.
6. Move the created target in that plane.
Tools in the Registration Module 691
Extract Targets
The Extract feature allows the user extract Spherical Targets, Black and White
Flat Targets, Point Targets and Point Targets (Corner) from TZF scans and
use the extracted targets to register the stations they belong to.
To Extract Targets:
The extract method, which appears in the Target Creator toolbar, is the
last used one.
Note: The targets shown in red are the newly created targets, i.e. the ones that
have been created in the current session of the Target Creator tool. Once you
close the Target Creator toolbar, they are shown in green.
692 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
A Sphere fits the points in the neighborhood of the picked one. Both of them
are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown below. At
the same time, a scan of Spherical Target type (named TargetX) is created
and put under the current station.
The information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, displays the
number of points in the created scan, the Standard Deviation value (except
when the extraction failed), and the fitting Diameter.
Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Spherical Target
close to the picked point.
694 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:
A Sphere, whose diameter has been previously defined, fits the points inside
the fence. Both of them are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar opens
as shown below. At the same time, a scan of Spherical Target type (named
TargetX) is created and put under the current station.
The information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, displays the
number of points in the created scan, as well as the Standard Deviation
information (except when the extraction failed), and the fitting Diameter. If the
area contains no points; nothing occurs.
Note: Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
Tools in the Registration Module 695
1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.
Or
The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Spherical
Target is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in the Unmatched folder in the
Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target Properties (see "Modify the
Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.
The properties of a scan (of Spherical Target type) fitted with a geometry
Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
696 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
A Black and White Target fits the points in the neighborhood of the picked one.
Both of them are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as
shown below. At the same time, a scan of Flat Target type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.
The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).
If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target (see
"Modify the Position of a Target" on page 699).
Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Black and White
Flat Target close to the picked point.
698 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:
A Black and White Target fits the points inside the fence. Both of them are
displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown below. A
scan, of Flat Target type (named TargetX), is created and put under the current
station.
The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).
If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target (see
"Modify the Position of a Target" on page 699).
Tip:
Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.
Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
Tools in the Registration Module 699
To pan the target in a plane. Click on the plane handle. It turns to yellow. A
plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.
1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.
Or
The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. The Flat Target is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in the
Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.
Properties of a scan (of Black and White Flat Target type) fitted with a geometry
Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
700 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown
below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is created and put under
the current station.
The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information.
Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Point Target close
to the picked point.
Tools in the Registration Module 701
1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.
Or
The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in
the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.
Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar
opens as shown below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.
An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).
An error dialog opens when a Point Target cannot be found closed to the
picked point.
Tools in the Registration Module 703
We advise you to pick a point on a corner. The extraction (of a target) can fail if
you pick a point on a flat surface. If that case occurs, only a point cloud is
extracted and the Fitting toolbar which opens looks as shown below.
704 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fence an Area
You need to define an area from which a target will be created. This area is to
be defined on the 2D image data in the 2D viewer.
To Fence a Zone:
If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar
opens as shown below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.
An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).
Tip:
Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.
Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
Tools in the Registration Module 705
Use the manipulator to move the target along a direction. Click on an axis
handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the target
is highlighted in yellow and those along which you cannot displace the target
are in mauve. Move the target along that direction.
Use the manipulator to pan the target in a plane. Click on a plane handle. It
turns to yellow. A plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.
Note: In the Input Data 2D Viewer, you may not see the position of the target
changed. This only occurs after you create the target in the database.
706 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The created scan is displayed in the Input Data 2D Viewer. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in
the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.
Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
Note: The Projection Mode in use by default (in the Target Analyzer) is
Perspective. If you are in Parallel (before entering the tool), the projection
mode automatically switches to Perspective. Once the tool is closed, the
projection mode is restored.
Georeferencing
Georeferencing describes the process of locating an object in the "real world"
coordinates. For example, you can georeference your house by determining its
latitude and longitude coordinates. In RealWorks, the objective of this tool is to
allow you to georeference a station (or a group of stations or a project) to a
known coordinate system. To do this, you have to assign for some targets (or
points) of the station (or group of stations) the corresponding known
coordinates. Once you assign at least three pairs, a least squares fitting
method will be used to calculate the best transformation. You can also import a
control network surveyed by traditional surveying instruments, and use these
control points to assign coordinates. If you apply this procedure station by
station, this amounts to performing registration sequentially (in contrast to
Target-Based Registration where the least squares adjustment is applied
simultaneously to all selected stations).
Caution: The Georeferencing tool does only move point clouds. Geometries,
created in OfficeSurvey (or Modeling), are not moved anymore.
708 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Import a survey network file including measured points into your project, if
required.
2. Select a station (or a project) from the Scans Tree and display it if
required.
3. From the Registration menu, select Georeferencing . The
Georeferencing dialog opens.
This dialog box opens as the fourth tab of the WorkSpace window and is
composed of four parts. Each of them corresponds to one step in the
georeferencing procedure.
If the input is a lonely station, this station is by-default selected. All targets
(if existed) of this station are listed in the Target List window.
If the input is a group of stations, the first station is selected by-default. All
targets (if existed) of this station are listed in the Target List window.
If the input is a project, this project is by-default selected. All targets (if
existed) of this project are listed in the Target List window.
1 - The selected project 2 - The Target List window 3 - Targets in the selection
Note: A measured point may have two states: Matched or Unmatched. All
measured points when unmatched are gathered into a folder named
Unmatched and rooted under the Project node in the Targets Tree. This folder
can be reached by selecting the Targets tab.
Tip: The Georeferencing tool can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Georeferencing feature can be reached from Scan-
Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
You cannot drop-down the list and select a station from if a project has been
selected (as input of the tool). All targets from the project are listed in the
Target List window as illustrated below.
710 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Zoom On Selected Target option lets you easily find the target, that you
selected in the Target List, in the 3D scene. A selected target is highlighted in
the Target List window, and highlighted and centered in the 3D View.
If the geometry of the selected target is not displayed, the selection in the
Target List window displays it. When you selected a target in the 3D View, it
gets highlighted in the Target List window and in the 3D View.
You are able to select the Projected Instrument Position of a leveled station
and assign known coordinates to it. Note that a Projected Instrument Position
has no represent in the 3D View. What is displayed is the last selected target.
For a target selected (from the Georeferencing dialog or from the 3D View), its
name and its coordinates appear in the Selected Target panel, and you cannot
modify them. The second part lets you assign known coordinates to the
selected target, by editing manually the known coordinates or by selecting a
measured point and assigning its coordinates. The third part lets you validate
the operation.
a) The Manual Edit in the Topo Point field is set by default. If not,
select it.
b) Enter a known coordinate in the X field.
c) Enter a known coordinate in the Y field.
d) Enter a known coordinate in the Z field.
Tools in the Registration Module 711
1 - Name of the selected target 2 - Coordinates of the selected 3 - Values the user has to
(not editable) target (not editable) enter manually
1 - A Topo point selected from the survey 2 - Coordinates and name of the selected Topo
network file point assigned to the selected target
Note: You can mix the two ways of assigning coordinates (By Picking and By
Target) in a single georeferencing operation without leaving the tool.
Tip: For assigning known coordinates to a target, you can select it from the
Target List window or pick on it in the 3D View. A selected target is highlighted
in the 3D View.
Tools in the Registration Module 713
For a point picked in the 3D scene, a name by default PickPoint1 and the 3D
position of the picked point appear in the Selected Target panel. You can
rename this picked point but you cannot modify its coordinates. The second
part enables to assign know coordinates to the picked point. You can either
edit the coordinates by hand or select a measured point and assign its
coordinates. You can then validate the operation in the third part.
1 - Default name of the picked 2 - 3D coordinates of the 3 - Values the user has to
point picked point enter manually
a) Manual Edit in the Topo Point field is set by default. If not, select
it.
b) Enter a known coordinate in the X field.
c) Enter a known coordinate in the Y field.
d) Enter a known coordinate in the Z field.
1 - A Topo point selected from the survey 2 - Coordinates and name of the selected Topo
network file point assigned to the selected target
Note:
If you have selected a station, you can only pick points of that station.
You can leave the picking mode by selecting Exit Picking Mode from the
pop-up menu.
You can mix the two ways of assigning coordinates (By Picking and By
Target) in a single georeferencing operation without leaving the tool.
Tip: You can remove the Topo point labels from the 3D View by first selecting
Rendering, then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.
716 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Once at least three known coordinates have been assigned to the targets
and/or to the picked points, a least-squares fitting method is then automatically
applied to calculate the best transformation.
You can select and delete an already assigned target (or picked point) by
pressing the Del. key. An assigned target once deleted is removed from the list
below and put again in the Target List window for a new assignment.
The error for each target (or for each picked point) is expressed a distance.
You able to un-check the targets (and/or the picked points) having the greatest
error; the fitting method is then applied each time you check or un-check the
targets (or picked points).
You can visualize the errors in the 3D View by clicking the Display Errors
button. The known coordinates you assigned to a target and/or to picked point
is displayed with the letter P and a number, in red.
Tools in the Registration Module 717
Note: A measured point (from the survey network file) once assigned is set as
matched.
Note: Leaving the Georeferencing tool without applying the georeferencing will
display an error message which prompts to abort or continue the operation.
Tip: You can leave the Georeferencing tool by pressing Esc or by selecting
Close from the pop-up menu.
Modify Target
The "Modify Target Matching" group, from the Registration menu, in the Menu
and Toolbars and the "Modify Target" menu, from the Target-Based
Registration group, in the Ribbon, gathers the operations the user can apply to
a target.
718 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In the Match With dialog, the Project Tree gathers all unmatched items except
those belonging to the selected station.
You are able to select an item of any kind (project position of an instrument,
target and topopoint) to match with the selected target.
4. Select an item from the Match With dialog. The OK button becomes
active.
If the selected item is not yet matched, both are matched together and put
under a matched folder in the Targets Tree.
Tools in the Registration Module 719
If the selected item is already matched, both are also matched together
but no matched folder is created in the Targets Tree. The item selected for
matching (in the Match With dialog) is put under the existing matched
folder (the one inside which resides the selected item and its pair).
If the selected item is the projection position of an instrument station, the
status of that station switches from to ., like it is setup over a known
point.
Tip: You can also right-click on an unmatched item from the Project Tree and
select Match With from the pop-up menu.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Match With feature can be reached from the Modify
Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
Match Targets
You can manually pair an unmatched target with another unmatched target.
Both must not reside under the same station. You can also pair two different
stations. Both need to be leveled and setup over a Known Point.
Note:
You can undo the operation.
Use the Ctrl (or Shift) key combined with the left-click for multi-select
items.
Targets (once paired) are put under a matched folder in the Scans Tree.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Match Targets feature can be reached from the
Modify Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration
tab.
720 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the stations have been leveled and setup over a known point, a dialog
opens and prompts you to accept the removal of a target (or not). Click
Yes to accept.
Tools in the Registration Module 721
If the stations have been only leveled, the projection positions of both are
matched together.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Match Targets feature can be reached from the
Modify Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration
tab.
Un-match a Target
Un-matching a pair of matched targets consists of dissociating one from the
other. Selecting a matched target will unmatch the pair that it belongs to.
Selecting a station will unmatch all pairs of matched targets that are inside.
To Un-match a Target:
Or
Tip: You can also right-click on a matched item from the Project Tree and
select Un-match Target from the pop-up menu.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Unmatch Target feature can be reached from the
Modify Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration
tab.
722 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Rename a Target
Auto-Pairing Targets: Targets and target groups are renamed. Instead of being
named TargetX and mTargetX where X is an order, they are renamed as XXX.
XXX starts at 001 and is incremented by one. Manual-Pairing Targets: Targets
keep their default name and target groups are renamed as described above.
The Rename Targets feature allows renaming of targets in case the manual
method has been used.
To Rename Targets:
Tip: You can also right-click on a target group and select Rename Targets
from the pop-up menu.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Rename feature can be reached from the Modify
Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 723
Note: The results in the report are spilt into two categories: By Stations and By
Targets.
Station Setup
The Station Setup tool lets the user to register a set of 3D scans, acquired with
any instrument, following a smooth survey workflow. It also lets the user to
move a registered set of data over a survey control network.
726 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
RealWorks displays the list of all the stations inside the project, even if a
unique station has been selected.
In case there are some unlevelled stations inside your project, a message
appears and the whole is automatically leveled.
If there are some Topo Points inside your project, the TopoStation System
the Topo Points belong to is the Reference Station.
If no Topo Point exists in your project, the first leveled station from the
selection is the Reference Station.
Tip: The Station Setup tool can also be reached from the pop-up menu.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Station Setup feature can be reached from Survey
Workflow group, on the Registration tab.
Note: If you are importing Topo Points and choose these ones for a backsight
calculation, you must not put a target height. It is already calculated during the
import. If you need to adjust the target heights for Topo Points, please
calculate only with the delta.
Tools in the Registration Module 727
Select a Station
To Select a Station:
Or
Note: The Previous Station and Next Station buttons are enabled only if there
are more than one station in your selection.
Note: In case an already defined station, i.e., registered station, has been
selected, the dialog shows then the current state of the network for that station.
This means that if the station had been set over a known point, the tool shows
then Station setup as method, and the value of the Instrument Height as well
as the coordinates and the name of the Known Point.
Station Setup
A Station Setup is a method which enables to determine the Position and the
Orientation of an instrument station by setting the instrument over a Known
Point on the ground, and by measuring a Backsight, as illustrated below.
Input a distance value in the Instrument Height field. The input value is
added to the Z coordinate of all items (point, geometry, scanner origin,
etc.) of the selected station, and RealWorks adjusts the whole network
automatically.
Tip: For more information, refer to the Modify the Instrument Height (on
page 759) topic.
The Select Point to Define Station Position and Key-in Point to Define
Station Position become dimmed. The Unmatch icon becomes enabled
and the selected (or key-in) point name as well as it coordinates are displayed
in the dialog. To able to change the selected point for another point, you must
first un-match if.
Note: For more information, refer to the Set Over a Known Point (on page
761) topic.
730 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Select Point to Define Station Position icon. The Set Station
Over a Known Point dialog opens.
2. Choose a Known Point from the dialog.
3. Click OK. The Set Station Over a Known Point dialog closes
1. Click the Key-in Point to Define Station Position icon. The Create New
Topopoint dialog opens.
2. In the Topo Point Name field, input a name or keep the default one.
3. In the Coordinates field, input or paste 3D coordinates.
4. Click Create. The Create New Topo Point dialog closes.
Tools in the Registration Module 731
Resection
A Resection is a method which allows determining the Position and Orientation
of an instrument station by measuring at least two Backsight Points, as
illustrated below.
To Perform a Resection:
Input a distance value in the Instrument Height field. The input value is
added to the Z coordinate of all items (point, geometry, scanner origin,
etc.) of the selected station, and RealWorks adjusts the whole network
automatically.
Tip: For more information, refer to the Modify the Instrument Height (on
page 759) topic.
Measure Targets
The Extract feature allows you to first extract points from a displayed TZF
Scan, and then fit them with a geometry of target type. There are at all four
types: Spherical Targets, Black and White Flat Targets, Point Targets and
Point Targets (Corner). This feature is grayed-out in case there is no TZF Scan
in the project. The Extract feature is grayed-out in case there is no TZF Scan
within your project.
To Extract Targets:
In Step 3, click the Extract button. The Target Creator toolbar opens.
Note: The extract method, which appears in the Target Creator toolbar, is the
last used one.
Note: In the 3D View, the extracted points are displayed with a size in pixels.
The size will automatically switch to 3 Pixels if it is lower than this value. The
size will not change if it is equal or greater than 3 Pixels. The change, when
happened, will be kept after you close the Target Creator toolbar and leave the
tool.
Tools in the Registration Module 733
A Sphere fits the points in the neighborhood of the picked one. Both of them
are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown below. At
the same time, a scan of Spherical Target type (named TargetX) is created
and put under the current station.
The information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, displays the
number of points in the created scan, the Standard Deviation value (except
when the extraction failed), and the fitting Diameter.
Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Spherical Target
close to the picked point.
Tools in the Registration Module 735
Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:
A Sphere, whose diameter has been previously defined, fits the points inside
the fence. Both of them are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar opens
as shown below. At the same time, a scan of Spherical Target type (named
TargetX) is created and put under the current station.
The information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, displays the
number of points in the created scan, as well as the Standard Deviation
information (except when the extraction failed), and the fitting Diameter. If the
area contains no points; nothing occurs.
Note: Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
736 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.
Or
The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Spherical
Target is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in the Unmatched folder in the
Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target Properties (see "Modify the
Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.
The properties of a scan (of Spherical Target type) fitted with a geometry
Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
Tools in the Registration Module 737
A Black and White Target fits the points in the neighborhood of the picked one.
Both of them are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as
shown below. At the same time, a scan of Flat Target type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.
The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).
If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target (see
"Modify the Position of a Target" on page 699).
Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Black and White
Flat Target close to the picked point.
Tools in the Registration Module 739
Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:
A Black and White Target fits the points inside the fence. Both of them are
displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown below. A
scan, of Flat Target type (named TargetX), is created and put under the current
station.
The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).
If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target (see
"Modify the Position of a Target" on page 699).
Tip:
Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.
Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
740 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
To pan the target in a plane. Click on the plane handle. It turns to yellow. A
plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.
1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.
Or
The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. The Flat Target is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in the
Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.
Properties of a scan (of Black and White Flat Target type) fitted with a geometry
Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
Tools in the Registration Module 741
If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown
below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is created and put under
the current station.
The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information.
Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Point Target close
to the picked point.
742 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.
Or
The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in
the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.
Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar
opens as shown below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.
An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).
An error dialog opens when a Point Target cannot be found closed to the
picked point.
744 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
We advise you to pick a point on a corner. The extraction (of a target) can fail if
you pick a point on a flat surface. If that case occurs, only a point cloud is
extracted and the Fitting toolbar which opens looks as shown below.
Tools in the Registration Module 745
Fence an Area
You need to define an area from which a target will be created. This area is to
be defined on the 2D image data in the 2D viewer.
To Fence a Zone:
If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar
opens as shown below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.
An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).
Tip:
Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.
Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
746 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Use the manipulator to move the target along a direction. Click on an axis
handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the target
is highlighted in yellow and those along which you cannot displace the target
are in mauve. Move the target along that direction.
Use the manipulator to pan the target in a plane. Click on a plane handle. It
turns to yellow. A plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.
Note: In the Input Data 2D Viewer, you may not see the position of the target
changed. This only occurs after you create the target in the database.
Tools in the Registration Module 747
The created scan is displayed in the Input Data 2D Viewer. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in
the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.
Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
For each extracted target from the list, the distance-to-instrument information
has been computed, and displayed in the information box.
With the Station Setup method, match with a known point (on page
749).
With the Resection method, perform the steps from 1 to 4 at least two
times and for each target, match with a known point (on page 749).
Tools in the Registration Module 749
Re-Fit a Target
To Re-Fit a Target:
Note: Refer to the Extract Spherical Targets (on page 692) and the Extract
Black and White Flat Targets (on page 696) section for more information.
Note: Refer to the Modify the Position of a Target (on page 699) for more
information.
The Select Point to Define Backsight Position and Key-in Point to Define
Backsight Position become dimmed. The Unmatch icon becomes
enabled and the selected (or key-in) point coordinates are displayed in the
dialog. To able to change the selected point for another point, you must first
un-match if.
750 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Select Point to Define Backsight Position icon. The Match
With dialog opens.
2. Choose a Known Point from the dialog.
1. Click the Key-in Point to Define Backsight Position icon. The Create
New Topopoint dialog opens.
2. In the Topo Point Name field, input a name or keep the default one.
3. In the Coordinates field, input or paste 3D coordinates.
4. Click Create. The Create New Topo Point dialog closes.
Tools in the Registration Module 751
The coordinates become 0;0;0 after adding the second backsight point.
752 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: The adjustment may fail in case some links between stations are not
enough defined.
Tools in the Registration Module 753
Network Adjustment
With this feature, all targets of the entire project are matched without user
intervention. The matching is based on target geometries in opposition to the
Named-Based Network Adjustment (see "Name-Based Network
Adjustment" on page 754) which is base target names. This feature shares
the same dialog as the Target-Based Registration (on page 652) tool.
In the Targets Tree, targets matched together are put in a folder named
mTARGET and rooted under the Project node.
3. Click Apply. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. All the changes
are applied to the database.
4. Or click Close. An information box appears and prompts user to apply the
changes in the database or not.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Adjust Network feature can be reached from the
Survey Workflow group, on the Registration tab.
754 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Targets are automatically matched by their name. The Adjust button in Step 3
of the Target-Based Registration is grayed-out. In the Registration Details
dialog, the Station View is set by default.
3. Switch to the Target View. Targets that are paired by their name are put in
a folder named by the target name.
4. Click Apply. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. All the changes
are applied to the database.
5. Or click Close. An information box appears and prompts user to apply the
changes in the database or not.
Tools in the Registration Module 755
Note: When you select a project for which any target can be matched by
name, you will be automatically direct to the basic Target-Based Registration
tool.
Tip: (*) You can also select a project for which no target has been initially
matched.
Instrument Leveling
The "Modify Stations" group, from the Registration menu, in the Menu and
Toolbars and the "Instrument Leveling" group, in the Ribbon, gathers all the
operations available that the user can apply to a station.
Tools in the Registration Module 757
Force Leved
A station for which the leveling parameter is missing because the instrument
had not been initially leveled can be manually set to leveled. You can change
the leveling property of a set of stations.
To Force Leveled:
Caution: When you change the status of a station, this does not modify the
status of the TZF Scans that are inside, i-e, when you set an un-leveled station
to leveled, the set of TZF Scans that are within remains un-leveled.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Force Leveled feature can be reached from the
Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 759
In the Property window, the current value of the "Instrument Height" line
changes. In the example below, the keyed-in value 1.50 m is displayed instead
of 0.
760 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The new set value is added to the Z coordinate of all items (point, geometry,
scanner origin, etc.) of the selected station.
If some targets of the selected station have been previously paired with targets
of other stations, a warning message appears and warns you that a Network
Adjustment of the project is now necessary to adjust corresponding stations.
Tip: You can also select and right-click on a leveled station in the Project Tree
and select Modify Instrument Height from the pop-up menu.
The Instrument Height is always related to a station. In case there are several
TZF Scans within a selected station, you are able to select a unique TZF Scan
and set the Instrument Height parameter to it. This parameter is then applied to
the station the TZF Scan belongs to. When you switch from one station to
another station, the value you set in the dialog for the first station is not kept, it
is reset to zero for the second station.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Modify Instrument Height feature can be reached from
the Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration
tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 761
4. In the Set Over Known Point dialog, the Project Tree gathers all
registration items except those belonging to the selected station.
5. Select an item. The OK button becomes enabled.
6. Click OK. The Set Over Known Point dialog closes.
7. In the Targets Tree, a matched folder is created with the selected station
and the known point inside.
Note:
If some targets of the selected station have been previously paired with
targets of other stations, a warning message appears and warns you that
a Network Adjustment of the project is now necessary to adjust
corresponding stations.
(*) It is not necessary to have a leveled station as input.
Caution: The Set Over Known Point feature is dimmed if there is no target
inside the other station.
Tools in the Registration Module 763
Note: In the Ribbon, the Set Over Known Point feature can be reached from
the Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration
tab.
764 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a station setup over a known point from the Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Station / Remove Known Point.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Remove Known Point feature can be reached from
the Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration
tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 765
Force Unleved
To Force Unleved:
1. Select a leveled (or setup over a known point) station from the Scans
Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Station / Force Unleveled.
Caution: When you change the status of a station, this does not modify the
status of the TZF Scans that are inside, i.e., when you set a leveled station to
un-leveled, the set of TZF Scans that are within remains leveled.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Force Unleveled feature can be reached from the
Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration tab.
766 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create Points
The "Create Points" menu gathers the operations related to the creation of
points. It can be reached from the Registration menu, in the Menu and
Toolbars, and from the Survey Workflow group, in the Ribbon.
Tools in the Registration Module 767
If the given name does not exist, jump to the next step.
If the given name already exists, a dialog appears and prompts to set a
new name instead. Click Yes to use the new name.
Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point's 3D Labels by selecting
Rendering/Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels
feature once selected has a check mark on its side.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Create Topo Point feature can be reached from the
Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.
2. In the Registration menu, select Create Points / Create Topo Points from
Selected Stations.
Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point's 3D Labels by selecting
Rendering/Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels
feature once selected has a check mark on its side.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Create Topo Points from Selected Stations feature
can be reached from the Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.
Tip: You can export the created Topo Point 3D coordinates in a RTF report by
selecting the Export Object Properties feature.
Tools in the Registration Module 769
1. Select a Topo Point (or a set of TopoPoints) from the Scans Tree.
2. In the Registration menu, select Create Points / Create Point Cloud from
Topo Points.
Each Topo Point is converted to a 3D coordinate point. In the Scans Tree, all
are gathered in a scan named TopoStationCloud which is placed under a
leveled station (blue color) named FromTopoStation. This scan is displayed in
the 3D View. In the Models Tree, a new point cloud (named FromTopoStation)
is created.
Note:
You cannot undo the operation.
By default, the Project Cloud does not contain the newly created point
cloud.
770 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the Ribbon, the Create Point Cloud from Topo Points feature can be
reached from the Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.
Create 3D Points
You can convert any registration entity (matched or unmatched) to a 3D
coordinate point. A registration entity can be a Spherical Target, a Flat Target,
and a Survey Point coming from a survey network file, an imported Topo Point
or a Topo Point created within a RealWorks tool such as the Georeferencing
tool or a target obtained by geometry fitting. The idea of this feature is to
convert the barycentre of a registration entity to a 3D Point. This barycentre is
the averaged center position when selecting a set of matched targets.
Tools in the Registration Module 771
1. From the Scans Tree, select a set of matched (or unmatched) entities from
a station.
2. In the Registration menu, select Create Points / Create 3D Points From
Targets. An information box opens.
3. Click OK. The information box closes.
A group named Target_Point (x) is created and rooted under the current
project in the Models Tree; where X is its creation order. This group gathers
the entities that are converted to 3D Points. There is a Target_Point group per
conversion. Each 3D Point has the name of the entity it is issued from.
Note: A selection is always from the Scans Tree. When you select an
unmatched entity from the Unmatched folder (or a matched entity from a pair)
in the Targets Tree, only the From Matched Targets command is available. For
both a warning message appears and warns that the selection is not valid.
Tip: You can display (or hide) the 3D Point's 3D Labels by selecting
Rendering/Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels
feature once selected has a check mark on its side.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Create 3D Points From Targets feature can be
reached from the Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.
772 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
There is no Undo.
The Create 3D Points From Matched Targets command is available even
if you select a single matched entity from a pair. But a warning message
appears and warns you that the selection is not valid. No 3D Point is then
created in the Models Tree.
Tip: You can display (or hide) the 3D Point's 3D Labels by selecting
Rendering/Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels
feature once selected has a check mark on its side.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Create 3D Points From Matched Targets feature can
be reached from the Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.
Tools in the Registration Module 773
Transformations Group
A TZF format file holds registration parameters which are Vector of Translation,
Axis of Rotation and Angle of Rotation. On first import of TZF format files, in
the case of a new project e.g., RealWorks creates new stations and
automatically initialize them with the registration parameters of the TZF format
files. These registration parameters will no longer to be read (or written)
anymore after the initialization even if they are changed in the meantime. The
only way these parameters can be read (or written) is by performing an explicit
import (or export).
All the feature related to this import (or export) are gathered in the
Transformations group, on the Registration tab.
774 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
No selection is required but you need to have at least a project loaded in
RealWorks.
If the project contains a station that is not valid (with no TZF Scan(s)
within), a dialog opens and asks you to proceed with the remaining
station(s). Choosing No will interrupt the import process.
Tools in the Registration Module 775
Note: You need to have at least a project loaded in RealWorks and you need
to perform a selection from the project to enable this feature, whatever the
selection.
776 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: (*) If any transformation has been applied to stations; the registration
parameters (Vector of Translation, Axis of Rotation and Angle of Rotation) are
equal to zero.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Export Station Registration Parameters to RMX Files
feature can be reached from the RMX list, in the Transformations group, on the
Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 777
The RMX format files will be processed one after the one.
For a given RMX format file, if RealWorks finds a related station; the
registration parameters will be applied to the station. If the RMX format file
has no corresponding station; the warning dialog below appears. Click OK.
The registration parameters won't be applied.
Note:
(*) 3D coordinates in millimeters.
(**) Otherwise the above warning dialog appears.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Register Stations With Imported RMX Files feature
can be reached from the RMX list, in the Transformations group, on the
Registration tab.
778 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Registration Visual Check dialog opens and the rendering option swaps
automatically to Station Color.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Registration Visual Check feature can be reached
from the Registration Check group, on the Registration tab.
Tip: You can open the Limit Box window by clicking the Limit Box List icon in
order to view, edit and load the saved limit box. Please refer to the Managing
Limit Boxes (on page 303) section for more information.
Note: You are undo and redo certain operations when using the tool, or after
using the tool. These operations are those that affect the canonical views, the
station color and the limit box creation.
780 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: When you load a saved limit box, the Thickness field will be updated
with the Thickness value of the loaded limit box.
Tools in the Registration Module 781
The Horizontal Slice feature lets the user define a limit box whose:
Note: You need to pick one point on the displayed objects in the 3D View.
The Slice Perpendicular to Screen feature lets the user define a limit box
whose:
Note: You need to pick two points on the displayed objects in the 3D View.
1. Click the Change Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to
show the following .
2. Pick a point on the displayed clouds and/or geometries.
1. Click the Modify Shape icon. A manipulator with six Face Handles
appears, one on each face of the limit box, and eight Corner Handles.
3. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box, uniformly in all directions.
Tools in the Registration Module 785
Tip: You can also select Modify Shape from the pop-up menu.
Note: Resizing a limit box will change consequently the value of its Thickness.
786 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Pan in a plane.
Pan along a direction.
Tip: You can also select Pan from the pop-up menu or use its associated
shortcut key T.
Tip:
You can use the following keys (, , , , Page Up, Page Down) on
your numeric keypad to move the limit box.
You can combine the use of the above keys with the Ctrl key to speed up
the movement of the limit box.
Tools in the Registration Module 787
Pan in a Plane
To Pan the Limit Box in a Plane:
1. Pick a Plane Handle to select it. A larger yellow Plane Handle is displayed.
2. Drag the Plane Handle in any direction on the plane to move the limit box
in that direction.
3. Drop the Plane Handle.
Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu or use its related
shortcut key R.
790 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Inspect Visually
In the first step, we have to find out the stations that are involved in the
registration issue, by doing one of the following:
Inspect the limit box from different sides (see "View a Limit Box From
Different Sides" on page 792).
Isolate the station(s) by coloring it (or them) (see "Change the Color
of a Station" on page 794).
Identify the station(s) by name (see "Identify a Station" on page 795).
Hide (or display) the station(s) that is (or are) needed (see "Display
and Hide a Station" on page 795).
Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.
Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are displayed in the 3D
View.
The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon is
highlighted in yellow.
Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.
Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are hidden in the 3D View.
The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon
becomes unselected.
The limit box, with its manipulator (Size, Pan or Rotate), is displayed in the
3D View.
The Show Limit Box icon is highlighted in yellow.
The limit box, with the current manipulator, is removed from the 3D View.
The Show Limit Box icon becomes unselected.
792 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Use the Next button to move up the defined limit box from one
Step.
Use the Previous button to move down the defined limit box from
one Step.
Tip: You can use the arrow keys, Left and Right, used as shortcut keys,
instead of Previous and Next.
794 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
You can manually change the color of each station, in the Property window, but
this can be very tough as all of the stations are not obviously in the same place
in the Project Tree. You may need to expand or shrink the Project Tree to
change the color of a station. The Change Station Color feature lets you
change easily the color of each station directly in the 3D View.
The station whose points have been colored is colored with the same color.
Note: You can leave the coloring mode by selecting Close Pick Point from the
pop-up menu.
Tools in the Registration Module 795
Identify a Station
To identify a station in the 3D View, you can place the cursor over the
displayed point cloud, the name of the station the point cloud belongs to
appears as a tooltip.
The keys H and D, when used outside the tool, behave differently. They only
hide or show the scan selected from the 3D View.
If the limit box has been defined with the Horizontal Slice method, the 3D
View is then locked in 2D, in the XY plane of the current frame, with the
2D grid displayed (if not previously hidden).
If the limit box has been defined with the Slice Perpendicular to Screen
method, the 3D View is then locked in 2D, in the plane defined by the two
picked points and perpendicular to the screen, with the 2D grid (if not
previously hidden).
4. If required, cancel the current fence and start a new one by selecting
Redraw Area from the pop-up menu.
5. Click the Done button.
The current limit box is resized to the size of the defined zone of interest.
Tip: You can also select Done from the pop-up menu.
796 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In addition to the name, the user can add a comment to the Limit Box Object
just like an ‘annotation’. These records can then be exported and sent, and
then reviewed just by using the limit box tool.
If the Limit Box window is open, the limit box is added to the limit box list.
Note: You need to input a name in the Name field to be able to store the area
as a limit box.
When you load a file of any format, except SIMA and TXT with topopoints, that
had never been previously saved in the RealWorks format; the Production
processing mode is set by default.
When you load a file saved in the RealWorks format and in the Production
processing mode; that file will be opened with that processing mode set. When
you are out of this processing mode and you need to be in it; you have to
choose the Production mode on the Quick Access Toolbar on the top of the
user interface:
799
The Features group mainly includes two tools. The first one allows the
collection of a set of surveying points/chains from a scanned point cloud in a
way that simulates regular surveying methods. The second one enables to
create and edit a feature set library usable directly with the first tool or with the
new feature set capability in the Trimble Scan Explorer.
The Slice Tools group includes a series of tools with the slicing capability.
From either a point cloud or a mesh, the user can create a terrain contour map,
a set profile and cross-sections alone an alignment, or performs a slice.
Note: The user can also find the Slice Tools group from the Drawing tab on the
Surfaces tab.
800 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
2D-EasyLine
This tool allows you to create polylines from point cloud's slice(s) that result(s)
from the use of the Cutting Plane tool or from planar polylines. The resulting
polylines can contain only segments or a combination of segments and circular
arcs. The 2D-EasyLine tool can be used as a standalone tool or as a sub-tool
inside the Cutting Plane tool.
If the input data is a pure point cloud slice, Step 1 of the 2D-EasyLine dialog
looks as shown in [A]. You can use either the automatic procedure or the
manual procedure (Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog) for modeling polylines.
Or
Both the number of segments and the number of arcs are equal to zero.
The sub-tools (Sampling and Segmentation) as well as the Display Cloud
option and the Preview button are enabled.
Tools in the Production Module 801
If the input data is a planar polyline (without points inside), Step 1 of the 2D-
EasyLine dialog looks as shown in [B]. You can only edit the planar polyline
(Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog).
1. Select a planar polyline (with no points inside) from the Models Tree.
2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select 2D-EasyLine . The 2D-EasyLine
dialog opens as shown below.
The number of segments and the number of arcs inside the planar polyline
are shown in text in Step 2.
The sub-tools (Sampling and Segmentation) as well as the polyline
computation parameter (Threshold) and the Preview button are all
dimmed.
802 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the input data is a planar and fitted polyline (with points inside), Step 1 of the
2D-EasyLine dialog looks as shown in [C]. You can choose between the two
procedures for modeling new polylines or use the editing tools to modify the
planar and fitted polyline.
1. Select a planar and fitted polyline (with points inside) from the Models
Tree.
2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select 2D-EasyLine . The 2D-EasyLine
dialog opens as shown below.
The number of segments and the number of arcs inside the planar polyline
are shown in text in Step 2.
The sub-tools (Sampling and Segmentation) as well as the polyline
computation parameter (Threshold), the Preview button and the two
displayed options (Display Cloud and Displayed Polyline) are all enabled.
Note: In the Ribbon, the 2D-EasyLine feature can be selected in the Line Work
group, on the Drawing tab.
The selection required to open the tool - planar polyline (fitted or not) or point
cloud slice - is displayed in a planar view (2D) with the 2D grid in
superimposition. This means that the planar polyline (fitted or not) or the point
cloud slice is locked in 2D; you can navigate through it (like performing a zoom,
panning or rotation). You can use the View Manager toolbar to show the 3D
sub-view and the planar view at the same time, or to switch between them. In
the planar view, you can use the pop-up menu to modify the size of the 2D grid
or to hide it.
Tools in the Production Module 803
If the input data is a pure slice cloud, new polylines are modeled according
to the value set in Threshold and are displayed in the 3D View. You have
choice between the two display options (Display Cloud and Display
Polyline) and the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline is grayed out.
Note: The other editing tools in Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog become
enabled.
804 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the input data is a fitted polyline, new polylines are modeled according to
the value set in Threshold and are displayed in the 3D View. You have
choice between the two display options (Display Cloud and Display
Polyline) and the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline becomes enabled.
Note: Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline cancels the computed polyline(s) and
reloads the initial polyline.
For both, the number of segments and the number of arcs will be updated
according to the Threshold value. (*) If the Threshold value is too high,
new polylines cannot be built. The number of segments and the number of
arcs fall to zero. The Step 1 becomes as shown below and only points are
displayed in the 3D View.
Both the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline and the Display Polyline are dimmed
Tools in the Production Module 805
[A] [B]
Polyline Drawing
Note: The Create button in the Drawing toolbar is dimmed. To validate the
polyline, choose Close Tool from the toolbar or from the pop-up menu.
806 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Edit Polylines
You can edit the modeled polyline. The edition can be done manually or thanks
to filters. If you want to use the by-hand method; choose the Polyline Drawing
tool to move or add vertices, delete a segment, etc. (see the Polyline Drawing
tool) or use the Edit Polyline tools to define which parts of the modeled (or
selected) polyline you want to keep. If you want to use the by-filter method, any
selection is required and you can apply filters like simplification, smoothing,
filling holes, etc.
Select Items
We describe hereafter the different selection modes that you can use for
editing polyline(s). There are four modes in all. Before selecting items from the
displayed polyline(s), only two modes can be used: Standard Selection and
Multi Selection. Once a first selection is made, the two other modes become
enabled: Partial Deselection and Partial Reselection.
Items in the polyline(s) are mainly arcs and segments. The information box at
the top right-corner of the 3D View displays in text the number of arcs and the
number of segments in the selection. The 2D-EasyLine dialog displays the total
number of arcs and segments in the polyline(s). The numbers in the
information box will be updated automatically each time you add or subtract
items from the polyline(s).
To Select Items:
1. Select item(s).
2. Add new selected item(s) to previous one(s).
Once a first selection is made, the two other selection modes - Partial
Deselection and Partial Reselection - in Change Selection Mode become
active as well as Change Deletion Mode.
Clicking Reverse Selection will set unselected items as selected and those are
selected as unselected. If any polygonal fence has been drawn, clicking
Reverse Selection will then select the whole polyline in the 3D View.
Note:
The polygonal fence should contain at least one item (segment or arc) in
its entirety so that this item can be selected.
You can undo a selection by using the Undo command.
Selecting New Fence from the pop-menu (or pressing Esc) will undo the
polygonal fence in progress.
Selecting Clear Selection from the pop-menu will clear the polygonal fence
from the polyline(s).
Tip:
Instead of double-clicking to close the polygonal fence, you can also right
click anywhere in the 3D View window and select End Fence from the
pop-up menu.
You can select Clear Selection from the pop-up menu to cancel the
selection.
808 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Multi-Select
To Multi-Select:
Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode, hold the Ctrl (or Shift) key pressed and
pick a point to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.
Tools in the Production Module 809
Partial Deselect
To Partial Deselect:
1 - Initial selections (in red) 2 - Polygon in the Partial 3 - Newly selected items are
Deselection mode removed from previous
selected items
Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode, hold the Alt key pressed and pick a point
to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.
810 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the polygonal fence contains some of the previously selected items; then
common items remain selected and the others are unselected.
If the polygonal fence contains any of the previously selected items. No
intersection will be performed.
1 - Initial selections (in red) 2 - Polygon in the Partial 3 - Only common items
Reselection mode between new and old selected
items are kept
Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode, hold the Ctrl + Alt keys pressed and pick
a point to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.
Delete Items
You can now continue editing the selected/modeled polyline(s) using the
available filters. Filters can be separated into two categories. The first category
contains filters for which you do not need to set parameters. These filters are:
Delete Selection, Delete Selection Filling Holes and Smooth.
Tools in the Production Module 811
Delete Items
To Delete Items:
Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View window to display the
pop-up menu and select Delete Selection.
812 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Segments and arcs inside the selection are deleted and the extremities
are connected together.
If the input is a slice cloud, Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline remains dimmed.
If the input is a polyline (fitted or not), Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline
becomes enabled. Click on it to reload the initial polyline.
1 - Selected items (in red) 2 - Selected items are deleted 3 - Selected items are deleted
and extremities are connected
Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up
menu and select Delete Selection Filling Holes.
Tools in the Production Module 813
Apply Filters
The second category contains filters for which parameters and options should
be set. These filters are Simplification and Fill Line Breaks. The purpose of the
Simplification filter is to simplify the selected/modeled polyline(s) by segments.
The Tolerance parameter will be used in this filter so that the original points or
the polyline vertices will be inside this tolerance with respect to the final
approximated polyline(s). You can choose the Use Arcs option; the filter will
use both segments and arcs to approximate the original polyline(s). The
purpose of the Fill Lines Breaks filter is to fill gaps on the selected/modeled
polyline(s) with segments. The Gap parameter will be used in this filter so that
gaps whose size is smaller than this parameter will be filled by segments. Note
that the default unit of measurement is set to millimeters; you do not need to
enter “mm” after the value. You can change the default unit of measurement in
Preferences.
Note:
No selection is required for both the Simplification filter and the Fill Line
Breaks filter.
If a selection has been done, both the Simplification filter and the Fill Line
Breaks filter are applied to the selection.
1. Drop down the selection list and select Fill Line Breaks.
2. Enter a value in the Gap field and press Enter.
3. Or select a value using the Up (or Down ) button.
4. Click on the Fill button.
Saving Results
After checking the modeled results, you can use the Apply button to create
them in the RealWorks. Each modeled polyline will be created as a polyline.
Note that if the original is also a polyline, then it will be replaced by the new
one.
1. Click Apply.
2. Click Close.
Draw a Polyline
This tool allows you to create quickly a polyline drawing by successively
picking on the displayed object(s) or not. The final result is a polyline which you
can export as a 3D polyline in DXF (or DGN) format, or as a 2D polyline in DXF
format for coplanar polyline. You can use the Polyline Drawing tool in both the
3D View and the planar view (as used in the 2D-EasyLine tool). In the latter
case, the created polyline is a planar one. You can use this to carry out
inspections.
Or
3. If you are in a main tool like e.g. the 2D-EasyLine, click the Polyline
Drawing icon.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Polyline Drawing feature can be selected in the Line
Work group, on the Drawing tab.
Tip: You can change the color of a drawing polyline in the Preferences / Tools
dialog. This change should be done before entering in the tool, otherwise a
message pops up.
816 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Define a 3D Plane
You can use the 3D Plane tool to define a 3D plane or lock the screen view in
2D, and draw a polyline on it. The Drawing toolbar looks as shown below in the
Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode:
To Define a 3D Plane:
1. Click the Start 3D Plane Tool icon. The 3D Plane toolbar and a 3D
plane in yellow both appear.
2. Define a 3D plane, and validate it. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes
enabled. The Lock In 2D icon is by default set. The scene is locked in the
defined 3D plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously).
The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
3. If required, click the Show/Hide Plane icon to display the defined plane.
The Drawing toolbar looks as shown below in the Based Based mode:
To Define a 3D Plane:
1. Click the Start 3D Plane Tool icon. The 3D Plane toolbar and a 3D
plane in yellow both appear.
2. Define a 3D plane, and validate it. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes
enabled. The Lock In 2D icon is default set. The defined 3D plane has the
following representation:
Tools in the Production Module 817
3. If required, click the Show/Hide Plane icon to display the defined plane.
Tip: You can also select the Start 3D Plane icon from the pop-up menu.
Note: In the Polyline Drawing tool, you can swap from a navigation mode
(Examiner/Walkthrough/Station-Based) to another as often as required.
Note: If a 3D plane has been selected as input of the Polyline Drawing tool, the
3D scene will be locked on that plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not
hidden previously).
818 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Draw a Polyline
The basic tool to draw a polyline is the action of picking which can be free or
constrained. The Polyline Drawing tool, split into three modes (Polyline,
Rectangle and Circle), behaves differently according to the input. In the
Polyline mode, if the input data is of 3D type, you can only draw segments as
the Change Mode to Arc icon is dimmed. This is true unless you lock in 2D in a
3D plane that you have to define. In that case, you can draw segments and/or
a combination of segments and circular arcs. In the Rectangle and Circle
modes, the input data can only be of 2D type, or of 3D type but locked in 2D in
a 3D plane the user has to define.
When you start drawing a polyline, if the cursor is over another polyline, the
first node will exactly start at the middle of a segment (or arc), as illustrated
below.
In RealWorks 9.0:
When you start drawing a polyline, if the cursor is over another polyline, the
start node will exactly on the existing polyline at the cursor position, as
illustrated below. The behavior is the same with the end of the polyline.
Tools in the Production Module 819
In 3D:
If you are in 2D, the Drawing toolbar looks as shown here below and the
Picking Parameters toolbar in the 2D constraint mode (H/V or Angle/Distance)
appears. The Change Mode to Arc, Draw Circle and Draw Rectangle icons are
available.
In 2D:
Note: The steps from 3 to 7 are only available in 2D and the pickings can be
done anywhere in the planar view, on cloud point/geometry or not.
820 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In 3D, the pickings should be done on the displayed object(s) and can be
constrained on a cloud point using the Ctrl key with the left-click. This means
that you cannot pick anywhere except on the point.
Tip: You can switch from the line drawing mode to the arc drawing mode and
conversely as often as you wish just by pressing respectively the L and C keys
on your keyboard, by clicking on the Change Mode button in the Drawing
toolbar or by selecting its related command from the pop-up menu.
A - The first selected node B - End Line: The start node is C - Close Line: The start node
not linked to the last selected is linked to the last selected
node node
Note: Pressing Esc while you are picking points will end and validate (but not
create) the polyline in progress.
Note: Each time you validate a polyline by double-clicking or by using the End
Line and Close Line commands; you can continue to draw other polylines.
These polylines will not be connected.
Tip: You can double-click to end drawing. In this case, the drawn polyline is
always an open one.
822 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Draw a Rectangle
To be able to draw a rectangle when the input is of 3D data type, first click the
Lock in 2D icon to lock the 3D View in 2D or define a 3D plane by using the 3D
Plane tool. Otherwise, the Draw Rectangle icon remains grayed-out. When the
scene is locked in 2D, there is a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden
previously) and the picking mode switches from 3D constraint to 2D constraint.
When you click again the Lock in 2D icon, the scene is free from the 2D lock
and from the 2D constraint picking mode. If the input is of 2D data type; you do
not need to lock the scene in 2D because it is (by definition) locked in a 2D
plane.
In 3D:
In 2D:
To Draw a Rectangle:
Or
9. Move your cursor to setup the opposite end. The node disappears and a
segment in dotted appears. Its shape changes as long as you move the
cursor.
10. Pick a point. The segment in dotted becomes continuous and another
node appears.
11. Move your cursor to setup the opposite end. The node disappears. Three
other sides in dotted and perpendicular to the first side appear. Their
length changes as long as you move the cursor.
12. Pick a point. A rectangle is then drawn.
Note: You can switch from the 2-point drawing mode to the 3-point drawing
mode and conversely as often as you wish just by clicking on the Draw
Rectangle icon.
Tip: You can also select Lock in 2D, Draw Rectangle by Defining 2 Points and
Draw Rectangle by Defining 3 Points from the pop-up menu.
824 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Draw a Circle
To be able to draw a circle when the input is of 3D data type, first click the Lock
in 2D icon to lock the 3D View in 2D or define a 3D plane by using the 3D
Plane tool. Otherwise, the Draw Circle icon remains grayed out. When the
scene is locked in 2D, there is a 2D grid superimposed (if has not been hidden
previously) and the picking switches from the 3D constraint mode to the 2D
constraint mode. When you click again the Lock in 2D icon, the scene is free
from the 2D lock and from the 2D constraint picking mode. If the input is of 2D
data type; you do not need to lock the scene in 2D because it is by definition
locked in a 2D plane.
In 3D:
In 2D:
To Draw a Circle:
Or
Note: You can switch from the center-and-radius drawing mode to the
diameter drawing mode and conversely as often as you wish just by clicking on
the Draw Circle button.
Tip: You can also select Lock in 2D, Draw Circle by Defining the Center and
the Radius and Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter from the pop-up menu.
Select a Polyline
When the input contains already created polylines (or after drawing and
creating some), you can set one of them as selected by picking. Note that this
is only available in 3D (or 3D locked in 2D).
To Select a Polyline:
Note:
Press Esc to leave the picking mode.
If required, hide all objects displayed in the 3D View; this can help you in
picking a polyline.
If you are in 3D locked in 2D, after choosing Select Polyline and before
picking a polyline, the 3D scene is free from the 2D lock and after picking
a polyline the 3D scene comes back to the 2D lock state.
Tip: You can also check Select Polyline from the pop-up menu.
Edit a Polyline
Before creating a polyline, you can delete the whole of it or modify it by
deleting, moving and inserting nodes or by continuing it. When you place the
cursor over a segment of a polyline, you may see the following symbols:
(Nodes), (Middle Nodes) and (Middle Nodes to Insert). When you place
the cursor over an arc of a polyline; only (Nodes) are available.
826 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Delete a Node
To Delete a Node:
1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears upon the node.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Node.
1 - The selected node on the 2 - The selected node is 3 - The selected node is
polyline removed from the polyline moved
Note:
Deleting the Start (or End) node of a chain of segments will remove the
First (or Last) segment from that chain. Deleting a Conjunction node will
delete the segment on both side of that node.
Deleting a node at the end of a lonely segment won't delete that segment.
You cannot delete a node of a lonely arc.
Tools in the Production Module 827
Move a Node
To Move a Node:
1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears upon the node.
2. Drag the node to a position. The green square turns to yellow. If the node
belongs to a segment; that segment becomes dotted. If it belongs to an
arc, the arc shape does not change.
3. Drop the node to that position. Note that in the case of drawing in the 3D
View, the new position should be on displayed objects.
Note:
Moving a node at the end of a segment (or arc) will only move that node.
Moving a node at the middle of a segment will move the whole segment.
Picking a point anywhere on a segment except on the end and middle
nodes or on an arc except on the end nodes will transform that point to a
node.
Insert a Node
To Insert a Node:
Continue a Polyline
To Continue a Polyline:
1. Place the cursor over the end (or start) node of a polyline or anywhere
over the last segment of a polyline.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Continue. A dotted line
appears between the cursor and the selected node if end (or start) node
has been chosen or between the cursor and the last node if the last
segment has been chosen.
3. Left-click anywhere in the 3D View to continue the polyline.
1 - Selected node on the polyline 2 - A segment is added after the selected vertex
Delete a Polyline
In 3D (or 2D), after drawing a polyline, the Create, Delete Polyline and Delete
All icons become enabled. Note that the Delete Polyline icon is not present on
the toolbar but can only be reached from the pop-up menu.
In 3D:
In 2D:
Tools in the Production Module 829
Note: You can also delete a polyline while drawing it (or after validating it).
Tip: To delete a polyline that is already created, please use the Undo button. It
is not necessary to close the Polyline Drawing tool for that.
Note: You can also delete a polyline that is set as selected (using the Select
Polyline command).
830 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Move a Polyline
After drawing a polyline (or setting an already created one as selected), you
can use the displacement mode to Pan or Rotate the polyline within the
displayed scene. The displacement mode which comes first is the one chosen
during the last use of that tool.
In 3D:
In 2D:
Tip: You can choose the Selection Mode from the pop-up menu.
Note: Moving an already created polyline (which is set as selected) will not
displace it but only the selection (the green polyline which appears over the
created polyline).
Tools in the Production Module 831
Pan a Polyline
After choosing Pan, a Manipulator in a plane parallel to the screen view
appears. If there is a polyline selected, (or when there are several polylines
drawn), the Manipulator has as origin the selected (or last drawn) polyline’s
center. You can move the selected (or last drawn) polyline along a direction at
once or anywhere in the Manipulator’s plane.
To Pan a Polyline:
1. Click the Selection Mode icon. The Change Move Mode becomes
enabled.
2. Click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.
3. Choose Pan from drop-down list. A Manipulator appears. It is
composed of two Axis-Handles and one Plane-Handle.
4. If you are in 3D, rotate lightly so that the plane - inside which the
Manipulator is - is unparalleled to the screen view.
5. Pick an Axis-Handle to select it; it turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can move the selected polyline is highlighted in yellow. Those
(two in all) for which you cannot move the selected polyline are in mauve.
Move the selected polyline along that direction.
6. Or pick on the Plane-Handle. The two Axis-Handles remain with their own
color and the two directions along which you can move the selected
polyline are highlighted in yellow. The forbidden direction - normal to the
plane - is in mauve. Move the selected polyline in that plane.
7. If you are in 2D, you can only move the selected polyline along a direction.
You may only see one forbidden direction in mauve. If you move the
selected polyline in a plane, you may not see any forbidden direction.
832 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can easily switch between Rotate and Pan, and inversely, by just
picking one of the Handles. The cursor changes to when you hover it over a
Handle.
Tools in the Production Module 833
Rotate a Polyline
After choosing Rotate, a Manipulator of ring shape (in deep blue) with two
extended diagonals (in light blue and mauve) appears in a plane parallel to the
screen view. If there is a polyline selected (or when there are several polylines
drawn), the Manipulator has as origin the selected (or last drawn) polyline’s
center. You can rotate the selected (or last drawn) polyline around an axis
perpendicular to the ring’s plane.
To Rotate a Polyline:
1. Click the Selection Mode icon. The Change Move Mode becomes
enabled.
2. Click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.
3. Choose Rotate from the drop-down list. A Manipulator appears. It has a
Ring Handle with two extended and perpendicular diagonals.
4. If you are in 3D, rotate lightly so that the plane - inside which the two
extended diagonals are - is unparalleled to the screen view. You may see
the direction - around which you can rotate the selected polyline - in
dashes.
5. Pick the Ring Handle; it turns to yellow. The direction around which you
can rotate the selected polyline tilts to deep blue. Rotate the selected
polyline around that direction.
6. If you are in 2D, do the same procedures than step 4. You may not see
any forbidden direction.
Tip: You can also right-click to display the pop-up menu and select first
Change Move Mode and then Rotation.
834 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can easily switch between Pan and Rotate, and inversely, by just
picking one of the Handles. The cursor changes to when you hover it over a
Handle.
Auto-Duplicate a Polyline
In the Station-Based mode, you can duplicate a polyline in two directions
(Horizontal or Vertical). The polyline needs to be a 2D polyline or a 3D
coplanar polyline (all nodes in the same plane).
If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:
If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble SX10
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:
836 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can also select a part of an already duplicated polyline using the
Selection Mode and duplicate it horizontally.
Tools in the Production Module 837
If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:
If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble SX10
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:
838 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can also select a part of an already duplicated polyline using the
Selection Mode and duplicate it vertically.
Tools in the Production Module 839
1. Select a drawn polyline using the Selection Mode *. The Change Move
Mode becomes enabled. The selected polyline color swaps from green to
yellow and a manipulator (with two handles (Green and Red)) appears
over it.
2. Select Copy Selection and Create from the pop-up menu. You cannot see
the duplicated polyline because it is upon the original polyline.
3. If required, click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.
4. Choose between Pan and Rotate.
5. Move the duplicated polyline in consequence. The duplicated polyline
becomes selected (yellow) and the original polyline unselected (green).
Note:
You can also use the following short-cut key Ctrl + D.
(*) If your polyline has been already created in the RealWorks database,
first set it using the Select Polyline command.
840 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create a Polyline
Once you are satisfied with the drawn polyline(s), you can create it (or them) in
the database. The newly created object will be put in the current active folder
under the Models Tree.
To Create a Polyline:
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close Tool.
Note: If you draw several unconnected polylines, they will be created into the
same polyline.
Tip:
You can also select Create from the pop-menu or press Enter.
You can also select Close Tool from the pop-menu or press Esc.
If the polyline is made of one chain, closed, planar and with no auto-
intersections, the property contains the area.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Catenary Drawing feature can be selected in the Line
Work group, on the Drawing tab.
842 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. If required, click the Pick Three Points icon. The cursor becomes as
follows . A yellow cross appears at the picked position.
2. Pick a point on the displayed point cloud. The cursor becomes as follows
. A yellow cross appears at the picked position.
3. Pick another point on the displayed point cloud. The cursor becomes as
follows .
4. Pick the last point on the displayed point cloud. A power line is extracted
from the point cloud and the Create icon becomes enabled.
Note: Pressing Esc. while you are picking points, cancels the points.
Note: An error message appears in the case no power line can be computed
from the picked points, for instance if the points are not on a hanging catenary
shape. You are then prompted to pick new points.
Tools in the Production Module 843
Tip: You can change the width of the created polyline in Preferences / Viewer.
EasyProfile
The idea behind this new feature is to allow you to easily extract profiles along
curbs, pavements, rail lines, cuttings, natural features etc. Profiles are
determined by tracking a pre-determined section. A section can be of segment
and circle arc based shape. This tool requires a point cloud selection to be able
to be activated.
844 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of three parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the EasyProfile procedure.
Caution: You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.
Note: In the Ribbon, the EasyProfile feature can be selected in the Line Work
group, on the Drawing tab.
Tools in the Production Module 845
1 - 2D-curve (profile) in white 2 - Section size (in red) 3 - Preview the tracking result
846 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - First Elements (in red) with profile (in white) 2 - Propagation of consecutive Elements
Note: The Delete Elements and Pick to Continue buttons are not
available before clicking Start.
Tools in the Production Module 847
Caution: You cannot enter a value equal to zero or negative in the Step Size
field.
Delete Sections
To Delete Sections:
1 - The picked Element 2 - The picked Element and those follow are
deleted
Note:
You can undo the deletion by selecting Undo Delete Elements from the
pop-up menu or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z.
You cannot delete the first Element; the one which contains the selected
2D-curve and is used for tracking.
Tools in the Production Module 849
Continue Tracking
To Continue Tracking:
Note: You can undo continuing tracking by selecting Undo Continue from the
pop-up menu or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z.
850 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create Profiles
Once you are satisfied with the tracking result, you can save it in the database.
A new folder is created and rooted under the current project. This folder
contains all computed profiles and a cloud. A profile is always named Prof-xxx
where xxx is its order. The cloud - always named EasyProf-Cloud - contains
points inside the fitted Elements used for tracking profiles.
To Create Profiles:
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Profile Matcher
The idea behind this tool is to allow the user to match or position a profile (2D
curve, cross-section, polyline, etc.) at a specific point and in a given direction in
a 3D scene. We mean by “matching a profile” not just to move it from its
current position to a new one in a 3D scene but also to create this profile in the
RealWorks database. This tool is useful when you import a profile from a CAD
application, and you wish to position it within a 3D scene in RealWorks, or
when you use the EasyProfile tool or when you wish to duplicate a profile's
pattern in different locations in a 3D scene.
Tools in the Production Module 851
1. Select both a point cloud/mesh and a profile from the Project Tree.
2. In the Line Work group, click the Profile Matcher icon. The Profile
Matcher dialog opens.
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of four parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the matching process. The
3D View splits into two horizontal viewers. The top viewer (a 3D viewer)
displays in 3D the selected point cloud or mesh and the selected profile as well
as a 3D-plane. The selected profile is in the 3D-plane. This means that both
have the same position and orientation in the 3D scene. The lower viewer (a
3D-locked viewer) displays in 2D (locked in the XY* plane of the active
coordinate frame) the selected profile and a set of points with a 2D-grid in
superimposition. This set results from slicing the selected point cloud.
Note:
The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the distance constrain mode
below the 3D View.
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Profile Matcher feature can be selected in the Line
Work group, on the Drawing tab.
Tools in the Production Module 853
2. If required and if a point cloud has been selected, un-check Display Cloud.
3. If required and if a mesh has been selected, un-check Display Mesh.
4. If required, un-check Display Plane.
5. If required, click Restore.
The Restore button remains unavailable as long as any 3D-plane has been
validated. After validating a 3D-plane, a profile of the same shape as the
selected one (the one required to activate the tool) is created. This profile is in
the validated 3D-plane. Any transformation has been applied to the selected
profile; it remains unchanged in position and direction. Clicking Restore will
undo the new 3D-plane as well as the new profile.
1 - The initial 3D plane with the selected profile 2 - The new 3D plane with new profile
inside
Note: For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane tool.
For (2), see the Picking Parameters.
Tools in the Production Module 855
Define a Profile
You can arrange the newly defined profile in the 3D-plane by rotating, panning,
scaling up and down or reversing it. The Thickness field is not unavailable
(grayed out) if a mesh has been selected in Step 1. The Thickness value
(cannot be equal to zero) is used for slicing the selected point cloud from each
side of the 3D plane.
Set a Thickness
To Set a Thickness:
Tip: You can also right-click in the 3D-locked viewer and select Start
Interactive Mode or Quit Interactive Mode from the pop-up menu.
856 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - The mouse shape in Rotate 2 - Before rotating the profile 3 - After rotating the profile
mode
Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the m or M key to
activate or deactivate the Interactive Mode.
Tools in the Production Module 857
1 - The mouse in Pan mode 2 - The Profile before panning 3 - The Profile after panning
Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the <Arrow> keys to
pan the profile Up, Down, Right and Left.
858 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the 3D-locked viewer, hold the left and middle buttons pressed.
2. Move the mouse forward to scale down the profile.
3. Move the mouse backward to scale up the profile.
1 - The profile before scaling down 4 - The scale factor before scaling down
2 - The profile after scaling down 5 - The scale factor after scaling down
3 - The mouse shape in Scale mode
Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the + and – keys to
scale the profile Up and Down.
Tools in the Production Module 859
Tip: You can also right-click in the 3D-locked viewer and select Flip Polyline on
Plane from the pop-up menu.
860 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
The Feature Set Creation dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace
window and is composed of three parts. The first part is for collecting points.
The second part is to define feature code. The third and last part allows you to
save the results, close the tool and obtain access to the online help.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Feature Set feature can be selected in the Features
group, on the Drawing tab.
Tools in the Production Module 861
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library . The Feature Code Library Editing
dialog opens.
2. Click New. A new feature code library is added.
3. Click OK.
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing dialog opens.
2. Click Import. The Import Feature Code Library dialog box opens.
3. Navigate through your hard disk to locate the library to be imported and
select it.
4. Click Open.
862 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Click Rename. The feature code library name becomes editable.
3. Enter a new name and press Enter.
4. Click OK.
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Drop down the Library list and select a feature code library.
3. Click Delete. The selected feature code library is deleted.
4. Click OK.
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Click Export. The Export Feature Code Library opens.
3. Enter a new name in the File Name field or keep the default one.
4. Specify a location on your hard disk in which to store the library in the
Look In field.
5. Click Save.
Tools in the Production Module 863
Feature Codes
A Feature Code is a system for codifying Feature Points. A Feature Code
should reflect the Feature Points you intend to collect.
1. Click Edit Feature Code Library. The Feature Code Library Editing dialog
opens.
Tip: Instead of defining Feature Codes, you can import into your project a
library which already contains a set of Feature Codes.
Feature Points
A Feature Point is composed of attributes like its name (Prefix + Index), its 3D
coordinates, its Feature Code and optionally, a Description. The user can
either pick or define a Feature Point.
Note: Instead of selecting Delete Point from the pop-up menu, you can also
use the Del key on your keyboard.
1 - The cursor' shape when placing it between 2 - The last collected feature point has a red
two connected feature points label
3 - The inserted feature point
866 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Place the cursor over a point on the displayed object. An empty point is
not taken into account.
2. Click to add a Feature Point at this position.
1 - The last collected Feature Point has a red 2 - A Feature Point has been added at this
label position
Tools in the Production Module 867
1 - The selected Feature Point current position 2 - The cursor' shape while dragging and
dropping the selected Feature Point
3 - The selected Feature Point new position
868 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Close a set of feature points 2 - Field for selecting display 3 - The number of feature
mode points
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up
menu and select Close.
Tools in the Production Module 869
3. Click Apply (or OK). The Feature Code Library Editing dialog closes.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Edit Library feature can be selected from the Features
group, on the Drawing tab.
Edit a Library
You can add a new Feature Code Library in your current project by creating
one or by importing one that originates from surveying applications. If the new
library is empty of feature codes, a warning message appears and it will be
deleted. A new library is always named LIB plus X corresponding to its order of
creation.
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library . The Feature Code Library Editing
dialog opens.
2. Click New. A new feature code library is added.
3. Click OK.
870 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing dialog opens.
2. Click Import. The Import Feature Code Library dialog box opens.
3. Navigate through your hard disk to locate the library to be imported and
select it.
4. Click Open.
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Click Rename. The feature code library name becomes editable.
3. Enter a new name and press Enter.
4. Click OK.
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Drop down the Library list and select a feature code library.
3. Click Delete. The selected feature code library is deleted.
4. Click OK.
Tools in the Production Module 871
1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Click Export. The Export Feature Code Library opens.
3. Enter a new name in the File Name field or keep the default one.
4. Specify a location on your hard disk in which to store the library in the
Look In field.
5. Click Save.
1. Click Edit Feature Code Library. The Feature Code Library Editing dialog
opens.
Tip: Instead of defining Feature Codes, you can import into your project a
library which already contains a set of Feature Codes.
Cutting Plane
The Cutting Plane tool enables to cut a selected entity (point cloud or mesh)
with a plane whose position and orientation need to be defined by the user.
The result of this cut is a sectioned point cloud or a polyline. This tool can be
used alone as a main tool or inside a main tool as a sub-tool. In the latter case,
it is mainly used as a visual quality checking tool and no results can be
created.
Tools in the Production Module 873
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of four parts. The first part (Define Cutting Plane) contains tools for defining a
plane. The second part (Define Slice) allows you to set a thickness for the
plane defined in the previous step and to choose between Single Slice and
Multi Slice. The third part (Control) is to preview the result(s). The last step is to
save the result(s).
A planar view with a 2D grid that you can customize opens below the 3D View.
A plane perpendicular to the screen and a slider appear in the 3D View. This
plane runs across a point that corresponds to the centre of the selection
(required to open the tool). This point sets the altitude (Offset) of that plane. In
this case, it is 0 mm*. The bounding box that highlights the selection delineates
the size of that plane.
874 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3. From now, you should define a plane. First, you should set its orientation.
Then you can define its position.
Note: (*) The current unit of measurement is in Millimeter. You can change it in
the Preferences dialog.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Cutting Plane feature can be selected in the Slice
Tools group, on the Surfaces tab.
There are three methods for visually defining the orientation of a plane. The
first method is to pick two points. The initial plane will pass through the line
defined by these two points and perpendicular to the screen plane. The second
method is to pick three points. The initial plane will pass through the plane
drawn by these three points. The third method is to define a plane. The initial
plane will be parallel to the defined plane.
1 - Select From Frame 3 - Pick Axis From Object 5 - Pick Three Points on Plane
2 - Fit 4 - Plane Perpendicular to 6 - Edit Parameters
Screen
Set Coordinates
To Set Coordinates:
1. Click the Pick Axis from Object icon. The initial cutting plane
disappears from the 3D View.
2. In the WorkSpace window, click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.
4. Select Display Geometry.
5. Click an object.
Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
876 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Pick 3 Points on Plane icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained). Picking is always on the displayed
object.
Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
Tools in the Production Module 877
Fit a Plane
1 - In (i) 4 - Plane
2 - Out (o) 5 - Create Fitted Geometry
3 - Display Un-partitioned Points 6 - Close Tool (Escape)
To Fit a Plane:
1. Fence a set of points for which you want to fit with a plane.
2. Click the Plane icon. Kept points are fitted with a plane.
Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; fitting a plane can be applied
to the entire point cloud.
878 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; finding the best cross plane
can be applied to the entire point cloud.
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
1. Click the Edit Parameters icon. The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens.
2. Click on the pull down arrow and do one of the following:
By Offset
To Define a Position By Offset:
Note:
(*) In the current unit of measurement. You can change it in Preferences.
Moving the slider Up (or Down) will increase (or decrease) the Offset
value.
880 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
By Interpolation
To Define a Position By Interpolation:
8. Define the exact position of the plane by entering a value between 0 and 1
in the Ratio field.
Tools in the Production Module 881
Define a Slice
After defining a plane, you now need to decide whether to perform a Single
Slice or Multiple Slice cutting. In the case of a Single Slice, the cutting will be
along the defined plane. You will then choose the thickness of the slice in order
to cut the point clouds. In the case of a Multiple Slice, you also need to define
the interval between two slices. The slices will be propagated from the position
of the defined plane in two directions with the given interval. The number of
slices indicated at the bottom of the dialog is calculated in such a way that
slices will span the whole range of the point cloud along the normal direction of
the defined plane.
Note: The Thickness value cannot exceed the Interval value. It can only be the
same.
882 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: If the selected object is a mesh, the cutting result will be a polyline.
Otherwise the result will be a cloud slice.
Tools in the Production Module 883
[A]
Note: If the selected object is a mesh, the cutting results will be polylines.
Otherwise the results will be cloud slices.
Build Polylines
To Build a Polyline from a Single Slice:
Click Display Next Slice to view the one after the active slice.
Tools in the Production Module 885
Click Display Previous Slice to view the one before the active slice.
Click Display First Slice to view the first slice.
Click Display Last Slice to view the last slice.
Key in a number and press Enter.
Note:
Instead of clicking Display Next Slice or (Display Previous Slice), you can
also use the Up (or Down) key on your keyboard.
You can multi-select cloud slices (or polylines) in the 3D View using the
Ctrl + A shortcut keys, open the 2D-EasyLine tool and build polylines
based on the selected cloud slices or polylines.
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Note:
Leaving the Cutting Plane tool without saving the result(s) will make
appeared a warning message.
(*) The folder default name is Cross-Cut-Interval -XX-Th YY. XX is the
Interval value and YY the Thickness value.
Note: All objects resulting from the use of the tool has the "Unclassified" layer.
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of several parts. The first part contains two sub-tools (Segmentation and
Sampling)*. If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite
points (or reduce its size by simplifying it). The way that point cloud is rendered
changes. Its Rendering swaps to White Color. If the input is a mesh, both sub-
tools are grayed-out and Its Rendering remains unchanged. The second part
enables to define an elevation range. The third part enables to set a tolerance
for contour decimation. The fourth part is to define principal contours and the
last part lets you display and save the contour creation results.
Note:
You can leave the Contouring tool by pressing Esc or by right-clicking
anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Close.
(*) The results issued from the use of both sub-tools cannot be saved. The
Create command is deactivated.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Contouring feature can be selected in the Slice Tools
group, on the Surfaces tab.
888 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Pick Low Elevation icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears. The Cutting Plane and the graduated vertical bar are removed
from the 3D View.
2. Pick a point on displayed object in the 3D View. It’s up to the user to pick a
point (freely or with constraint).
To Preview Contours:
In the top window, each contour is displayed with a color. A graduated scale at
the left side gives the altitude information for a given color. An information box
at the right top corner displays the active (selected) contour's properties: Order
and Elevation. In bottom view, there is by default a 2D Grid superposed (if not
hidden previously) on the displayed contour. You can choose to change the 2D
Grid's size or to hide it by using the corresponding items from the pop-up
menu. An information box at the right top corner displays in addition to the
properties listed above the Fitted Polyline's size. A View Manager toolbar
appears at the bottom of the 3D View. You can use the icons in this toolbar to
change the configuration of the 2D sub-views.
Tools in the Production Module 893
1. Check the Define Principal Contours option. The First and Skip fields
become enabled as well as the Pick Principal Contour icon. A label
appears next to each contour.
1 - The Define Principal Contours option 3 - Define the number of contours to skip
2 - Define the first principal contour by entering 4 - Pick Principal Contour
a number
1 - Intermediate contours have no label 2 - Each principal contour is shown with a label
If the active contour is other than the first contour, you can use the Up and
Down keys of your keyboard (or the Display Previous Contour and Display
Next Contour buttons in the Step 4 of the Contouring dialog) to display the next
and the previous contour in the bottom view. Be sure to first select the top view
to be able to use the Up and Down keys. It should have a yellow frame.
Clicking the Display First Contour and Display Last Contour buttons will set the
first and last contour as active (selected). You can key in a contour’s order in
Step 4 to select it. Do not forget to validate by pressing the Enter key.
Tip: You can visualize several contours in the bottom view. Please, select the
ones you need from the top view by combining the use of Ctrl key with left-
clicking; or multi-select all using the Ctrl + A shortcut keys.
896 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
You can create as many contours as required without leaving the Contouring
tool. If you decide to leave this tool without creating any contours, a message
appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the action you are going
to perform.
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Note: You can leave the Contouring tool by pressing Esc or by right-clicking
anywhere in any window and select Close from the pop-up menu.
Manipulate a Label
Each principal contour has a label which contains the length information in text.
You can move that label to any location in the 3D View. Note that you should
first create the contours in the database and leave the Contouring tool to be
able to manipulate the labels.
To Manipulate a Label:
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of five parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling.
The second part allows you to define the 2D cutting position. The third part is
to set section parameters. The fourth part is assigned for calculating and
displaying sections. The fifth and last part is to save the created sections in the
database, close the tool and give access to the online help. The selected point
cloud is displayed in white in the 3D View, and the others are hidden.
Tip: You can also select a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and fitted polyline
(or set of segments) as input of the Profile/Cross Section tool.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Profile/Cross Section feature can be selected in the
Slice Tools group, on the Surfaces tab.
Tools in the Production Module 899
Select a Method
There are two methods for computing a set of cross-sections: From Segments
and From Path. If the loaded project does not contain any set of segments, the
button From Segments stays dimmed. If there are some*, the button becomes
enabled. The button From Path is always enabled even if there is no fitted
polyline in the loaded project. Before selecting a method, the No Path Selected
and No Bounds texts are displayed and the number of cross-sections is equal
to 0.
To Select a Method:
Click the From Segments button. The Cut Positions from Segments dialog
opens.
Click the From Path button. The Cut Positions on Path dialog opens.
Tip:
If the input is a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and fitted polyline, the No
Bounds text remains displayed. The fitted polyline name appears in the
Path line. The number of cross-sections is calculated based on the default
value of the Interval parameter.
If the input is a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and set of segments, the
No Path Selected and No Bounds texts remain displayed. The number of
cross-sections is equal to the number of segments.
Select a Path
If there is at least one path (polyline) in the loaded project. You can select it for
calculating the cross-sections. In that case, the selected point cloud (or mesh)
and the current path (polyline) - the one listed in the selection box - with its
projection (if existing) in the XY* plane are displayed in the 3D View.
To Select a Path:
1. In the Cut Positions on Path dialog, click the pull down arrow.
2. Select a path (polyline) from the drop down list.
1 - Combo box for selecting an existing path 3 - Draw and Create Path in Database
2 - Radio buttons for choosing between 4 - Field for setting the Starting value on the
Horizontal Path or Use 3D Path path
If the Use Horizontal Path option has been checked, cross-sections will be
computed from the path projection in the XY plane. If the Use 3D Path option
has been checked, cross-sections will be computed perpendicularly from the
path in 3D (not projected in the XY plane). The Starting on a path is like its
origin; its default-value is equal to zero but you can set it to a value that meets
your need.
Tools in the Production Module 901
Note:
The selected path (polyline) has to be regular (one chain with at least
three points).
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
902 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Draw a Path
If any path (polyline) exists in your project, the combo box is grayed out. You
have to create at least one in the database. In that case, only the selected
scene (point cloud or mesh) is shown in the 3D View. The scene is constrained
in the XY* plane of the active coordinate frame and movements while picking
points are restricted to navigation movements. You can rotate the complete
scene around the Z* axis, zoom (in or out) along this same axis and pan in the
XY* plane.
To Draw a Path:
1. Click the Draw and Create Path in Database icon. The Drawing toolbar
appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a 2D grid
superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in the 2D constraint mode. The mouse cursor changes to a
pencil.
2. Pick at least two points (free or constrained).
3. Click End Line. The last picked point ends the line.
4. Or click Close Line. The start and end picked points are linked with a
segment in order to form a closed line.
5. Click Create. The drawn line is saved and created in the database as a
polyline.
Note:
If the 2D Grid had been hidden in a previous case, it will also be hidden
when you activate the Polyline Drawing tool.
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
Tools in the Production Module 903
1 - Set the Start/End position 3 - Reload the initial Start/End 4 - Pick the Start/End position
by inputting a value position 5 - An estimation of the
2 - Reverse the path direction number of sections
904 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Here below are two screen-captures showing the Start and End positions when
the Use Horizontal Path option has been chosen.
1 - The Start position on the horizontal 3 - The End position on the horizontal
(projected) path (projected) path
2 - The Start position modified on the horizontal 4 - Pick to modify the Start position on the
(projected) path horizontal (projected) path
Here below are two screen-captures showing the Start and End positions when
the Use 3D Path option has been chosen.
Tools in the Production Module 905
1 - The Start position on the 3D path 3 - The End position on the 3D path
2 - The Start position modified on the 3D path 4 - Pick to modify the Start position on the 3D
path
3. Click the Reload Initial Start Position On Path icon (if required).
4. Click the Reload Initial End Position On Path icon (if required).
1. Click the Pick Start Position On Path icon. The mouse cursor shape
changes to a pointer.
2. Pick a point along the path (polyline). The picked point becomes the Start
point.
3. Repeat the two above steps form the End position.
4. Click the Reload Initial Start Position On Path icon (if required).
5. Click the Reload Initial End Position On Path icon (if required).
Define a Width
The Interval between two consecutive cross-sections is not enough to define
them along the path (polyline). You also need to define their width by bounding
them from each side. The left and right boundaries that delineate the width of
each cross-section can be equal or different one from each other. The Width of
a cross-section on a given position on the path (polyline) is the width of the
point cloud.
To Define a Width:
1. Check the Use Fixed Width option. The Left and Right fields become
editable.
2. Enter a new value in the Left field.
3. Enter a new value in the Right field.
1. In the Cut Positions from Segments dialog, click on the pull-down button.
2. Select a group from the drop-down list.
1 - A combo box for selecting a group of 3 - The number of segments in the selected
segments group
2 - The selected segments (in yellow) 4 - The selected segments projected in the XY
plane (in red)
The number of segments in the selected group appears below the selection
list. Each segment (in yellow) and its projection (in red) in the XY* plane of the
active coordinate frame are shown in the 3D View. Note that the segments in
yellow are in 3D while those in red are in 2D.
Define a Path
As in the From Path method, a path (if available in your project) allows you to
generate a profile and to set the cross sectioning direction (Start and End
positions). Note that a path is not necessary for generating cross-sections; that
why this step (in the From Segments method) is optional. A path becomes
necessary if you wish to order all cross-sections and to have the position of
each of them along the profile (distance from the Start position to the current
(active) cross-section). If no path exists in your project, you can use the Draw
and Create Path in Database tool to draw one.
Tip: You can use a path that comes from the From Path method in the From
Segments method, and conversely.
Tools in the Production Module 909
Select a Path
To Select a Path:
1. Check the Define Path option. The Select Path field becomes active.
2. Click on the Select Path pull-down arrow.
3. Select a path (polyline). The path (polyline) representation appears in the
3D View.
1 - A box for selecting an existing path 4 - The path projected in the XY plane
2 - The Define Path option 5 - The Draw and Create Path in Database
3 - A path
The selected path (in yellow) and its projection in the XY* plan (in red) are
displayed in the 3D View window.
Draw a Path
To Define a Path:
1. Click the Draw and Create Path in Database icon. The Drawing toolbar
appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a 2D grid
superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in the 2D constraint mode.
2. Draw and create a path.
The drawn path (in yellow) and its projection in the XY* plan (in red) are
displayed in the 3D View.
Compute Cross-Sections
The Compute Sections panel remains dimmed if any selection of a set of
segments (or of a fitted polyline) has been performed after
Set a Thickness
The distance between two consecutive cross-sections defined in the previous
step is not a sufficient parameter for computing the whole cross-sections. You
must also define a value which will be used as a cutting thickness along the
profile.
To Set a Thickness:
Note: The Thickness field is enabled only if there is a fitted polyline (or set of
segments) selected.
Set a Tolerance
Tolerance is a parameter used for approximating the model (profile) to the
reality (cloud). The smaller this parameter is, the closer the approximation will
be. Tolerance zero means that the corresponding profile or cross-sections
pass through all sectioned points.
To Set a Tolerance:
Note: The Tolerance field is enabled only if there is a fitted polyline (or set of
segments) selected.
912 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The top left sub-window displays the active (or selected) cross-section as a
linear graph. The sub-window in the top right corner displays the profile as a
linear graph. The third sub-window displays all generated cross-sections with
the path and the profile. The active cross-section is in fuchsia. You can
organize these three sub-windows as you please using the commands of the
toolbar at the bottom of the user interface.
When selecting the From Segments method - in (A) no path has been
selected, the active (selected) cross-section’s position is unknown while its
order is known. In (B) a path has been selected, the same cross-section’s
position is in text in the information box and its order differs from the one in (A).
2. If a point cloud has been selected, un-check the Display Cloud option to
remove the point cloud representation from the 3D View, if required.
3. If a mesh has been selected, un-check the Display Mesh option to remove
the mesh representation from the 3D View, if required.
Tip: You can also right-click inside a graph for which you want to perform a
print-out. The pop-up menu drops down. Then select Print.
Tools in the Production Module 915
Drag and drop the graph (with the left button) to a new location to pan it.
Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in/out.
Or use the left and middle buttons.
[A] [B]
Tip: Instead of clicking Display Next Section or (Display Previous Section), you
can also use the Up (or Down) key on your keyboard.
Note: The Display Sections panel becomes enabled only if a preview of cross-
sections has been performed.
Tools in the Production Module 917
These results are fitted polylines and can be exported via DXF/DGN formats to
AutoCAD® and MicroStation®.
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Note:
Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Instead of selecting Close, click inside a sub-view and press Esc.
Leaving the Profile/Cross-Section tool without leaving the results will make
appeared a warning message.
918 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the Ribbon, the Move Labels feature can be selected in the Slice
Tools group, on the Surfaces (or Drawing) tab.
919
The Slice Tools group includes a series of tools with the slicing capability.
From either a point cloud or a mesh, the user can create a terrain contour map,
a set profile and cross-sections alone an alignment, or performs a slice.
The Volume group includes only one tool. It enables to compute a volume from
a point cloud or a mesh.
Fitting
This tool is used for fitting a geometry to a set of points. The geometry can be
a plane, a sphere or a cylinder. Creating a plane (or a cylinder) can be useful
when you need to compare a surface to a geometric model in the Surface-to-
Model Inspection (see "Inspect a Surface and a Model" on page 995) tool.
920 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select and display one point cloud (or more*) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Surface group, click the Fitting icon. The Fitting toolbar appears
as well as an information window at the top right corner of the 3D View.
The information window displays the total number of points in the selected
point cloud (Right Number) and the number of points after defining a
region for fitting (Left Number). Before fencing, the Right Number and the
Left Number are both equal.
If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option
(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View are hidden except the one selected. All of the displayed objects have
their bulb icon turned to Off.
If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed. All displayed objects have their bulb icon remained On, except
the one selected.
Note: You can fit the whole selected point cloud without fencing as Fit
Geometry to Cloud is active. If no fence has been defined, a geometry also
appears when clicking Sphere, Cylinder, Vertical Cylinder, Plane or Horizontal
Plane. In this case, the geometry fits all points of the selected point cloud and
the two numbers of points in the information window remain unchanged.
Caution: (*) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Fitting feature can be selected in the Surface group,
on the Surfaces tab.
Tools in the Production Module 921
1. Navigate through the 3D scene to find a set of points for which you want to
fit with a geometry.
2. Fence this set of points by drawing a polygonal fence.
3. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View.
4. Select End Fence from the pop-up menu. The In and Out icons become
active.
The number of points in the selected point cloud will be diminished from
the amount of points used for fitting (in the information window and in the
3D View).
Tip:
You can also select In (or Out) from the pop-up menu or use the related
short-cut key I (or O).
Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, press the Space
Bar.
Note:
Pressing Esc will undo a closed fence (validated) or a fence in progress
(still to be validated).
After fencing, the Display Un-partitioned Points becomes enabled. Clicking
on it will reload all points of the selected point cloud.
Caution: Be careful with the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting
Segmentation option in the Preferences dialog. If you decide to keep the option
unchecked, all displayed clouds remain displayed with the selected cloud after
entering the tool. You are able to fence, not only the selected cloud but also
those that are not selected (but only displayed). This may be confusing but
keep in mind that the displayed clouds are not taken into account in the fencing
result.
922 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
4. If Sphere has been chosen, the Fitting toolbar looks as shown below. The
Diameter field becomes enabled.
If Auto has been chosen, a Sphere appears so that it fits all points inside
the fence.
If 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200 mm and 230 mm (or a user-defined
value) has been chosen, a Sphere whose diameter is constrained by the
chosen (or defined) value appears.
Tip:
You can fit points directly inside a drawn fence without using In (or Out).
You can use the F short-cut key instead of clicking the Fit Geometry to
Cloud icon. The geometry type used for fitting will be the current one.
Note:
After fitting, the Display Unpartitioned Points icon becomes unavailable.
Pressing Esc will undo the geometry fitting as well as the drawn fence.
The fitted geometry disappears from the 3D View.
The information window at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the
RMS Deviation value after fitting with a Cylinder, Vertical Cylinder, Plane,
Horizontal Plane or Sphere.
(*) The value will not be kept anymore if no fitting has been performed.
924 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
A Fitted Object is then created and rooted in the Models Tree under the
current project and shown in the 3D View.
The selected Point Cloud recovers its total number of points (in the
information window and in the 3D View).
Note:
Before leaving the Fitting tool, be sure to create the newly fitted geometry
in the database; otherwise it will be lost.
Pressing Esc will close the Fitting tool but will not cancel the created
geometry.
The Create In feature can only be selected from the pop-up menu. It is
available only if there is at least one group of models under the selection
(required to open the Fitting tool). Otherwise, it won't appear in the pop-up
menu.
Tip: Instead of clicking on a button in the Fitting toolbar, you can also select its
corresponding command from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 925
Create Meshes
The purpose of the Mesh Creation tool is to create a triangulated mesh from a
point cloud which, in this case, must have no geometry. Such a mesh can be
used for further editing, texture mapping, and ortho-projection image creation
or as input for the Cutting Plane tool. You can also export it to other software in
DXF (or DGN) format.
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of four parts. The first one enables to edit a point cloud previously selected and
is composed of the Sampling and Segmentation tools. The selected point cloud
is called Working Cloud and its total number of points is displayed in this
dialog. The second part of this dialog allows you to select a projection mode.
The third and last parts enable previewing and building meshes.
Frequently, the selected cloud contains many points, you may need to
decimate them before doing the triangulation. You may also decide to generate
a mesh on just a part of the selected cloud. To do this, you can use the
Segmentation and the Sampling sub-tools.
Note: Sampling and Segmentation can be selected either from the pop-up
menu or from the dialog.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Mesh Creation feature can be selected in the Surface
group, on the Surfaces tab.
926 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
There is only one way to define a projection cylinder. There is another method
for computing meshes from the selected point cloud. This method (called No
Projection) is based to any projection surface. Satisfactory results may be
obtained where the selected point cloud is relatively free of spikes and peaks
on its surface.
1 - Set From Frame 3 - Pick Axis From Object 5 - Pick Three Points on Plane
2 - Fit 4 - Plane Perpendicular to 6 - Edit Parameters
Screen
Note:
For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane tool.
When selecting (2), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears, it’s up to you
to do a free picking or a constrained picking.
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
928 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Pick Axis from Object . The initial projection disappears from the
3D View.
2. Click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.
4. Select Display Geometry.
5. Click one point.
Draw a Circle
To Draw a Circle:
Note: Picking can be done anywhere - on the selection (point cloud or mesh)
or not. These two points determine the projection cylinder’s diameter and its
direction is perpendicular to the screen view.
Draw a Cylinder
To Draw a Cylinder:
Note: Picking should be on the selection (point cloud or mesh) for the two first
points and anywhere the third point (on selection or not). The first and second
picked points give the projection cylinder’s direction and the second and third
picked points determine its diameter.
930 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
5. Click OK.
Select No Projection
By choosing the No Projection method, the user can compute a mesh on more
complex geometries. The point cloud, selected as input, will be spatially
sampled with a 2 mm resolution for reducing the point cloud density where it is
too high, i.e. close to the scanner. The resulting mesh will be slightly
smoothed: it will not exactly pass through the input points.
Note: When the input point cloud has less than 90% of non-zero normals, the
normals are discarded from the mesh computation. When it has more than
90% of non-zero normals, the normals are used in the mesh computation.
Tools in the Production Module 931
Preview a Mesh
Before previewing a mesh, the Number of Vertices and Number of Triangles in
the dialog are both equal to zero.
To Preview a Mesh:
1. Check the Display Edges option. This will display the edges of triangles for
easier verification of the result.
2. If needed, uncheck the Display Points option. The input representation is
removed from the 3D View.
3. If needed, check the Remove Discontinuities option. This will remove the
triangles around surface discontinuities (spikes, peaks etc.).
4. Click on the Preview Meshes button. The triangulation procedure will be
performed.
Note:
The Remove Discontinuities option is not available in the No Projection
method.
The Display Edges, Display Points and Remove Discontinuities options
can be checked either before or after previewing the meshes.
Tip: Preview Meshes can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
932 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create a Mesh
By clicking on the Create button, the previewed mesh will be created in the
RealWorks database. If you select several point clouds, the corresponding
meshes will be created in association with each other. You cannot create a
mesh without performing a preview. RealWorks will forbid you to do so by
inhibiting the Create button.
To Create a Mesh:
Tip: Create and Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Edit Meshes
We have explained in the previous section how to compute a mesh from a
point cloud using the Mesh Creation tool. Here, we are going to describe a set
of tools which can be used in complement of the previous one in order to
improve the quality of the mesh computation. The Mesh Editing tool allows you
to edit a mesh: you can delete its vertices, edges or triangles, smooth or refine
it, remove noisy peaks, extract a part from it in order to create a new mesh or
to texture map or invert normal.
Tools in the Production Module 933
Note: If you click on the Reverse Selection icon without performing any
selection, the whole mesh displayed in the 3D View will be selected.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Mesh Editing feature can be selected in the Surface
group, on the Surfaces tab.
934 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Select an Element
You can select each element that composes a mesh. Please, use the Select
Elements icon to pick an element, no matter the element could be. Or use
the Select Vertices, Select Edges and Select Triangles icons to respectively
pick a vertex, an edge and a triangle.
Pick an Element
To Pick an Element:
Note:
The Keep Selected and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed (for
either a vertex or an edge) and become enabled (for a triangle).
To add a new element to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then
pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.
The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged (for either a
vertex or an edge) and is updated (for a triangle).
Tip: The Select Element icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 935
Pick a Vertex
To Pick a Vertex:
Note:
The Keep Selected and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed.
To add a new vertex to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then
pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.
The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged.
Pick an Edge
To Pick an Edge:
Note:
The Keep Selected and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed.
To add a new edge to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then pick.
Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.
The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged.
936 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Pick a Triangle
To Pick a Triangle:
Note:
The Keep Selected and Keep Unselected icons become enabled.
To add a new triangle to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then
pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.
The number of "Selected Triangles" is updated according to the number of
triangles that has been selected.
Tools in the Production Module 937
Fence an Area
You can select by fencing an area on the selected mesh as with the
Segmentation of a Point Cloud.
To Fence an Area:
Tip:
You can press Space Bar to close the fence instead of double-clicking.
You can click left + Ctrl to multi-select or click left + Shift to remove from
the selection.
Note: Picking can be done out of the displayed mesh. The Keep Selected (or
Keep Unselected) command is similar to the In (or Out) operation in the
Segmentation tool.
The Reload All command becomes active after choosing Keep Selected or
Keep Unselected. You can then reload all triangles of the selected mesh.
938 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Edit a Mesh
There are several tools for editing the selection previously displayed. You can
delete, refine, smooth, remove peaks, extract to new mesh, invert normal on
triangles or flip selected edges. Note that the Refine, Smooth, Remove Peaks
and Invert Triangle Normal features do not require a selection on the mesh
(see [A1]). Each of them (when selected) will be applied to the whole mesh.
After selecting a triangle or a set of triangles, vertices and edges, Delete and
Extract to New Mesh become active in addition to the four tools named above
(see [A2]). Each of them (when selected) will be applied to the selection done
in Step 1 (vertices, edges, triangles or an area of the mesh).
[A1] [A2]
The Show Models in List Window lists polylines in the project (see [A3]). After
selecting one, the Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) icon
becomes enabled (see [A4]).
[A3] [A4]
1 - Show Models in List Window 2 - Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using
Polyline(s)
After selecting a vertex (or an edge), Step 2 of the Mesh Editing dialog
becomes as below in [B1] (or [B2]).
[B1] [B2]
Tools in the Production Module 939
Smooth a Mesh
The Smooth feature enables to apply a median filtering to the vertices of the
selected triangles.
To Smooth a Mesh:
Refine a Mesh
The Refine feature consists of swapping or splitting edges.
To Refine a Mesh:
Reverse Triangles
To Reverse Triangles:
Note: The Invert Triangle Normal will be applied to the whole mesh in display
whatever the selection you made.
Deleting a vertex will delete all triangles of the displayed mesh having that
vertex in common.
Deleting an edge will delete all triangles of the displayed mesh having that
edge in common.
Deleting a triangle will only delete that triangle.
In all cases, the "Displayed Triangles" number in the Mesh Editing dialog
is then updated.
Tip: Instead of selecting Delete, you can use the related short-cut key Del.
When you extract the selection to a new mesh, the "Display Triangles" number
in the Mesh Editing dialog is updated.
Tip: Instead of selecting the Extract to New Mesh icon, you can use the related
short-cut key P.
Tools in the Production Module 941
1. Click the Show Models in List View icon. Polylines are listed in the List
window and none is displayed in the 3D View.
2. Select the appropriate polyline from the List window. The Enhance Mesh
With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) button becomes enabled.
3. Toggle the selected Polyline's On/Off icon On (if required). It is displayed
in the 3D View.
4. Click the Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) icon.
The new mesh contains new edges that correspond to the Polyline. All the
vertices of the previous mesh are preserved during this operation.
Tip: The Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) icon can also be
selected from the pop-up menu.
942 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Flip an Edge
When an edge is shared by two triangles, you can use the Flip Selected Edges
tool for swapping it so that it is still shared by these two triangles but from the
two other vertices.
To Flip an Edge:
Note: An unmatched image cannot be used for texture mapping. This is why
selecting one will not show it as a thumbnail in Step 3 and the Apply Texture
button is dimmed.
Note: Several matched images may be selected at the same time and applied
as textures.
Tools in the Production Module 943
1. If there are some images in your project, all of them are listed in the
List window and none is displayed.
2. Jump to step 5.
Or
If there is a non-colored TZF Scan in your project, nothing occurs. Skip the
Map Texture step.
If there is a colored TZF Scan in your project, the Create Station Images from
TZF Scan Color process is then launched.
Once the process has completed, a set of six matched images is created, one
for each face of a cube centered on the station location. All matched images
are put under a folder named according to the station.
5. Jump to step 5.
Or
If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:
If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble SX10
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:
Select a type by checking the corresponding check box. The number of images
of the chosen type is displayed. The selected images are displayed in overlap
in the background., only if the Display Images option has been chosen.
5. Select the matched image behind the selected mesh in the 3D View
window. It is shown as a thumbnail in Step 3.
6. Click the Apply Texture button.
If the Project Image Borders option is not checked, only the selected
triangles that lie entirely inside the image will be textured.
If the Project Image Borders option is checked, the selected triangles that
lie entirely inside the image will be textured in the same way, but the
triangles that intersect the selected image boundaries will also be split. In
this way, the whole image is used for texturing the selected triangles. Note
that the shape of the mesh does not change during this operation.
Tools in the Production Module 945
1. Select an area (or the entirety) of the mesh where a texture removal is
required.
2. Click on the Remove Existing Texture icon.
1. Select an area (or the entirety) of the mesh where a texture overwriting is
required.
2. Click the Show Images in List View icon. Matched images are listed in the
List window and none is displayed.
3. Select the appropriate image from the List window. It is shown as a
thumbnail in Step 3.
4. Toggle the selected image's On/Off icon On. It is displayed in an
independent window in the 3D View. The displayed mesh is aligned with
the camera's point of view.
5. Check the Overwrite Existing Texture option.
6. Click Apply Texture.
946 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Apply.
2. Click Close.
Note: Leaving the Mesh Editing tool without applying all changes in the
database will make appear a message.
Tools in the Production Module 947
A merged mesh, with the "Unclassified" layer and whose name is OBJECTX, is
created under the current project in the Models Tree. X is its order. This mesh
has no point cloud representation inside.
Note: In the Ribbon, you can reach the Merge Meshes feature from the
Surface group, on the Surfaces tab.
Manipulate a Mesh
The feature detailed hereafter lets you to manipulate a mesh (or a set of
meshes) by moving it from one position to another position along the three
directions of the active frame, and by rotating it centered on its center (one
defined by the user) in order to match it with a cloud.
To Move a Mesh:
Pan a mesh.
Rotate a mesh.
Change the manipulator location.
Note: In the Ribbon, you can reach the Move Mesh feature from the Surface
group, on the Surfaces tab.
948 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Pan a Mesh
To Pan a Mesh:
5. Pick a Plane Handle. It turns to yellow as well as the plane one which the
handle is lied on.
6. Drag to displace the mesh on the yellow plane.
Tools in the Production Module 949
Tip: You can select Pan Along Home Frame Axes from the pop-up menu.
Rotate a Mesh
To Rotate a Mesh:
Tip: You can also use the following combination of keys: Shift + R.
Tip: You can select Change Manipulator Location from the pop-up menu
951
Calculate a Volume
The Volume Calculation tool enables to compute the volume between a point
cloud and a plane, between two point clouds, between a point cloud and a
mesh or between two meshes. The volume computation is based on a grid
method and the result is represented in the 3D View by a graph of vertical color
lines with scale. You can choose in the Preferences dialog the units to
represent the computed volumes.
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of six parts. The first part contains two sub-tools (Segmentation and Sampling).
The second part enables to define a plane. The third part lets you set its
resolution. The fourth part enables to preview the volume computation result,
display (or hide) the selected surface(s), check the computed volume(s) to
keep and edit a report. The fifth part is to edit the computed volume(s). The
sixth part is to save the volume computation result, and close the tool.
If one surface has been selected, this surface will be automatically displayed in
the 3D View with its own color. If two surfaces have selected, the first (by
selection order) will be set as Reference Surface and displayed in Red and the
second as Comparative surface and in Green.
Note:
If the selected surface is a mesh, these two sub-tools (Segmentation and
Sampling) are unavailable.
If the input contains a point cloud and a mesh; the mesh will be by default
Reference Surface and will not able to change to the Comparison Surface.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Volume Calculation feature can be selected in the
Volume group, on the Surfaces tab.
952 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Define a Plane
A plane perpendicular to the Z-axis of the active coordinate frame appears.
To Define a Plane:
Note: After selecting (1), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears. You can pick
free or constrained points.
954 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fit a Plane
1 - In (i) 4 - Plane
2 - Out (o) 5 - Create Fitted Geometry
3 - Display Un-partitioned Points 6 - Close Tool (Escape)
To Fit a Plane:
1. Fence a set of points for which you want to fit with a plane.
2. Click the Plane icon. Kept points are fitted with a plane.
Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; fitting a plane can be applied
to the entire point cloud.
Tools in the Production Module 955
Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; finding the best cross plane
can be applied to the entire point cloud.
1. Click the Pick Axis from Object icon. The initial cutting plane
disappears from the 3D View.
2. In the WorkSpace window, click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.
4. Select Display Geometry.
5. Click an object.
Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
956 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
1. Click the Pick 3 Points on Plane icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained). Picking is always on the displayed
object.
Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
Tools in the Production Module 957
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
1. Click the Edit Parameters icon. The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens.
2. Click on the pull down arrow and do one of the following:
Define a Position
Once the initial plane is well oriented, you have to define its position in the 3D
space.
To Define a Position:
The initial plane in the 3D View is hidden and the Volume Calculation dialog
appears in grey. This means that the options and commands from this dialog
are unavailable. The dialog comes back to its initial state when you have
picked a point.
Note: The picking must be done on the selected surface (point cloud or mesh).
Tools in the Production Module 959
Preview a Volume
You can perform a preview to visualize the result before saving it in the
database. You can change the parameters as many times as you please and
perform a preview without leaving this tool. There are two display options (one
per surface). If one surface has been selected as input, only one display option
is available. See (A1). If two surfaces have been selected as input, the two
display options are all available. You can reverse this comparison order by
clicking on the Swap Reference/Comparison Surfaces icon. The Reference
Surface becomes a surface to inspect and its color swaps to green. The
Comparison Surface becomes a Reference Surface and its color turns to red.
See (B1).
If one surface (point cloud or mesh) has been selected, the volume
computation is done between this surface and the plane defined in Step 1. Two
volumes are computed if the plane cuts the selected surface in two. The
Positive (Cut) volume is the part (of the selected surface) above the plane
while the Negative (Fill) volume is the part below. The sum of both is the
volume computation result. A unique volume is computed if the plane does not
cut the selected surface.
Tools in the Production Module 961
If two surfaces (point cloud(s) or mesh(es)) have been selected, the volume
computation is done between both of them.
Note:
962 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Edit and export the volume result(s) 2 - Check Volume to Keep options
1. Clear the Positive (Cut) option. The positive representation of the volume
is hidden.
2. Or clear the Negative (Fill) option. The negative representation of the
volume is hidden.
Note: You cannot have the Positive (Cut) and Negative (Fill) options both
unchecked. You need to have at least one checked.
Tools in the Production Module 963
Edit a Volume
The volume previously computed may have irregularities like holes or peaks,
you can then edit it by keeping (or removing) the part you want (or do not
want), completing holes, smoothing or filtering according to two given
elevations. The cursor is in the segmentation mode and only the Range Based
Filtering feature is available. This means that it is up to the user to filter the
computed volume or to fence an area for editing.
1. Click the Range Based Filtering icon. The Range Based Filtering dialog
opens.
2. Enter a value in the Minimum Value field.
3. Enter a value in the Maximum Value field.
4. Click OK.
Parts of the volume out of the defined range are not taken into account
Tools in the Production Module 965
Fence an Area
If you start by fencing an area on the volume, the Fill Holes and Smooth Cells
icons become enabled and the Range Based Filtering icon swaps from
enabled to disabled.
To Fence an Area:
Tip:
You can also right-click in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and
select the command you want to use.
Instead of selecting Keep Cells (or Empty Cells), you can also use the
related short-cut key I (or O).
Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can also
double-click.
Note:
Once a fence has been drawn, the user can no longer manipulate the
volume.
To start a new fence, please cancel the current one by selecting New
Fence from the pop-up menu or by pressing Esc.
966 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fill Holes
To Fill Holes:
Tip: The Fill Holes icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Note: The Positive (Cut) (or Negative (Fill)) value is then updated.
Tools in the Production Module 967
Smooth Cells
To Smooth Cells:
Tip: The Smooth Cells icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Note: The Positive (Cut) (or Negative (Fill)) value is then updated.
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Note:
Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Leaving the Volume Calculation tool without saving the result will make
appeared a warning message.
969
Inspect Data
Data loaded in RealWorks can be inspected using the dedicated tools. All are
gathered on the Inspection tab, in the Production module, and split into three
groups.
The Inspection Map group includes a set of tools that lets the user compare
two surfaces, enough close in the shape, together. The result can be analyzed
and exported.
The 3D Inspection group includes mainly two tools. The first one enables to
determine the from-point-point distances, from two different point clouds. The
result can be analyzed with the second too.
The Polyline Inspection group includes only one tool. It enables to inspect a
point cloud along a planar polyline.
The Polyline Inspection group includes only one tool. It enables to define
station positions on an alignment.
970 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Floor group includes mainly two tools. It enables to define station positions
on an alignment.
Alignment Stationing
The Alignment Stationing feature lets the user define the stations along a given
polyline. The stations have known positions along that curve.
Tools in the Production Module 971
1. Select a polyline, with only one chain, from the Project Tree.
2. In the Stationing group, click the Alignment Stationing icon. The Alignment
Stationing dialog displays.
In the 3D View, the selected polyline displays with its own color. Its two
ends, each with a cross and a label, display in green.
The Start and End indications show the direction along which stations will
be positioned.
Stations are automatically positioned along the polyline, following the
values found in the Beginning Station, Interval Start Station and Interval
fields.
Each station position, symbolized by a cross and a label, display in the
color of the selected polyline.
The value displayed on the labels is the sum of the values found in the
Beginning Station, Interval Start Station and Interval fields except for the
first label which is the addition of Beginning Station and Interval Start
Station values.
The Interval Start Station specifies the distance between the Start position
to the first station position (0 m is the default value).
The Beginning Station specifies the start value in term of distance of the
first station (0 m is the default value).
Note: If you enter in the tool with a polyline for which an alignment stationing
has been already performed, the dialog which appears is filled up with the
parameters of the alignment.
972 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can specify the style used to format a station value, among No
Formating, 2 Digits: 10+00, and 3 Digits: 1+000, in the Preferences / Units (see
"Units Preferences" on page 127) dialog.
Horizontal Step (2D): This is the step on the projected path (projection in a
horizontal plane).
3. Enter a distance value in the Beginning Station field. This value can
positive or negative.
974 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
4. Enter a value in the Start Prefix field. This value can be any combination of
ASCII characters. It is used for naming the stations with the number
defined above.
Tools in the Production Module 975
1. Enter a distance value in the Interval Start Station field, and press Enter.
2. Or pick a position on the selected polyline.
3. Enter a distance value in the Interval field, and press Enter. The Interval
value is the distance between two consecutive stations.
If the Interval Start Station value is larger than the Interval value, the
applied value for the Interval Start Station is recomputed to be between
the beginning of the polyline and the value of the first Interval.
If the Interval value induces the creation of more than 1000 stations, a
question pops up and asks you to continue or not.
If the Interval Start Station value is higher than the length of the selected
polyline, this value is not taken account.
A new object, named "Polyline - With Stations", is created. When displaying its
properties, you can see the number of stations defined in the polyline, the
Station Prefix used for the stations name, as well as the interval between two
stations, and the slicing method (Horizontal Step (2D) or Distance Along
Alignment (3D)).
If the selected polyline is composed a set of segments and arcs. The created
polyline doesn't contain arcs. All of them are discretized in segments.
Note: When you save a project with the newly created polyline in RealWorks
10.2, this changes the database. As a result, the project cannot be open in
10.1.
976 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: The exact position of a station on the polyline is not exported when
exporting the properties of a "Polyline - With Stations" object. Only the number
of stations, and the prefix of the stations, are exported.
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of six parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling.
If point clouds have been selected, you can use these two sub-tools to
delineate an area for the inspection, to render them cleaner (i.e. reduce
parasite points) or to simplify them. The second part allows you to define a
projection surface. The third part allows you to set the projection surface’s
resolution. The fourth part allows you to preview the inspection result, display
(or hide) the selected point cloud(s)/mesh(es). The fifth part is to edit the
inspection result. The sixth part is to save the inspection result, close the tool
and give access to the online help.
Before opening the Twin Surface Inspection tool, each selected surface is
shown with its own color in the 3D View. After you open the tool, the reference
surface (the first selected) will appear in red and the second surface (the
second selected) in green. If the selection contains a point could and a mesh
as surfaces; the mesh will be by default a reference surface (in red) and will
not be able to be changed to a comparison surface (in green). The information
box (at the top right corner of the 3D View) lists the name of the reference
surface and of the comparison surface*.
Note: If the Project Cloud has been selected as input, it is by default the
Reference Surface. Its name does not appear in the information box.
978 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: The projection type which comes first is the one you have selected
during the last use of that tool.
Tools in the Production Module 979
Plane-Based Projection
If the two selected surfaces are of plane shape, choose the Plane-Based
Projection method. Step1 of the Twin Surface Inspection dialog becomes as
shown below:
A projection plane with a normal direction parallel to the Z axis* of the active
coordinate frame appears in the 3D View. A slider at the left side of the 3D
View allows you to move the projection plane from the top to the bottom and
vice versa. The way of defining a 3D plane is the same as in the Cutting Plane
tool.
Cylinder-Based Projection
If the two selected surfaces are of cylinder shape, choose the Cylinder-Based
Projection method. Step1 of the Twin Surface Inspection dialog becomes as
shown below:
A projection cylinder with an axis parallel to the Z axis* of the active coordinate
frame appears in the 3D View. You can change the projection cylinder axis
direction according to the two other axes (X* and Y*). If the selection (only
point cloud) that you performed in Step 1 contains an entity, you can pick on it
so that its axis becomes the new axis of the projection cylinder. You can also
pick points on your selection (point cloud or mesh) to define a projection
cylinder or edit one manually. In all cases, the bounding box that highlights the
selection (point cloud or mesh) delineates the height of the projection cylinder.
You cannot exceed it.
Draw a Circle
To Pick Two Points to Define a Projection Cylinder:
1. Click the Draw Circle icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D
constraint mode below the 3D View window.
2. Pick one free (or constrained) point. After picking this point, the Picking
Parameters toolbar switches to the Cartesian System constraint.
3. It's up to you to use this constraint or to pick a free point.
Note: Picking can be done anywhere on the selection (point cloud or mesh) or
not. These two points determine the projection cylinder's diameter and its
direction is perpendicular to the screen view.
Draw a Cylinder
To pick three points to define a projection cylinder:
1. Click the Draw Cylinder icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
the 3D constrain mode.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained).
Note: Picking should be on the selection (point cloud or mesh) for the two first
points and anywhere for the third point (on selection or not). The first and
second picked points give the projection cylinder's direction and the second
and third picked points determine its diameter.
1. Click the Pick Axis from Object icon. The initial projection disappears from
the 3D View.
2. Click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.
4. Select Display Geometry.
5. Click one point.
982 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Edit Parameters
To Edit Manually a Cylinder:
1. Click the Edit Parameters icon. The Cylinder Editing dialog opens.
2. Click the pull down arrow and do one of the following:
Tunnel-Based Projection
If the two selected surfaces are of tunnel shape, choose the Tunnel-Based
Projection method. If your project contains a 3D Path and a 2D Shape
(respectively a 3D polyline and a 2D polyline), the name of each is displayed. If
there is more than one path or shape, you can drop-down the selection list for
each and select another 3D Path or 2D Shape. See [A]. If your project contains
no 3D Path and no 2D Shape; the dialog displays as shown in [B], and you are
not able to perform an inspection.
A projection tunnel of the 3D Path’s length and of the 2D Path’s shape appears
with the reference and comparison surfaces respectively in red and green.
You can inspect the Comparison Surface (in green) with the Reference
Surface (in red) along or perpendicular to the 3D Path by checking
Perpendicular or along the 3D Path and in the Z axis* direction (of the active
coordinate) by checking Vertical.
If required, you can define the Start (or End) position of the inspection, by
picking a point along the 3D Path.
You can reset the Start position (and/or the End position) to the beginning
(and/or to the end) of the 3D Path.
Tools in the Production Module 985
Define the Start and End positions of the inspection, by picking a point
along the 3D Path.
Or enter a distance value in the Start and End fields.
986 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If required, reset the Start position (and/or the End position) to the
beginning (and/or to the end) of the 3D Path.
Note: If the alignment stationing is done with the Distance Along Alignment
(3D) option, the distance will be along the 3D Path. If the alignment stationing
is done with the Horizontal Distance (2D) option, the distance will correspond
to the distances along the curve projected onto the horizontal plane.
Note: You cannot set the Start position after the End position. To swap the
path orientation, you need to go to the Alignment Stationing tool and do the
Reverse Alignment.
Note: There is no minimum distance between the Start position and the End
position for performing an inspection. When you enter the exact value of the
Start position into the End field, this value is not taken into account.
Determine a Resolution
The same resolution will apply to both directions and will differ according to the
projection surface you have defined in Step 2. If the projection surface is a 3D
plane, the resolution directions will be the width and length directions of that
plane. If the projection surface is a 3D cylinder, the resolution directions will be
the axis direction of this cylinder and the direction of its circumference when
you unfold it. If the projection surface is a 3D tunnel, the resolution directions
will be the 3D Path and 2D Shape directions.
Preview an Inspection
Once you have finished defining the projection surface and setting its
resolution, you can preview the result before saving it in the database. You can
change the parameters (projection surface and resolution) as many times as
you please and perform a preview without leaving this tool. By default, an
object selected for activating the tool is automatically displayed in the 3D View.
To hide it, you have to un-check the display option. And to display it again, you
should re-check the option. There are two display options (one for each
selected object).
To Preview an Inspection:
If the two surfaces are of the same type (Point Cloud (or Mesh) for both),
the Swap Surfaces icon is available. Click the Swap Surfaces icon.
The Reference Surface becomes a surface to inspect (Comparison) and
the Comparison Surface swaps for Reference.
If the two surfaces are from different type (Point cloud for one and Mesh
for the other), the Swap Surfaces icon is then unavailable
1 - The scale and the origin of the inspection 3 - The comparison surface (green)
map 4 - The inspection map
2 - The reference surface (red)
Tools in the Production Module 989
In the Map Preview window, you can zoom the inspection map In or Out. You
can do this in three ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the
inspection map using Image Zoom In and Image Zoom Out . The
second way is to magnify (or reduce) the inspection map using the mouse
wheel (if present). The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list. If the
inspection map is larger than the Map Preview window can show, you can pan
it on left-click in four directions: Up, Down, Right and Left. In the 3D View, the
inspection map is shown in superposition with the two selected surfaces and
the projection surface. A frame (red and green) corresponding to the inspection
map’s origin appears in both the 3D View and the Map Preview window.
Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to
use the features.
Note: When a cylinder is vertical, i.e. when the angle between its axis and the
Z-axis of the current coordinate system is less than 45 degrees, the orientation
of the inspection map changes between RealWorks 10.1 and RealWorks 10.2.
When the angle is greater than 45 degrees, the cylinder is considered as
horizontal. In this case, the orientation of the map does not change between
10.1 and 10.2. Refer to the table below.
Note: When you save a project for which the orientation of the inspection map
changed due to the verticality of the cylinder in RealWorks 10.2, this changes
the database. As a result, the project cannot be open in 10.1.
Tools in the Production Module 991
When the Fill Holes option has been kept unchecked, all the holes on the
clouds are preserved on the inspection map.
When the Fill Holes option has been checked, all the holes on the clouds are
filled on the inspection map.
992 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:
Note:
To cancel the current polygonal fence, you can press Esc or select New
Fence from the pop-up menu.
To leave the Draw Polygon to Edit tool, click again the Draw Polygon to
Edit, select Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu or press Esc.
Tip:
Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can either
double-click or press on the Space Bar.
You can also select Keep Cells (or Empty Cells) from the pop-up menu or
use their related short-cut key I (or O).
994 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Filter an Area
To Filter an Area:
Note:
You can also select Fill Holes (or Smooth Cells) from the pop-up menu or
use their related short-cut key F (or S).
An inspection map, once created, becomes un-editable.
1 - Option for setting only 2 - Number of levels in the 3 - Field for defining intervals
positive values of intervals current ColorBar by setting values
3. Click in the interval value field and key in new values. The number of
levels is displayed below.
4. Select the Positive Values option (if required).
5. Click in an interval line. A pull down arrow appears
6. Click on the pull down arrow. A color palette appears.
7. Choose an existing color or click Other to define yours.
8. Click Save.
Tools in the Production Module 995
Note:
To leave the Twin Surface Inspection tool, you can press Esc or select
Close from the pop-up menu.
Leaving the Twin Surface Inspection tool without saving the inspection
result will open an information box which prompts you to confirm, undo or
cancel the operation you attempt to execute.
1. Select one of these two sets (surface and model of plane/cylinder shape
or surface and 2D polyline and 3D polyline) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Inspection Map group, click the Surface to Model Inspection icon.
The Surface to Model Inspection dialog opens.
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of five parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling.
The second part allows you to set a projection surface (3D plane, 3D cylinder
or 3D tunnel) resolution. The third part allows previewing the inspection result,
display (or hide) the selected point cloud/mesh or model. The fourth part is to
edit or to analyze the inspection result. The fifth part is to save the inspection
result, close the tool and give access to the online help.
Define a Projection
A projection model will be automatically set after opening the Surface to Model
Inspection tool. The surface to inspect (point cloud or mesh) remains with its
own color and the reference surface (model) is shown in yellow.
Tools in the Production Module 997
Plane-Based Projection
If the Model is a plane, the projection should be based on a 3D plane, with the
same direction (Normal) and whose dimensions (Width and Length) are
delineated by the highlighting box.
Cylinder-Based Projection
If the Model is a cylinder, the projection should be based on a 3D cylinder, with
the same size (Diameter and Length).
Tunnel-Based Projection
If a 2D Shape and a 3D Path (respectively a 2D polyline and a 3D polyline)
have been selected, the projection is based on a 3D Tunnel of the 3D
polyline’s length and of the 2D polyline’s shape. The 2D Shape and 3D Path
names are displayed in Step 1. You can inspect the Comparison Surface (point
cloud or mesh) with the Reference Surface (model) along or perpendicular to
the 3D Path by checking Perpendicular or along the 3D path and in the Z axis
direction (of the active coordinate) by checking Vertical. You can also swap the
3D path and the 2D Shape.
Note: The step Define Projection is only available when selecting a 2D shape
and a 3D path.
Tools in the Production Module 999
By default, the inspection performs from the beginning of the 3D Path to its
end.
You can define the Start (or End) position of the inspection, by picking a
point along the 3D Path.
If required, reset the Start position (and/or the End position) to the
beginning (and/or to the end) of the 3D Path.
1000 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
By default, the inspection performs from the beginning of the 3D Path to its
end.
The value in the Start field is the value of the Beginning Station (see the
Alignment Stationing (on page 970) tool).
The value in the End field corresponds to the position at the end of the 3D
Path.
Define the Start and End positions of the inspection, by picking a point
along the 3D Path.
Or enter a distance value in the Start and End fields.
Tools in the Production Module 1001
If required, reset the Start position (and/or the End position) to the
beginning (and/or to the end) of the 3D Path.
Note: If the alignment stationing is done with the Distance Along Alignment
(3D) option, the distance will be along the 3D Path. If the alignment stationing
is done with the Horizontal Distance (2D) option, the distance will correspond
to the distances along the curve projected onto the horizontal plane.
Note: Along a given 3D Path, you cannot set the Start position after the End
position.
Note: There is no minimum distance between the Start position and the End
position for an inspection. When you enter the exact value of the Start position
into the End field, this value is not taken into account.
1002 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Determine a Resolution
A same resolution will be applied to both directions of the projection surface
except when a 2D Shape and a 3D Path have been selected - see [A] and [B].
These directions will differ according to the projection model set in Step 1. If
the projection model is a 3D Cylinder, the projection directions are equal to the
axis direction of the 3D Cylinder and to the direction along the 3D Cylinder’s
circumference. If the projection model is a 3D Plane, the projection directions
correspond to the width and length directions of the 3D Plane. If the projection
surface is a 3D Tunnel, the resolution directions will be the 3D Path and 2D
Shape directions.
Preview an Inspection
Once you have finished defining the projection surface resolution, you can
perform a preview to visualize the result before saving it in the RealWorks
database. You can change the parameter as many times as you please and
perform a preview without leaving this tool. By default, an object selected for
activating the tool is automatically displayed in the 3D View. To hide it, you
have to un-check the display option. And to display it again, you should re-
check the option. There are two display options (one for each object selected).
If the selected object is a point cloud, the display option will take the name of
Display Cloud. If the selected object is a mesh, the display option will take the
name of Display Mesh. The second display option’s name is always Display
Model.
Note: You do not necessary need to validate the value you key in the
Resolution field. Clicking the Preview button will validate the value by its own.
1004 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The inspection is done by comparing the Model with the selected Surface. The
inspection result is a map shown in a specific window (called Map Preview)
which opens above the 3D View. This map is a 2D image inside which pixels
are colored according to the difference (expressed in terms of elevation)
between the Surface and the Model. A ColorBar located at the right side of the
inspection map is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to an
elevation value.
In the Map Preview, you can zoom the inspection map In (or Out) in three
ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the inspection map by
using Image Zoom In and Image Zoom Out . The second way is to
magnify (or reduce) the inspection map using the mouse wheel (if present).
The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list. If the inspection map is
larger than the Map Preview window can display, you can pan it on left-click in
four directions: Up, Down, Right and Left. You can also hide/show the current
ColorBar or edit a new one.
In the 3D View, the inspection map is shown in superposition with the two
selected items (Surface and Model). A frame (of red and green colors)
corresponding to the origin of the inspection map (also called Orientation)
appears in both the 3D View and the Map Preview.
Tools in the Production Module 1005
Plane Shape
Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to
use the features.
Tools in the Production Module 1007
Cylinder Shape
Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to
use the features.
1008 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
When a cylinder is vertical, i.e. when the angle between its axis and the Z-axis
of the current coordinate system is less than 45 degrees, the orientation of the
inspection map changes between RealWorks 10.1 and RealWorks 10.2. When
the angle is greater than 45 degrees, the cylinder is considered as horizontal.
In this case, the orientation of the map does not change between 10.1 and
10.2. Refer to the table below.
Note: When you save a project for which the orientation of the inspection map
changed due to the verticality of the cylinder in RealWorks 10.2, this changes
the database. As a result, the project cannot be open in 10.1.
Tools in the Production Module 1009
Tunnel Shape
Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to
use the features.
Tools in the Production Module 1011
When the Fill Holes option has been kept unchecked, all the holes on the
clouds are preserved on the inspection map.
When the Fill Holes option has been checked, all the holes on the clouds are
filled on the inspection map.
1012 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:
Note:
To cancel the current polygonal fence, you can press Esc or select New
Fence from the pop-up menu.
To leave the Draw Polygon to Edit tool, click again the Draw Polygon to
Edit, select Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu or press Esc.
Tip:
Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can either
double-click or press on the Space Bar.
You can also select Keep Cells (or Empty Cells) from the pop-up menu or
use their related short-cut key I (or O).
1014 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Filter an Area
To Filter an Area:
Note:
You can also select Fill Holes (or Smooth Cells) from the pop-up menu or
use their related short-cut key F (or S).
An inspection map, once created, becomes un-editable.
Note:
To leave the Surface to Model Inspection tool, you can press Esc or select
Close from the pop-up menu.
Leaving the Surface to Model tool without saving the inspection result will
open an information box which prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the
operation you attempt to execute.
Tools in the Production Module 1015
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. Depending on the
sub-tool you select, the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog changes appearance.
The selected inspection map is displayed in the Inspection Map Analyzer
Viewer [A] with two sliders (horizontal and vertical).
The Section Viewer [B] shows the extraction result(s) in 3D and optionally the
inspection map if the Display 3D Map option is checked. The Lock in 2D option
(when not dimmed and if checked) locks the extractions result(s) in 2D
(constrained in the XZ* plane of the active frame) with a 2D Grid in
superposition. You can hide and display again the 2D Grid. When the Lock in
2D option is checked, you can only pan the results(s) in the YZ* plane, zoom
(in or out) or rotate around the X* axis. Un-checking Lock in 2D will hide the 2D
Grid and will free the result(s) from the 3D locked constraint.
Tools in the Production Module 1017
The way the two viewers (Inspection Map Analyzer and Section) will be
represented depends on the sub-tool you select. You can rearrange the
viewers as you please using the View Manager tools
Note:
Pressing Esc will close the Inspection Map Analyzer tool.
Clicking Close in the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog (or selecting Close
from the pop-up menu in the viewers) will not close the current sub-tool
but will close the main tool.
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
1018 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Select Points & Polylines. The Inspection Map Analyzer dialog appears as
shown.
The Inspection Map Analyzer and Section Viewers are both opened. In the
Section Viewer, the inspection map is by default hidden and the navigation is
locked in 2D. In the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer, the horizontal and
vertical sliders are shown and only one is active.
3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map in
the Section Viewer.
4. If required, uncheck the Lock in 2D option to free the navigation from 2D
lock in the Section Viewer.
5. In Step 1, choose between Pick on Reference Surface and Pick on
Comparative Surface.
Tip: You can use the Up/Down (or Right/Left) arrows of your keyboard to
vertically (or horizontally) move the slider with constant step. This step
corresponds to one pixel on the inspection map (not one pixel on the screen).
To do this, you should first click inside the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer to
select it.
Tools in the Production Module 1019
Pick Points
Picking should always be done inside the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer and
anywhere over the color area of the inspection map (except on black area).
To Pick a Point:
The picked point is shown in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer [A] and in the
Section Viewer [B]. Its 3D position (XYZ coordinates) is displayed in text in the
Section viewer. Starting a new picking will cancel the current one.
Tip:
You can also select Quit Point Creation Mode from the pop-up menu or
press on the Esc key.
You can remove the picked point labels from the 3D View by first selecting
Rendering, then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1021
Draw Polylines
Picking should be done on the colored areas of the inspection map.
To Draw a Polyline:
1. Click the Draw Polyline icon. The two sliders disappear from the
Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer and the Close Polyline icon becomes
active*.
2. Pick a series of points on the inspection map in the Inspection Map
Analyzer Viewer.
3. Right-click and select Close Polyline from the pop-up menu. The start
point is connected to the end point. Close Polyline becomes Open
Polyline.
4. Right-click again and select Open Polyline from the pop-up menu. The
start point is disconnected to the end point. Open Polyline becomes Close
Polyline.
5. Double-click to end the polyline.
The drawn polyline appears in both of the two viewers (Inspection Map
Analyzer and Section).
Note:
You can neither draw a circle arc nor a series of discontinuous polylines.
(*) The Close Polyline icon may define two creation modes. Not-clicked-on
Close Polyline icon sets the open polyline creation mode. Clicked-on
Close Polyline icon sets the close polyline creation mode.
You cannot combine the Pick Point and Draw Polyline features together.
Tip:
You can also select Draw Polyline, Close Polyline, Open Polyline and End
Polyline from the pop-up menu.
Pressing once Esc will cancel the current polyline. Pressing twice Esc will
cancel the current polyline and leave the polyline tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1023
1. For each picked point (or drawn polyline), you can add comments.
2. Click Create to save the result.
Note: Be sure to first save the picked point (or drawn polyline) before leaving
the Point Creation (or Draw Polyline) tool. Otherwise, it will be cancelled.
1024 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Choose Sections & Shifts from the drop-down list.
The Inspection Map Analyzer viewer and the Section viewer both open.
The Section viewer is split in two sub-viewers. The top sub-viewer displays
a section, or a couple of sections, or a shift depending on the option(s)
(Comparison Section, Reference Section, or 1D Inspection) chosen in
Step 2. The bottom sub-viewer displays the difference plot between a
couple of sections.
A section is a profile resulting from the slicing over a surface on an
inspection map. A slice over a reference surface, in red, is called
Reference Section. A slice over a comparison surface, in green, is called
Comparison Section.
The shift between a couple of Reference Section and Comparison
Section, at a given position, is called 1D Inspection.
In the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer, the horizontal slider and the
vertical slider are shown and only one is active a time.
Caution: The Set Horizontal Slider is grayed out when the selected
inspection map is a Tunnel.
Choose a Slider
To Choose a Slider:
1. Click the Set Horizontal Slider icon to choose the horizontal direction.
2. Or click Set Vertical Slider icon to choose the vertical direction.
3. Or position the cursor over the end of a slider and click on it.
Note: To hide (or display) the active slider, select Hide Slider (or Display
Slider) from the pop-up menu in the Inspection Map Viewer.
1026 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Inspection Map viewer, position the cursor over one of the two ends
of a slider, as illustrated below.
2. If the Horizontal Slider has been chosen, drag and drop it from Up to
Down and reversely until it meets the position required. The slicing will be
done in this direction and at this position.
3. If the Vertical Slider has been chosen, drag and drop it from Right to Left
and reversely until it meets the position required. The slicing will be done
in this direction and at this position.
Note: The Set Horizontal Slider icon is grayed out when the selected
inspection map is a Tunnel.
Tip: You can move the two sliders in four directions (Right, Left, Up and Down)
using the arrow keys of your keyboard. In that case, the displacement is done
with a constant interval. The interval value is the one you set in the Interval
field in Step 3.
Tools in the Production Module 1027
If the inspection map is a Plane (or a Cylinder); the chosen slider moves to
the picked position in the chosen direction.
If the inspection map is a Tunnel; the Vertical Slider moves horizontally to
the picked position.
Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer
to display the pop-up menu and select Set Slider Position.
Tip: Instead of choosing Set Slider Position, you can also double-click in the
inspection map.
1028 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Set Slider Point Position icon. The Slider Position Definition
dialog opens.
2. If the inspection map is a Plane (or a Cylinder); choose between
Horizontal Slider and Vertical Slider.
3. If the inspection map is a Tunnel; only the Vertical Slider option can be
chosen.
4. Do one of the following:
Check the Point option, and enter the 3D coordinates of a point. Its related
position, along the 3D Path and on the inspection map, updates.
If the position of the point is out of the inspection map. A warning message
displays in red in the Slider Position Definition dialog, and the OK button is
grayed out.
Enter a distance value. The 3D coordinates and the position on the map of the
related point, get updated. You cannot input a position that is out of the range
delimited the Start and End positions. These positions are those defined when
performing an inspection.
If Horizontal Slider has been chosen, the horizontal slider becomes active
and it jumps vertically to the defined position.
If Vertical Slider has been chosen, the vertical slider becomes active and it
jumps horizontally to the defined position.
Note: When the format 2 Digits: 10+00 or 3 Digit 1+000 is used for the
stationing, the sub units are not used.
a) Select the Use Length Unit option from the list. The unit of the
Interval changes according to the unit set in the Preferences / Units /
Unit System / Length.
b) Or select the Use Angular Unit option from the list. The unit of the
Interval changes according to the unit set in the Preferences / Units /
Unit System / Angle.
c) And jump to the step 5.
If the Horizontal Interval option is unchecked, the slices are set with
regular interval along the 3D Path (red path).
If the Horizontal Interval option is checked, the slices are set with regular
interval, not along the 3D Path, but along its projection on a horizontal
plane (blue path).
In the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer, the Next (or Previous) button moves
the horizontal slider from Down to Up (or the vertical slider from Right to Left).
The displacement is performed with a constant step which corresponds to the
value in the Interval field. In the Section viewer, the Next (or Previous) button
sets the next (or previous) section(s) (and/or shift) as active.
In the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer, the Next (or Previous) button moves
the horizontal slider from Up to Down (or the vertical slider from Left to Right).
In the Section viewer, the Next (or Previous) button sets the previous (or next)
section(s) (and/or shift) as active.
Tip: Instead of clicking Next (or Previous), you can use the Up and Down (or
the Left and Right) Arrows on your keyboard.
Note: The 2D Lock option is unchecked of its own in case the Multi-Slices has
been chosen.
Tools in the Production Module 1033
When you create a tunnel inspection map with a 3D Path with an alignment
stationing, you can see the position of the vertical slider in the Plot viewer.
In case of a vertical cylinder and if the angle between its vector and the Z-Axis
is less than 45°, the difference plot is displayed vertically along the slicing
direction.
1034 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In case of a horizontal cylinder and if the angle between its vector and the Z-
Axis is less than 45°, the difference plot is displayed horizontally along the
slicing direction.
In other cases, you can invert the axes manually by selecting Swap Axes.
To Manipulate a plot:
Note: Zoom In or Zoom Out will change the linear graph scale.
Print a Plot
To Print a Plot:
Scale a Plot
To Scale the Plot:
Export Sections
You are able to export a set of sections to the AutoCAD DXF (or DWG) format.
Note: For all of the exports described in the next topics, the Amplification
Factor value is by default set to 3.
If the Set Horizontal Slider has been chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Horizontal Slices dialog opens.
1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF) format from the File of
Type field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Horizontal
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.
If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Vertical Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.
If the Multi-Slices option has been checked, the Vertical Interval field
is grayed-out with the Interval value, as illustrated below.
Tools in the Production Module 1037
Or
A set of Horizontal Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Horizontal Slider, with the Vertical
Interval as constant step.
Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you can only export a set of
Horizontal Slices.
If the Set Vertical Slider has been chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Vertical Slices dialog opens.
1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF) format from the File of
Type field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Vertical
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.
If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Horizontal Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.
1038 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Or
A set of Vertical Sections will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider, with the Horizontal
Interval as constant step.
Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you can only export a set of
Vertical Slices.
Tools in the Production Module 1039
If the Set Vertical Slider has been chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Horizontal Slices dialog opens.
1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF) format from the File of
Type field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Vertical
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.
If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Horizontal Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.
Or
A set of Horizontal Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider, with the Vertical
Interval as constant step.
Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you can only export a set of
Horizontal Slices.
If the Set Horizontal Slider has been chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Vertical Slices dialog opens.
1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF) format from the File of
Type field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Vertical
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.
If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Horizontal Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.
Tools in the Production Module 1041
Or
A set of Vertical Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Horizontal Slider, with the Vertical
Interval as constant step.
Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you can only export a set of
Horizontal Slices.
1042 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Set Vertical Slider is by default chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Vertical Slices dialog opens.
1. Choose a format (DWG (or DXF) and a version from the File of Type
field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Vertical
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.
If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Horizontal Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.
Or
A set of Vertical Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider, with the Horizontal
Interval as constant step.
Caution: Outside the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you are not allowed to
export vertical slices from a single Section.
1044 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. If only one type of object has been chosen in Step 2, click the Create
button.
2. If at least two types have been chosen in Step 2, click the Create All
button.
Polylines created with the Horizontal Distance (2D) option chosen in the
Alignment Stationing tool:
Polylines created with the Distance Along Alignment (3D) option chosen in the
Alignment Stationing tool:
2. If the 1D Inspection option has been checked in Step 2, click the Create
All button.
1046 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3. If the Reverse Directions option has been chosen in Step 3, the numbering
order is inverted and the position of the active section(s) (and/or 1D
Inspection) changes.
4. Click Close. The Inspection Map Analyzer dialog closes.
Caution: (*) For a cylindrical inspection map (Tunnel), the cross map data
lines are numbered with the following order: from 0° to +360°. All are put in a
folder, whose name is followed by the Interval value in degrees.
Tools in the Production Module 1047
1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Select Volumes & Surfaces. The Volumes & Surfaces dialog appears.
3. Select the whole map by clicking Select Whole Inspection Map Area.
4. Or fence an area,
5. Or pick a color,
6. Or define a color range,
7. Or use surface values,
8. Or filter altitudes.
Note:
You can right-click anywhere in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer to
display the pop-up menu and select the command you wish to use.
* Click Restore Down in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer to swap to
the Inspection Map Analyzer and Section viewers' display.
** To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the
pop-up menu.
To be able to view the 2D lock (or the inspection map) when checking the
Lock 2D (or Display 3D Map) option in the dialog, please first restore the
default layout (Inspection and Section viewers).
1048 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Fence an Area
Fencing an area is always done by picking anywhere (colored and black areas)
on the inspection map. If no area has been fenced, the whole inspection map
will be selected by default.
To Fence an Area:
Tip: Pressing Esc or selecting New Fence or Close Polygon Tool from the pop-
up menu will undo the polygonal fence in progress.
Tip: Instead of selecting Add By Polygonal Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Ctrl. You should do this before ending the polygon.
Tip: Instead of selecting Subtract By Polygonal Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Shift. You should do this before ending the polygon.
10. Click on the pull down arrow of the Polygonal Selection list.
11. Select Intersect with Polygonal Selection .
12. Draw another polygonal fence. Areas in common are kept.
1050 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Fencing of intersection shape 2 - Areas in common are kept
Tip: Instead of selecting Intersect With Polygonal Selection, you can also use
its related shortcut key Shift + Ctrl.
Tip: To leave the polygon selection mode, you can select Close Polygon Tool
from the pop-up menu, click on any icon in the Volumes & Sections dialog.
Tools in the Production Module 1051
Pick a Color
To Pick a Color:
1. Picking should always be done inside the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer
and anywhere over the colored areas of the map.
2. Pan or zoom the inspection map in or out (if required).
3. Click Select Color Range .
4. Pick a pixel on the inspection map. The map is filtered according to the
picked point color; the areas of this map sharing the same color than the
picked point are kept.
5. Click on the pull down arrow of the Color Range Selection list.
6. Click Add Color Range Selection .
7. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The map is filtered according to
the newly picked color.
Tip: Instead of selecting Add Color Range Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Ctrl. You should do this before picking another pixel.
8. Click on the pull down arrow of the Color Range Selection list.
9. Select Subtract Color Range Selection .
1052 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
10. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The areas of the map having the
same color than the picked point are subtracted from the selection.
Tip: Instead of selecting Subtract Color Range Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Shift. You should do this before picking another pixel.
11. Click on the pull down arrow of the Color Range Selection list.
12. Select Intersect Color Range Selection .
13. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The areas of the map having the
color in common are kept. Those not having the same color are unkept.
Tip: Instead of selecting Intersect Color Range Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Shift + Ctrl.
Tip: To leave the selection by color range mode, you can select Quit Selection
by Color Range from the pop-up menu, click on any icon in the Volumes &
Sections dialog.
Tools in the Production Module 1053
The elevation difference inside or outside the bound values are kept and the others are darkened
4. Click OK.
Tools in the Production Module 1055
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window in place of the
Inspection Map Analyzer dialog. In Select by Using Surface Values, only the
Inspection Map Analyzer viewer is opened and the horizontal and vertical
sliders appear again.
Tip: You can also choose Select by Using Surface Values from the pop-up
menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1057
To Filter an Altitude:
Select "Iso-Curves"
You can extract and create Iso-Curves (of polyline type) from an inspection
map. Iso-Curves are computed from a position (called Reference) with a
certain spacing (called Interval).
1058 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Extract Iso-Curves
In Iso-Curves, the Inspection Map Analyzer and Section viewers are opened.
The horizontal and vertical sliders are hidden in the Inspection Map Analyzer
viewer and the Section viewer is empty of contents*.
To Extract Iso-Curves:
1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Select Iso-Curves. The Iso-Curves dialog appears. The inspection map is
by default not displayed in the Section viewer.
3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map.
6. Click Preview.
Tools in the Production Module 1059
The first computed Iso-Curve will be the Reference Iso-Curve; this means that
it will have height the value set in the Reference field. The other Iso-Curves will
then be computed from the Reference Iso-Curve by propagation in two
directions (up and down) with the defined Interval. The active Iso-Curve (not
necessarily the Reference Iso-Curve but the first in the computation’s order) is
of fuchsia color in the Section viewer and is colored according to its value in
the ColorBar in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer. For a given active Iso-
Curve, the information window at the top right corner of the Section viewer
shows in text its order, shift and size (of the polyline).
Note:
Computing a huge quantity of Iso-Curves may take a very long time. In
that case, an information dialog appears and prompts you to continue or
abort the operation.
* To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the
pop-up menu.
To be able to view the iso-curves in the Section viewer, hide the inspection
map in the 3D View by un-checking the Display 3D Map option.
1060 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Browse Iso-Curves
The active Iso-Curve is the first in the computation’s order. It is of fuchsia color
in the Section viewer and is colored according to its value in the ColorBar in
the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer.
To Browse Iso-Curves:
1. Click Display Next Iso-Curve (or Display Previous Iso-Curve ) to set the
next (or previous) iso-curve as active.
2. Or click Display First Iso-Curve (or Display Last Iso-Curve ) to set the
first (or last) iso-curve as active.
3. Or key in an iso-curve’s number and press Enter.
4. Or pick an iso-curve in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer.
Note:
You can set several iso-curves as actives. To do this, multi-select the ones
you need in the Section viewer by combining the use of Ctrl with clicking.
You can use the Up (or Down) Arrow key instead of Display Next Iso-
Curve (or Display Previous Iso-Curve).
Tools in the Production Module 1061
1 - Defines the first principal 2 - Defines the number of Iso- 3 - Select First Principal Iso-
Iso-Curve by entering a Curves to skip Curve by Picking
number
Create Iso-Curves
Iso-Curves are created in the RealWorks database as 3D polylines in a set
(named Cross-MapData-IsoCurves XX where XX is the Interval value) under
the current (active) project. You can export them to the AutoCAD application.
To Create Iso-Curves:
Note:
Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Leaving the Iso-Curves sub-tool without saving the result will make
appeared a warning message.
1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Select Colored Mesh. The Colored Mesh dialog appears. The inspection
map is by default not displayed in the Section viewer.
3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map.
4. Do one of the following:
Note:
After clicking Preview, the number of vertex and the number of triangles
related to the computed mesh are shown in the Colored Mesh dialog.
* To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the
pop-up menu.
1064 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Note:
Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Leaving the Colored Mesh sub-tool without saving the result will make
appeared a warning message.
Tools in the Production Module 1065
Tip:
You can also click Print in the Main toolbar or select Print from the File
menu.
You can also select a printer from the network (or set the current printer's
properties) by clicking on the Network (or Properties) button in the Print
Setup dialog.
1. Click the Define Area button. The 3D scene is locked in 2D, in Top view, in
the XY plane of the current frame.
2. Pick a point, anywhere.
3. Pick another point, opposite to the first one.
The two points define a rectangular area which delimits the part of the
ground to inspect.
Points inside the defined area are fitted with a plane, with red edges and
yellow background. This plane is called Reference Plane. It will be used as
a projection plane for inspecting the ground. Its height along the Z axis (of
the current frame) is displayed in the Elevation field.
When you change the current area to a new one, the value in the
Elevation field changes too.
When you hover the cursor over the plane, its manipulators appear, one
per edge and one per corner.
Note: You cannot undo the defined area. If you wish to do it, you need to
define a new one.
1070 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the position is within the defined area, the Origin moves to the position.
If the position is outside the defined area like in [P1], the position the closer to
the defined area is then considered [P2]. The Origin moves then to [P2]. The
3D coordinates of [P2] should be within the defined area.
Tools in the Production Module 1071
Or
Or
Note: (*) The value you entered does not need to correspond to the height of a
point on the cloud. You can set a height higher than the cloud.
Tools in the Production Module 1073
Generate an Inspection
To Preview the Inspection Result:
In the 3D View, the Inspection Map is by default displayed. Its Color Bar,
in red and blue, helps you to easily identify the regions, on the ground and
in the defined area, above zero (Red), and those that are below (Blue).
You may have some regions in black. There are no points inside such
regions.
A set of horizontal and vertical lines is also displayed. These lines contain
the points found for each node of the Grid. Each of these points is the
deviation of the corresponding cell of the Inspection Map. If the Origin
point defined is inside the area of the Inspection Map, a node is at this
position.
The snapshot below illustrates the Inspection Map, the Grid and the cloud
intentionally un-stacked
N - Node, intersection between a vertical line P - Point on the cloud with XYZ coordinates
and horizontal line, on the grid
ED - Elevation Difference
1074 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the Fill Holes option has been checked, the regions in black on the
inspection map are filled with the information found in the neighborhoods.
If the Out of Tolerance option has been checked, some regions in gray
appear on the inspection map. These regions are the points whose
deviation is in the defined Tolerance, as illustrated below.
Tools in the Production Module 1075
1076 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Generate a Report
To Generate a Report:
1. In the Generate Report panel, check the Above Reference (Red) option
and/or Below Reference (Blue) option.
2. Click the Export button. A dialog opens.
3. In the Look In field, locate a drive/folder to store the report.
4. Enter a name in the File Name field.
5. Click Save. Five files are created.
If the Above Reference (Red) option has been checked, only points with
positive deviation are exported (in the report).
If the Below Reference (Blue) has been checked, only points with negative
deviation are exported (in the report).
If the Out of Tolerance option has been checked, points whose deviation
enters in the field of the defined option are not exported (in the report).
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
1078 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In Step 1, click the Define button. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the
Top view with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
2. Pick the first point on the displayed point cloud data.
3. Move the cursor to pick the second point. The segment, linking the first
picked point to the cursor, initially in red switches to green when its length
matches the length specified by the ASTM E1155 standard.
Or
7. Pick the third point on the displayed point cloud data to validate.
If the drawn test section is not in compliance with the ASTM E1155 standard in
terms of dimensions and surface, an error message appears and prompts you
the resize the drawn section by using the edge and corner manipulators.
Tip: You can choose Define Test Section from the pop-up menu instead of
clicking Define.
Tip: You can press Enter or choose Validate from the pop-up menu instead of
clicking Validate.
If the length of the sample is less than 11 ft, the picking (of the second point)
fails (with a beep) and an error message displays.
If the minimum distance between two samples is less than 4 ft., the picking (of
the second point) fails (with a beep) and an error message displays.
If the sample is in an area that does not contain sufficient point cloud data, an
error message displays and the newly drawn sample is discarded.
1082 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create Samples
To Create Samples:
1. Click the Add Sample icon. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the
Top view with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
2. Pick the first point on the displayed point cloud data.
3. Move the cursor to pick the second point. The segment, linking the first
picked point to the cursor, initially in ORANGE switches to GREEN when
its length matches the length specified by the ASTM E1155 standard.
4. Pick the second point on the displayed point cloud data. The scene is free
from the 2D lock.
5. Repeat the steps from 1 to 4 for creating a new sample. It is in RED if the
minimum distance which separates that sample to the first one is less than
4 ft. It turns to ORANGE first if the distance matches the ASTM E1155
standard specification, and then to GREEN if the length matches the
ASTM E1155 standard specification.
Below the list, the minimum and overall values of FF and FL are displayed
with the 90% Confidence interval.
The Minimal Number of Readings according to the measured area and the
Total Number of Readings are also displayed. Readings are
measurements done a sample, spaced a constant step of 1ft.
Tools in the Production Module 1083
A defined sample is visible in the 3D View with its full name (name + FF:
xx FL:xx).
Tip: You can also use the shortcut A or choose Add Sample from the pop-up
menu.
Delete Samples
To Delete Samples:
Tip: You can choose Delete Sample from the pop-up menu.
Create a Report
You are able to create a report in the RTF format. The Report button remains
grayed out as long as the number of defined readings does not reach the
minimum number of required readings, which is related to the size of the test
section.
To Create a Report:
1. Click the Report button. If the defined samples are not uniformly
distributed over the test section, a warning appears.
2. Click Yes. The FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155) Report dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the report file to be stored in
the Look In field.
4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension RTF is added
automatically.
5. Click Save. The Enter Contract Specifications for Report dialog opens.
The report contains a snapshot of the test section with the samples displayed.
It also contains the tolerances (Specified Overall Value (SOV) and Minimum
Local Value (MLV) for both FF and FL) used and associated pass/fail result for
each sample and overall, the number of readings, the measured area.
It shows the FF and FL values, and the 90% Conf. Intervals for each sample,
for the overall and minimal.
Tools in the Production Module 1085
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The first item (by
order of selection) is called Reference and is displayed in red in the 3D View.
The second item (by order of selection) called Comparison is green. You can
display (or hide) each of them in the 3D View by checking (or un-checking) the
Display Reference (or Display Comparison).
You use the Segmentation (or Sampling) sub-tool for defining a region (or for
reducing the number of points) on each of the two selected items (keep
checked either Display Reference or Display Comparison) or on both of them
(keep both checked). Reload Points will reload points of the item for which the
display option has been checked.
The Min. Distance and the Max. Distance are both set as "Undefined" in Step
1.
Tip: The 3D Inspection tool can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
1086 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Preview.
The 3D inspection cloud will be updated according to the defined range as well
as its related ColorBar.
Note:
The unit of measurement for From (or To) is set to Meter, you do not need
to enter "m" after the value. You can change the unit of measurement in
Preferences.
1088 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The From value should be less than the To value and reversely.
Tip: You can undo the filtering by selecting e.g. Undo from the Edit menu.
Doing that will reload the computed 3D inspection cloud as well as its related
ColorBar.
You can select a folder from the Project Tree under which you want to put the
created 3D Inspection Cloud. You only need to do that before clicking Create.
Note: If required, select the Cloud Color rendering from the 3D View >
Rendering menu to be able to view the 3D inspection cloud with color
information.
The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace
window. The selected 3D inspection cloud is by-default displayed in the 3D
View. The number of points inside the 3D inspection cloud is displayed in Step
1 - Extract Cloud by Range in the 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog.
3. Edit a ColorBar,
4. Or extract a cloud from the 3D inspection cloud,
5. Or auto-Split a 3D inspection cloud in a cluster of clouds.
6. Or hide (or display) the 3D inspection cloud by checking (or un-checking)
the Display Inspection Cloud option.
1 - The "To" slider and the "To" value in the 4 - Points of the 3D inspection cloud below the
ColorBar "To" value
2 - The "From" slider and the "From" value in 5 - Points of the 3D inspection cloud above the
the ColorBar "From" value
3 - The 3D inspection cloud
The 3D inspection cloud's Number of Points (see Step 1) as well as its aspect
and the color associated to it (see 3D View) will be then updated. Kept points
are those in the defined range; they remain with their own color. The unkept
points are those out of the defined range. All are colored in black when they
are above the From value, and in white when below the To value. The Reload
Points becomes enabled.
Note:
The unit of measurement for From (or To) is set to Meter, you do not need
to enter "m" after the value. You can change the unit of measurement in
Preferences.
The From value cannot be greater than the To value, and reversely.
The Extract button becomes dimmed.
The Display Inspection Cloud option when checked (or unchecked)
enables to display (or hide) the cloud in display in the 3D View. This cloud
can be the initial 3D inspection cloud or an extracted cloud.
1092 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Each component is a Cloud and each has its own color and displayed in
the 3D View.
The Split to Clusters button becomes dimmed.
The 3D inspection cloud (filtered or not) is hidden. The Display Inspection
Cloud option is unchecked by its own.
Tools in the Production Module 1093
Tip: If required, apply the Cloud Color rendering to be able to view each spilt
component with its own color.
Note: You can split a 3D inspection cloud without extracting a cloud from it. To
do that, bypass the Step 1 in the 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog.
1. Click the Create button. The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog remains open.
If the 3D inspection cloud has not been split but only filtered, a lonely
cloud named as follows Insp3D-Cloud From value - To value is created.
If the 3D inspection cloud has been split; each component is created as a
Cloud. Each has its own color and all are put under a folder called
Extracted Clouds.
2. If required, use the extracted cloud as input for a new extraction (or
splitting).
3. Click Close. The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog closes.
2D-Polyline Inspection
This tool enables to compare a model to a point cloud. A model can come from
an imported DXF (or DWG) file or results from cross-sectioning. An imported
model must be already georeferenced with the point cloud. In both cases, a
model is a 2D polyline which should be composed of at least three non-aligned
points.
1094 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select one point cloud (or more) from the Project Tree.
2. From the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Open icon. The Open dialog
opens.
3. Select AutoCAD® files (*.dxf, *.dwg) from the File Of Type field.
4. Select the Add To Project option (if needed).
5. In the Look In field, navigate to the drive/folder where the .dxf file is
located.
6. Double-click on the file to select it. The DXF File Import dialog opens.
7. Select the DXF length unit and click OK.
8. In the Polyline Inspection group, click the 2D-Polyline Inspection icon. The
2D-Polyline Inspection dialog opens.
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of four parts: The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and
Sampling. The second part allows you to select a model and to set a thickness.
The third part is to perform the inspection. The fourth and last part is to save
the inspection result in the RealWorks database, close the tool and obtain
access to the online help. The selected cloud is displayed in white in the 3D
View.
Tools in the Production Module 1095
Set a Thickness
To Set a Thickness:
[A]
[B]
In this picture, the selected point cloud, the In this picture, only points resulting from the
selected model and the inspection result are inspection with the selected model are
displayed in the 3D View window. displayed
Tools in the Production Module 1097
Note: In the 2D locked position, you can display the 2D grid. To do this, you
can either right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and
select Show 2D Grid or select the 2D Grid/Show 2D Grid command from the
3D View menu bar.
Note: In the 2D locked position or not, you can print the inspection result. To
do this, you can either right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-
up menu and select Print or select the Print command from the File menu bar.
1098 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Save.
2. Click Close.
Note: Instead of clicking Close in the dialog, you can also right-click anywhere
in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and then select Close or press
twice Esc.
1099
Note: You can also find the Ortho-Image group in the Registration module, but
without the Ortho-Projection, Multi Ortho-Projection and Image Rectification
features.
This group includes a set of tools that are related to matched images.
Note: You can also find the Matched Image group in the Registration module,
but without the Image Matching feature.
1100 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create Ortho-Images
Conventional and perspective photographs taken by any 2D camera show
distortions caused by the camera angle and the topography itself. These
phenomena can be noticed particularly on aerial photographs. Non-uninformed
scale on this kind of photographs prevents from direct measurement, like on a
map. These disadvantages can be cancelled by ortho-rectification. This means
that such photographs are computer-deformed.
The Ortho-Projection tool allows you to create ortho-images from the selected
point cloud or textured mesh. You can either export the ortho-images to CAD
software, such as AutoCAD® or MicroStation® for further processing or
drafting operations, or you can perform 2D measurements directly within
RealWorks. The basic principle behind this tool is to choose a Projection Plane
on which the ortho-image will be created, and choose the right information that
you want to store in this image, and then create it. All the metric information will
be stored in this image, i.e. measurements made on this photo will be
accurate.
Tools in the Production Module 1101
This dialog opens as the third tab of the Workspace window and is composed
of four parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the ortho-projection
computation. The first step (called Define Projection Plane) is to define,
orientate and check a Projection Plane. The second part (called Define Zone of
Interest) is to draw a Zone of Interest on the previous Projection Plane. The
third part (called Define Image Resolution) is to specify parameters and
rendering to apply. The fourth part is to preview and create ortho-images.
Note: The two sub-tools (Segmentation and Sampling) are not available if the
input is a mesh.
Note: Within the Ortho-Projection tool, you don’t have to change the loading
state in order to load more or less points in RAM. Now the computation of
ortho-images is done with all points available on the disk. As a result, the time
to compute may be a bitter longer but the resolution is much more higher
1102 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Define Projection Plane by Picking 3 Points 3 - Define Projection Plane by Screen View
3 - Define Corners of Zone of Interest 4 - Define Projection Plane from Existing Ortho-
Image
1. Click the Define Projection Plane by Picking 3 Points icon. The Picking
Parameters toolbar appears.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained) on the displayed objects.
A number located beside the mouse's pointer guides you in picking points. This
number starts from One and ends by Three. When two points are picked, they
are linked by a red segment. When three points are reached, they are linked
two-by-two by a red segment and form in that way a triangle. A Projection
Plane is then computed. No need of defining its Normal; it will be automatically
calculated. You can cancel this plane whenever you want and start a new one.
To do it, start again the previous procedure.
Note:
You can also select Cancel Picking from the pop-menu.
You can Pan, Rotate, Zoom (in or out) and Zoom with constant ratio in the
3D View while defining a Projection Plane.
In the picking mode, pressing Esc cancels the selection of points in
progress. Out of the picking mode, pressing Esc closes the Ortho-
Projection tool.
1104 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Define Corners of Zone of Interest icon. The Vertical Rectangle
Corner Coordinates dialog opens.
2. Enter a point position in the Top Left Corner field.
3. Enter a point position in the Bottom Right Corner field.
4. Click OK.
Tip: You can also select the Set Projection Plane Corners icon from the pop-
up menu.
Note: You can measure the 3D coordinates of two opposite points in the 3D
View thanks to the Point Measurement feature in the Measure tool, and copy
and paste the coordinates in the Vertical Rectangle Corner Coordinates dialog.
Tools in the Production Module 1105
1 - Existing ortho-image in the project or current 3 - Resolution and size of an existing ortho-
Projection Plane image or of the current Projection Plane
2 - Parameters of an existing ortho-image or of
the current Projection Plane
Note:
You can use the Shift + C short-cut (or select Set Camera Parameters
from the pop-up menu) to set or edit parameters.
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate Frame.
1106 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - The first and second picked points 2 - The projection plane is aligned to the
defined horizontal
1108 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc or selecting Cancel Picking (Esc) from
the pop-up menu cancels the selection of points in progress and closes Define
Horizontal by Picking 2 Points.
Tools in the Production Module 1109
Set a Position
You can also modify the position of a Projection Plane by picking a point on the
displayed scene (point cloud or mesh). This is important if you want to use the
elevation information for calculating the ortho-projection.
To Set a Position:
1. Click the Define Projection Plane Position by Picking Point icon. The
Picking Parameters (in 3D constraint mode) toolbar opens.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) anywhere on the selected object.
1 - A point picked on the displayed cloud 2 - The projection plane moves from its current
position to its new position
Note:
Modifying a Projection Plane’s position will not modify its orientation.
Press Esc (or select Cancel Picking (Esc) from the pop-up menu) to close
the Define Projection Plane Position by Picking Point tool.
1110 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a Projection Plane. A green
square appears.
1 - The handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - The handle during the drag & drop operation
1 - Rotate 90° around Vertical Axis 2 - Buttons for selecting a canonical view
Note:
You need to first define a Projection Plane. Otherwise, all views are
dimmed.
You can swap from a view to another not by clicking on the button as are
used to do in the View Alignment toolbar but by clicking on the pull down
arrow. Because clicking on that button will always bring you to the Front
View of the Projection Plane which is the view required to compute an
ortho-image.
1112 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The projection plane remains fixed while the 3D scene rotates 90° around its vertical axis
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
Tip: You can use the short-cut key Shift + C to edit the parameters (or select
Set Camera Parameters from the pop-up menu).
Tools in the Production Module 1113
Before clicking on the Draw button, the Area in the Step 2 panel is "Area
Undefined". After clicking on the Draw button, the entire Projection Plane is set
as a Zone of Interest and its dimensions appears in the Area field. After
drawing a rectangular frame, the Area values are updated to match the drawn
frame' size.
At the same time, the Rotate Counterclockwise 90° icon becomes enabled.
1114 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Draw button. The cursor will take the shapes as shown below.
2. Draw a rectangular frame by picking two points.
3. If required, rotate left both the displayed scene and the Projection Plane
(see Rotate Counterclockwise 90° (on page 1115)).
4. Click Validate.
1 - Shape of the cursor for the first point to pick 2 - The cursor shape of the second point to pick
3 - The Zone of Interest size
A 2D Grid appears upon the locked scene. You can hide it or change its size.
The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer with a
number beside; this guides you in selecting points. This number starts from
One (first corner of a rectangular frame) and ends by Two (opposite corner).
You can cancel the rectangular frame whenever you want and start a new one.
Note:
Select Cancel Rectangle (Esc) from the pop-up menu to undo the
selection of points in progress (once the first has been picked).
Movements are constrained to the Projection Plane's plane and are
restricted to Pan and Zoom. Rotate is not allowed.
Tools in the Production Module 1115
Note: The Area values are updated to match the resized frame's dimensions.
1. Set the Projection Plane to see its front view (by choosing Front View).
2. Click the Rotate Counterclockwise 90° icon. The displayed scene and the
Projection Plane are rotated left.
3. Click again the Rotate Counterclockwise 90° icon. The displayed scene
and the Projection Plane are rotated left again, and so on.
Both the Projection Plane and the 3D scene are rotated left
1116 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Set a Resolution
You can define an ortho-image’s resolution by giving the PPI (Pixels Per Inch),
specifying the number of pixels in the X* and Y* directions or giving the pixel
size. The pixel size is equal to 1 (if the unit of measurements is Inch) or to 25.4
(if the unit of measurement is millimeters) divided by the image resolution (in
PPI). The image size (in pixels) is obtained by dividing the interest zone size by
the pixel size.
To Set a Resolution:
3. Click OK.
Tip: You can use the short-cut key R or select Set Image Resolution (R) from
the pop-up menu to open the Set Image Resolution of Ortho-Image dialog.
Preview an Ortho-Image
You can now use the Preview button to calculate the ortho-image. When
completed, the calculated image will be shown in the 2D Image viewer. You
can change the current parameters and perform a new preview. You can do
this as many times as required until you have the right result.
To Preview an Ortho-Image:
If the ortho-image is bigger than the 2D Image viewer can show, you can pan it
on left-click in any direction. You can also make a 2D-distance measurement.
Because the metric information is stored in the calculated ortho-image, the
measurement is accurate. You can create the measurement in the database by
using the corresponding command in the pop-up menu. Note that once it is
created, the measurement will be shown in the 3D View.
1118 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip:
You can select Preview Ortho-Image from the pop-up menu.
The color of the background on an Ortho-Image is the same as the one in
the 3D View. You can change it in Preferences\Viewer. This change will
be then applied whatever the Rendering option you choose.
Print an Ortho-Image
You can print the preview of an ortho-image.
To Print an Ortho-Image:
Tip: You can also select Print from the menu bar or clicking its icon in the Main
toolbar.
Split an Ortho-Image
When an ortho-image is too wide (or long), you can split it into a set of ortho-
images of smaller size. You can split an ortho-image along a direction (Width
(or Height)) or along two directions (Width + Height).
To Split an Ortho-Image:
Create an Ortho-Image
You can save the result in the database. An ortho-image whose name is
"Image" is created and put under the current active group of the Images Tree.
You can create several ortho-images without leaving the tool.
To Create an Ortho-Image:
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Tip: You can also select Create Ortho-Image (or Close) from the pop-up menu.
You should first hide the 2D Image viewer.
If a point cloud has been selected, you can work on it to delimit an area for the
multi-ortho-projection computation, to render it cleaner without parasite points
or to simplify it (see the Sampling and Segmentation tools). If a mesh has been
selected, the two upper sub-tools are unavailable. The results of applying
these sub-tools will not save into the database; they are used only for
calculation purposes.
Note: The Head Always Up option is kept after opening the tool, i.e., if the
option has been enabled, it will remain enabled.
Define a Polyline
A polyline can be either a line of continuous segments which can be closed (or
not). It can also be composed of one or several non-continuous segments but it
cannot be formed by arcs.
Tools in the Production Module 1121
Select a Polyline
If there is a polyline within the project, it is displayed in the Define Polyline field.
The "Number of Segments" is not then equal to zero. The selected point cloud
(or mesh) and the Projection Planes obtained by extruding each segment of
this selected polyline along the Z* direction are displayed in the 3D View.
1 - Field for selecting an existing Polyline 2 - Number of segments in the selected (or
drawn) Polyline
To Select a Polyline:
Note:
A polyline which is composed of arcs will not appear in the selection list.
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
1122 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Draw a Polyline
If no polyline is available. The Define Polyline combo box is grayed out and the
"Number of Segments" is equal to zero. You have to create at least one in the
database. The selected point cloud (or mesh) is shown with a 2D Grid in
superimpose (if not hidden previously) in the 3D View. The scene is
constrained in the XY* plane of the active coordinate frame, brought to the Top
view and movements while picking points are restricted to Rotate (around the
Z* axis), Zoom (along the Z* axis), and Pan (in the XY* plane).
To Draw a Polyline:
1. Click the Create New 2D Polyline icon. The Drawing and Picking
Parameters (in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear in the 3D View. The
mouse cursor shape changes to a pencil.
2. Draw a polyline by picking several points.
3. Click End Line. The last picked point ends the line.
4. Click Create. The drawn Polyline appears in the Define Polyline field and
its "Number of Segments" is updated.
Tip: You can select each of the Drawing features from the pop-up menu.
Note:
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
In the Drawing toolbar, the Change Mode to Arc, Draw Circle by Defining
the Center and Radius and Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter icons are
enabled and let the user draw such kind of polyline but any will be into
account.
Tools in the Production Module 1123
You can modify all the Projection Plane heights at once by changing the
Maximal Altitude (or Minimal Altitude) value or each Projection Plane height
individually. The Maximal (or Minimal) Altitude default value will be the Maximal
(or Minimal) Altitude value of the active Projection Plane. The maximal value
must be higher than the minimal value.
1 - Top Align all Planes 3 - Start Editing Table 5 - The Display / Hide option
2 - Bottom Align all Planes 4 - Inverse Normal of All
Planes
1124 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
Instead of clicking a button in the Multi-Ortho-Projection dialog, you can
also select its equivalent from the pop-up menu.
You undo the change you have done and redo it again by selecting Undo
and Redo.
You can also select a Projection Plane in the 3D View by picking it.
Enlarge (or reduce) the selected Projection Plane's height by dragging and
dropping the two horizontal edges.
1. Click the Top Align all Planes icon. The Maximal Altitude dialog opens.
2. Enter a new value in the Maximal Altitude field.
3. Or use the Up and Down buttons* to select a value.
4. Click OK. All Projection Planes are aligned to the top.
1. Click the Bottom Align all Planes icon. The Minimum Altitude dialog opens.
2. Enter a new value in the Minimum Altitude field.
3. Or use the Up and Down buttons* to select a value.
4. Click OK. All Projection Planes are aligned to the bottom.
Edit Planes
To Edit Planes:
1. Click the Start Editing Table icon. The Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters
dialog opens.
The Auto Hide feature allows displaying more information using less screen
space by hiding (or showing) the Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters dialog.
When you press the Auto Hide button, the Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters
dialog will hide away. Move the mouse pointer over the Multi-Ortho-Image Area
Parameters title bar, it will slide out and will become visible. If you want the
Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters dialog to stay visible after it has be slid
out, just press the Auto Hide button.
Tip: (*) You may see the Projection Plane corresponding to the selected area
appears in Step 4 - Preview Single Image as well as its Size, Minimum Altitude
and Maximum Value.
Tools in the Production Module 1127
1. Define a Resolution.
2. Choose a Density to apply.
3. Define the Depth parameter.
Set a Resolution
The user should define a Resolution to apply to the active Projection Plane. A
Resolution is by default square.
To Set a Resolution:
Set a Density
The Density expressed in terms of PPI (Pixels Per Inch) is automatically
computed according the current value of the Resolution.
1128 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Check the Define Depth option. The Front and Back fields become
editable.
2. Enter a value in the Front field. The Reload Front Depth icon becomes
enabled.
3. Enter a value in the Back field. The Reload Back Depth icon becomes
enabled.
4. If required, load the initial value by pressing Reload Front Depth.
5. If required, load the initial value by pressing Reload Back Depth.
Tools in the Production Module 1129
In this view, you can zoom or make a 2D distance measurement. You can
zoom according three ways. The first way is to magnify (or reduce) an area of
the ortho-projection image using Zoom In and Zoom Out. The second way is to
magnify (or reduce) the whole ortho-projection image using the mouse's wheel
(if existed). The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list.
Tip: The color of the background on an Ortho-Image is the same as the one in
the 3D View. You can change it in Preferences\Viewer. This change will be
then applied whatever the Rendering option you choose.
Click Display Previous (or Next) Ortho-image to set the previous (or next)
Projection Plane as active.
Click Display First (or Last) Ortho-image to set the first (or last) Projection
Plane as active.
Key in a Projection Plane's order in the Preview Single Image field to
select it. Do not need to validate by pressing the Enter key.
Tip:
Use the Home (or End) button of your keyboard instead of Display First (or
Last) Ortho-image.
Use the Up (or Down) arrow of the keyboard instead of Display Previous
(or Next) Ortho-image.
Note:
The active (current) Projection Plane's parameters like its Size, Maximum
Altitude and Minimum Altitude are displayed in Step 4 of the Multi-Ortho-
Projection dialog.
The Display Previous Ortho-image, Display Next Ortho-image, Display
First Ortho-image and Display Last Ortho-image buttons are dimmed if
there is only one segment in the defined polyline.
Tools in the Production Module 1131
Print an Ortho-Image
You can print the preview of an ortho-image.
To Print an Ortho-Image:
Tip: You can also select Print from the menu bar or clicking its icon in the Main
toolbar.
Create Ortho-Images
You can create an ortho-image at a time or all at once in the database. Each
ortho-image is named as follows: Cross-Object-Polyline's name-Segment's
order. You can export each of them as a TIFF format file or via the DXF format
to AutoCAD®. Note that you can create several series of ortho-images without
quitting the tool.
1132 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In the Ortho-Image group, click the Image Rectification icon. The Image
Rectification dialog opens.
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The navigation
mode swaps automatically to the Station-Based mode.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Image Rectification feature can be selected in the
Ortho-Image group, on the Imaging tab.
Choose a Station
You need to select a station with at least an image inside.
To Choose a Station:
Note: In case no selection has been performed before entering the tool, the
entire project will be taken into account. The first station of the project is by
default chosen.
1134 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If the current project has no images; the Select Image Type dialog is empty
and looks as illustrated below:
If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:
If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble S1X0
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:
You can swap from the Station-Based mode to the Examiner (or Walkthrough)
mode and vice versa; Switching to the Examiner mode is typically useful for
checking a plane that has been defined in the Station-Based mode.
To Pick Points:
Note: You can define a projection plane even if the selected station does not
contain any image.
1136 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another point anywhere in the 3D View (on the displayed point cloud
or not). The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point anywhere in the 3D View (only on the displayed point
cloud). A vertical plane appears with the third picked point as center.
[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1137
[D]
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another point on the screen. These two points will define the
orientation of the first axis of the horizontal plane's frame. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point in 3D (on a cloud point, a measured point or a
geometry). This point defines the height of the vertical plane. A horizontal
plane appears with the third picked point as center.
[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1139
[D]
[A]
[A]
3. Pick another point on the screen so that the two points represent a
horizontal segment in the 3D space. These two points define the
orientation of a horizontal segment drawn on the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C].
4. Pick another on the screen so that the previous point and this new one
represent the steepest slope direction of the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [D] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1141
[D]
5. Pick the last point in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). The
three first picked points - which are not collinear (not lying on the same
line) - draw a 3D plane; the fourth picked point is its center.
You can swap from the Station-Based mode to the Examiner (or Walkthrough)
mode and vice versa; Switching to the Examiner mode is typically useful for
checking a plane that has been defined in the Station-Based mode.
1. Click the Define Plane by Picking Three 3D Points icon. The Picking
Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained) in the 3D View.
1. Click the Define Vertical Plane by Picking Two 3D Points icon. The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick two points (free or constrained) in the 3D View.
Tools in the Production Module 1143
1. Click on the From button. The Copy From Existing Rectified Image dialog
opens. All rectified images inside the project are listed.
2. Select a rectified image from the Project Tree. The OK button becomes
active.
3. Click OK. The Copy From Existing Rectified Image dialog closes.
The rectified image parameters appear in the Step 3 and Step 4 of the Image
Rectification dialog. Its projection plane is shown in the 3D View window.
1144 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a projection plane. A green
square appears.
2. If a corner handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the projection
plane size. During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.
1 - Handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - Handle during the drag & drop operation
1 - Handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - Handle during the drag & drop operation
1. Click the Define Plane Position by Picking One 3D Point icon. The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on the displayed point cloud in the 3D
View.
1146 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
The size of the zone of interest is in the current unit of measurement (the
one set in Preferences).
If no projection plane has been defined in Step 1, the grayed-out Area
Undefined message appears in the dialog and the Draw button remains
dimmed.
Tools in the Production Module 1147
1. Click Draw. The cursor will take the shapes as shown below and the
projection plane is hidden.
2. Draw a rectangular frame by picking two points.
1 - Cursor shape of the first 2 - Cursor shape of the second 3 - Size of the interest zone
point to be picked point to be picked
1148 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer to indicate
that you are in the picking mode. A number beside this pointer guides you
step-by-step in the point's selection. It starts from One that corresponds to the
first point of the X* direction and ends by Two. Once the two points are
reached, the interest zone is generated. You can cancel it whenever you want
and start a new one.
Note:
Pressing Esc cancels the selection of points in progress and leaves the
drawing mode.
(*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
Tools in the Production Module 1149
1. Enter a value in the Pixel Size field. The image size (WxH) is updated
according the new value.
2. Or click Advanced. The Set Image Resolution dialog opens.
3. Do one of the following:
Tip: You can use the combination of keys Shift + R (or select Set Image
Resolution from the pop-up menu) to open the Set Image Resolution dialog.
Tools in the Production Module 1151
In this 2D Image viewer, you can zoom-in (or zoom-out) by doing one of the
following:
Magnify or reduce an area on the rectified image with the Image Zoom In
and Image Zoom Out buttons,
Use the mouse wheel,
Choose a zoom factor from the drop-down list.
If the rectified image is larger than the 2D Image viewer can show, you can pan
it on left-click in any direction.
Tip: You can select Preview Rectified Image from the pop-up menu.
Note: If you close the Image Rectification tool before previewing the result, the
position of the rectified image will be lost. If you close the tool after previewing
the result, a dialog opens and prompts you to save the result or not.
1152 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Measurement.
2. Pick two points on the rectified image. The measurement distance is
shown in text in the 2D Image viewer.
3. Select Create Measurement from the pop-up menu.
4. Select Close Tool from the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can also use the Esc key instead of selecting Close Tool from the
pop-up menu.
Note: Pressing Esc without saving the measured distance will cancel that
distance.
Tip: You can also select Print from the File menu (or click on the Print button in
the Main toolbar).
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
Tip: You can also right-click in the 3D View and select Create Rectified Image
from the pop-up menu.
Note: Once the zone of interest has been defined (3D rectangle), defining a
new plane will merely modify the position and orientation of the zone of
interest. In particular, the size of the rectangle is kept. This can prove useful
when producing a series of rectified images of a facade (to keep the height and
vertical position of the rectangle).
Note: You do not need to first preview a rectified image to create it in the
database.
Convert to an Ortho-Image
The Convert to Ortho-Image feature lets you inspect a power plant by
comparing its blueprint and the point cloud obtained by its scanning.
1154 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Import Images
An image of the BMP, or JPEG, or TIF format can be imported into RealWorks.
The only prerequisite is to have a project already loaded in RealWorks.
Otherwise, the import feature remains grayed-out.
To Import Images:
1. From the File menu, select Import Image. The Import Image In dialog
opens.
2. In the Look In field, navigate to the drive / folder where the images are
stored.
3. Select an image to import.
4. Click Import. The Import Image In dialog closes.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Import Image feature can be selected from the
Import/Export group, in the Home tab.
Create Ortho-Images
To Create Ortho-Images:
Or
Note: The three corners should form a square area. Otherwise, the OK button
remains grayed-out.
Tools in the Production Module 1155
Move an Ortho-Image
The Move Ortho-Image feature has a set of tools that enable to modify the
position and orientation of an Ortho-Image created previously with the Convert
to Ortho-Image (see "Convert to an Ortho-Image" on page 1153) or Ortho-
.Projection (see "Create Ortho-Images" on page 1100) tool.
Modify an Ortho-Image
To Modify an Ortho-Image:
Tip: All the features can be accessed from the pop-up menu.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Move Ortho-Image feature can be selected from the
Ortho-Image group, in the Imaging tab.
1156 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can change the position of the manipulator by clicking the Change
Manipulator Location icon.
Tools in the Production Module 1157
3. Pick a position. The Ortho-Image moves along the direction of its normal,
at the position set by the picked point.
1158 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
4. To pan the Ortho-Image in any direction, click on the Plane Handle and
move the Ortho-Image in its plane.
Tools in the Production Module 1159
Tip: You can change the position of the manipulator by clicking the Change
Manipulator Location icon.
1160 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can change the position of the manipulator by clicking the Change
Manipulator Location icon.
Tools in the Production Module 1161
4. Pick another point, on the displayed point cloud or the displayed Ortho-
Image.
1162 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Ortho-Image is moved in its plane along the direction defined by the two
picked points.
Tools in the Production Module 1163
Image Matching
The Image Matching tool allows you to match an imported image to a
displayed 3D scene, or in other words, to find the camera position from which
the image is shot. The basic principle behind this tool is to select at least four
pairs of markers (points or segments or a combination thereof); each of them
should be selected on the same physical objects. For example, you can select
a point from the 3D scene, and another one in the 2D image, both correspond
to the corner of a room. We call these two points a pair of markers. Then
RealWorks will use these selected markers to calculate a best registration (or a
best camera position) so that when you view from this camera position and
along its axis, the image and the 3D scene will superposed. Once the image is
matched to the 3D scene, you can use it to color the scanned points, to texture
the meshed model, or just to enhance understanding of the scene.
This dialog opened as the third tab of the WorkSpace window is separated into
four parts. The first part enables to select an image that will be used as
reference for matching. The second part contains tools to select and edit
markers. The third part enables to preview the matching, view stored and
matched images and match under constraint. The last part enables to validate
the matching and color points. The selected image is shown as a thumbnail in
the left top corner of the 3D View. If more than one image are selected, the first
in the selection list is the one that is shown in the 3D View.
Note: The Image Matching icon is not present in the Tools toolbar.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Image Matching feature can be selected in the
Matched Image group, on the Imaging tab.
1164 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Select an Image
You should select an image from the Select Image combo box for matching.
Only unmatched and already matched images are listed in that combo box.
To Select an Image:
Tip: Inside the Image Matching tool, you can go back to the Models Tree tab to
display or hide objects for marker selection purposes.
Tip:
The Hide/Show Image icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
You can also click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key V.
Tip:
The Maximize/Minimize Image icon can also be selected from the pop-up
menu.
You can also click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key M.
Tools in the Production Module 1165
Move a Thumbnail
Place your cursor over the symbol and drag and drop the thumbnail image
to a location within the 3D View.
Select Markers
For a given image, if a matching has been already performed, you can view the
stored matching. If any matching has been performed and when no information
about the shooting position are available, you can start matching by selecting
at least four pairs of markers. Before selecting, each pair is set as "Undef" in
the Pairs column of the marker list and "?" in the Defined In column.
To Select Markers:
Note:
Press twice the Esc button to close the Image Matching tool.
In the marker list table, each selected marker pair will be shown. You can
see in the second column whether the pair is completely defined, or if it is
just partially defined.
1166 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Pick Markers
You should pick at least four pairs of markers. Each pair may be either a 3D
Point/2D Point pair or a 3D Line/2D Line pair. The order of these pairs has no
influence on the final calculation. So you can pick them whenever you find a
corresponding marker pair (no matter its type) in both 3D View and 2D View
(for image). Movements are restricted in the 3D View to Pan, Zoom and Rotate
while picking markers.
To Pick Markers:
Note:
Pressing Back (or once on Esc) while the picking is in progress cancels
the selected markers.
A pair of points is always put at the first position in the marker list when
you select a combination of points and lines.
Tools in the Production Module 1167
6. Repeat the steps from 4 to 5 for the three other pairs of point markers.
Note:
Point markers can be selected by pair (one from a view and one from the
other view) as described above or continuously (four from a view and four
the other view).
1168 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
When you select a pair from the list, its related point marker P on the
object becomes green (the number label remains in yellow) and the red
square in the reference image becomes pink (the number remains
unchanged).
Tools in the Production Module 1169
1. Select an image from the selection list that will be used as a reference
image for matching.
2. Click on the Add Line Marker icon. You are now in the picking mode.
3. Pick in the 3D scene to set at least four line markers (if any point has been
set).
4. Pick in the reference image to set at least four line markers (if any point
has been set).
The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer with two
numbers beside. The first number is a line order and the second to the picked
point order. A point once picked on the selected object is shown by a yellow L
with a number besides indicating a line marker order. Two points from the
same rank once picked are linked by a color segment which is named Line # X.
X is the line marker rank. A point once picked on the reference image is shown
by a pink square marker with a number besides indicating a line marker order
and a line is drawn through this point to the current mouse cursor position. Two
points from the same rank once picked are linked by a color segment which
named Line # X. X is the matching line rank. When a pair of line markers from
the same rank (one in the reference image and one in the cloud) is defined,
this pair is named Line # X and is put in a list. X is the pair rank. A check mark
besides a pair of line markers means that this pair is taken into account for
matching. Un-select a check mark if you don't want to take into account a pair.
When you select a pair from the list, its related line markers are lengthened.
1170 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Load Markers
You can import an image that has been already matched, load and use its
parameters for matching new images. Usually, such parameters are stored in a
TXT (or ASCII) format file.
To Load Markers:
Tip: You can also use the short-cut key L instead of selecting Load Marker
Pairs From File from the pop-up menu.
Modify Markers
Once four pairs of markers (Points or Lines) are set, you can delete those that
are not correctly set for matching, re-order a part (or the whole) of them, modify
their location in each view or reset them all. Four tools, available for editing the
marker features, are described hereafter.
1. Click on the Move Markers icon. The cursor shape changes as shown
in the illustration below.
2. Move the cursor over any marker in either the 2D image or the 3D View.
The marker will be highlighted in pink in the 2D image and in green in the
3D View.
3. Drag and drop the marker to a new position. Its corresponding marker in
the other view will not be moved too.
1 - The cursor shape in the displacement mode 2 - The marker is in green when highlighted in
the 3D View
1172 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Delete Makers icon. The cursor shape changes as shown in
the illustration below.
2. Move the cursor over any marker either in the image or in the 3D scene.
The marker will be highlighted.
3. Click on the marker to delete it. Its corresponding marker in the other view
will is also deleted.
When you place the mouse cursor upon a point (P), its color tilts from red to
pink in the reference image and from yellow to green in the point cloud (or
mesh). This means that the point (P) is selected and can be deleted. Deleting a
point (P) will remove it from both the reference image and the point cloud (or
mesh). A point (P) once deleted is replaced by one which is just after it and the
pairs list is automatically updated. Once all markers deleted, you go back
automatically to the selection mode. When you delete a line (L), you delete by
the same way the line (L) in the other view.
Tip: You select a pair of markers from the marker list table and press the Del
key to delete it.
Tools in the Production Module 1173
Tip: The Reset All Markers icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
1. Click the Reorder Markers icon. The cursor shape changes as shown
in the illustration below.
2. Move the cursor over any marker in either the 2D Image or the 3D View.
3. Pick the marker. Its order* is reversed with that of the first marker. The
order of its corresponding marker in the other view does not change.
Save Markers
You can save the selected marker pairs into a text file and reload it later on to
continue your image matching work.
To Save Markers:
Tip: You can also use the short-cut key S instead of selecting Save Marker
Pairs To File from the pop-up menu.
Match an Image
With an unmatched image, once four pairs of markers have been selected, the
Preview button becomes enabled. You can proceed to a preview. With an
already matched image, you can view the stored matching.
Tools in the Production Module 1175
Gap between markers set on the reference image and on the displayed scene
3. If required, click Hide. The image in background will be removed from the
3D View.
Tip:
Instead of using the slider, you can click anywhere in the 3D View and use
the Up and Down keys of your keyboard.
You can click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key A to set
the blending parameter to 0 (slider in Low position) or to 1 (slider in Top
position).
Note: You can hide the image by right-clicking anywhere in the 3D View and
selecting Projected Image.
Note: Because you need to adjust the 3D scene to cover the projected image
by small movements in all directions, the Head Always Up option in
Preferences if checked is then disabled.
1. Select a pair of markers from the marker list which you consider offer the
best coincidence
2. The first Constrained to Marker Pair icon becomes active. Click on it.
3. Go to the 3D View, and move the scene. You can see that the movement
is constrained in such a way that the selected marker pair will always be
coincident.
1. Select another pair of markers from marker list. The second Constrained
to Marker Pair icon becomes enabled.
2. Click on the Constrained to Marker Pair icon.
3. Go to the 3D View, and move the scene. You can see that the movement
is constrained in such a way that both the selected pairs will always be
coincident.
Color Points
You can now use the Coloring button to color the displayed cloud(s) with the
currently matched image. It is important to note that this coloring operation has
no Undo. After the coloring, the color attributes of the points can be changed
again if you use this function with another image.
Note: The Coloring operation may take a long time for huge datasets.
1. Click Apply.
2. Click Close.
1180 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Go to a Shooting Position
This feature allows you to align your viewing frustum from the shooting position
of an image as registered to the 3D data. It is not accessible if the selected
image has no 3D data correspondence.
To Go to a Shooting Position:
The first screen capture shows an image The second image shows the view alignment
thumbnail with a displayed cloud after the Go to Shooting Position command is
executed
Tip: You can right-click on an image and select Go to Shooting Position from
the drop-down menu.
Note: In Ribbon, you can click the Go to Shooting Position icon in the Matched
Image group, on the Imaging tab.
1181
Model Shapes
The Model tab provides a fast and intuitive 3D modeling capability. Tools in this
tab are gathered in two categories, called Creation and Edition.
Tools are split into two categories: Main Tool and Sub-Tool. Main tools enable
to model diverse shapes to represent the as-built environment using simple
CAD compliant geometrics. They can be reached from the Modeling menu, in
the Menu and Toolbars user interface or from the Creation group, on the Model
tab, in the Ribbon user interface.
Tools that enable to modify the objects created previously, can be found in the
Modeling menu in the Menu and Toolbars user interface, or in the Edition
group, on the Model tab, in the Ribbon user interface.
Note: The user can also find the Creation and Edition groups from the Model
tab on the Plant tab.
Cloud-Based Modeler
The Cloud-Based Modeler tool allows you to model geometries of the following
shapes: Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, etc. Modeling can only be cloud-based. In
this case, a selection as input data (Project Cloud or pure point cloud) is
required and the modeling is done by fitting points.
1182 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The
Segmentation tool is open default and its toolbar appears. The input point
cloud is called Cloud Data. The information box at the top right corner of
the 3D View displays the RMS Deviate and Number of Points information
(both are initially "Undefined") for the Cloud-Based Modeler tool and the
Number of Points information for the Segmentation tool. The RMS (Root
Mean Square) Deviate corresponds to the standard deviation between
points used for fitting and the fitted geometry.
If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option
(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View are hidden except the one selected. All of the displayed objects have
their bulb icon turned to Off.
If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed. All displayed objects have their bulb icon remained On, except
the one selected.
Note: (*) If the selected point cloud is On before starting the tool, it
automatically tilts to Off. We advise you to maintain it Off.
Caution: (**) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Cloud-Based Modeler feature can be reached from
the Creation group, on the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1183
1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.
1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
1184 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.
After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tools in the Production Module 1185
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tip: You can also select a geometry type from the pop-up menu.
1186 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Use Constraints
This optional step is for applying constraints to objects under construction.
Check the Use Constraint option to make this step appear. Constraints can be
assumed as limits imposed on objects and they vary according to the geometry
type selected in Step 1. You cannot apply two constraints of the same type.
The applied constraint you find in the constraint list - see hereafter - is always
the last applied one.
Tools in the Production Module 1187
Plane
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying a constraint. A constraint
(once applied) is put in the constraint list and each is selected by default (box
checked). You can apply one constraint of the same type at once. You can mix
a constraint type with another; but you have some restrictions in combining
constraint types (see the table).
[A]
[B]
3. Un-checking a defined constraint in the constraint list will free the related
constraint type for use.
Tip:
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
1. Click the Pass through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar and its
information box at the top right corner of the 3D View.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1190 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Sphere
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. A constraint
(when applied) is put in the constraint list and each is selected by default (box
checked). You can apply one constraint of the same type at once. You can mix
a constraint type with another; but you have some restrictions in combining
constraint types (see the table).
[A]
[B]
Tip:
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Lock a Radius
To Lock a Radius:
1. Click the Lock Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Do one of the following:
Lock a Center
To Lock a Center:
1. Click the Lock Center icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1. Click on the Lock Center on Line icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
1192 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Cylinder
Six types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a constraint is
compatible with the others. If you mix incompatible constraints together; a
warning message appears. After applying constraints, the constraint list looks
as shown in [B].
[A]
[B]
Tip:
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
1. Click the Pass Axis Through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens
with the Pick Point mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
Tools in the Production Module 1195
Lock a Radius
To Lock a Radius:
1. Click the Lock Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Do one of the following:
Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:
1. Click the Make Secant to Cylinder icon. The 3D Secant dialog as well
as its information box appears.
2. Pick a cylinder.
3. If required, check Use Same Radius to set the same radius than the
picked cylinder.
4. If required, check Use Given Angle and give a secant angle.
5. If required, click Perpendicular to have a 90° secant angle.
6. Click OK.
Note that the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint type generates four sub-
constraint types according to the option(s) checked.
If only Use Same Radius has been checked, you have the two following
constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Radius.
If only Use Given Angle has been checked and the given angle value is
different to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types:
Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Angle with Direction.
If only Use Given Angle has been checked and the given angle value is
equal to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types: Make
Axis Secant to Axis and Make Perpendicular to Direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1197
If only Use Given Angle has been checked and Perpendicular pressed-on,
you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and
Make Perpendicular to Direction.
If the two options have been checked with an angle other than 90° or
270°, you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to
Axis, Lock Radius and Lock Angle with Direction.
If the two options have been checked with an angle equal to 90° or 270°,
you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis,
Lock Radius and Make Perpendicular to Direction.
If the two options are kept unchecked, you have the Make Axis Secant to
Axis constraint type.
1198 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Regular Cone
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a constraint is
compatible with the others.
[A]
[B]
Tip:
Tools in the Production Module 1199
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:
Circular Torus
Five types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to know on how a constraint
is compatible with the other(s).
[A]
[B]
Tip:
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
1. Click the Make Parallel to a Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.
1. Click the Lock Center Line Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens
as well as it information box.
2. Do one of the following:
1. Click the Lock Pipe Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well
as it information box.
2. Do one of the following:
1. Click the Align to Join to Two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius icon.
2. Pick an existing cylinder.
3. Pick another existing cylinder. The result is null if the two picked cylinders
are not secant or do not have the same diameter.
Note: A warning appears if the two picked cylinder axes are parallel.
Tools in the Production Module 1205
3D Point
Two types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. These two
constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a
constraint is compatible with the others.
[A]
[B]
Tip:
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
1206 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Lock on a Plane
To Lock on a Plane:
1. Click the Lock on Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens with the Pick
Entity with Direction mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.
1. Click the Lock to Line (or Axis) icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens with
the Pick Axis Entity mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1207
Circular Arc
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. Lock on Plane,
Make Parallel to Plane and Make Perpendicular to Direction (already evoked)
will detail here. All constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table
below to check how a constraint is compatible with the others.
[A]
[B]
Tip:
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Lock on a Plane
To Lock on a Plane:
1. Click the Lock on Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens with the Pick
Entity with Direction mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.
1. Click the Make Parallel to a Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.
Segment
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together; refer to the table (click to see) to know on how a
constraint is compatible with the other.
[A]
[B]
Tip:
1210 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
1. Click the Pass Axis Through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens
with the Pick Point mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1212 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Extrusion
This step is not in option as for the other geometry types. The Use Constraint
option is checked by default and cannot be unchecked. The Drawing and
Picking Parameters (in 3D constraint mode) toolbars appear and the cursor is
in the drawing mode. Two types of constraint are available. The constraint list
(with two columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints.
Define a Polyline
In the Drawing toolbar, not only the Change Mode icon is available but also the
Draw Rectangle and Draw Circle icons. This differs from the Drawing toolbar in
the Polyline Drawing tool.
To Define a Polyline:
Note:
After defining a polyline, all drawing modes (Line, Arc, Rectangle and
Circle) are dimmed in the Drawing toolbar.
The Walkthrough navigation mode is forbidden. If you are in the
Walkthrough mode, the navigation mode will swap of its own from that
mode to Examiner after starting drawing.
Tools in the Production Module 1213
The Lock 2D Curve and Make Parallel to Direction constraints appear in the
constraint list. The primitive to extrude will have an axis direction perpendicular
to the screen view.
1. Click the Start 3D Plane Tool icon. The 3D Plane toolbar appears.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane*. The scene is locked on the defined 3D
plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
3. Choose a drawing mode among Line, Arc, Rectangle and Circle.
4. Draw and validate a polyline. The scene is free from the 2D lock.
Note:
(*) Please, refer to the 3D Plane tool on how to define a 3D plane.
The Find Best Extrusion View is only present when using the 3D
Plane tool in the Cloud-Based Modeler tool. It enables to find the best
cutting direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1215
Select a Polyline
If there is a polyline within the project (or after drawing and creating one), you
can set it as selected. Only a 2D polyline and 3D coplanar polyline (all nodes
are in the same plane) can be selected.
To Select a Polyline:
Tip: You can also check Select Polyline from the pop-up menu.
1216 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
(*) Picking a first point in the polyline drawing mode will bring the 3D scene
locked to a view perpendicular to the defined direction.
After validating the defined polyline, the Lock 2D Curve constraint is put in
the constraint list under the Make Parallel to Direction constraint.
Tip: You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
Tools in the Production Module 1217
Note:
(*) Picking a first point in the polyline drawing mode will bring the 3D scene
locked to a view parallel to the defined plane with a 2D Grid (if not
previously hidden).
After validating the defined polyline, the Lock 2D Curve constraint is put in
the constraint list under the Make Perpendicular to Plane constraint.
Tip: You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
1218 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Rectangular Torus
Only one constraint type is available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying a constraint. After applying a
constraint, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].
[A]
[B]
Tip:
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Note: The user should fit (or extract) a Rectangular Torus with constraint.
Otherwise, the Fit and Extract buttons remain dimmed.
Tools in the Production Module 1219
1. Click the Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section
icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a first box. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another box. If the two boxes are secant and have the same section,
a rectangular torus appears.
1220 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Its Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Axis) is parallel to the two
boxes' Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Width).
Its Bend Angle is equal to the angle drawn by the two boxes' Direction of
Height.
Its Outer Diameter is equal to the two boxes' Depth.
4. If the two picked boxes are not secant; the "This constraint cannot be
activated because the two boxes are not secant" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
5. If the two picked boxes do not have the same section, the "There is too
much indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical,
one of them is a cube or they have no common face" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
Tip:
If required, make the two boxes secant using the Make Secant to a Box
(With Same Section) constraint in the Geometry Modifier tool.
If required, modify manually the two boxes' parameters (like Center,
Width, Height, Depth, Directions, etc.) in the Property window to make
sure that both are secant and have the same section.
Tools in the Production Module 1221
Box
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together, refer to the table below to check how a constraint is
compatible with the others.
[A]
[B]
Tip:
1222 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
Del to clear it.
All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
1. Click the Define X icon. The 3D Direction toolbar opens with the Pick an
Entity With Direction set by-default.
2. Define a direction using available tools.
The Vector X (also called Direction of the Weight in the Property window) of
the box is parallel* to the defined direction.
1. Click the Define Z icon. The 3D Direction toolbar opens with the Pick an
Entity With Direction set by-default.
2. Define a direction using available tools.
The Normal Z (also called Direction of the Height in the Property window) of
the box is parallel** to the defined direction.
Calculate a Geometry
This step can come after choosing a geometry type or after constraints have
been applied. You have two ways for computing a geometry: Fit and Extract.
Fit consists of adjusting the displayed/fenced point cloud with geometry.
Extract consist in picking a point on the point cloud where the geometry should
lie. The resulting geometry will be fitted to a subset of the point cloud in the
neighborhood around the picked point. This is a faster way of defining a
geometry; no fence is necessary.
1. Click Extract.
2. Pick a point. A primitive of the type selected in Step 1 appears.
Tools in the Production Module 1225
Tip: If a sampling/segmentation has been started; you can directly fit and
create a geometry in the database without doing this in two steps. Choose for
that the Fit and Create command from the pop-up menu or use its related
short-cut key Space bar.
Note:
Fit and Extract are dimmed if Extrusion has been selected in Step 1 and
remains in this state as long as a polyline has not been drawn and
validated.
The Extract function will work well when the picked point is in a clear area
on the model, i.e., where the model is only present in a large enough
neighborhood around the point. When it is difficult to find a clear area, then
it is better to first fence then fit
Create a Geometry
If you are satisfied with the fitted/extracted geometry, you can create it as a
persistent object in the RealWorks database by using the Create button in the
dialog. You can create as many geometries as required without leaving the
tool. When you need to leave the tool, just click on Close.
Tip: Create and Close can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Geometry Creator
The Geometry Creator tool is for creating a geometry. Ten types are available.
You can create a geometry by editing known parameters, picking points or
picking entities within displayed objects. All construction methods inside the
tool are pure; they are in opposition to those based on point cloud fitting. A
created geometry can be used as an entry for the other tools of RealWorks like
e.g. the Surface to Model Inspection tool where models of tunnel are required
for comparison.
1226 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The Plane type is
set by default and the 3D Plane tool information box appears at the top right
corner of the 3D View.
Note:
You can press the Esc key to leave the Geometry Creator tool.
You can use the Geometry Modifier tool, the Intersect tool and the
Duplicator tool within the Geometry Creator tool in order to modify the
geometry you are defining.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Geometry Creator feature can be reached from the
Creation group, on the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1227
Define a Plane
To Define a Plane:
1. Click the Plane icon. Step 2 of the Geometry Creator dialog becomes
as shown in [A] in the Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode and in [B] in
Station-Based mode.
[A] [B]
3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.
A plane whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current Sub-
Project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the plane parameters like its Center and Direction of Axis.
Define a Plane (in all Navigation Modes (Examiner, Walkthrough and Station-Based))
There are three methods available in all navigation modes for interactively
defining a plane's orientation and position: Pick two Screen Points, Pick Three
Points and Pick Two Points. For the first method, the plane will pass through
the line defined by these two points and will be perpendicular to the screen
plane. For the second method, the plane will pass through these three points.
The third method is to pick two points which define a vector. As a plane is
defined by two vectors. Selecting this method will orientate the plane so that
the second vectors is parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis) of the active
coordinate frame.
There are two methods for precisely defining the orientation of a plane: Axis
and Pick Entity with Direction. For the first method, the plane becomes
perpendicular to an axis of the active frame. For the second method, the
plane's orientation will be aligned to the axis of the picked entity.
1. Click Pick three Points . The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the
3D constraint mode.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained) on displayed objects or not.
You can swap from the Station-Based mode to the Examiner (or Walkthrough)
mode and vice versa; Switching to the Examiner mode is typically useful for
checking a plane that has been defined in the Station-Based mode.
To Pick Points:
Note: You can define a projection plane even if the selected station does not
contain any image.
1230 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another point anywhere in the 3D View (on the displayed point cloud
or not). The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point anywhere in the 3D View (only on the displayed point
cloud). A vertical plane appears with the third picked point as center.
[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1231
[D]
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another point on the screen. These two points will define the
orientation of the first axis of the horizontal plane's frame. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point in 3D (on a cloud point, a measured point or a
geometry). This point defines the height of the vertical plane. A horizontal
plane appears with the third picked point as center.
[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1233
[D]
[A]
[A]
3. Pick another point on the screen so that the two points represent a
horizontal segment in the 3D space. These two points define the
orientation of a horizontal segment drawn on the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C].
Tools in the Production Module 1235
4. Pick another on the screen so that the previous point and this new one
represent the steepest slope direction of the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [D] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
[C]
[D]
5. Pick the last point in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). The
three first picked points - which are not collinear (not lying on the same
line) - draw a 3D plane; the fourth picked point is its center.
1236 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
Define a Sphere
To Define a Sphere:
1. Click the Sphere icon. Pick Two Points * is set by default. The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor
is in the picking mode.
2. Do one of the following:
3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.
A Sphere whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the sphere parameters like its Center, Diameter, Direction of
Axis and Distance Between Extremities.
Note:
The Direction of Axis is assumed to be aligned with the Z-Axis of the
active coordinate frame.
(*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D
Sphere at the middle of the 3D View. This 3D Sphere has the default
parameters as parameters (the ones in the dialog after choosing Sphere
as Geometry Type). If you decide to choose another Geometry Type, a
dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).
1238 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. If required, click the Pick Two Points icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a sphere.
3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a sphere.
Edit Parameters
The value by default for the Radius is one meter. The 3D coordinates in the
Center field are the 3D position of the middle of the 3D View.
To Edit Parameters:
Define a Cylinder
To Create a Cylinder:
3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.
A Cylinder whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the cylinder parameters like its Center, Pipe Diameter,
Length, Direction of Axis, Direction of Bound 1 and Direction of Bound 2.
Note:
The Direction of Bound 1 and the Direction of Bound 2 are aligned with the
Direction of Axis.
(*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a vertical
Cylinder at the middle of the 3D View. This Cylinder has as parameters
the defaults (the ones in the dialog after choosing Cylinder as Geometry
Type). If you choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and
prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).
1240 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. If required, click the Pick Three Points icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a cylinder.
3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a cylinder.
4. Pick a third point. This point will define the pipe radius.
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
1. Click the Regular Cone icon. Pick Three Points * is set by default.
The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The
cursor is in the picking mode.
2. Do one of the following:
3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.
A Regular Cone whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the
current Sub-Project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property
window open, you can edit manually the regular cone parameters like its
Center, Diameter at Base, Diameter at Top, Distance Between Extremities and
Direction of Axis.
Note:
The Center and Direction of Axis (automatically computed based-on the
other parameters) can be modified.
(*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a vertical
Regular Cone at the middle of the 3D View. This Regular Cone has as
parameters the default parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog after
choosing Regular Cone as Geometry Type). If you choose another
geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current
geometry (or not).
1242 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.
A Circular Torus whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the
current project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window
open, you can edit manually the Circular Torus parameters like its Center, Pipe
Diameter, Center Line Diameter, Direction of Axis and Bend Angle.
Note:
(1) With no constraint applied, the created Circular Torus is of closed
shape (the Bend Angle equal to 360 degrees).
(2) With one constraint applied, the created Circular Torus is an open
regular torus, its Bend Angle is equal to 90 degrees.
(3) With two constraints applied, the created Circular Torus is an open
regular torus, its Bend Angle is equal or less than 90 degrees.
1244 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a Circular
Torus at the middle of the 3D View. This Circular Torus has as parameters the
defaults parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog after choosing Circular
Torus as Geometry Type). If you choose another geometry type, a dialog
appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).
1. Click the Pick Two Points icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens
in the 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point. This point will be the center of a Circular Torus.
3. Pick another point. This point will define the Pipe Radius + Center Line
Radius distance.
1. Click the Align to Join to Two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius icon.
2. Pick an existing cylinder.
3. Pick another existing cylinder. The result is null if the two picked cylinders
are not secant or do not have the same diameter.
Note: A warning appears if the two picked cylinder axes are parallel.
1246 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
Define a Box
To Create a Box:
1. Click the Box icon. Step 2 of the Geometry Creator dialog becomes as
shown in [A] in the Examiner (or Walkthrough) modes and in [B] in the
Station-Based mode.
[A] [B]
Define a horizontal face by picking one 3D point, then four screen points
(two horizontal directions and depth),
Define a vertical face by picking one 3D point, the four screen points
(horizontal direction, vertical direction and depth).
4. Click Create.
5. Click Close.
A 3D Box whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the box parameters like its Center, Width, Depth, Height, etc.
1248 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D Box at
the middle of the 3D View. Its parameters are displayed in the dialog. If you
choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the
current geometry (or not).
1. Click the Pick Entity With Direction icon. The cursor becomes as
shown in [A].
2. Pick an entity. A 3D Box appears [B].
[A]
[B]
1. Click the Stick to Plane icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. The selected box is projected on the picked plane [B]. The
bottom side (of the box) lies on the plane.
[A]
[B]
The Direction of Normal (of the plane) [C] and the Direction of the Height (also
called the Normal Z* of the box) [D] are parallel but not necessarily in the same
direction. In the example below, both are opposite.
[C] [D]
Tools in the Production Module 1251
1. Click the Pick Bottom Left Corner of Box icon. The cursor becomes as
shown and the Picking Parameters toolbar in the 3D constraint mode
opens.
2. Pick a point. A 3D Box appears. Its bottom left corner is the point you
picked.
1. Click the Pick Four Screen Points icon. The cursor becomes as shown
in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar in 3D constraint mode opens.
2. Pick the first screen point*. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].
3. Move your mouse. A segment in orange links the first screen point to the
cursor.
[A] [B]
4. Pick the second screen point*. The cursor then takes the shape shown in
[C].
5. Move your mouse. Two other segments in orange link the first and second
screen points previously picked to the cursor. The two picked points and
the cursor draw a triangular plane.
6. Pick the third screen point*. The cursor then takes the shape shown in [D]
and the triangular plane changes to a rectangular plane.
[C] [D]
Tools in the Production Module 1253
7. Move again your mouse (from Up to Down or vice versa). A 3D Box (with
an orange frame) appears.
8. Pick the fourth screen point* to complete the 3D Box.
Define a Horizontal Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four Screen Points (Two
Horizontal Directions and Depth)
To Define a Horizontal Face by Picking One 3D Point, then Four Screen Points
(Two Horizontal Directions and Depth):
1. Click the Define Horizontal Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four
Screen Points (Two Horizontal Directions and Depth) icon. The cursor
becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a 3D Point. Picking should be on displayed points. The cursor takes
then the shape shown in [B].
3. Pick the first screen point. Picking doesn't need to be on displayed points.
[A]
[B]
Tools in the Production Module 1255
4. Move your mouse. The cursor then becomes as shown in [C]. A segment
in orange links the first screen point to the cursor. This segment can be
vertical or horizontal.
5. Pick the second screen point, not necessary on displayed points.
6. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [D]. A
horizontal plane (with an orange frame) appears.
7. Pick the third screen point, not necessarily on displayed points.
[C]
[D
8. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [E]. A 3D
Box (with an orange frame) appears.
9. Pick the fourth screen point to complete the 3D Box.
[E]
1256 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tools in the Production Module 1257
Define a Vertical Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four Screen Points (Horizontal
Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth)
To Define a Vertical Face by Picking one 3D Point, then Four Screen Points
(Horizontal Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth):
1. Click the Define Vertical Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four Screen
Points (Horizontal Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth) . The cursor
becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a point. Picking should be on displayed points. The cursor then takes
the shape shown in [B].
3. Pick the first screen point. Picking doesn't need to be on displayed points.
[A]
[B]
4. Move your mouse. The cursor then becomes as shown in [C]. A segment
in orange links the first screen point to the cursor. This segment should not
be vertical but horizontal.
5. Pick the second screen point, not necessary on displayed points.
1258 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
6. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [D]. A
vertical plane (with an orange frame) appears.
7. Pick the third screen point, not necessarily on displayed points.
[C]
[D]
8. Move again your mouse. The cursor becomes then as shown in [E]. A 3D
Box (with an orange frame) appears.
9. Pick the fourth screen point to complete the 3D box.
[E]
Tools in the Production Module 1259
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.
A rectangular torus whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the
current Sub-Project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property
window open, you can edit manually the rectangular torus parameters like its
Center, Width, Height, etc.
1. Click the Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section
icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a first box. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another box. If the two boxes are secant and have the same section,
a rectangular torus appears.
1262 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Its Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Axis) is parallel to the two
boxes' Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Width).
Its Bend Angle is equal to the angle drawn by the two boxes' Direction of
Height.
Its Outer Diameter is equal to the two boxes' Depth.
4. If the two picked boxes are not secant; the "This constraint cannot be
activated because the two boxes are not secant" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
5. If the two picked boxes do not have the same section, the "There is too
much indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical,
one of them is a cube or they have no common face" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
Tip:
If required, make the two boxes secant using the Make Secant to a Box
(With Same Section) constraint in the Geometry Modifier tool.
If required, modify manually the two boxes' parameters (like Center,
Width, Height, Depth, Directions, etc.) in the Property window to make
sure that both are secant and have the same section.
Note: The Normal's direction is called Direction of Axis in the Property window.
Tools in the Production Module 1263
1. Click the Extrusion icon. The Drawing and Picking Parameters (in 3D
constraint mode) toolbars appear.
2. Draw or select a polyline.
3. Enter a distance value in the Length field.
4. Click Create.
5. Click Close.
An Extrusion whose name is OBJECTX is created and put in the Models Tree.
X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the
segment parameters like its Center, Length, Direction of Axis, Direction of
Bound 1 and Direction of Bound 2.
Define a 3D Point
To Define a 3D Point:
Pick a point*
Pick three secant planes*.
Pick a plane and a segment*.
Pick an entity with center*.
Project a 3D Point on a plane*.
Pick two axial entities*.
Edit parameters.
3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.
A 3D Point whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can only edit manually the 3D Point's Center.
Note: (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from
the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D Point
at the middle of the 3D View. If you choose another geometry type, a dialog
appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).
Pick a Point
To Pick a Point:
1. Click the Pick Point icon. The cursor takes the following shape , the
initial 3D Point is hidden and the Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the
3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed objects (or not).
Tools in the Production Module 1267
1. Click the Pick Three Planes icon. The initial 3D Point is hidden in the
3D View and the cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor becomes as shown in [B].
3. Pick another plane. Another red frame with a yellow background appears
upon the picked plane. The cursor becomes as shown [C].
1268 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
4. Pick again another plane. A 3D Point (the intersection of the three picked
planes) appears. [D]
Tools in the Production Module 1269
1. Click the Pick Plane and Segment icon. The initial 3D Point disappears
from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].
3. Pick a segment. The plane and the segment intersect at a 3D Point [C].
1270 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Pick Entity with Center icon. The cursor takes the following
2. Pick a 3D Point. A yellow label with the following text “Point to Project on
Plane” appears over the picked point [B].
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
Define a Segment
To Define a Segment:
Edit parameters.
3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.
A Segment whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the segment parameters like its Center, Direction of Axis and
Length.
Note: (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from
the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a Segment
at the middle of the 3D View. This Segment has as parameters the default
parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog). If you choose another geometry
type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).
1. Click the Pick Two Points icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens
in the 3D constraint mode and the cursor is in the picking mode.
2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a Segment.
3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a Segment.
Note: Pickings can be done on objects displayed in the 3D View (or not).
1274 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Pick Two Planes icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens
in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
Sub-Tools
There are no direct entries for sub-tools. All of them can only be open within a
main tool to perform basic operations such as editing or transforming an
existing shape or a shape to create. There is no creation anymore
Tools in the Production Module 1277
3D Picking
The 3D Picking is a tool for picking entities with direction. It only appears when
you apply constraints to object manipulation. When using the Make Parallel (or
Make Perpendicular) constraint, the 3D Picking tool opens as a tab of the
Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar with the Pick Entity with
Direction mode set by-default (see [A]). When the Make Parallel to Plane or
Lock on Plane constraint has been applied to object manipulation; Pick Entity
with Direction appears in the 3D Plane tool opens as shown in [B]*. When the
Make Perpendicular to Direction constraint has been applied to object
manipulation; the 3D Direction tool opens as shown in [C]*.
The 3D Picking tool information at the top right corner of the 3D View is empty
of information. The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar contains
three tabs detailed below. When this toolbar appears; the By Picking Entity tab
comes first. All these constraints can be found in tools like Geometry Modifier,
Cloud-Based Modeler, etc.
[A]
[B]
[C]
Note:
To leave the Pick Entity with Direction mode, press Esc or select Cancel
Picking from the pop-up menu.
(*) In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) navigation mode.
1278 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select an entity from the Project Tree (or in the 3D View). The Make
Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) becomes active.
2. Click Pick Entity with Direction if required.
3. Click a point on a displayed entity.
If Make Parallel has been chosen, the selected entity will be parallel to the
picked entity.
If Make Perpendicular has been chosen, the selected entity will be
perpendicular to the picked entity.
4. Click Cancel. The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar closes.
Note: When picking a plane as constraint, the entity in selection will be parallel
(or perpendicular) not to the plane’s normal direction but to the plane itself.
Tip: You can also select Pick Entity with Direction and Cancel from the pop-up
menu. For Cancel, you can press Esc.
Tools in the Production Module 1279
3D Direction
The 3D Direction allows you to define 3D primitives of linear shape (only
direction). This tool appears when applying constraints to object manipulation.
When using the Make Perpendicular or Make Parallel constraint, the 3D
Direction tool opens as a tab of the Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel)
toolbar with the X-axis* mode set by-default (see [A]). The Make Perpendicular
(or Make Parallel) toolbar contains three tabs detailed below. When this toolbar
appears; the By Picking Entity tab comes first.
To use the 3D Direction tool, you need to click on the To Direction tab. A 3D
direction in yellow and dotted appears. To use the tool fully, you need to have
objects selected and displayed. When the Make Perpendicular to Direction
constraint has been applied to object manipulation; the 3D Direction tool opens
as shown in [B]. The 3D Direction tool information box at the top right corner of
the 3D View displays the current 3D direction (default or drawn) parameters.
These constraints can be found in tools like Geometry Modifier, Cloud-Based
Modeler, etc.
[A]
[B]
Tip: All direction definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or
using available short-cut key (Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel).
Validate a 3D Direction
Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D direction, you can validate it by
clicking Validate. Note that any persistent object will be created in the
database. Be sure to first validate the result before leaving the 3D Direction
tool; there is no warning message prompting you to save the result or not.
Note: To leave the 3D Direction tool, you can click Cancel in the Make
Perpendicular, Make Parallel or 3D Direction toolbar, select Cancel from the
pop-up menu or press Esc.
3D Point
The 3D Point allows you to define a 3D primitive of Point shape. This tool can
only be used as a sub tool inside main tools like Geometry Modifier, Cloud-
Based Modeler, etc. The 3D Point tool opens with the Pick Point mode set by-
default and the cursor in the picking mode. The 3D Point information box at the
top right corner of the 3D View displays the current 3D Point’s parameters -
Position. Press on the Esc key (or select Cancel Picking) from the pop-up
menu to leave the Pick Point mode. A 3D Point appears and the other modes
become enabled. To use the tool fully, you need to have objects selected and
displayed.
Tip: All point definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or using
available short-cut key (Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel).
Pick a Point
To Pick a Point:
1. Click the Pick Point icon. The cursor takes the following shape , the
initial 3D Point is hidden and the Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the
3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed objects (or not).
1284 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Pick Three Planes icon. The initial 3D Point is hidden in the
3D View and the cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor becomes as shown in [B].
3. Pick another plane. Another red frame with a yellow background appears
upon the picked plane. The cursor becomes as shown [C].
Tools in the Production Module 1285
4. Pick again another plane. A 3D Point (the intersection of the three picked
planes) appears. [D]
1286 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Pick Plane and Segment icon. The initial 3D Point disappears
from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].
3. Pick a segment. The plane and the segment intersect at a 3D Point [C].
Tools in the Production Module 1287
1. Click the Pick Entity with Center icon. The cursor takes the following
2. Pick a 3D Point. A yellow label with the following text “Point to Project on
Plane” appears over the picked point [B].
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
1. Click Edit Parameters . The initial 3D point is hidden and the Position
Editing dialog opens.
2. Enter a point’s position in that dialog.
3. Press OK.
Validate a 3D Point
Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D Point, you can validate it by clicking
Validate. No persistent object will be created in the database. Be sure to first
validate the result before leaving tool because there is no warning message
prompting you to validate the result (or not).
1290 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3D Axis
The 3D Axis allows you to define primitives of Segment shape (with Direction
and Position). This tool appears when you apply constraints such as Lock
Center on Line or Fit to Axis in object manipulation. These constraints can be
found in tools like e.g. Geometry Modifier and Cloud-Based Modeler. This tool
also appears when evoking the 3D Axis tool inside the Duplicator tool.
In the first case, the 3D Axis tool opens with the Pick Axial Entity mode set by-
default - the other modes are dimmed - and the cursor in the picking mode. In
the second case, the Pick Axial Entity mode is not set by-default. The 3D Axis
information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the current 3D
axis parameters - Direction and Position. If the Pick Axial Entity has been set
by default; press on the Esc key (or select Cancel Picking) from the pop-up
menu to leave this mode. A 3D axis (red dotted line) appears and the other
modes become available. To use the tool fully, you need to have objects
selected and displayed.
Tip: All axis definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or by
using available short-cut keys (Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel).
1. Click the Pick Axial Entity icon. The cursor becomes as follows and
the initial 3D axis disappears from the 3D View.
2. Pick an object with a direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1291
1. Click Pick Two Points . The initial 3D axis is hidden and the cursor
takes the shape shown in [A].
2. Pick a point. After picking, it takes the shape shown in [B].
3. Pick another point.
[A] [B]
Note: Picking can be free or constrained and the Picking Parameters toolbar
opens in 3D constraint mode. In this creation mode, you can have objects of
any type.
1292 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
After clicking Pick Two Planes , the initial 3D axis is hidden and the cursor
takes the shape shown in [A]. This means that you are in the picking mode.
After picking a plane, it takes the shape shown in [B]; this means that you need
to pick a second plane. In this creation mode, you need to have secant planes.
[A] [B]
1. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
means that it is selected.
2. Pick another plane. An axis (the intersection of the two picked planes) in
red and dotted appears.
1 - The first picked plane 3 - The cursor before picking the second plane
2 - The cursor before picking the first plane
Tools in the Production Module 1293
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
1. Click Edit Parameters . The Axis Editing dialog opens and the initial 3D
axis disappears from the 3D View.
2. Click on the pull-down arrow in the Axis Editing dialog.
3. Do one of the following:
Validate an 3D Axis
Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D axis, you can validate it by clicking
Validate. No persistent object will be created in the database. Be sure to first
validate the result before leaving the 3D Axis tool because there is no warning
message prompting you to validate the result (or not).
1294 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3D Radius
The 3D Radius dialog only appears when you apply a constraint like e.g. Lock
Radius, Lock Center Line Radius or Lock Pipe Radius respectively to a sphere
or a cylinder and to a regular torus. The 3D Radius dialog opens with the Pick
Radial Entity mode set by-default. The information box, at the top right corner
of the 3D View, displays the radius value of the current entity. To leave the
Pick Radial Entity mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking) from the pop-up
menu.
Tip: All commands in the 3D Radius tool dialog can be selected from the pop-
up menu. The user should first leave the picking mode.
Tools in the Production Module 1295
Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:
The radius (or diameter) of the selected entity changes to fit the input value.
If the Radius option has been checked, the radius of the selected entity
changes to fit the radius of the picked entity.
If the Diameter option has been checked, the diameter of the selected
entity changes to fit the diameter of the picked entity.
1. Click the Pick Two Points on Diameter icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears.
2. Pick two points anywhere. If the Diameter option is unchecked, it is
automatically checked. The distance between the two picked, is displayed
in the dialog box and in the 3D View. It is also displayed as a segment in
red and dotted.
3. Click OK. The 3D Radius dialog closes.
The Diameter of the selected entity changes to fit the distance between the two
picked points.
1296 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Radius of the selected entity changes to fit the distance between the two
picked points.
Tools in the Production Module 1297
1. Click the Pick Axis and Point icon. The cursor is as shown in [A].
2. Pick a segment. A line (in dot and yellow) appears upon the picked
segment and the cursor becomes as shown in [B].
3. Pick a point.
If the Radius option has been checked; a line (in dot and red) from the picked
point and perpendicular to the picked segment appears [C]. The distance of
that line is displayed in the dialog box. This distance will be used as
constrained radius.
If the Diameter option has been checked; the picked point will be the center of
a line (in dot and red and perpendicular to the picked segment) appears [D].
The distance of that line is displayed in the dialog box. This distance will be
used as constrained diameter.
1298 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The radius (or diameter) of the selected entity changes to fit the radius (or
diameter) defined by the picked segment and point.
Note: You need to have a segment and a point, already created in the
database.
Tools in the Production Module 1299
3D Secant
The 3D Secant dialog appears when you use the Make Secant to Cylinder
constraint in tools like Geometry Modifier or Cloud-Based Modeler. The Pick
Cylinder to be Secant With mode is set by default. To leave this mode, press
Esc or select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu.
The 3D Secant information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, contains
the information related to the secant cylinder and the secant angle if the Use
Same Radius and Use Given Angle options are unchecked, the secant
cylinder, the radius value and the secant angle if the Use Same Radius option
is checked and the secant cylinder and the secant value if the Use Given Angle
option is checked.
All are undefined before applying the constraint except the secant angle which
has the value in the Use Given Angle field or is equal to 90 degrees if
Perpendicular is pressed-on.
Note: When you use the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint inside the
Geometry Modifier tool; you need to have a cylinder first selected. This
condition is unnecessary in the Cloud-Based Modeler tool.
1300 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Check the Use Given Angle option and enter a value different from 90° or
270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant to the picked cylinder axis with
the given angle.
Check the Use Given Angle option and enter a value equal to 90° or 270°.
The selected cylinder axis is secant and perpendicular to the picked
cylinder axis.
Check the Use Given Angle option and click the Perpendicular icon.
The selected cylinder axis is secant and perpendicular to the picked
cylinder axis.
Check the Use Given Angle and Use Same Radius options with an angle
other than 90° or 270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant to the picked
cylinder axis with the given angle and both entities have the same radius.
Check the Use Given Angle and Use Same Radius options with an angle
equal to 90° or 270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant and
perpendicular to the picked cylinder axis both entities have the same
radius.
3D Plane
The 3D Plane allows you to define a 3D primitive of planar shape. In the
Modeling processing mode and whatever the navigation mode you use
(Examiner, WalkThrough or Station-Based), this tool appears when you apply
constraints to object manipulation. When using the Make Perpendicular (or
Make Parallel) constraint, the 3D Plane tool opens as a tab of the Make
Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar with the X-Axis* mode set by-default
(see [A1] and [A2] respectively in the Examiner/Walkthrough and Station-Base
mode).
The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar contains three tabs. When
it appears; the By Picking Entity tab comes first. To use the 3D Plane tool, you
need to click on the To a Plane tab (or click on the (or ) button). A 3D plane
perpendicular to the screen appears and the 3D Plane information box at the
top right corner of the 3D View displays the current (default or drawn) 3D plane
parameters - Normal and Position.
To use the tool fully, you need to have an object selected and displayed.
[A1]
[A2]
1302 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
To Select an Axis:
To Edit Parameters:
1. Click the Edit Parameters icon. The Plane Editing dialog opens.
2. Enter a direction in the Normal field.
3. Enter a point position in the Point field.
4. Click OK. The Plane Editing dialog closes.
The third method is to pick an entity with a direction so that the initial 3D plane
normal becomes parallel to the picked entity direction.
There are three methods for visually defining the orientation of a 3D plane. The
first method is to pick two points. The initial 3D plane will pass through the line
defined by these two points and perpendicular to the screen plane.
The second method is to pick three points. The initial 3D plane will pass
through the plane drawn by these three points.
1. Click the Pick 3 Points icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.
Tools in the Production Module 1303
The third method is to pick two points which define a vector. As a plane is
defined by two vectors. Applying this constraint will orientate the selected plane
so that the second vectors is parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis) of the
active coordinate frame.
1. Click the Pick Two Points icon (in the X, Y and Z Coordinate System).
2. Or click the icon in the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).
3. Pick two points. No need to pick on displayed objects.
Tip: All plane definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or using
available short-cut key (Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel).
1304 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another point anywhere in the 3D View (on the displayed point cloud
or not). The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point anywhere in the 3D View (only on the displayed point
cloud). A vertical plane appears with the third picked point as center.
[C]
1306 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[D]
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another point on the screen. These two points will define the
orientation of the first axis of the horizontal plane's frame. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point in 3D (on a cloud point, a measured point or a
geometry). This point defines the height of the vertical plane. A horizontal
plane appears with the third picked point as center.
[C]
1308 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[D]
[A]
[A]
3. Pick another point on the screen so that the two points represent a
horizontal segment in the 3D space. These two points define the
orientation of a horizontal segment drawn on the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C].
4. Pick another on the screen so that the previous point and this new one
represent the steepest slope direction of the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [D] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
1310 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[C]
[D]
5. Pick the last point in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). The
three first picked points - which are not collinear (not lying on the same
line) - draw a 3D plane; the fourth picked point is its center.
1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a 3D plane. A green square
appears.
2. If a corner handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the 3D plane
size. During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.
3. If a middle handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the 3D plane
width (or length). During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.
Validate a Plane
Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D plane, you can validate it by clicking
Validate. Note that any persistent object will be created in the database. Be
sure to first validate the result before leaving the 3D Plane tool; there is no
warning message prompting you to save the result or not.
Note: To leave the 3D Plane, you can click Cancel in the Make Perpendicular,
Make Parallel or 3D Plane toolbar, select Cancel from the pop-up menu or
press Esc.
Modify a Geometry
Rotating or panning an object can be free (called Standard Navigation) or
constrained. Constraints can be imposed (Screen Rotation, Vertical Pan,
Horizontal Pan, etc.) or defined by the user. That’s the reason of the Geometry
Modifier tool which enables to define theses constraints by using manipulators
in order to have a fine control in rotating or panning objects.
No selection is required to open the Geometry Modifier tool. Once inside the
tool, you need to do a selection - only geometries except polylines and
meshes, measures, etc. - in one of these three windows (3D View, List and
Property) and display the selection to be able to use a manipulator. Selection
can only be single.
1312 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the Ribbon, the Geometry Modifier feature can be found from the
Edition group, on the Model tab.
Change a Shape
Modifying the shape of a geometry means changing its dimensions with
manipulators which change according to the geometry type.
Note:
You cannot modify the shape of a geometry of Plane (or 3D Point).
You can select a geometry before or after choosing the Modify Shape
command.
Tip: You can select Modify Shape from the pop-up menu or use its related
shortcut key Shift + E.
Tools in the Production Module 1313
Sphere
To Modify the Shape of a Sphere:
Cylinder
To Modify a Cylinder Shape:
Cone
To Modify a Cone Shape:
Circular Torus
To Modify a Circular Torus Shape:
5. Pick the generator radius ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.
6. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus generator radius.
Segment
To Modify a Segment Shape:
Extrusion
To Modify an Extrusion Shape:
Box
To Modify a Box Shape:
Caution: Modifying the size of a Box will not change anymore the direction of
the main axis.
1322 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Rectangular Torus
To Modify a Rectangular Torus Shape:
Note: If you don't want to snap on any face, press the CTRL key while
dragging the handle.
1324 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Modify a Position
"To Pan" a geometry means moving and positioning it at a desired location
within the scene. "To Rotate" a geometry means turning it around an axis or
around a point.
Note: You can select a geometry before or after choosing one of the above
displacement mode.
Tools in the Production Module 1325
3. Select an axis handle by picking it; it turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the selection is highlighted in yellow and those for
which you cannot are in mauve.
4. Move the selection along that direction.
1326 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
5. Select a plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions (two)
along which you can pan the selection are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
6. Move the selection in that plane.
Tip: You can also select Pan along Home Frame Axes from the pop-up menu
or use the Shift + T short-cut key to choose this manipulation mode.
3. Select an axis handle by picking it; it turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the selected geometry is highlighted in yellow and
those for which you cannot are in mauve.
4. Move the selected geometry along that direction.
1328 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
5. Select a plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions (two)
along which you can pan the selection are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
6. Move the selection in that plane.
Tip: You can also select Pan along Own Axes from the pop-up menu or use
the Ctrl + T short-cut key to choose this manipulation mode.
Rotate a Geometry
This feature lets the user turn a selected entity around its center.
To Rotate a Geometry:
Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu (or use the Shift + R
short-cut key).
1330 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis
passing through the center of the Red ring handle and perpendicular to it.
The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis
passing through the center of the Green ring handle and perpendicular to it.
Or
1332 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis
passing through the center of the Blue ring handle and perpendicular to it.
Or
Caution:
A value, once input in a field, will be not reset (to zero) once the
transformation is applied. You have to manually reset this value to zero.
Any transformation can be applied if all of the fields are set to zero. The
Validate icon becomes dimmed.
following shape .
4. Pick a position anywhere. The picking can be on a displayed object or not.
The manipulator will move to the picked position.
Tip: You can also select Change Manipulator Location from the pop-up menu
(or use the C short-cut key).
Note: The cursor changes from to when you hover it over a Handle.
The Pick an Axis From Other Geometry, then Pan feature lets you move an
entity along a direction which is given by the axis of another entity.
1. Click the Pick an Axis From Other Geometry, then Pan icon. The cursor
takes the shape shown in [C1]. This means that you are in the axis picking
mode.
2. Pick the object. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
3. Select another object. A position manipulator (in blue) (in the picked
object’s axis and having as origin its center) appears [C2].
4. Pick the object. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
5. Select another object. A position manipulator (in blue) (in the picked
object’s axis and having as origin its center) appears [C2].
7. Drag the position manipulator to pan the second object along the first
object’s axis [C3].
Tip:
You can also select Pick Axis from Other Geometry and Pan from the pop-
up menu.
With this tool, you can pan an object along its own axis or along another
object’s axis. Only objects having an axis can be picked for panning
purposes.
Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu).
1336 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Pick a Point from Other Geometry, then Rotate icon. The
cursor takes the shape shown in [C1]. This means that you are in the point
picking mode.
2. Place the cursor over an object [C1].
3. Pick the object. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
4. Select another object by picking it. A manipulator appears [C2]. This
manipulator has three rings (red, light blue and green) and has as origin
the center of the picked object.
5. Select a ring handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. An axis passing the
center of that ring handle and perpendicular to it appears. This axis has
the color of the selected ring handle.
6. Drag the ring handle to rotate the second object around the axis of the
second object (C3).
Tools in the Production Module 1337
Tip: You can also select the Pick a Point from Other Geometry, then Rotate
from the pop-up menu.
Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu).
1338 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then Rotate icon.
2. Pick an entity other than the selected one. A manipulator, perpendicular to
the axis of the picked entity and having as origin its center, appears.
3. Select the ring handle (in deep blue) by picking it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag the ring handle to rotate the selected entity around the axis of the
picked one.
Tools in the Production Module 1339
Tip: You can also select the Pick Axis from Other Geometry and Rotate icon
from the pop-up menu.
Note: With this manipulation mode, you can rotate an entity around its own
axis, or around the axis of another entity. Only an object with an axis can be
picked.
Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu).
After selecting Pick Plane and Pan , the cursor takes the shape shown in
(A). This means that you are in the plane picking mode. After picking a point, it
returns to its default shape (Arrow); this means that you are in the selection
mode. With this tool, you can pan an object in a plane or along a plane’s axis.
[A]
Tip: You can also select Pick Plane and Pan from the pop-up menu.
Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu).
1340 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
2. Pick the plane. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
3. Select the same plane by picking it. A manipulator appears (B2). This
manipulator has two axis handles (red and green) and a plane handle and
has as origin the center of the picked plane.
4. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the plane is highlighted in yellow and those (two) for
which you cannot are in mauve.
5. Drag the axis handle to pan the plane along the direction in yellow (B3).
Tools in the Production Module 1341
6. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions
(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
7. Drag the plane handle to pan the plane along any of the two directions
(B4).
1342 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
2. Pick the plane. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
3. Select another object (plane or others) by picking it. A manipulator
appears (C2). This manipulator has two axis handles (red and green) and
a plane handle and has as origin the center of the picked object.
4. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the object is highlighted in yellow and those for which
you cannot are in mauve.
5. Drag the axis handle to pan the object along the plane direction in yellow
(C3).
Tools in the Production Module 1343
6. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions
(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
7. Drag the plane handle to pan the object along any of the plane directions
C4).
1344 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
2. Pick the plane. A manipulator appears (D2). This manipulator has two axis
handles (red and green) and a plane handle and has as origin the center
of the picked plane.
3. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the plane is highlighted in yellow and those (two) for
which you cannot are in mauve.
4. Drag the axis handle to pan the plane along the direction in yellow (D3).
Tools in the Production Module 1345
5. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions
(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
6. Drag the plane handle to pan the plane along any of the two directions
(D4).
1346 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
2. Pick the plane. A manipulator appears (E2). This manipulator has two axis
handles (red and green) and a plane handle and has as origin the center
of the picked object.
3. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the object is highlighted in yellow and those for which
you cannot are in mauve.
4. Drag the axis handle to pan the object along the plane direction in yellow
(E3).
Tools in the Production Module 1347
5. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions
(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
6. Drag the plane handle to pan the object along any of the plane directions
(E4).
1 - Move Geometry Using 2-Point Defined 2 - Align Geometry (Z Axis) Along 2-Point
Vector Defined Vector
Note: You need select a geometry before choosing one of the above
commands. Otherwise, they are dimmed. Each of the commands can be
selected from the pop-up menu.
1348 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
After choosing the Move Geometry using 2-Point Defined Vector icon, the
cursor takes the shape shown in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in 3D constraint mode. This means that you are in the point picking
mode. After picking a point, it becomes as shown in [B]. This means that you
need to pick to another point. After picking, it returns to its default shape
(Arrow); this means that you are in the selection mode. With this tool, you can
pan a geometry by picking two points.
[A] [B]
1 - The first and second picked points 2 - The selected object is translated from the
first picked point to the second picked point
Note: You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu (or use the Esc
key) to leave the Move Geometry using 2-Point Defined Vector tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1349
After choosing the Align Geometry (Z-Axis) along 2-Point-Defined Axis icon,
the cursor takes the shape shown in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in 3D constraint mode. This means that you are in the point picking
mode. After picking a point, it becomes as shown in [B]. This means that you
need to pick to another point. After picking, it returns to its default shape
(Arrow); this means that you are in the selection mode. With this tool, you can
align an object’s Z-axis along two picked points.
[A] [B]
Note: You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu (or use the Esc
key) to leave the Align Geometry (Z-Axis) along 2-Point-Defined Axis tool.
1350 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Apply Constraints
Plane
After selecting a plane (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry Modifier
tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are seven types of constraints.
1. Click Pass through Axis. The 3D Axis toolbar and its information box
appear.
2. Do one of the following to define an axis:
1. Select a plane.
2. Click Make Horizontal. Its Direction of Normal becomes parallel to the Z
Axis (or Elevation Axis)) but not necessary in the same direction.
1. Select a plane.
2. Click Make Vertical. As the selected plane is defined by two vectors.
Applying this constraint will orientate the selected plane so that one of the
vectors is parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis) of the active coordinate
frame.
Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:
1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.
Make Horizontal
To Make Horizontal:
1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Horizontal icon. The selected geometry is moved so
that its Direction of Axis is perpendicular to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.
1352 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
1. Click the Pass through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar and its
information box at the top right corner of the 3D View.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1. Click the Pass through Point icon. The 3D Axis toolbar as well as its
information box appear.
2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
1354 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Sphere
After selecting a sphere-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool),
the Geometry Modifier tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are four
constraint types.
Lock a Radius
To Lock a Radius:
1. Click the Lock Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Do one of the following:
Lock a Center
To Lock a Center:
1. Click the Lock Center icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
Tools in the Production Module 1355
1. Click on the Lock Center on Line icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
1. Click the Pass through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar and its
information box at the top right corner of the 3D View.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
Cylinder
After selecting a cylinder-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool),
the Geometry Modifier tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are six
constraint types.
Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:
1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
1. Click the Pass Axis Through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens
with the Pick Point mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1358 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Lock a Radius
To Lock a Radius:
1. Click the Lock Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Do one of the following:
Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:
1. Click the Make Secant to Cylinder icon. The 3D Secant dialog as well
as its information box appears.
2. Pick a cylinder.
3. If required, check Use Same Radius to set the same radius than the
picked cylinder.
4. If required, check Use Given Angle and give a secant angle.
5. If required, click Perpendicular to have a 90° secant angle.
6. Click OK.
Note that the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint type generates four sub-
constraint types according to the option(s) checked.
If only Use Same Radius has been checked, you have the two following
constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Radius.
If only Use Given Angle has been checked and the given angle value is
different to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types:
Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Angle with Direction.
If only Use Given Angle has been checked and the given angle value is
equal to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types: Make
Axis Secant to Axis and Make Perpendicular to Direction.
1360 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If only Use Given Angle has been checked and Perpendicular pressed-on,
you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and
Make Perpendicular to Direction.
If the two options have been checked with an angle other than 90° or
270°, you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to
Axis, Lock Radius and Lock Angle with Direction.
If the two options have been checked with an angle equal to 90° or 270°,
you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis,
Lock Radius and Make Perpendicular to Direction.
If the two options are kept unchecked, you have the Make Axis Secant to
Axis constraint type.
Regular Cone
After selecting a cone-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool), the
Geometry Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are three
constraint types.
Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:
1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.
Tools in the Production Module 1361
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:
Circular Torus
After selecting a circular torus-shaped geometry (before or after opening the
tool), the Geometry Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are
seven constraint types.
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:
1. Click the Lock Pipe Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well
as it information box.
2. Do one of the following:
1. Click the Lock Center Line Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens
as well as it information box.
2. Do one of the following:
1. Click the Align to Join to Two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius icon.
2. Pick two existing cylinders. The result is null if the two picked cylinders are
not secant or do not have the same diameter.
1368 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3D Point
After selecting a 3D point (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry
Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are two constraint types.
Lock on a Plane
To Lock on a Plane:
1. Click the Lock on Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens with the Pick
Entity with Direction mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.
1. Click the Lock to Line (or Axis) icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens with
the Pick Axis Entity mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1369
Segment
After selecting a segment (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry
Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are four constraint types.
Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:
1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.
Lock on a Plane
To Lock on a Plane:
1. Click the Lock on Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens with the Pick
Entity with Direction mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.
1370 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:
1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:
Define a plane,
Define a direction,
Pick an entity with direction.
1. Click the Pass Axis Through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens
with the Pick Point mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1372 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Extrusion
After selecting an extrusion (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry
Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are two constraint types.
Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:
1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.
1. Select an Extrusion.
2. Click on the Make Secant to an Extrusion icon.
3. Pick another Extrusion.
Tools in the Production Module 1373
Rectangular Torus
To Apply Constraints to a Rectangular Torus:
Tip:
The Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Direction
constraint can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Selecting a rectangular-torus-shaped geometry can be done before (or
after) opening the Geometry Modifier tool.
1374 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section
icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a first box. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].
[A]
[B]
3. Pick another box. If the two boxes are secant and have the same section,
a rectangular torus appears.
Tools in the Production Module 1375
Its Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Axis) is parallel to the two
boxes' Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Width).
Its Bend Angle is equal to the angle drawn by the two boxes' Direction of
Height.
Its Outer Diameter is equal to the two boxes' Depth.
4. If the two picked boxes are not secant; the "This constraint cannot be
activated because the two boxes are not secant" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
5. If the two picked boxes do not have the same section, the "There is too
much indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical,
one of them is a cube or they have no common face" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
Tip:
If required, make the two boxes secant using the Make Secant to a Box
(With Same Section) constraint in the Geometry Modifier tool.
If required, modify manually the two boxes' parameters (like Center,
Width, Height, Depth, Directions, etc.) in the Property window to make
sure that both are secant and have the same section.
1376 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Box
To Apply Constraints to a Box:
Note: Selecting a box-shaped geometry can be done before (or after) opening
the Geometry Modifier tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1377
1. Click Make Parallel . The Make Parallel toolbar opens with the By
Picking Entity tab selected by-default. In that tab, the Pick an Entity With
Direction is set by-default.
2. Do one of the following:
Pick an entity using the Pick an Entity With Direction tool in the By Picking
Entity tab.
Define a plane using available tools in the To a Plane tab*.
Define a direction using available tools in the To a Direction tab*.
The Normal Z (also called the Direction of the Height in the Property window)
of the box is parallel** to the Direction of Axis of the picked entity (or to the
Direction of Normal of the defined plane or to the defined direction).
Note:
(*) First click on the corresponding tab.
(**) But not necessary in the same direction.
1378 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Stick to Plane icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. The selected box is projected on the picked plane [B]. The
bottom side (of the box) lies on the plane.
[A]
[B]
The Direction of Normal (of the plane) [C] and the Direction of the Height (also
called the Normal Z* of the box) [D] are parallel but not necessarily in the same
direction. In the example below, both are opposite.
[C] [D]
Tools in the Production Module 1379
Plane Bounding
The Plane Bounding tool is dedicated to plane modifications. We mean by this
you can modify an existing plane bounds, define new ones, create holes, etc.
This tool is based on polyline drawing and editing like the Polyline Drawing
tool. It requires a selection as input data (mainly a plane from the database
(already created)) when used alone as a main tool or is based on local objects
(not yet created in the database) when used as a sub-tool in e.g. the Cloud-
Based Modeler tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1381
In Station-Based mode, the 3D scene is viewed from the first station viewpoint
(the first in the Project Tree) with overlapped images in the background (if
existed).
Tip: You can also click on the Plane Bounding icon in the Tools toolbar.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Plane Bounding feature can be found from the Edition
group, on the Model tab.
1. Click Select Polyline . The 3D scene becomes free from the 2D lock.
The 2D Grid (if displayed) is hidden. The Picking Parameters toolbar is
hidden.
2. In the 3D View, pick a polyline.
Note:
Press Esc to leave the Select Polyline mode.
Selecting another polyline will cancel the current one.
Tip: You can also choose Select Polyline the pop-up menu.
1384 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
Double-click to end drawing. The polyline is closed.
Picking can be free or constrained on displayed objects or not.
Tip:
You can switch from the line drawing mode to the arc drawing mode and
conversely as often as you wish by pressing respectively the L and C keys
on your keyboard.
1386 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Out of the picking mode, press Esc to quit the Plane Bounding tool. Or
select Close Tool from the pop- up menu.
Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. If at least
three points (for segments) (or two (for an arc)) have been picked, then the
polygonal polyline will be closed and validated.
Tools in the Production Module 1387
a) Pick a point.
b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the
previous one, defines a diagonal of a rectangle.
a) Pick a point.
b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the
previous point, defines the first side of a rectangle.
c) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the
previous point, defines the second side of the rectangle and is
perpendicular the first one.
Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. Nothing
occurs. The rectangular polyline in progress is then cancelled.
Tools in the Production Module 1389
a) Pick a point.
b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the
previous one, defines a diameter of a circle.
If Draw Circle by Defining the Middle Point and the Radius has been
chosen:
Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. Nothing
occurs. The circular polyline in progress is then cancelled.
1390 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Delete a Node
To Delete a Node:
1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears over the node.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Node.
If the node is shared by two segments, the two segments will be deleted
and replaced by a segment.
If the node is shared by two arcs; the two arcs will be deleted and replaced
by a segment.
Tip: You can press Del on your keyboard instead of selecting Delete Node
from the pop-up menu.
Move a Node
To Move a Node:
1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears on the node.
2. Drag and drop the node to a new location. The green square turns to
yellow during this operation.
If the node at the end of two segments, the node will be moved and the
two segments will be extended.
If the node at the middle of a segment, the whole segment will be moved.
Tip: Picking a point anywhere on a segment except on the End and Middle
nodes (or on an arc except on the End node) will transform that point to a
node.
Tools in the Production Module 1393
1. Place the cursor anywhere on a segment (except at the End and Middle
nodes) or on an arc (except at the end nodes). A hollow square appears
on the segment at the cursor position.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Middle Node. A
new Middle node is inserted not at the picking position but at the middle of
the segment (or arc).
1. Click Select Polyline . The 3D scene becomes free from the 2D lock.
The 2D Grid (if displayed) is hidden.
2. In the 3D View, pick a polyline.
3. Click Delete All Temporary .
1394 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: The Selection Mode icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1395
Tip: You can also select Pan (or Rotate) from the pop-up menu. Just first
select Change Move Mode.
Note: After choosing Selection Mode, the Change Move Mode icon becomes
enabled. The moving mode which comes first is the last used one.
Tip: You can easily switch between Pan and Rotate, and vice versa, by just
picking one of the Handles. Note that the cursor changes to when you
hover it over a Handle.
1396 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
To Apply Bounds:
Tip: The Set as External Curve and Create Hole icons can also be selected
from the pop-up menu.
Tip:
You can also select Validate Plane Modification and Close Tool from the
pop-up menu.
For Close Tool, you can use its related short-cut key (Esc).
Intersect
Intersecting an entity with another entity is similar to bound the first with the
second. Mainly entities of the following shapes (circular torus, cone, cylinder,
extruded geometry, plane and sphere) can be intersected. The first entity will
be modified after the intersection and the second entity remains unchanged.
Intersecting a series of entities together is similar to bound together. All will be
modified after intersecting. The Intersect tool can be used alone or inside main
tools like the Cloud-Based Modeler tool.
1398 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[A]
[B]
Note: In the Ribbon, the Intersect feature can be found from the Edition group,
on the Model tab.
Note: (*) For some entities, you are able to switch to the other side of the
intersection. For others, this cannot be done as the icon remains grayed out.
Tools in the Production Module 1399
Cylinder
A Cylinder can only be intersected with:
Lock Center on Line to the Sphere when intersecting it with the Cylinder,
Pass Axis through Point to the Cylinder when intersecting it with the
Sphere.
Make Parallel and Fit to Axis to the Cylinder when intersecting it with the
Cone,
Make Parallel and Fit to Axis to the Cone when intersecting it with the
Cylinder.
Sphere
A Sphere can only be intersected with:
Plane
A Plane can only be intersected with:
Pass Through Point to the Plane when intersecting it with the Sphere,
Lock Center or Pass Through Point to the Sphere when intersecting it with
the Plane.
Cone
A Cone can only be intersected with:
Circular Torus
A Circular Torus can only be intersected with:
Box
The intersection of a Box is always done along the Box main axis. A Box can
only be intersected with:
Tip: If required, use first the Change Main Axis constraint in the Geometry
Modifier tool to change a Box main axis' direction.
Rectangular Torus
A Rectangular Torus can only be intersected with:
Extrusion
An Extrusion can only be intersected with a Plane.
3D Point
A 3D Point cannot be intersected with any entity.
Line
A Line cannot be intersected with any entity.
1406 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: You cannot switch to the other side of an intersection when you
extend an entity between two other ones.
Cylinder
A Cylinder can only be intersected with two entities of type:
Sphere
A Sphere can only be intersected with two Planes parallel to the Sphere
existing bound (if any).
Plane
A Plane can only be intersected with two Planes.
Cone
A Cone can only be interested with two entities of type:
Circular Torus
A Circular Torus can only be intersected with two Cylinders of same radius,
when the Circular Torus joins them.
Box
A Box can only be intersected with two entities of type:
Extrusion
An Extrusion can only be intersected with two Planes.
3D Point
A 3D Point cannot be intersected with any entities.
Line
A Line cannot be intersected with any entities.
1408 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Connect Cylinders
The Link Cylinders feature enables to connect two cylinders together even if
they are not secant or don’t have the same diameter, by creating entity(ies) in
between.
For two cylinders, secant in axes and having the same diameter, a connected
cylinder is created in between:
For two cylinders, not secant in axes and having the same diameter, a
connected cylinder is created in between:
For two cylinders, not secant in axes and not having the same diameter, two
connected cylinders and one regular cone are created in between:
1412 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
For two cylinders, with aligned axes but not having the same diameter, a
regular cone is created in between:
Tools in the Production Module 1413
Duplicate
The Duplicate tool enables to duplicate a geometry along (or around) a path
defined by the user. A path can be a line, a circle or a combination of both
(called Polyline). This tool requires a selection as input. If the input is an object
from the database (already created), the tool can be used as a main tool.
When the object is being created, the tool is a sub-tool inside a main tool like
e.g. the Geometry Creator tool.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Duplicator feature can be found from the Edition
group, on the Model tab.
Choose a Method
There are three duplication methods: Along a Line, Around an Axis and Along
a Polyline. Inside each method, you need to define a path along (or around)
which the duplication will be carried out. The method which comes first is the
one set during the last use of that tool.
To Choose a Method:
Tip: All duplication methods can be selected from the pop-up menu. First
select Choose Type of Path.
Tools in the Production Module 1415
Define a Line
Before defining a path, Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog takes the appearance
shown below in [A]. After defining a path, the Select Global Frame for
Manipulator icon becomes enabled; it enables to switch from a one-handle
manipulator to a three-handle manipulator (see [B]).
[A] [B]
1 - Draw Line by Defining Two Points 3 - Select Global Frame for Manipulator
2 - 3D Direction
To Define a Line:
Tip: The Select Global Frame for Manipulator can also be selected from the
pop-up menu.
1416 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click on the Draw Line by Defining Two Points icon. The Picking
Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed items. A Red Line linking
the first picked point to the cursor appears. This Red Line has a label in
red showing the distance from the first picked point to the cursor’s current
position.
3. Pick another point (free or constrained), always on displayed items.
The distance between the two picked points sets the Step value (see Step 3 of
the Duplicator dialog). The selected item is duplicated according to the
parameters set in Step 3 along the defined path. The last duplicated item has a
Manipulator and an End label at its center.
Tip: The Draw Line by Defining Two Points icon can also be selected from the
pop-up menu.
1418 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Define a 3D Direction
The 3D Direction icon enables to define a 3D direction.
To Define a 3D Direction:
A Red Line starting from the selected item and running parallel to the defined
3D direction appears. The selected item is duplicated according to the
parameters set in Step 3 along the defined path. The last duplicated item has a
Manipulator and an End label at its center.
Tip: The 3D Direction can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Define a Circle
After choosing Around an Axis, you need to indicate the displacement mode for
duplication by checking either the All Parallel option or the All Rotated option.
Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog becomes as shown below.
To Define a Circle:
This Red Circle may have two shapes (dotted and/or continuous arc) with an
arrow as duplication direction. The initial item is duplicated around that Red
Circle according to the parameters in Step 3.
If All Parallel has been checked, all newly duplicated items have the same
direction as the first one.
If All Rotated has been checked, each newly duplicated item has its own
direction. The initial (selected) item still remains selected and the last
duplicated item has an End label at its center.
1420 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: The Draw Circle by Defining its Center can also be selected from the pop-
up menu.
1422 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Define a 3D Axis
The 3D Axis icon enables to define an axis which will be used the Normal
direction of a circular path.
To Define a 3D Axis:
1. Click on the 3D Axis icon. The 3D Axis toolbar appears as well as the
3D Axis information box.
2. Define a 3D axis. A Red and Dotted Segment appears.
3. Validate the 3D axis. The Red and Dotted Segment disappears. A Red
Circle appears with a Red and Green Manipulator along and in the middle
of the defined axis.
Tip: The 3D Axis icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1423
Define a Polyline
Before selecting (or defining) a polyline, Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog takes
the appearance shown in [A]. After selecting (or defining) a polyline, Pick on
the Wanted Position of the Start of the Path and Reload the Start to its Initial
Value become active (see [B]).
[A] [B]
To Define a Polyline:
The initial (selected) item is duplicated according to the parameters set in Step
3 along the defined path (in red). Starting a new polyline selection (or a new
polyline drawing) will undo the duplication. Duplicated items except the initial
(selected) one are removed from the 3D View.
1424 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Selecting a Polyline
The Select Polyline icon enables to select a path of segment (or a combination
of segment and circular arc) shape - mainly polyline - if present in your project.
To Select a Polyline:
1. Click Select Polyline . The cursor takes the shape as shown below.
2. Pick a polyline to select it.
A red path of the same shape as the polyline starting from the initial item’s
center appears. The Start and End positions on the path are indicated with a
label. It’s up to you to change the Start position.
Tip: The Select Polyline icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1425
Creating a Polyline
The Create Polyline to Define Path icon enables to draw and create a polyline.
To Create a Polyline:
A red path of the same shape as the polyline starting from the initial item’s
center appears. The Start and End positions on the path are indicated with a
label. It’s up to you to change the Start position.
Tip: The Create Polyline to Define Path icon can also be selected from the
pop-up menu.
1426 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Resize a Path
You can use the Manipulator to resize the path previously defined. If the path is
a Red Circle, the Manipulator has two Axis Handles (Red and Green) and on
Plane Handle. You can enlarge (or reduce) the Red Circle's diameter by
displacing its center in a direction using an Axis Handle or in an arbitrary
position using the Plane Handle. For both, the displacement is done on the
Red Circle's plane.
If the path is a Red Line, the Manipulator has only one Axis Handle (Green).
You can extend (or shorten) the Red Line along the defined direction by using
the Handle Axis. But you can also use the Select Global Frame for Manipulator
which has three Axis Handles (Green, Red and Blue) and three Plane Handles.
In that case, you extend (or shorten) the Red Line not along the defined path
but along the direction indicates by the Axis Handle or on the plane defined by
a pair of Axis Handle. If the path is a Red Polyline, there is no Manipulator.
Note: If you start defining a new path; this cancels the current duplication.
Duplicated items except the selected item are removed from the 3D View.
Define Parameters
There are three sets of parameters available for duplicating items: Step &
Quantity, Step & Length and Length & Quantity. The Step parameter
corresponds to the distance (or angle) between two successive items. The
Length corresponds to the distance (or angle) from the Start position to the
End position.
To Define Parameters:
Note: The Length value is automatically updated according to the value set in
the Quantity (or Step) field.
1428 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. If Along a Line / Along a Polyline (or Around an Axis) has been selected,
enter a distance (or angular) value in the Step field.
2. Or click Pick on the Wanted Position of the Next Element .
3. Go to the 3D View and pick a point on the path.
4. If Along a Line / Along a Polyline (or Around an Axis) has been selected,
enter a distance (or angular) value in the Step field.
5. Or click Pick on the Wanted Position of the End of the Path .
6. Go to the 3D View and pick a point on the path.
7. If required, click Reload the Path Length to its Initial Value .
Note: The Quantity value is automatically updated according to the value set in
the Step (or Length) field.
Tools in the Production Module 1429
Note:
The Step value is automatically updated according to the value set in the
Quantity (or Length) field.
(*) To leave the picking mode, select Cancel Picking from the pop-up
menu or use Esc. Outside the picking mode, use Esc to leave the
Duplicator tool.
Tip: Invert Path Direction can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
1430 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Duplicate Items
After defining a path and setting parameters, you can create the duplicated
items as persistent objects in the database. All are gathered in a folder named
Duplication which is put under the active group. Each duplicated item has the
name set in the Name Prefix field with an order.
If a name has been entered in the Name Prefix field, each duplicated item has
the name set in the field with an order. If no name has been entered in the
field, each duplicated item is named as follows: Copy of
"Selected_Entity_Name" with an order between parentheses.
Note: You can duplicate as many items as required without leaving the
Duplicator tool.
1431
All the features related to the piping can be found in the Modeling and Plant
menus, in the Menus and Toolbars user interface, or in the Piping group, on
the Model tab, in the Ribbon user interface.
Tools in the Plant menu, when used in combination the Modeling tools, bring
you the benefits of streamlined workflow to the world of engineering. All are
gathered in the Plant menu, in the Menu and Toolbars, and in the SteelWorks
group, in the Ribbon.
Tools for creating ladders, ladder cages, railing and starts are gathered in the
Plant menu, in the Menu and Toolbars, and in the Access group, on the Model
tab, in the Ribbon.
1432 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
EasyPipe
The EasyPipe is very easy to use because you only need a few clicks to
execute the following tasks: extract a pipe path from more than one million
points and model the extraction with geometric entitie(s) if needed. The
procedure given hereafter guides you step-by-step through the use of this tool.
For each command, you can use its short-cut key (if available); this allows you
to accelerate your work.
Note: (*) If the selected Point Cloud is On before starting the tool, it
automatically tilts to Off. We advise you to maintain it Off.
Caution: (**) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.
Note: In the Ribbon, the EasyPipe feature can be found in the Piping group, on
the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1433
1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.
1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
1434 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.
After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tools in the Production Module 1435
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
1436 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In Step 1, click the Extract Cylinder button. The cursor takes the
appearance of a cross.
2. Pick a point on the displayed set of points. The cross becomes a ruler.
3. Move the cursor to any location. A circle appears. Its center is at the
position of the picked point.
4. Pick another point (not necessary on the set of points).
A first cylinder is extracted from points inside the circle. The Start button in
Step 2 becomes enabled. The Number of Elements is equal to One.
Note: An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the
first extracted cylinder parameters like its Diameter, the Number of Points
(used for fitting) and the Standard Deviation.
Tools in the Production Module 1437
Tip: You can cancel the current cylinder and extract a new one by using the
Start button again.
Caution: The first extracted cylinder will not be saved if you close the tool by
pressing Esc. (or by selecting Close).
1438 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[A]
[B]
Tools in the Production Module 1439
Note: An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View window
displays the information related to the picked cylinder like its Diameter, Number
of Points and Standard Deviation.
Tip: You can also select a point cloud and a cylinder as input of the tool. The
selected cylinder will be automatically considered as the first cylinder, without
picking.
1440 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
The Start button takes the name of Pick to Continue.
The Delete Elements, Smooth and Model buttons become enabled. The
Number of Elements will be updated according to the fitted cylinders.
Tools in the Production Module 1441
1. Click the Pick to Continue button. If the fitting is too important; the
extraction stops on its own and a dialog opens and prompts to continue or
to abort.
2. Click Yes to continue.
3. Click No to abort.
1442 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click the Delete Elements button. The mouse cursor becomes as shown
below [A].
2. In the 3D View, pick an extracted cylinder. The picked cylinder and those
that follow after are deleted [B].
[A]
[B]
Tip: You can undo a deletion by selecting Undo Delete Elements from the pop-
up menu (or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z).
Note: You cannot delete the first cylinder; the one used for tracking. The
cursor will stay in the picking mode until a valid cylinder will be selected.
Tools in the Production Module 1443
Note: The Number of Elements will be updated once the extracted cylinders
have been smoothed.
1444 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Create. You can still extract another pipe from remaining points. The
EasyPipe dialog remains open.
2. Click Close. The EasyPipe dialog closes
Note: If the extracted cylinders have not been modeled; a list of cylinders will
be created in RealWorks. If the modeling has been applied, a mix of cylinders
and circular torus will be created.
Tip: You can also select Close from the pop-up menu.
1. Select a lone (or a set of) fitted Pipe(s) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Plant menu, select Export Pipe Center Lines . The Save As
dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive / folder where you want to store the file.
4. Keep the default name which is the project name.
5. Or input a new name in the File Name field.
6. Click on the File of Type pull down arrow.
7. Choose among Solids AutoCAD Files (*.dwg), Solids AutoCAD (*.dxf) and
MicroStation Files (*.dgn).
8. Click Save.
Note: A unique format file will be exported regardless of the number of Pipes
selected as input.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Export Pipe Center Lines feature can be found in the
Piping group, on the Model tab.
1446 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Product Version
AutoCAD® 2010 v.u.24
AutoCAD® 2009 v.u.23.1.01
AutoCAD® 2008 v.u.22.1.01
AutoCAD® 2007 v.u.21.1.01
AutoCAD® 2006 v.u.20.1.01
AutoCAD® 2005 v.u 19.1.01
AutoCAD® 2004 v.u 18.1.01
AutoCAD® 2002 v.u 16.1.01
AutoCAD® 2000 v.u 15.0.02
AutoCAD® Release 14 v.u 14.1.04
AutoCAD® Release 13 v.u 13.1.01
Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of
AutoCAD.
Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.
Product Version
AutoCAD® 2010 v.u.24
AutoCAD® 2009 v.u.23.1.01
AutoCAD® 2008 v.u.22.1.01
AutoCAD® 2007 v.u.21.1.01
AutoCAD® 2006 v.u.20.1.01
AutoCAD® 2005 v.u 19.1.01
AutoCAD® 2004 v.u 18.1.01
AutoCAD® 2002 v.u 16.1.01
AutoCAD® 2000 v.u 15.0.02
AutoCAD® Release 14 v.u 14.1.04
AutoCAD® Release 13 v.u 13.1.01
Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of
AutoCAD.
Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.
Layer: This option allows you to define a number of layers. One is set by
default and the option is dimmed.
Export Of: This option allows you to choose which the type of object(s) you
want to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries
and Selected Clouds. Selected Geometries is set by default and the option
is dimmed.
Export Frame: A project may have several coordinate frames. This option
allows you to select which coordinate frame from the drop-down list you
want to apply to the exported data.
Master Unit: This option allows you to select a unit system to the Master
unit.
Sub Unit: This option allows you to select a unit system to the Sub unit.
Positional Unit: This option allows you to enter a value for the Positional
unit.
1. Select a set of cylinders and/or circular torus from the Models Tree.
2. In the Modeling menu, select Change Pipe Diameter . The Change
Pipe Diameter dialog opens.
3. In the New Diameter Value field, input a new value.
4. Click Apply. The Change Pipe Diameter dialog closed. The new value is
then applied to all selected cylinders and/or circular torus
Note: For a circular torus, the pipe diameter cannot be larger than the center
line diameter. If you input a value that leads to such a case, an error message
is then displayed.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Change Pipe Diameter feature can be found in the
Piping group, on the Model tab.
1450 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: Importing a catalog file that is already imported will open a warning
message.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Import SteelWorks Catalog(s) feature can be reached
from the SteelWorks group, on the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1451
Note: In the Ribbon, the Remove SteelWorks Catalog List feature can be
reached from the SteelWorks group, on the Model tab.
1452 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
SteelWorks Creator
This feature allows you to model structural steelworks. Standard and specific
catalogs can be used within it.
1. Select one point cloud* (or more**) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Plant menu, select SteelWorks Creator . The SteelWorks Creator
and the Drawing open, as the third tab of the WorkSpace window for the
first and as a toolbar the second. We will call the input point cloud a Cloud
Data.
Note:
The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
(*) If the selected point cloud is On before starting the tool, it automatically
swaps to Off. We advise you to maintain it Off.
Caution: (**) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.
Note: In the Ribbon, the SteelWorks Creator feature can be reached from the
SteelWorks group, on the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1453
1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.
1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
1454 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.
After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tools in the Production Module 1455
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
There are five types of Sections you can create: H Section, I Section,
U Section, L Section and T Section.
Tip: For each type of Section, you can select its related shortcut. Please, refer
to the Shortcut Keys (see "Shortcut Keys in RealWorks" on page 101)
section for more information.
1456 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip:
You can import a catalog file within the SteelWorks Creator tool. You may
not see it once imported. In that case, select it by dropping down the
Catalog Files list.
You can delete the whole catalog files within the SteelWorks Creator tool.
Note: (*) The name you see in the Catalog Files field is not necessarily the
name of the imported catalog file. This name is the one you find in #SPEC
NAME# in the catalog file.
Select a Table
The available tables* are: HEA, HEB (for H Section), IPE, INP (for I Section),
UNP (for U Section), LEA (for L Section), TEA (for T Section). If there is no
catalog file that has been imported into your project; you may see "No Table" in
the Table field.
To Select a Table:
Note: (*) The number of Tables as well as their name or the kind of Tables
may differ from one catalog to another. The Tables given above are based on
the standard DIN catalog. In a catalog like the AFNOR catalog, new tables can
be added (UAP, UPF, HEM tables only).
Tools in the Production Module 1457
Select a Reference
If there is no catalog file that has been imported into RealWorks; you may see
"None" in the Selected Reference field.
To Select a Reference:
Tip: You can select a Reference from the drop-down list without checking the
Catalogue Constraint option. It will be automatically checked.
2D Sections
The Change Mode, Draw Rectangle and Draw Circle icons are not present in
the Drawing toolbar. Drawings are constrained to the shape chosen in Step 1.
Note: There is no way to close the Drawing toolbar except of first drawing and
validating a 2D section.
1458 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Define a 3D Plane
To Define a 3D Plane:
1. Click the Start 3D Plane Tool icon. The 3D Plane toolbar and a 3D
plane both appear.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane*. The scene is locked on the defined 3D
plane (which is hidden) with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden
previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint
mode. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes active and Lock in 2D
is default-set.
3. Click the Show/Hide Plane icon to display the defined 3D plane (if
required).
Note: (*) Please, refer to the 3D Plane tool on how to define a 3D plane.
Tip:
You can also select Start 3D Plane Tool (or Show/Hide Plane) from the
pop-up menu.
The Find Best Extrusion View is only present when using the 3D Plane
tool in the SteelWorks Creator tool. It enables to find the best cutting
direction.
1. Navigate through the 3D scene to find the best view on which you want to
draw a 2D section.
2. Pick a first point. The scene is locked on the current view plane with a 2D
grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the Picking Parameters
toolbar in the 2D constraint mode.
Tools in the Production Module 1459
Draw a 2D Section
To Draw a 2D Section:
Tip: The New SteelWorks icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
1. Click on the Selection Mode icon. The Change Move Mode button
becomes enabled with Pan as default mode.
2. A manipulator (with two secant handles and a plan) appears.
3. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the 2D section is highlighted in yellow and the one along which
you cannot displace it is in mauve.
4. Move the 2D section along that direction.
5. Click on the plane. It turns to yellow.
6. Move the 2D Section in any direction in that plane.
7. Click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.
8. Choose Rotate from the drop-down list. The Manipulator changes of
shape.
9. Click on the Manipulator. It turns to yellow.
10. Turn left or right the Manipulator.
1460 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Define a Length
You need to define a Length only if you don't want to create a beam based on
a catalog. Otherwise, defining a Length has no effect.
To Define a Length:
Tip: The extrusion's Length can also be modified by using the Geometry
Modifier tool.
Create Beams
An extruded entity will be created in the RealWorks database. Each extruded
entity has as name "ObjectX - Reference - Catalog" where X is its order. X
always starts at One. Reference will be replaced by the Selected Reference’s
value and Catalog by the Catalog’s name. If the Catalog Constraint option has
not been checked; the extruded entity has as name "ObjectX - SteelWorks".
To Create Beams:
Create a Ladder
The Ladder is a tool that lets the user to build a ladder based on a predefined
model or on a model defined by the user.
Tools in the Production Module 1461
Or
3. In the Access group, on the Model tab, click the Ladder icon.
Note: From here, when you press the Esc. key, this will close both the Drawing
toolbar and the Ladder tool.
1462 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.
1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
Tools in the Production Module 1463
Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.
After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
1464 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
If there are several models in your project, you can choose one by doing
the following
There is a persistency in the chosen model, i.e., it will be kept until you change
it to a new one.
Use the default STD Model. It comes with a set of predefined parameters;
you can view them by clicking the Edit button.
Or customize a model by modifying each of the parameters, the Apply
button, initially grayed-out, becomes enabled, as well as the Save As
button. The name of the chosen model changes to "Custom".
Tools in the Production Module 1465
Depth (2),
Thickness (3),
and Interval (4),
Depth (5),
And Width (6).
Note: You are not allowed to input either a negative or null value in each of the
parameter fields.
Tip: You can use the Tab key to navigate through the parameter fields.
Note: The model created is not stored in the current project but in the Windows
registry, so that when performing an update of RealWorks, the model will be
not lost.
Tools in the Production Module 1467
1. Rotate the ladder so that you can view it from its top, as illustrated below.
2. Lock the view in 2D by clicking the Lock In 2D icon in the Drawing
toolbar.
Or
3. Use the UCS Creation (see "Create an UCS" on page 248) tool to create a
new frame. Its Z axis must be aligned with one of the rails, as illustrated
below.
1468 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
4. Select the created frame and display its top view by selecting Object Top
.
5. If required, lock the view in 2D by clicking the Lock In 2D icon.
Tools in the Production Module 1469
Draw a 2D Section
To Draw a 2D Section:
1. Pick a point, ideally at the center of one of the Rungs. A 2D Section and a
manipulator appear. The 3D scene is locked in 2D, with the 2D Grid in
superimposition (if not previously hidden).
If Pan has been chosen, move the 2D section in the 2D locked plane.
3. If required, click the New 2D Section icon to delete the current 2D section.
4. Once satisfied, click the Validate Polyline icon.
1470 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: If the Drawing toolbar is not open, click the Polyline Drawing icon.
Note: There is no way to close the Drawing toolbar except of first drawing and
validating a 2D section.
Note: When you press the Esc. key after defining a 2D section, this will delete
the 2D section.
Tools in the Production Module 1471
Or
Note: A negative or null value cannot be considered for the Length and Start
Height parameters.
Create a Ladder
To Create a Ladder:
After clicking Create, you are brought back to Step 1. You can start drawing
another 2D Section and create a new ladder without having to leave the tool.
At the same time, the created ladder is by default selected and set as a Model
Group. You can change its layer or set it as a Non Model Group. To be able to
do that, you need to first leave the 2D Section drawing mode, and select
Change Classification Layer or Set as Non Model Group from the pop-up
menu.
Note: The cloud displayed in the 3D View after clicking Create is not the cloud
created within the ladder but the one selected as input of the tool. By this way,
you can continue on fitting other ladders.
1474 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a ladder group (created previously with the Ladder tool) from
the Project Tree.
2. From the Plant menu, select Ladder Cage .
Or
3. In the Access group, on the Model tab, click the Ladder Cage icon.
Note: From here, when you press the Esc. key, this opens a dialog prompting
you to create the ladder cage or not before closing the tool.
Note: When you use the Segmentation (or Sampling) tool, a dialog opens
asking you to keep (or not) the preview of the ladder cage.
Tools in the Production Module 1475
Note: The shape of the chosen the hoop is displayed in the Shape field.
Warning: In case you delete the active hoop which is not the first one, the next
active hoop is not the one that comes after the one that has been deleted but
the first one.
Caution: You cannot delete several hoops at once. The Delete icon is grayed
out in that case.
1478 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: The values in the Radius and Dimension fields are persistence. They
remain unchanged until you change them. To preserve the shape of the
chosen hoop, the value in the Dimension field should be higher than the value
in the Radius field. If you input a value that is lower, the value won't be taken
into account.
Tools in the Production Module 1479
3. Pick an extrusion.
Or
4. Draw a polyline:
a) Click the Polyline Drawing icon. The Drawing toolbar opens. The
3D View is locked in 2D, with the 2D Grid (if not previously hidden).
b) Draw a polyline and validate by choosing Close Tool, from the
toolbar or from the pop-up menu. A dialog opens and prompts you to
either create the drawn polyline or not.
Note: You are not able to change the intrinsic parameters of a user-defined
hoop. The Radius field in Step 2 is dimmed. Only the Dimension field is
enabled.
When you change the value in the Dimension field, its shape does not
lengthen or shorten as for the predefined shapes. You will only see the hoop(s)
moving as well as the 3D plane.
1480 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
You can apply any transformation you applied to a unique hoop, like changing
its shape, radius, etc. except deleting several of them or deleting them all. To
deselect all the selected hoops, do the following:
1. Leave the Inner Strap option unchecked to set all the straps out of the
hoops .
2. Or check the Inner Strap option to set all the straps inside of the hoops .
A group , named Ladder Cage Group, is created and rooted under the
Project Tree.
Under the group, the items below are also created:
Create Railings
The Railing is a tool that lets the user to build a railing based on a predefined
model or on a model defined by the user.
Or
3. In the Access group, on the Model tab, click the Railing icon.
1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.
1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
Tools in the Production Module 1485
Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.
After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
1486 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
(*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.
Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tools in the Production Module 1487
Select a Path
If there is at least one path (polyline) in the loaded project. You can select it for
creating railings. In that case, the selected point cloud and the current path
(polyline), the one listed in the selection box, with its projection (if existing) in
the XY plane are displayed in the 3D View.
To Select a Path:
If the Horizontal Path option has been checked, the railings will be
computed from the projection of the path on the XY plane.
If the 3D Path option has been checked, the railings will be computed
perpendicularly from the path in 3D (not projected in the XY plane).
The Vertical Offset is the distance which separates the selected (or
drawn) path (polyline in green ) and the polyline along which the railings
will be generated (polyline in red ). This value is by default equal to zero.
Note: The selected path (polyline) has to be regular (one chain with at least
three points).
1488 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Draw a Path
If any path (polyline) exists in your project, the combo box is grayed out. You
have to create at least one in the database. In that case, only the selected
scene (point cloud or mesh) is shown in the 3D View. The scene is constrained
in the XY plane of the active coordinate frame and movements while picking
points are restricted to the navigation movements. You can rotate the complete
scene around the Z axis, zoom (in or out) along this same axis and pan in the
XY plane.
To Draw a Path:
1. Click the Draw and Create Path in Database icon. The Drawing toolbar
appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a 2D grid
superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in the 2D constraint mode. The mouse cursor changes to a
pencil.
2. Pick at least two points (free or constrained).
3. Click End Line. The last picked point ends the line.
4. Or click Close Line. The start and end picked points are linked with a
segment in order to form a closed line.
5. Click Create. The drawn line is saved and created in the database as a
polyline.
Note: If the 2D Grid has been hidden in a previous case, it will also be hidden
when you activate the Polyline Drawing tool.
Select a Model
To Select a Model:
Choose a Configuration
To Choose a Configuration:
Rec. Axial .
Rec. Left .
Rec. Right .
Tools in the Production Module 1493
Note: The procedure explained in this section is about the 3 Rails and
Toeboard configuration. Please, enter the parameters corresponding to the
chosen configuration.
1494 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: The procedure explained in this section is about the 3 Rails and
Toeboard configuration. Please, enter the parameters corresponding to the
chosen configuration.
Tools in the Production Module 1495
Straight.
Vertical.
1496 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Corner Post Offset is the distance from either side of a corner.
1. Click the Pick Start Position On Path icon. The mouse cursor shape
changes to a pointer.
2. Pick a point along the path (polyline). The picked point becomes the Start
point.
3. Repeat the two above steps form the End position.
4. Click the Reload Initial Start Position On Path icon (if required).
5. Click the Reload Initial End Position On Path icon (if required).
1498 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
A cloud,
A set of Cylinders, each is named Post.
Tools in the Production Module 1499
Create Stairs
The Stairs is a tool that lets the user to build stairs based on a predefined
model or on a model defined by the user.
Or
3. In the Access group, on the Model tab, click the Stairs icon.
Note: From here, when you press the Esc. key, this will close the Stairs tool.
1500 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
f there are several models in your project, you can choose one by doing
the following
There is a persistency in the chosen model, i.e., it will be kept until you change
it to a new one.
Use the default STD Model. It comes with a set of predefined parameters;
you can view them by clicking the Edit button.
Or customize a model by modifying each of the parameters, the Apply
button, initially grayed-out, becomes enabled, as well as the Save As
button. The name of the chosen model changes to "Custom".
Tools in the Production Module 1501
Note: You are not allowed to input either a negative or null value in each of the
parameter fields, except for the Axis Offset.
Tip: You can use the Tab key to navigate through the parameter fields.
Tools in the Production Module 1503
Note: The model created is not stored in the current project but in the Windows
registry, so that when performing an update of RealWorks, the model will be
not lost.
The position picked by the user is labelled Bottom, and its height along the Z
axis (of the current frame) is displayed in the Bottom field.
The position picked by the user is labelled Top, and its height along the Z axis
(of the current frame) is displayed in the Top field.
Note: The Top value needs to be higher than the Bottom value. If you pick a
point whose height is below the height of the bottom point, this point won't be
considered.
Tip: The Bottom and Top fields are editable after picking the bottom and top
landing positions.
1504 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Draw a 2D Section
To Draw a 2D Section:
1. Click the Draw Frame to Positions New Stairs icon. The Drawing
toolbar appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a
2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode. The mouse cursor changes to
a pencil.
2. Pick two (or three) points (free or constrained) to define a rectangular
frame.
3. If required, resize the rectangular frame in length and in width by dragging
and dropping a middle node.
4. Click Validate. The Drawing toolbar closes.
Note: When you press the Esc. key after defining a 2D section, this will delete
the 2D section.
Note: You are able to edit the defined frame in length and width. When you try
to edit a node in order to change the shape of the frame, it won't change.
Create Stairs
To Create the Stairs:
Note: You can create as many stairs as needed without having to leave the
tool.
Note: The cloud displayed in the 3D View after clicking Create is not the cloud
created within the stairs but the one selected as input of the tool. By this way,
you can continue on fitting other stairs.
1506 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Storage Tank module is present in all RealWorks products except in the
Viewer, Base and Plant, as illustrated below. Note that the Horizontal Tank
Calibration, Tank Setup, Vertical Tank Inspection, Tank Secondary
Containment and Table Location tools are available only in the Advanced Tank
version.
The set of tools can be reached from the Storage Tank menu in the Menu and
Toolbars, and are split into three groups (Tank Object, Tank Inspection and
Tank Calibration), on the Storage Tank tab, in the Ribbon.
1. Select a point cloud (or a fitted mesh) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Storage Tank menu, select Vertical Tank Calibration .
The Vertical Tank Calibration dialog opens as the third tab of the
WorkSpace window. It is composed of several parts.
If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite points
(or reduce its size by simplifying it). If the input is a fitted mesh, only a
point cloud is displayed.
By default, two planes and a cross-section center line are displayed.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Vertical Tank Calibration feature can be reached from
the Tank Calibration group.
1508 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: The Dipping Plate must be below the maximum level height of the
Body. If you enter a value (or pick a height) that does not meet this
requirement, an error dialog opens.
4. Isolate the Dipping Plate from the whole set of points by fencing.
5. If required, switch back to the Examiner mode.
6. Bring the view to Front, by selecting from the 3D View / Standard
Views menu.
7. If required, remove unwanted points from the Dipping Plate, by fencing.
8. Close the Segmentation toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial
planes and the cross section center line appear.
9. Click the Pick Dipping Plate icon. The two initial planes and the cross
section center line disappear again.
1510 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
10. In the 3D View, pick a point on the Dipping Plate. The two initial planes
and the cross section center line reappear again and the Bottom Plane is
then set to that point.
11. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the
Reload Points icon (within the Vertical Tank Calibration).
Tools in the Production Module 1511
1. In the Vertical Tank Calibration dialog, click the Fit Dipping Plate icon.
The Fitting toolbar opens. The two initial planes and the cross section
center line disappear.
2. Switch to the Station-Based mode. By this way, the tank is then
visualized from its interior. This will help you to locate easily the Dipping
Plate. Please note this is only available in case the scan data has been
acquired from the interior of the tank.
3. Navigate within the set of points to visually locate where the Dipping Plate
is.
4. Isolate the Dipping Plate from the whole set of points by fencing.
5. If required, switch back to the Examiner mode.
6. Bring the view to Front, by selecting from the 3D View / Standard
Views menu.
7. If required, remove unwanted points from the Dipping Plate, by fencing.
8. Click the Horizontal Plane icon. The fenced points are fitted with a blue
horizontal plane.
1512 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
9. Close the Fitting toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial planes
and the cross section center line appear again. The Bottom Plane is then
set to the position of the fitted plane.
10. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the
Reload Points icon (within the Vertical Tank Calibration tool).
Input a Value
To Input a Value:
Pick a Height
To Pick a Height:
Note: If the input value is lower than 5 millimeters, an error dialog opens.
Tools in the Production Module 1513
Note: If the input value is lower than 10 millimeters, an error dialog opens.
To Preview Results:
In the Vertical Tank Calibration dialog, the Display Sump and Display
Sections options become enabled. By default, the two Geometry options
are checked.
In the 3D View, the Sump's Volume is represented by a graph of vertical
color lines and the Sections are represented by a set of closed and fitted
(with points) Polylines. The information box, in the upper right corner,
displays in text the values of the Sump Volume, Body Volume and Full
Volume.
2. If required, check the Cloud options to display the point cloud in the 3D
View.
3. If required, uncheck the Geometry options to hide the computed Volume
and Sections in the 3D View.
4. Visually check the Sump Volume data to ensure that the entire area has
been taken into account for the volume calculation. If you detect "holes" in
the Sump Volume display, choose a different resolution setting. Reiterate
this step until you achieve a satisfactory result.
Tools in the Production Module 1515
1 - A set of point cloud slides 3 - A set of Sections
2 - The Volume of the Sump
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
A group named Tank-Interval "Interval value" is created and rooted under the
Models Tree. All computed Sections and Volume are put under that group. A
Section is a Fitted Polyline and is named Section-TankX-Alt "Altitude Value"
where X is its order in three digits, or more. A Volume is named: Sump-Dipping
Plate "Height value".
If the Dipping Plate has been defined by fitting a set of points with a plane, a
Fitted Plane object named "Dipping Plate" is created and put under the Tank-
Interval folder.
Tip: You can leave the Vertical Tank Calibration tool by pressing Esc or by
selecting Close from the pop-up menu.
Note: You can create as many sets of Sections and Volume as required
without having to leave the tool. If you decide to leave this tool without saving
the results, a message appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel
the process.
1516 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: If the Storage Tank Application option has been chosen during the
installation of RealWorks, two files are installed in X:\Program
Files\Trimble\RealWorks 11.0\Tables\Tank. The Excel sheet is a sample
template that allows the importing of cross section data (from the above
mentioned TXT file) generated by the Vertical Tank Calibration tool. Formulas
allow the user to apply compensations and to then create capacity tables. The
Word format file contains detailed instructions for importing and processing the
cross section data.
Warning: You must export the results before closing the Vertical Tank
Calibration tool, otherwise they will be lost.
Tools in the Production Module 1517
1. Select a point cloud (or a fitted mesh) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Storage Tank menu, select Horizontal Tank Calibration .
The Horizontal Tank Calibration dialog opens as the third tab of the
WorkSpace window. It is composed of several parts.
If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite points
(or reduce its size by simplifying it). If the input is a fitted mesh, only a
point cloud is displayed.
By default, two planes and a cross-section center line are displayed.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Horizontal Tank Calibration feature can be reached
from the Tank Calibration group.
1518 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Horizontal Tank Calibration dialog, click the Fit Dipping Plate
icon. The Fitting toolbar opens. The two initial planes and the cross
section center line disappear.
2. Switch to the Station-Based mode. By this way, the tank is then
visualized from its interior. This will help you to locate easily the Dipping
Plate. Please note this is only available in case the scan data has been
acquired from the interior of the tank.
3. Navigate within the set of points to visually locate where the Dipping Plate
is.
4. Isolate the Dipping Plate from the whole set of points by fencing.
5. If required, switch back to the Examiner mode.
6. Bring the view to Front, by selecting from the 3D View / Standard
Views menu.
7. If required, remove unwanted points from the Dipping Plate, by fencing.
8. Click the Horizontal Plane icon. The fenced points are fitted with a blue
vertical plane.
9. Close the Fitting toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial planes
and the cross section center line appear again. The Bottom Plane is then
set to the position of the fitted plane.
10. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the
Reload Points icon (within the Vertical Tank Calibration tool).
Input a Value
To Input a Value:
Pick a Height
To Pick a Height:
Note: If the input value is lower than 5 millimeters, an error dialog opens.
Note: If the input value is lower than 10 millimeters, an error dialog opens.
Tools in the Production Module 1521
To Preview Results:
In the Horizontal Tank Calibration dialog, the Display Sump and Display
Sections options become enabled. By default, the two Geometry options
are checked.
In the 3D View, the Sump's Volume is represented by a graph of vertical
color lines and the Sections are represented by a set of closed and fitted
(with points) polylines. The information box, in the upper right corner,
displays in text the values of the Sump Volume, Body Volume and Full
Volume.
2. If required, check the Cloud options to display the point cloud in the 3D
View.
3. If required, uncheck the Geometry options to hide the computed Volume
and Sections in the 3D View.
4. Visually check the Sump Volume data to ensure that the entire area has
been taken into account for the volume calculation. If you detect "holes" in
the Sump Volume display, choose a different resolution setting. Reiterate
this step until you achieve a satisfactory result.
1522 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.
A group named Tank-Interval "Interval value" is created and rooted under the
Models Tree. All computed Sections and Volume are put under that group. A
Section is a Fitted Polyline and is named Section-TankX-Alt "Altitude Value"
where X is its order in three digits, or more. A Volume is named: Sump-Dipping
Plate "Height value".
If the Dipping Plate has been defined by fitting a set of points with a plane, a
Fitted Plane object named "Dipping Plate" is created and put under the Tank-
Interval folder.
Tip: You can leave the Horizontal Tank Calibration tool by pressing Esc or by
selecting Close from the pop-up menu.
Note: You can create as many sets of sections and volume as required without
having to leave the tool. If you decide to leave this tool without saving the
results, a message appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the
process.
Tools in the Production Module 1523
Note: If the Storage Tank Application option has been chosen during the
installation of RealWorks, two files are installed in X:\Program
Files\Trimble\RealWorks 11.0\Tables\Tank. The Excel sheet is a sample
template that allows the importing of cross section data (from the above
mentioned TXT file) generated by the Horizontal Tank Calibration tool.
Formulas allow the user to apply compensations and to then create capacity
tables. The Word format file contains detailed instructions for importing and
processing the cross section data.
Warning: You must export the results before closing the Horizontal Tank
Calibration tool, otherwise they will be lost.
1524 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
In the Horizontal (or Vertical) Tank Calibration dialog, click the Check
button. The Tank Calibration Check dialog opens in place of the Horizontal
(or Vertical) Tank Calibration dialog. The first Section with fitted points is
displayed in the 3D View with a 2D Grid superimposed (if not previously
hidden).
Note: You can hide the 2D Grid or change its size by selecting its related
command from the pop-up menu or from 3D View menu bar.
Note: You need to first generate a preview of Sections and Volume from the
set of points; otherwise the Check button remains dimmed.
1. Check the Filter Sections options. The Tolerance slider and its field
become enabled.
2. Move the Filter Sections slider from Left to Right to set a value.
3. Or enter a rate in the field.
If the selected (active) section is other than the first section, you can use the
Up and Down keys of your keyboard (or Display Previous Contour and
Display Next Contour buttons in the dialog) to display the next and the
previous section in the 3D View. The Display First Contour or Display Last
Contour buttons will set the first section or last section as active (selected).
You can also key in a number in Step 2 to select it.
Tip: You can hide the slice of points that is associated with the selected
section by un-checking the Display Cloud option.
1526 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Edit a Section
This step is dedicated to the editing of defective sections. Only one section can
be edited at a time; the selected one. As a section is a fitted polyline which is
composed of a set of segments, you can use the Polyline Drawing tool to
modify it manually by moving vertices. You can also delete a part and connect
extremities with a segment.
1. Click the Polyline Drawing icon. The Drawing and Picking Parameters
(in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear.
2. Place the cursor over the Section. A solid square appears if you are on
a node, if you are on a middle node and if you are on a middle node
to insert.
3. Drag the node to a position. The selected node turns to yellow.
4. Drop the node to that position.
5. Click Validate.
Tip: The Polyline Drawing icon can also be selected from the pop-up
menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1527
Note: To undo the previously drawn fence and start a new one, select the
Standard Selection Mode icon again.
Tip: The Standard Selection Mode icon can also be selected from the pop-
up menu.
1528 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: The Reload Initial Section and Delete and Connection Extremities
icons can be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tank Setup
The purpose of this tool is to allow the user to create an object of Tank type in
the database. This creation must first go through an initial phase that
corresponds to the classification (of the tank). A classification is a feature that
enables to automatically (or manually) identify each part of a tank, whatever
the shape it has. A tank is composed of the following parts:
Bottom.
Shell.
Roof.
Deadwood (all the data inside the tank like pipes, ladders, etc.).
Remaining (point clouds not classified in the previous categories).
1530 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a point cloud (or a Tank object ) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Storage Tank menu, select Tank Setup . The Tank Creation
dialog opens.
If a Tank object has been selected as input, the number of points of each
part (of the tank) is displayed.
Tools in the Production Module 1531
Note: In the Ribbon, the Tank Setup feature can be reached from the Tank
Object group.
1. Drop-down the first list and choose among Vertical Cylinder and Horizontal
Cylinder.
2. Drop-down the second list and choose among Inner Scans and Outer
Scans.
If Vertical Cylinder and Inside Scans have been chosen, the Bottom
parameter is enabled, and you can drop-down the list to choose among
Planar Bottom (Flat/Sloped), Cone Up Bottom and Cone Down Bottom.
If Vertical Cylinder and Outside Scans have been chosen, the Bottom
parameter is grayed-out.
If Horizontal Cylinder has been chosen, the Bottom parameter is grayed-
out.
1532 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Remaining, Roof and Shell, if Vertical Cylinder and Outside Scans have
been chosen in Step 1.
Remaining, Shell and Deadwood, if Horizontal Cylinder and Inside Scans
have been chosen in Step 1.
Remaining and Shell, if Horizontal Cylinder and Outside Scans have been
chosen in Step 1.
The set of points inside the defined fence is colored with the color
corresponding to the part of the tank you have chosen.
The number of points inside the defined fence appears, in Step 3 of the
Tank Creation dialog, below the chosen part.
The number of points in the Remaining part is reduced by the amount of
points inside the defined fence.
1534 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
6. If necessary, fence another region on the set of points and add it to the
previous.
Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar).
Tip: You can select Assign to Desired Tank Part from the pop-up menu or use
the P shortcut key.
All the parameters that compose the tank object can be viewed when
displaying its properties.
Note: You cannot create a tank object without Shell. The Create button
remains grayed-out until a Shell has been defined.
Note: The Tank Creation dialog remains open after a tank object is created.
You need to close it manually to leave the Tank Creation tool.
3. If required, cancel the current measurement and start a new one by doing
one of the following:
Press Esc.
Select Tank Shell Measurement from the pop-up menu.
Pick two new points.
Tools in the Production Module 1539
Tip: Instead of clicking Create, you can press Enter, or select Create from the
pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1541
The roundness analysis tells whether the tank is circular up to a tolerance. The
tank may be round and not perfectly cylindrical, i.e., it may have a different
diameter at different heights. For each elevation, the roundness analysis
compares the shell point cloud to a circular shape as illustrated below.
Caution: You need to have a vertical Tank object with Shell. Otherwise the
Vertical Tank Inspection tool cannot be launched.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Vertical Tank Inspection feature can be reached from
the Tank Inspection group.
Tools in the Production Module 1543
This step also enables to define a set of measurement rules. Both the grid and
the measurement rules will be used to compute the inspection between the
point cloud and the fitted cylinder.
Click the Define/Edit button. The Tank Grid Definition dialog opens, in
place of the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog.
In the 3D View, the cylinder, fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection, is
hidden.
1546 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Define Stations
In a tank, a Station is a vertical line which may correspond (or not) to a vertical
weld seam.
1. Click the Pick Initial Inspection Station icon. The cursor takes the following
shape .
2. In the 3D View, pick a point, over a vertical weld seam (or not). The 3D
coordinates of the picked point are displayed in the Initial Station field.
Or
Note: You can cancel the initial Inspection Station by selecting Undo.
Tools in the Production Module 1547
A set of vertical (and blue) lines appears all around the tank. The longer one is
the initial line (initial Inspection Station).
The number of lines, which is always a multiple of 2, is obtained by subdividing
the circumference of the tank by the Step Distance value.
The value, you entered in the Step Distance field, is automatically adjusted to a
value to fit the subdivision and the multiple-of-two constraint.
Or
Note: You can cancel the whole Stations except the initial one by selecting
Undo.
Note: The numbering will start from the initial station, at 0 or at 1, depending
on the convention chosen in step 2. The order for the rest of the stations will be
given by the chosen direction. See the Set the Orientation and Numbering
Conventions (on page 1563) topic.
Note: A warning message appears and prompts you to continue or abort when
the number of stations exceeds 250.
Define Courses
In a tank, a Course is a circumferential ring bounded by two consecutive
horizontal weld seams.
Tools in the Production Module 1549
Pick Welds
To Pick Welds:
1. Click the Pick Welds button. The cursor takes the following shape .
The Pick Welds button takes the name of Done.
2. In the 3D View, pick a point on the top horizontal weld seam of a Course.
3. In the 3D View, pick on the bottom horizontal weld seam of the Course to
define.
Note: You can add a series of lines without having to leave the tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1551
Remove Welds
To Remove Welds:
1. Click the Remove Weld button. The cursor takes the following shape .
2. In the 3D View, pick a horizontal weld seam.
Edit a Grid
This step enables to edit the grid previously defined, by moving either the
Station lines or the Course lines (welds).
Tools in the Production Module 1553
Shift a Station
To Shift a Station:
1. Click the Shift Stations button. The cursor takes the following shape .
2. In the 3D View, pick a Station. Its color turns to pink.
3. Pick a new position in a space delimited by the next Station and the
previous Station. The selected Station is shifted horizontally to the picked
position.
Note: You can cancel the shift of the Station by selecting Undo.
1554 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: You are not allowed to shift a Station to a position which may modify
its order in regards with the rest of the Stations.
Tools in the Production Module 1555
Shift a Weld
To Shift a Weld:
1. Click the Shift Welds button. The cursor takes the following shape .
2. In the 3D View, pick a weld. Its color turns to pink.
4. Click Done.
Caution: Be aware that all of the parameters input in this step are persistent.
You have to reset them manually.
Note: You can display (or hide) the measurement rules by checking (or un-
checking) the Display Rules option.
Tools in the Production Module 1557
Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rule(s) Above the Bottom
Weld of a Course
To Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rules Above the Bottom
Weld of a Course:
Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rule(s) Below the Top
Weld of a Course
To Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rules Below the Top Weld
of a Course:
Note: A value entered in the Below is always positive. If you input a negative
value, the value will not be taken into account.
Tools in the Production Module 1561
The Outer Zone is the interval from the Shell to a given position, generally the
position where the bottom starts to be settled. The Inner Zone is the interval
from this position to the center of the tank.
You can put a distance equal to zero in the Outer Zone Width field.
In that case, whatever the value in the Outer Zone Step, it is not going to be
taken into account.
Caution: Be aware that all of the parameters input in this step are persistent.
You have to reset them manually.
Note: You can display (or hide) the measurement rules by checking (or un-
checking) the Display Rules option.
Caution: This step is grayed out if you enter the Vertical Tank Inspection tool
with no Bottom in your Tank object.
After applying the grid, Step 4 in the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog becomes
enabled.
Caution: The user needs to first define a measurement rule, i.e. with Stations
and Courses, to be able to inspect the verticality and roundness of the tank.
Otherwise, after clicking Apply, the Verticality and Roundness buttons remain
grayed out.
Tools in the Production Module 1563
The Numbers from 0 option enables to start the numbering of the Stations
at 0.
The Numbers from 1 option enables to start the numbering of the Stations
at 1.
The Angles option enables to display the numbering of the Stations, as
angular values (always in degrees).
Note: The conventions related to the Orientation and the Numbering of the
Stations, defined here, will be visible when checking the vertically and the
roundness of the tank, in the report and in the created results.
1564 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Click on the Verticality button. The Tank Verticality Check dialog opens, in
place of the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog.
Both the cylinder (fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection) and the
selected point cloud are hidden in the 3D View.
Tools in the Production Module 1565
Filter Sections
The slicing of the selected point cloud along the Station lines, are called
Sections. All are selected after entering into the Tank Verticality Check sub-
tool. The number of selected Stations is displayed in Step 1. The
measurements, made at the points by intersecting the Station lines with the
measurement rule lines, are called Measurement Points.
By default, the first Section (in order) is the one selected (in Step 2) and
displayed in the 3D View. The Apply Filter option is by default not chosen. But
when you choose it, it enables to filter by only keeping the Sections for which
some measurement points are not in the Tolerance the user has to define.
1. Check the Apply Filter option. The Tolerance field becomes enabled.
2. Enter a distance value in the Tolerance field.
The measurement points that are out of the defined Tolerance are in red.
Those that are in the defined Tolerance are in blue.
In Step 1, the number of selected Selections is updated according to the
defined Tolerance.
In Step 2, the number of Vertical Measurements is also updated.
1 - A measurement point out of the defined 2 - A measurement point in the defined tolerance
tolerance
1566 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: Be aware that the value put in the Tolerance parameter is persistent.
You have to reset it manually.
Tools in the Production Module 1567
1. Click Display Next Section (or Display Previous Section ) to display the
next (or previous) section in the 3D View.
2. Or click Display Last Section (or Display First Section ) to display the
last (or first) section in the 3D View.
3. Or key a number and press Enter.
4. If required, check the Display Cloud option.
5. If required, check the Display Reference option.
6. Zoom in or zoom out the displayed Section.
Tip:
You can use the Up (or Down) Arrow key instead of Display Next Section
(or Display Previous Section).
1568 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
You can use the Home (or End) key instead of Display First Section (or
Display Last Section)
Tools in the Production Module 1569
Both the cylinder (fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection) and the
selected point cloud are hidden in the 3D View.
The view is brought to Top, locked in 2D with the 2D Grid displayed.
Tools in the Production Module 1571
By default, the higher Section (in elevation) is the one selected (in Step 2) and
displayed in the 3D View. The Apply Filter option is by default not chosen. But
when you choose it, it enables to filter by only keeping the Sections for which
some measurement points are not in the Tolerance the user has to define.
1. Check the Apply Filter option. The Tolerance field becomes enabled.
2. Enter a distance value in the Tolerance field.
The measurement points that are out of the defined Tolerance are in red.
Those that are in the defined Tolerance are in yellow.
In Step 1, the number of selected Selections is updated according to the
defined Tolerance.
In Step 2, the number of welds is also updated.
1572 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Caution: Be aware that the value put in the Tolerance parameter is persistent.
You have to reset it manually.
Tools in the Production Module 1573
1. Click Display Next Section (or Display Previous Section ) to display the
next (or previous) section in the 3D View.
2. Or click Display Last Section (or Display First Section ) to display the
last (or first) section in the 3D View.
3. Or key a number and press Enter.
4. If required, check the Display Cloud option.
5. If required, check the Display Reference option.
6. Zoom in or zoom out the displayed Section.
Tip:
You can use the Up (or Down) Arrow key instead of Display Next Section
(or Display Previous Section).
You can use the Home (or End) key instead of Display First Section (or
Display Last Section)
1574 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create a Report
To Create a Report:
1. Click the Create Report button. The Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog
opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the report file to be stored in
the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension RTF is added
automatically.
4. Click Save. A new Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog opens.
5. Do one of the following:
Define the content of the report (see Report Content (on page 1575)).
If the Verticality Inspection (or Roundness Inspection) option has been
checked, define the Criteria for Verticality and Roundness (see
"Criteria for Verticality" on page 1578).
If the Bottom Settlement Inspection option has been checked, choose a
Bottom Reference (on page 1576).
If the Shell Settlement Inspection option has been checked, define the
Criteria for Shell Settlement (on page 1579).
For any type of content, define the Conventions that will be used in the
plots.
6. If required, check the Display Point Cloud in Plots option to enable to the
display of points in the plots.
7. If required, check the Display Difference Values in Roundness Plots option
to display the values of the deviation in radius between the measurement
points and the circular reference in the report.
8. Click Create. The Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog closes and the
report opens of its own.
The unit of measurement that will be used in the report is the unit of
measurement for Length.
Tools in the Production Module 1575
Report Content
If the Verticality Inspection option has been checked, the Verticality Report
part will be included in the report.
If the Roundness Inspection option has been checked, the Roundness
Report part will be included in the report.
If the Verticality Inspection option and the Roundness Inspection option
has been checked, the Verticality and Roundness table in the first page
will be displayed.
If the Bottom Settlement Inspection option has been checked, the Bottom
Settlement Report part will be included in the report. In the first page the
Bottom Settlement table will be added.
If the Shell Settlement Inspection has been checked, the Shell Settlement
Report part will be included in the report. In the first page, the Shell
settlement table will be added.
1576 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Bottom Reference
If the Bottom model option has been chosen, the plots in the Bottom
Settlement report will display the fitted bottom as reference line. This
“fitted” reference line will be used to compute the elevation from reference
in the tables.
The elevation of this reference line is the elevation of the highest measured
point for all the profiles plus 25% of the distance between the highest and the
lowest elevations for all the profiles.
1578 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Top Tolerance threshold applies on the upper part of the tank, i.e.,
above the ‘Height above Shell-to-Bottom Weld’.
The Bottom Tolerance threshold applies on the lower part of the tank, i.e.,
below the ‘Height above Shell-to-Bottom Weld’.
The Height above Shell-to-Bottom Weld field enables you to use two
different tolerances.
The estimated tank diameter is given as an aid for defining the tolerances.
Where:
Conventions
The Unit field enables to choose a unit system to be used in the report.
1580 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
When you edit an already inspected tank object and save the results, a dialog
appears and warns you that the new inspection will delete the existing one. If
you wish to keep the old inspection, please make a copy of the tank object
before entering the tool. This way, you will create a new inspection.
Tools in the Production Module 1581
1. Select a Tank object and a Cloud object from the Project Tree.
2. On the Storage Tank tab, click the Tank Secondary Containment icon
in the Tank Calibration group. The Tank Secondary Containment dialog
opens.
The input cloud should correspond to the ground surface where the secondary
containment has to be extracted. Thus, before computation, it is recommended
to remove other objects (e.g. pipes, cars, tanks, etc.) using the automatic
Ground Extraction (on page 345) feature and/or the manual Segmentation.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Tank Secondary Containment feature can be reached
from the Tank Calibration group.
1582 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Define an Area
To Define an Area:
1. In Step 1, click the Select Area button. The Drawing toolbar appears. The
3D View is locked in 2D, with a 2D Grid in superimpose (if not hidden
previously). The view is brought to Top View.
2. Draw a fence around the containment area. It should be not too far from
the top of the dike, around one meter. The secondary containment is
assumed to be entirely inside the fence.
3. Validate the fence by clicking . The Drawing toolbar closes.
Note: After defining an area, the Compute button in Step 2 becomes enabled.
Click the Compute button. The volume as well as the watershed line and
the spillover point are computed and displayed in the 3D View.
Tools in the Production Module 1583
Generate a Report
To Generate a Report:
6. Click the Create button. The Tank Secondary Containment Report dialog
closes.
Here is an example for which the contents of the selected tank combined with
the rainfall rate do not exceed the capability of the secondary containment.
Here is an example for which the contents of the selected tank combined with
the rainfall rate exceed the capability of the secondary containment.
Rainfall
An important factor that the user has to take into consideration in determining
the necessary secondary containment capacity is the local precipitation
condition, Rainfall.
Units
Volume: The unit that is used in the report for quantifying a volume.
Create
To Create:
Click the Create button. The computed result is then created in the
database in a new folder named "Secondary Containment".
Tools in the Production Module 1585
Locate Tables
The Storage Tank Application is an option when installed, also installs a set of
tables. The Locate Table option is a direct entry that brings you to the folder
where the tables are.
Note: The Locate Table option can be reached from the Tank Calibration
group, in the Ribbon, and from the Storage Tank menu, in the Menu and
Toolbars.
1586 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Or
Caution: The Send to SketchUp feature remains grayed-out for two reasons.
First is when no session of SketchUp has been open (from RealWorks).
Second is when you select an entity for which the feature is not enabled.
Note: An error message appears when you try to export an entity to SketchUp
while its Welcome to SketchUp dialog is still open.
Note: This feature requires the installation of SketchUp Pro on your computer.
If you have SketchUp Make instead, a message appears and warns that this
feature is not compatible with SketchUp Make.
One good practice is to generate a Top view, a Front view and a side view,
export them to SketchUp, and then use them as background. In SketchUp, set
the 'View>Face Type' to X-Ray to be able to view the ortho-images behind the
model.
1588 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: In the Ribbon, the Send to SketchUp feature can be found in the
SketchUp group, on the Model tab.
CHAPTER 13
The Media tab is present in all RealWorks products. Tools from the tab can be
used in Production, and in Registration. When you are in Registration, only the
Screen Capture (High Resolution) and the Capture Screen features are
available. In the Viewer, only the Screen Capture feature is available.
The set of tools is gathered in one group (Media), and put on the Media tab, in
the Ribbon.
1591
Create a Video
The aim is to provide a tool that can generate videos from survey data. The
video files are saved in the AVI (for Audio Video Interleave, a video format from
Microsoft) format with customizable resolution and compression level.
The Video Creator dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and
is composed of three parts. The first part (Define Navigation Path) contains
methods for creating a video. The second part (Define Video Parameters)
allows you to set parameters and preview the result. The last step is to save
the result.
The 3D View spits into two 3D viewers. The top 3D viewer (Main View)
displays the global scene. The bottom 3D viewer (called Preview) displays the
view from the current keyframe. A keyframe is like a camera in a given
position. The Perspective projection mode is set by default; you cannot swap to
Parallel.
1592 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Quick Mode
In the Examiner mode, the top 3D viewer (called Main View) displays the
global scene with a red circular path and four keyframes. All the keyframes are
directed towards the center of the circular path. The bottom 3D viewer (called
Preview) displays the view of the current keyframe (in yellow). The circular
path has as diameter the diagonal of the bounding box that highlights the
selection. A 3D manipulator (three handles corresponding to three secant
directions, each with a color (red, green and blue)) is located at the center of
circular path. The View Inwards/Outwards button in Step 1 is enabled.
In the Station-Based navigation mode, the top 3D viewer displays the global
scene with only one keyframe. This keyframe is set at the first station position
of the Project Tree. The bottom 3D Viewer shows the viewpoint from that
keyframe. The View Inwards/Outwards button is dimmed.
1594 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
View Inwards/Outwards
You can reverse the keyframe direction so that all keyframes diverge from the
center instead of converging on it.
To View Inwards/Outwards:
Note: You can undo (or redo) the inversion by clicking on the Undo Operation
(or Redo Operation) button in the Main toolbar.
Producing Media Files 1595
1. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the circular path (with keyframes) is highlighted in yellow and
those along which you cannot displace the circular path (with keyframes)
are in mauve.
2. Drag and drop to move the circular path (with keyframes) along that
direction.
Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
1596 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Click on a plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can displace
the circular path (with keyframes) appears in highlighted in yellow and
those you cannot displace along are in mauve.
2. Drag and drop to move the circular path (with keyframes) in that plane.
Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
Producing Media Files 1597
Note: You can undo (or redo) the resizing by clicking on the Undo Operation
(or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
1598 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Step-by-Step Mode
In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode, the top 3D viewer (called Main View)
displays the global scene with an initial keyframe. The bottom 3D viewer
(taking the name of Video Editing and Preview) displays the view from that
keyframe. In both 3D viewers, the Head Always Up option and the Perspective
project mode are default-set. The initial keyframe is at a position that
corresponds to the current keyframe (of the previous creation mode) position
with a shift. As the Heap Always Up option is default-set; you cannot navigate
with permanent constraints (Horizontal Pan, Horizontal Rotation, etc.) or
temporary constraints (Rotate constrained around a vertical axis, Pan
constrained along a vertical axis, etc.) in the 3D viewers. You can only zoom
(in or out), pan and rotate.
Keyframe
Producing Media Files 1599
Add a Keyframe
To Add a Keyframe:
1. In the bottom 3D viewer, navigate through the scene to find the right point
of view.
2. In the Video Creator dialog, click the Add New Keyframe icon. A
keyframe is added in the top 3D viewer (in the first station position when
you are in the Station-Based mode).
3. Repeat the steps from 1 to 2 to add another keyframe.
Tip:
You can also click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom) and select Add New
Keyframe from the pop-up menu.
In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) navigation mode, use the View
Alignment tools like Center On Point to help you rotating around a point.
Note:
Adding a new keyframe at the same position than an existing keyframe will
make rotate the camera of 360°.
You can undo (or redo) the addition of a keyframe by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
You can switch from the Examiner navigation mode to the Walkthrough
navigation mode and vice versa when adding new keyframes. You cannot
switch to the Station-Based navigation mode if there are already
keyframes. You need to delete all of them to be able to switch to this
navigation mode.
Edit Keyframes
After adding a keyframe, the Clear All Keyframes and Delete Current Keyframe
icons as well as the Save Keyframes to File command become enabled.
1604 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Delete a Keyframe
To Delete a Keyframe:
1. In Step 1 of the Video Creator dialog, click the Clear Current Keyframe
icon. The current keyframe is removed from the sequence.
2. Or browse the sequence of keyframes using the navigation buttons to find
the one you want to delete and click Clear Current Keyframe.
Note: You can undo (or redo) the deletion of a keyframe by clicking on the
Undo Operation (or Redo Operation) button in the Main toolbar.
1. In Step 1 of the Video Creator dialog, click the Clear all Keyframes
icon.
2. Or right-click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom) and select Clear all Keyframes
from the pop-up menu.
1. Browse the sequence of keyframes using the navigation buttons to find the
one for which you want to change its position or orientation.
2. In the bottom 3D viewer, navigate through the scene to find the right point
of view.
If you are in the Examiner mode, the current keyframe position changes as well
as the path's shape.
If you are in the Walkthrough mode, the current keyframe orientation changes
while the path's shape remains unchanged.
1606 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
If you are in the Station-Based mode, the current keyframe position changes.
All are at the same position.
Note: You can undo (or redo) the operation by clicking on the Undo Operation
(or Redo Operation) button in the Main toolbar.
Producing Media Files 1607
Path Mode
The top 3D viewer displays the global scene with a path (if there is a polyline in
your project) and keyframes (one at each node of the polyline). The initial
keyframe is at the starting node's position. The bottom 3D viewer - taking the
name of Preview - displays the view from the current keyframe (in yellow). If
your project has no polyline; the top 3D viewer still displays the global scene
but without path. The bottom 3D viewer keeps the view from the current
keyframe (of the previous creation mode). In both 3D viewers, the Head
Always Up option and the Perspective project mode are default-set. As the
Heap Always Up option is default-set; you cannot navigate with permanent
constraints (Horizontal Pan, Horizontal Rotation, etc.) or temporary constraints
(Rotate constrained around a vertical axis, Pan constrained along a vertical
axis, etc.) in the 3D viewers. You can only zoom (in or out), pan and rotate.
Select a Path
The loaded project contains one (or several) polyline(s). You can select one as
a path for generating a video. The selected polyline needs to be regular
(composed of one or several continuous segments with (or without) arcs).
To Select a Path:
Note: If the selected polyline contains more than twenty-two nodes, a warning
message appears and prompts you to select the polyline or not.
Producing Media Files 1609
1. Click Draw and Create Path in Database . The Drawing and Picking
Parameters (in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear. The mouse cursor
shape changes to a pencil.
2. Draw a polyline by picking several points
3. Click End Line. The last picked point ends the line.
4. Click Create to save the drawn polyline in the database.
Tip: You can also select Create from the pop-up menu.
Note:
If the drawn polyline is composed of no continuous segments, an error
dialog appears.
If the drawn polyline contains more than twenty-two nodes, a warning
message appears and prompts you to select the polyline or not.
If the drawn polyline is a circle, five keyframes are generated. The first and
fifth keys are in the same position. That's why only four keyframes are
visible.
1610 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Set a Direction
There is a polyline in your project or after drawing one, the Direction field and
the Reverse Path Direction and Smooth Curve icons all become activated.
Otherwise all are dimmed.
If the polyline is a set of segments, Straight sets the start [A] and end [E]
keyframes aligned respectively with the first [AB] and last [DE] segments
and the other keyframes [C e.g.] parallel to the line passing through the
previous and next keyframes.
If the polyline is a set of arcs, Straight sets each keyframe tangent to its
node.
Left rotates all keyframes to the right of the Straight direction.
Right rotates all keyframes to the left the Straight direction.
Top rotates all keyframes so that they point upward.
Bottom rotates all keyframes so that they point downward.
Note: The white dotted line in the picture above is not present in the top 3D
viewer but just here for illustrating the explanation.
1612 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Video Creator dialog, click the Reverse Path Direction icon.
2. Or right-click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom).
3. Select Reverse Path Direction from the pop-up menu.
Tip: You can combine the Reverse Path Direction feature with the Smooth
Curve feature.
Tip: You can combine the Smooth Curve feature with the Reverse Path
Direction feature.
1. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the path (with keyframes) is highlighted in yellow and those along
which you cannot displace the path (with keyframes) are in mauve.
2. Drag and drop to move the path (with keyframes) along that direction.
Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
Producing Media Files 1613
1. Click on a plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can displace
the path (with keyframes) appears in highlighted in yellow and those you
cannot displace along are in mauve.
2. Drag and drop to move the path (with keyframes) in that plane.
Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
Browse Keyframes
A sequence of keyframes defines which movement the spectator will see,
whereas the position of the keyframes on the video defines the timing of the
movement. An active keyframe - the one in yellow in the top 3D viewer - sets
the starting point of that movement. If more than one keyframe is available and
if the active keyframe is other than the first one, you can browse through the
sequence as described below:
To Browse Keyframes:
Tip:
Use the Home (or End) button of your keyboard instead of Got to First
Element (or Go to Last Element).
Use the Up (or Down) arrow of the keyboard instead of Go to Previous
Element (or Go to Next Element).
1614 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Set a Duration
A Duration in second expresses the time the camera will take to run through
the navigation path from the beginning to the end.
To Set a Duration:
Define a Speed
To Define a Speed:
Preview a Video
To Preview a Video:
1. Click Play. The video is launched and the Play button becomes dimmed.
2. Press Esc to stop the video preview.
In the Main View window, a keyframe runs along the defined path from the
first keyframe position to the last keyframe position.
In the Preview window, a preview of the video to create displays in the 4/3
format.
1618 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Create a Video
To Create a Video:
a) Select Custom. The two Pixels fields become editable with 320 x
240 as default values.
b) Set your own resolution.
Note:
A warning message appears when the resolution values are invalid. You
can only set a value between 100 and 2000.
Pressing Esc stops the video encoding. A message which prompts you to
cancel the operation (or not) appears.
In the Main View window, the keyframe, which runs along the defined path
from the first keyframe position to the last keyframe position when
previewing the video, does not run anymore. In the Preview window, a
preview of the video to create displays in the 4/3 format, in the chosen
resolution. The two bands, one on each side of the preview video, take the
color of the main window color.
Tip: The codecs from the drop-down list are those installed in your computer
system. For practical purposes, we recommend you to install the (free) codec
to ensure that your videos reach a wide audience.
Caution: All Microsoft codecs (Microsoft RLE, Microsoft YUV and Microsoft
Video 1) are removed from the RealWorks 8.1 release.
1620 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Media group, click the Capture Screen (High Resolution) icon.
The Save dialog opens.
2. Type a name for the image file. RealWorks assigns automatically the
.BMP extension to this file.
3. Specify the location where you want to store this file by navigating through
the drive/folder.
4. Click Save.
Producing Media Files 1621
1. In the Media group, click the Capture Screen icon. The Save File
dialog opens.
2. Type a name for the image file. RealWorks assigns automatically the
.BMP extension to this file.
3. Specify the location you want to store this file by navigating through the
drive/folder.
4. Click Save. The Save File dialog closes.
CHAPTER 14
Exporting Data
All the RealWorks family of products contain the export features described in
this chapter except for the Viewer. All export commands are gathered in the
Import/Export group, on the Home tab, in the Ribbon.
Caution: For all export features, a dialog opens and prompts you to input a
File Name. Please, note that you cannot leave the File Name field empty. You
have to enter a name. Otherwise, you cannot export.
1625
Note: There are two types of E57 exports: Export to non-Gridded E57 Format
and Export to Gridded E57 Format.
1626 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note:
You can also select a project with meshes (or geometries) inside.
A geometry is converted in a mesh when exporting.
Exporting Data 1627
User Defined
If the selected mesh (or geometry) has been geo-referenced in a coordinate
system different from the UTM coordinate system (for example the Lambert or
the Trimble GX™ scanner), the Export as KMZ File dialog opens with the
"User Defined" option set as default. Exporting to the Google Earth format
involves defining a "Reference Point" on the selected mesh/geometry (mainly a
point on the ground) and giving its related latitude and longitude coordinates in
the WGS84 coordinate system.
Note: If the selected mesh (or geometry) hasn't been geo-referenced in any
coordinate system, the user will have to orientate the scene by himself in
Google Earth.
Tip: You can use the Add Placemark tool in Google Earth to get the
longitude and latitude coordinates of the Reference Point.
Exporting Data 1629
BSF Format
You can export a project, a station (or a scan) or an object with point cloud
inside from RealWorks to a BSF format file at once*. This station can be one
created from a Trimble FX Controller file or not.
1. In the Export to BSF dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Select a frame to apply to the data from the drop-down list.
3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.
4. Select a unit among Meter, International Foot or U.S. Survey Foot.
5. Click Export. The Export to BSF dialog closes.
Note:
A file of BSF format has *.bsf as extension.
A warning message appears if no cloud (or an empty cloud) has been
selected.
(*) You can select several objects as input but only the first (of the
selection) is exported.
1. In the PDMS Export dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Select a frame to apply to the exported data from the drop-down list.
3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.
4. Select a unit* from the drop-down list.
5. Click Export. The PDMS Export dialog closes.
Note:
A file of PDMS Macro format carries the pdmsmac file extension.
(*) Only the Millimeter unit is available.
Exporting Data 1631
E57 Format
The E57 format is a file format specified by the ASTM (American Society for
Testing and Materials), an international standards organization. It is compact
and vendor-neutral. It was developed for storing data (Point Clouds, images
and metadata) produced by 3D imaging systems such as laser scanners. Such
format enables data interoperability among 3D imaging hardware and software
systems and is not dependent on proprietary formats for storing and
exchanging data.
1. In the Export Options dialog, if there are several frames available in your
project, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Choose a frame to apply from the drop-down list.
3. Check an option among Export Intensity and Export RGB Color.
4. Click Export. The Export Options dialog closes.
Note:
Only an object with a point cloud inside can be exported. If an object has
sub-objects with no points inside, a warning message appears and warns
the user that this (or these) sub-object(s) are not exported.
A file of E57 format carries the e57 file extension.
Caution: Data are exported to the E57 format as an irregular grid point sets, in
the Cartesian coordinates (XYZ). Data are exported in Meters.
LAS Format
The LAS file format is a public file format for the interchange of 3-dimensional
point cloud data between data users. It is binary-based. The two LAS format
versions (1.2 and 1.4) support natively the classification of point clouds. Both
standards contain a slight difference in terms of number of layers. The user
has to choose the LAS format version to export to.
LAS 1.2
The LAS 1.2 format version supports 9 predefined layers, and 0 customizable
layers.
1632 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
LAS 1.4
The LAS 1.4 version supports 17 predefined layers, and 191 customizable
layers.
Exporting Data 1633
1. In the Export Options dialog, if there are several frames available in your
project, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Choose a frame to apply from the drop-down list.
3. Choose to export (or not) the color information by checking (or un-
checking) the Export RGB Color option.
Note: The Exported Intensity options is always checked and dimmed. This
means that the intensity information is always exported.
Note:
Only an object with a point cloud inside can be exported. If an object has
sub-objects with no points inside, a warning message is displayed and
warns the user that this (or these) sub-object(s) are not exported.
A file of LAS format has *.las as extension.
Data and bounding box limits are exported in meter.
Caution: The LAS file format has coordinate size limitations. When you export
a georeferenced scene using the LAS format, be aware that its size may have
an impact on the precision of the exported data. For a scene with a size
smaller than 2000 Km, you will have a precision to the millimeter. For a scene
with a size larger than 2000 Km, you will have a precision to the centimeter.
For a scene with a size larger than 20000 km, you will have a precision to the
decimeter.
Warning: The dialog below appears if points to be exported are too far from
the origin of the coordinates frame that will be applied. Precision of the data
may be reduced if you choose Yes.
1634 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: An error message appears in case some layers are out of the LAS
classification range. Some information may be lost because unsupported
layers will be converted to "1 Unclassified", while compatible layers will be kept
intact.
LAZ format
The LAZ format is a compressed version of the LAS format. Exporting to the
LAZ format is similar to the LAS one. Refer to the LAS format topic for more
information. The LAZ format also supports natively the classification of point
clouds. RealWorks does only export in the LAZ 1.2 version. The same
behavior (warning to the user and reclassification to "Unclassified") should be
observed.
Exporting Data 1635
1. In the Export as PCG File dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down
arrow.
2. Select a frame to apply to the data to export.
3. Check an option among the options below:
Export Intensity.
Export RGB Color.
Note:
You should have AutoDesk Revit MEP (Vers. 2013) installed on your
computer.
Data and bounding box limits are exported in meter.
1636 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. In the Export as OBJ File dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down
arrow.
2. Select a coordinates frame to apply from drop-down list.
3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.
4. Select a unit system to apply in the Unit field.
5. Click Export.
Note:
A file of Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) format carries the obj file extension.
Only a mesh can be exported. Trying to export anything else makes an
error dialog appeared.
Exporting Data 1637
Note: You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.
Pointools Format
POD (Point Database) files are Bentley's native point cloud format. No specific
dialog appears when you export a selection to this format. A selection can be a
cloud, a scan, a station or a project. Points, color, intensity and normal (if
available) information (from the selection) are then exported.
Note: The POD file format for Pointools does support the point cloud
classification.
PTS Format
Only an object of cloud type can be exported to the PTS format. If you try to
export anything else, like e.g. a pure geometry, an error dialog appears. If the
object has the two types, only the cloud property will be exported.
1. In the Export Options dialog, if there are several frames available in your
project, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Choose a frame to apply from the drop-down list.
3. Choose to export (or not) the color information by checking (or un-
checking) the Export RGB Color option.
Note: The Exported Intensity options is always checked and dimmed. This
means that the intensity information is always exported.
1. In the Export as DXF File dialog, choose an option among those listed
below.
Export Of: This option allows you to choose which kind of objects you want
to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries or
Selected Clouds.
Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.
Cloud Rendering: This option lets you select a rendering that will be
applied to the exported point cloud. You have choice among all available,
except "White Color" and "Layer".
Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines: Coplanar polylines will be
exported as 3D DXF polylines. That is to say that all circle arcs will be
discretized in segments.
Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane: All nodes of the polyline(s) are
exported in the XY plane.
Note: You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.
Note: Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out the
Cloud Rendering field. Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will
gray out both the Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines and Export
Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane options.
1640 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
ASCII Format
ASCII is the acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Exporting to this file format involves exporting a selection from RealWorks to
the ASCII format. You can only export one project at a time; in this case only
point clouds are exported. In such conditions, an ASCII file format is composed
of a header (mainly comments) and a set of lines. Each line is composed of
one point with coordinates (X, Y and Z), and where present, attributes like
intensity, normal or color.
1. In the Export as ASCII File dialog, choose an option among those listed
below.
Export Frame allows you to select which frame will be applied to the
exported data.
Unit allows you to select the unit system that will be applied to the
exported data.
Separator allows you to specify a separator to set between each value
(Semicolon, Comma, Tabulation and Space).
Decimal Char allows you to specify the decimal char (Point or Comma).
Coordinate System allows you to choose between Cartesian system (X, Y
and Z) and Global system (also called Geodetic Northing, Easting, and
Elevation system).
Decimal Places allows you to define the decimal places.
Export Intensity allows you to export data with intensity attributes.
Export Normal allows you to export data with normal attributes.
Export RGB color allows you to export data with RGB color attributes.
Note: You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.
Caution: A warning appears in the case there is no cloud or the clouds are
empty in the selection.
Note: When the selection is the whole project, no matter the name you enter in
the Export Selection dialog, an ASC format file is created for each station of
the project. Each ASC file is named based on the station name. When the
selection is a station/scan, a unique ASC format file is created and it has the
name you entered in the Export Selection dialog.
Exporting Data 1641
LandXML Format
Several companies, including Autodesk, teamed up to create a method for
exchanging project information across different software packages and
LandXML is the result. LandXML is a generic, text-based file format used to
save project data. It is similar to a DXF™ file, which is a generic file format for
vector-based drawing information.
Note: (*) Selecting anything else will generate the following warning message
"Name of the selected item has not been exported".
1642 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
When you export a geometry, the geometry itself will not be exported but only
its mesh version. This mesh version of the geometry comes from a conversion
with two parameters you have to set. The geometries you can export are listed
here: Box, Cylinder, Ellipsoid, Extrusion, Plane, Plane with hole(s), Pyramid,
Rectangular torus (open or closed), Sphere. When you export a mesh,
whatever the type of the mesh (a merged mesh, a textured mesh or a colored
mesh), it will be exported as a mesh but without the color information.
In the FBX format, the position and the orientation of an object are expressed
in a right-hand coordinate system with the Y-Axis directed to the Up.
RealWorks has also a right-hand coordinate system, but with the Z-Axis
directed to the Up instead. When exporting, a conversion will be performed so
that the views (Front, Up, Left) are identical in RealWorks and in the FBX
format.
1. In the Export as FBX (Autodesk FilmBox) File dialog, click on the Export
Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Select a coordinates frame to apply from the drop-down list.
3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.
4. Select a unit system to apply in the Unit field.
The Angle parameter expresses the maximum length when discretized an arc.
The Length parameter lets the user define the maximum length of an edge in a
triangle.
Exporting Data 1643
And/or
5. Click Export. The Export as FBX (Autodesk FilmBox) File dialog closes.
Caution: When a group of objects has been selected as input, the hierarchy of
the objects in the group is preserved in the FBX format.
Caution: Do not put the parameters Length and Angle too small. Otherwise,
the conversion of the mesh will take a lot of memory and time.
1644 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
TDX Format
The idea behind the TDX format is to enable the exchange of data between
Trimble Business Center and Trimble RealWorks. The requirements for being
able to export to the TDX format is to have a selection from the Project Tree,
and to be in the Registration configuration. The selection (input) can be
everything from the Project Tree, but the result (output) is the entire project.
Standard: This option creates both a TDX format and a TDF folder which
contains all scan files of the project.
Linked to Current Project: This option creates only a TDX format file. No
TDF
Note: Scan data (scans, stations, and leveling information) except images is
not exported from RealWorks.
Note: If the Recap license has expired or is not valid for any reason, the export
will be available in RealWorks but will fail with an error message.
If there are some frames in the project, the Export Options dialog displays and
the user is able to choose one to apply:
Once the export is complete, a file with the RCP extension and a folder, named
following to the file name with the "Support" extension, are created. For each
selected object (scan or cloud), a scan, with the RCS extension is created.
Caution: ReCap has a hard limit of one point per cubic millimeter. As a result,
the number of points in the Recap point cloud may be less than the number of
points of the exported point cloud.
1646 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Product Version
AutoCAD® 2010 v.u.24
AutoCAD® 2009 v.u.23.1.01
AutoCAD® 2008 v.u.22.1.01
AutoCAD® 2007 v.u.21.1.01
AutoCAD® 2006 v.u.20.1.01
AutoCAD® 2005 v.u 19.1.01
AutoCAD® 2004 v.u 18.1.01
AutoCAD® 2002 v.u 16.1.01
AutoCAD® 2000 v.u 15.0.02
AutoCAD® Release 14 v.u 14.1.04
AutoCAD® Release 13 v.u 13.1.01
In RealWorks, the user can export the primitives listed in the table below.
Note:
1 Export in DXF version R14.
2 Possibility to export in DWG version R12, R13, R14, R15 (2000/2002),
R18 (2004/2005), R21 (2007) and R24 (2010).
3 DWG export case: ellipse arcs are exported as segments from start to
end point.
4 LWPolyline by default, Polyline when exporting coplanar polyline as 3D
Polyline checked.
5 DWG export case: Less powerful than DXF export. Use the last R24
version for best result.
6 DWG export case: Full ellipses well managed, ellipse arcs are exported
as segments.
1648 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of
AutoCAD.
Export Of: This option allows you to choose which kind of object you want
to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries or
Selected Clouds.
Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.
Cloud Rendering: This option allows you to select a rendering that will be
applied to the exported point cloud.
Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines: Coplanar polylines will be
exported as 3D DXF polylines. That is to say that all circle arcs will be
discretized in segments.
Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane: All nodes of the polyline(s) are
exported in the XY plane.
Note:
You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.
Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out the
Cloud Rendering field.
Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out both the
Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines and Export Coplanar
Polylines in XY Plane options.
1650 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of
AutoCAD
Export Of: This option allows you to choose which kind of object you want
to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries or
Selected Clouds.
Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.
Cloud Rendering: This option allows you to select a rendering that will be
applied to the exported point cloud.
Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines: Coplanar polylines will be
exported as 3D DXF polylines. That is to say that all circle arcs will be
discretized in segments.
Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane: All nodes of the polyline(s) are
exported in the XY plane.
Note:
You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.
Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out the
Cloud Rendering field.
Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out both the
Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines and Export Coplanar
Polylines in XY Plane options.
1652 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a project (or group, station or other item) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Object Properties feature from the list. The Export
dialog opens.
4. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
5. Enter a name in the File Name field.
6. In the Options panel, choose one of the following:
Selection: The selected item properties are exported. If there are sub-
items under the selected item; all the sub-items properties are exported
too. If there is no sub-item under the selected item, only its own properties
are exported.
Projection of Selection: The properties of all items and sub-items that
belong the project the selection is from are exported.
All Project Trees: The properties of all items and sub-items that belong to
the Scans, Targets, Models and Images sub-trees are exported.
7. Check the Show File option to automatically open the report after
exporting.
8. Click Save. The Export dialog closes.
Exporting Data 1653
Export Images
You can export a single image (or a set of images) to the JPEG format (with
JPG as extension).
To Export an Image:
If only one image has been selected, the Export Image dialog closes.
If a set of images has been selected, the Export Image dialog displays the
next image to save and so on.
Tip: You can right-click on an image in the Images Tree and select Export
Image from the pop-up menu.
1654 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Export Ortho-Images
Tiff (or Tif) is the acronym for Tagged Image File Format. It is one of the most
popular and flexible current public domain raster file format. Exporting an
ortho-image involves saving it in a Tiff (or Tif) format. With the Tiff image, is
created a file of the same name and with the TXT extension. This file contains
the four corners for the Tiff image: Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left and Bottom
Right. These corners are useful for locating an ortho-image in 3D.
To Export an Ortho-Image:
Note:
You can export an ortho-image as a 3D Tiff. To do this, select first the
Export Selection feature, then AutoCAD Files (*.dxf) as file’s type.
If a set of ortho-images has been selected, the export is done one by one
from the first to the last. The user only needs to click Save for each ortho-
image.
Tip: You can right-click on an ortho-image from the Images Tree and select
Export Ortho-Image from the pop-up menu.
Exporting Data 1655
Export Measurements
You can export a measurement (or a set of measurements) as a report in the
Excel format (*.CSV files). Only measurements from an active project (selected
project) are exported. For a Point to Point Distance Measurement, its type,
name, length, delta X, delta Y, delta Z, extremity 1 and extremity 2 values
exported. For an Angular Measurement, its type, name and the angle value are
exported. For a 3D Point Measurement, its type, name and X,Y,Z values. For
an Orientation Measurement, its type, name and the center, azimuth angle and
tilt angle values are exported.
To Export a Measurement:
Export Frame: This option enables to select a frame that will be applied to
the exported data.
Separator*: A separator can be a Semicolon, Comma or Tabulation.
Decimal Char: A decimal symbol can be either a Point or a Comma.
Options**: There are five types of measurement to export: Point to Point
Distance Measurement, Angle Measurement, 3D point Measurement,
Orientation Measurement and Polyline Measurement. Only one type can
be selected at a time.
Note:
(*) The required Separator when exporting to the CSV format is a Comma.
If the user selects a Semicolon (or Tabulation) Separator instead, a
warning message appears and advices the user that the measurement(s)
will be exported as a TXT format report.
1656 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
(**) When you select a type of measurement from the Models Tree, only
the option (from the Options panel) of the same type is enabled and the
other options are dimmed. When you select a set of measurements that
covers all types, the four options are enabled. You need to choose an
option; otherwise the Export button remains dimmed.
You cannot combine a Comma Separator with a Comma Decimal Char.
Exporting Data 1657
Export Frame: This option enables to select a frame that will be applied to
the exported data.
Unit: This option enables to select the unit system that will be applied to
the exported data.
Separator: A separator can be Semicolon, Comma and Tabulation.
Decimal Char: A decimal char can be either a Point or a Comma.
Feature Set Export Options: Options in that panel enables to express a
Feature Set in either the Cartesian coordinate system or the Global
coordinates system. If required, the user can add a description.
Note:
You can only export one Feature Set at a time. If you select a set of
Feature Sets, only the last (from the selection list) is exported.
The Dash-Line Segments (or Continuous Segments) that have been
chosen to link each Feature Point in the Feature Set tool are not exported.
You cannot combine a Comma Separator with a Comma Decimal Char.
Note:
(*) A warning dialog opens if there is no TZF Scan within your selection.
(*) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the
Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
Exporting Data 1659
Note: (**) In the case where the Jpg image files are not writable to the folder
(lack of space or lack of permissions), an Error message is then shown.
1660 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Convert to BSF feature from the list.
If a station (or a set of stations) has been selected as input, the BSF
Conversion Using Registered Stations dialog opens.
If a project has been selected as input, a dialog opens and asks you if you
want to process all stations or not. Click Yes. The BSF Conversion Using
Registered Stations dialog opens.
Note:
The stations can be empty.
(*) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the
Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
Exporting Data 1661
Filter Data
The procedures hereafter are in option. When the user decides to not apply the
filter (or the sampling); the whole scan data will be taken.
Spatial Sampling
The Spatial Sampling method allows you to obtain a point cloud with a
homogeneous spatial density that you have to define.
To Sample Spatially:
1. In the Filtering (Optional) panel, check the Spatial Sampling option. The
Resolution field becomes enabled.
2. Enter a value in the Resolution field.
3. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.
Filter by Range
The By Range allows you to define a distance (from the center of the FX
instrument) beyond which no point will be taken into account. This filter is only
applied to the scan data.
To Filter by Range:
1. Check the Filter by Range option. The Max Distance field becomes
editable.
2. Enter a value in the Max Distance field.
3. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.
Filter by Zone
The By Zone option allows filtering by defining a bounding box. The Min Point
and Max Point are the two extremities of a bounding box diagonal.
To Filter by Zone:
1. Check the By Zone option. The Min Point and Max Point fields become
editable.
2. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Min Point field.
3. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Max Point field.
1662 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Output Files panel lets the user choose between two methods for
converting TZS (or TZF) format files to BSF format files: By Volume or By
Stations. If required, the user can generate a preview and define a location
where the conversion will be placed.
Exporting Data 1663
By Volume
This feature allows you to split a single (or a set of) registered station(s) along
the X, Y and Z axes of the current coordinate system into a set of cloud data.
Each corresponds to a BSF format file and as name: Cloud_Xn_Yn'_Zn''. All
will be put under the Scan Folder (defined in the Output Files panel). If the
cloud data is empty; no BSF format file will be created.
To Convert the TZS (or TZF) Format Files into a Set of Cubes:
1. In the Output Files panel, check the By Volume option (if required).
2. In the Volume Properties panel, click on the pull-down arrow.
3. Choose between Number of Cubes and Cube Size.
4. Enter a number value in the Minimum of Points in Cube for File Creation
field.
5. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a number value.
6. Click Convert.
The conversion is done from the first TZS (or TZF) format file to the last.
For each TZS (or TZF) format file, there are two stages.
You can abort the conversion operation by pressing Esc, only when the
first stage is in progress. In this case, the following dialog appears.
1664 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
By Station
Each TZS (or TZF) format file will be converted into a unique BSF format file
(one per file). Each BSF format file will have as name its related TZS (or TZF)
file. All will be put under the Scan Folder (defined in the Output Files panel).
The conversion is done from the first TZS (or TZF) format file to the last.
For each TZS (or TZF) format file, there are two stages.
You can abort the conversion operation by pressing Esc, only when the
first stage is in progress. In this case, the following dialog appears.
Folder
The Default Folder is the folder where the TZS (or TZF) files are located. The
Scan Folder is the folder where BSF files (once converted) will be put. By
default, it has the same name as the project created within RealWorks.
1. In the Output Files panel, click on the Default Folder button. The Save
In Folder dialog opens.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the BSF format files in the Save In field.
3. Select and open the folder by double-clicking.
4. Click Save. The Save In Folder dialog closes.
In the Output Files panel, check the Generate a Preview BSF File option.
Convert to BSF
Two folders (CAD and Scans) are created and rooted under the Default Folder
(the one defined in the Output Files panel) as well as a file named
Scan_Centers (with BWS as extension). This file is a list of all TZS (or TZF) file
centers. The preview and the BSF (respectively in Preview and Scan Folder)
are all put under the Scans folder.
Note: You cannot convert a station (or a set of stations or a project) that is not
a Trimble Scan File with TZS (or TZF) extension. If you attempt to so, the
dialog below appears.
1668 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project)* (with TZF Scans within)
from the Project Tree.
2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Convert to E57/PTX/PTS feature from the list.
If a station (or a set of stations) has been selected as input, the Convert to
E57/PTX/PTS dialog opens.
If a project has been selected as input, a dialog opens and asks you if you
want to process all stations of the selected project.
Click Yes. The Convert to E57/PTX/PTS dialog opens.
Note:
If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
Sampling by Step
In the Sampling by Step method, one point will be taken into account at each
defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D Image Data.
To Sample by Step:
1. In the Filtering (Optional) field, check the Sampling by Step option. The
Step (in Pixels) field becomes enabled.
2. Enter a value in the Step (In Pixels) field.
3. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.
1670 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Folder
The Default Folder is the folder where the TZF format files are.
1. In the Output panel, click on the Default Folder button. The Save In
Folder dialog opens.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the PTS (or PTX) format files in the Save In
field.
3. Select the folder and click Save. The Save In Folder dialog closes.
Gridded E57
The E57 format is a file format specified by the ASTM (American Society for
Testing and Materials), an international standards organization. It is compact
and vendor-neutral. It was developed for storing data (Point Clouds, images
and metadata) produced by 3D imaging systems such as laser scanners. Such
format enables data interoperability among 3D imaging hardware and software
systems and is not dependent on proprietary formats for storing and
exchanging data.
Note: An E57 format file is created for each TZF scan. The E57 format file is
named according to the name of the TZF format file.
Note: Each TZF Scan is exported to the E57 format as a regular grid point
sets.
Exporting Data 1671
PTS
A PTS format file contains a set of lines information. The Number of Points in
the file is at the first line followed by as many lines as there are points. Each
line corresponds to a Point with the X,Y,Z coordinates, intensity information
(from -2047 to +2048).
Note:
The PTS option applies the station registrations to point coordinates and
then writes them.
The unit of measurement is in Meter.
A PTS format file is created for each TZF scan. The PTS format file is
named according to the name of the TZF format file.
PTX
A PTX format file also contains a set of lines information. The Number of
Columns and the Number of Points per Column in the file are respectively at
the first and the second line followed by a series of sets of lines. The Number
of Lines in a set corresponds to the Number of Points. The first set - which
comes after the two first lines of the file - defines the first column, the next set
the second column, and so on. Each line corresponds to a Point with the
following information: x,y,z,i (from 0.0 to 1.0). If there is no scanning data
(because of sky e.g.), the Point on the column still exists but contains zero.
Note:
The PTX option writes the station registration information in the file header
and keep point coordinates unchanged.
The unit of measurement is set to Meter.
A PTX format file is created for each TZF scan. The PTX format file is named
according to the name of the TZF format file. If the TZF Scan is colored, the
colors information are also exported into the PTX format file.
1672 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tip: You can select an inspection map from the Project Tree (or from the 3D
View) and select Export Inspection Map from the pop-up menu.
Note:
You cannot export an inspection map that is not already created in the
database.
If a set of inspection maps has been selected, the export is done one by
one, from the first to the last. The user only needs to click Save for each
inspection map.
Exporting Data 1673
Horizontal Interval: This interval is a constant step used for displaying the
difference in elevations between the Red Section and the Green Section.
This constant step is a distance value.
Vertical Interval: This interval is a constant step used for slicing
horizontally the inspection map. It is the same as the Interval used in
Section & Shifts (in Inspection Map Analyzer tool) when multi-slicing. This
constant step is a distance value when the inspection map is a Plane (or
Tunnel). It is an angle when the inspection map is a Cylinder.
Amplification Factor: This factor is used for magnifying the differences in
elevations when they are too small for viewing.
Reference Surface Title: This option enables to define a name for the
Reference Surface.
Comparison Surface Title: This option enables to define a name for the
Comparison Surface.
Layer Numbering Offset: This option enables to shift the naming of the
exported slices.
Unit: This option enables to choose a unit of measurement.
1674 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
9. In the Horizontal Interval field, enter a distance value (or angular value) if
the inspection map is a Plane/Tunnel (or Cylinder).
10. In the Vertical Interval field, enter a distance value.
11. Give a value in the Amplification Factor field.
12. Enter a name in the Reference Surface Title field.
13. Enter a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.
14. Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit drop-down list.
15. Click Export. The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog closes.
Note:
The unit of measurement for a distance value is by-default set to Meter;
you do not have to enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (refer
to the Preferences options for more details).
The unit of measurement for an angular value is by-default set to Degree;
you do not have to enter “°” and you can change it when necessary (refer
to the Preferences options for more details).
Caution: In Sections & Shifts of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you cannot
slice an inspection map of tunnel shape horizontally while in the Export
Inspection Map Vertical Slices feature you can.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Export Inspection Map Horizontal Slices feature can
be reached from the Export list, on the Home tab.
Exporting Data 1675
If an Alignment Stationing (on page 970) has been applied to the selected 3D
Path, the stationing information in the drawing helps the user to visualize which
Horizontal Slice is at which position along the alignment
1680 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Note: You can specify the style used to format a station value in the
Preferences / Units (see "Units Preferences" on page 127).
Exporting Data 1681
Horizontal Interval: This interval is a constant step used for displaying the
difference in elevations between red and green sections. This constant
step is a distance value when the inspection map is a Plane (or Tunnel). It
is an angle when the inspection map is a Cylinder.
Vertical Interval: This interval is a constant step used for vertically slicing
the inspection map. It is the same as the Interval used in Section & Shifts
when multi-slicing. The constant step is distance value.
Amplification Factor: This factor is used for magnifying the differences in
elevations when they are too small for viewing.
Reference Surface Title: This option enables to define a name for the
Reference Surface.
Comparison Surface Title: This option enables to define a name for the
Comparison Surface.
Layer Numbering Offset: This option enables to shift the naming of the
exported slices.
Unit: This option enables to choose a unit of measurement.
Note:
The unit of measurement for a distance value is set by default to Meter;
you do not have to enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (refer
to the Preferences options for more details).
The unit of measurement for an angular value is set by default to Degree;
you do not have to enter “°” and you can change it when necessary (refer
to the Preferences options for more details).
Exporting Data 1683
If an Alignment Stationing (on page 970) has been applied to the selected 3D
Path, the stationing information can be found in two locations:
In the title of each drawing. This helps the user to visualize which Vertical
Slice is at which position along the alignment:
Note: You can specify the style used to format a station value in the
Preferences / Units (see "Units Preferences" on page 127).
1688 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Introduction
The Import Scans and Register feature is a batch processing tool. It enables to
execute a sequence of three action types in a Wizard manner, i.e. Input
Preparation (selection of gridded scan data files in TZF format and non-TZF
format, conversion of non-TZF format files to TZF format files, etc.), Data
Extraction (creation of sampled scans, station panoramic images, etc.) and
Scan Registration (with the Plane-Based or Target-Based method).
Caution: Do not process more than one time over a given dataset under the
same project. If done anyway, the Import Scans and Register feature will
duplicate extracted objects.
Note: Trimble RealWorks disables once the Import Scans and Register feature
is started.
Select Files: Enables to select a scan data file (or set of scan data
files) to be added to the list of files to be imported. The selected file
(or set of files) can be of (or a mix of) any supported file formats.
Select Folder: Enables to select a folder (or a set of folders) to be
added to the list of files to be imported. All files from the set of
supported formats found under the selected folder(s) / sub folder(s)
will be added to a default group. The disk hierarchy will be not kept.
New Group: Enables to create a new group.
Caution: If there are some TZF format files out of the project RWI folder.
These files will be not selected and processed. When saving an existing
Trimble RealWorks project file as a new project, please choose to copy the
TZF Scan files into the new project. It is also possible to retrieve locally the
TZF Scan files using the Get TZF Scans Files button of Trimble RealWorks.
To remove a scan data file or a folder from the list of files to be imported, press
the Red Cross at its right side. To remove all files, click the Remove All button.
Once scan data files are added, the total number of files to be processed
displays in brackets in the dialog.
Note: A Riegl's RSP format file is a project file that points to a set of scan data
files. The number of files displayed in the dialog does not reflect the RSP
format file itself but the number of scan data files.
All selected TZF format files will be copied to the project RWI folder. TZF
format files, that need processing (Extended-Range, Color, Re-projection,
etc.), will be processed into new TZF files to the RWI folder. When processing
the TZF format files, the Import Scans and Register feature will always re-
compress the TZF format files. All non-TZF format files will be converted to the
TZF format. For those requiring additional inputs (i.e. the FLS format and the
ZFS format), the corresponding import parameters dialog pops up.
Exporting Data 1691
Note: The Import Scans and Register feature cannot import directly surveyed
data produced by a data collector such as Total Stations (or Field Stations,
etc.), i.e. Topo Points. However, it is possible to use an existing project
containing Topo Points.
Sampling by Step: With this sampling method, one point will be taken
into account at each defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D
image data.
Spatial Sampling: With this sampling method, the user will obtain a
point cloud with a homogeneous spatial density that the user has to
define.
Extract Preview: This option, when enabled, will create a scan by first
getting points, not based on a TZF Scan but from its preview, and by
computing the normals on them. A scan is always named Preview.
The number of points for each is less than two million points.
Filter by Range: This filter will let the user define a distance (from the
center of the instrument) beyond which no point will be taken into
account. This filter is only applied to the scan data.
Note: The default unit of measurement is the unit of measurement set in the
Preferences / Units in Trimble RealWorks.
Note: A RWCX format file will be created for each extracted point cloud and,
this file will be put under the RWI folder.
The Auto-Register Using Planes feature does not require any input parameter:
1694 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
The Target-Based Registration feature allows the user to select between Black
and White Flat Target and Spherical Target as type to use. To select Black and
White Flat Target, click the Black and White Flat Target button. To select
Spherical Target, first enter a value in the Diameter field and then click the
Spherical Target button.
Note: The default unit of measurement is the unit of measurement set in the
Preferences / Units in Trimble RealWorks.
Note: A Black and White Flat Target can appear only once as it has no size
while a Spherical Target can have several sizes, thus appearing several times
in the target list. The target extraction will be launched sequentially for the two
types (if the types have been defined) and for every diameter (if multiple sizes
have been defined).
To remove a type of target to use, select it from the target list and press the
Remove button at its right.
All registration operations are performed on groups, each group having its own
Reference Stations. Groups are not registered together.
Exporting Data 1695
And for all the selected TZF format files, the below progress bars:
Registration.
Extraction of RMX format files.
Update of TZF format files.
Job status.
There are three groups: In Progress, Completed and Failed. When the batch
process starts, all steps initially are stacked in the “In Progress” group.
If the step is completed and failed, it is moved down to the “Failed” group
Before starting the batch processing, the user can go back and modify any
parameters. Once the batch processing is launched, the Start button becomes
disabled. When the batch processing ends, the Finish button becomes
enabled. A folder whose name is Project Name_Batch Output opens and
contains the items listed below:
Batch Log is a report in the HTML format. It contains the list of all
actions that have been performed.
Registration Report is a report in the RTF format file.
RMX Folder which contains a set of RMX format files, one per TZF
format file. A RMX format file is an ASCII-based file which contains
the registration parameters (vector of translation, axis of rotation and
angle of rotation).
Set of JPG station panoramic images with the luminance information
and / or with the color information (if available).
When the batch processing is ended, press the Close button. Trimble
RealWorks switches back to "Enabled" in the Registration mode showing all
scans
Once launched, the batch processing cannot be paused but can be cancelled.
All completed operations will be reflected in the project file as the RWP file is
saved on the go after every successful operation.
CHAPTER 15
You can share your data for collaboration purposes in a customizable and
professional format. You can publish your project, and view it easily in Internet
Explorer. The published project will be viewed in a 2.5D view. You have the
ability to take measurements, add annotations, and/or extract data from the
published project.
The Publish feature is available with the following types of license: Advanced,
Advanced Modeler, Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank, as illustrated below.
The Publish feature can be found in two places on the Home tab, when
dropping-down the Export list in the Import/Export group or in the Sharing
group. The Publish feature can also be found in the Sharing group, on the
Media tab.
1698 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Publish a Project
The input of the feature is a single project with at least one TZF format file
within. Otherwise, the feature is grayed out. If the TZF format file has not yet
been processed, the Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to
proceed to do so. The output of the feature, both a published project and an
embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer, can then be distributed via a
media like a USB flash drive or DVD-Rom. To be able to view a published
project with the embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer, the user needs to
have a 64-bit OS (Seven or 8), Internet Explorer 8 (64 bits) or later and .Net
Framework 4 and Visual C++ Redistributable 2010 X86.
Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
To Publish a Project:
Note: (*) If the selected project contains some TZF Scans for which the links to
the TZF format file are broken, a warning dialog with all missing TZF files
appears. Click OK to close it. The Publish 'Project_Name' dialog opens then.
Note: In the Ribbon, the Publish feature can be reached from the Export list,
on the Home tab.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1699
The Output folder is the folder where all the published files are located. The
default path to the Output folder is C:\Users\User_Name\Documents. The
default Background Color is yellow. The default Font Color is dark grey.
Define a Title,
Attach a Logo file,
Define an Output Folder,
Set a Background Color,
Set a Font Color.
Title
To Edit a Title:
Logo
To Add a Logo:
Output Folder
To Define an Output Folder:
Tip: You can manually enter the path of the Output folder.
Note: The defined Output folder will not be taken into account if you do not
publish your project (by clicking on the Publish button).
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1701
Background Color
There are nine Standard Colors: White, Gray, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow,
Orange, and Purple.
Or
Font Color
There are nine Standard Colors: White, Gray, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow,
Orange, and Purple.
Or
Note: There is no restriction to the number of Media item you can add.
Tip:
You can manually enter the path of a Media to include when publishing.
You can also manually edit a Media's name in the Title field.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1703
Note:
First click on the Media tab, if not done.
You cannot add another Media file unless the first Media has been added.
From the Media tab, click Subtract to remove the related line.
Add a Link
To Add a Link:
Tip:
You can manually enter the path of a Link to include when publishing.
You can also manually edit a Link's name in the Title field.
Note: When a Link points to a document, the document is copied into the final
published project.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1705
Note:
First click on the Links tab, if not done.
You cannot add another Links unless the first Link has been added.
Remove a Link
To Remove a Media File:
From the Links tab, click Subtract to remove the related line.
The information about the "File Size" and the "Estimated Time" are not
available if for each TZF Scan (of the project), the link to the TZF format file is
broken.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1707
Caution: You will be warned that your data will be published with extraction
capabilities if the Enable Extract option is checked.
Note: If the Enable Extract option is kept unchecked, a TZF format file, once
published in the Data/RWI folder, is locked. Its icon is grayed-out if you try
to load it in RealWorks.
A main folder, named according to the name given in the Title field, is created
under the default (or defined) Output Folder. The day and time information are
added to the main folder (respectively in the Day-Month-Year and Hour-
Minute-Second format). Two sub-folders (Bin and Data) and an Html format file
(named Index) are created under the main folder.
Note: The publication may be a success even if the links (from the TZF Scans
to the TZF format files) are broken. You will see then the text "0 files
Processed".
Bin Folder
The Bin Folder is the folder used to embed Trimble Scan Explorer application
files.
1708 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Data Folder
The Data folder is the folder where a published project is stored. By default, a
published project shares the same name as the original project (project to
publish) or the name defined by the user in Title field. A published project in the
Data folder is a replica of the project that has been published (from
RealWorks). This means that there is a RWP file and a RWI folder within (the
Data folder). Each TZF format file from the project to publish is replicated in the
published project in the RWI folder in the Data folder but with a size other than
the original ones (due to the size reduction).
Note: All the Point Clouds of a published project are not accessible. Only TZF
Scans and images are accessible. An error message appears if you try to open
a published project. The message warns you that scan point file(s) is (or are)
missing, points cannot be loaded and the project cannot be open.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1709
1 - Logo 4 - Link(s)
2 - Title 5 - Video(s)
3 - Embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer 6 - Image(s)
Note: You need to have .Net Framework 4 and Visual C++ Redistributable
2010 X86 installed on your computer.
1711
License Agreements
1.2 Other Rights and Limitations. (1) You may not copy, modify, make
derivative works of, rent, lease, sell, distribute or transfer the Software, in
whole or in part, except as otherwise expressly authorized under this
Agreement, and you agree to use all commercially reasonable efforts to
prevent its unauthorized use and disclosure. (2) The Software contains
valuable trade secrets proprietary to Trimble and its suppliers. To the extent
permitted by relevant law, you shall not, nor allow any third party to copy,
decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the Software, or
attempt to do so, provided, however, that to the extent any applicable
mandatory laws give you the right to perform any of the aforementioned
activities without Trimble's consent in order to gain certain information about
the Software for purposes specified in the respective statutes (e.g.,
interoperability), you hereby agree that, before exercising any such rights, you
shall first request such information from Trimble in writing detailing the purpose
for which you need the information. Only if and after Trimble, at its sole
discretion, partly or completely denies your request, may you exercise such
statutory rights. (3) The Software is licensed as a single product. You may not
separate its component parts for use on more than one computer except as
specifically authorized in this Agreement. (4) You may not rent, lease or lend
the Software unless you are a reseller of Trimble products under separate
written agreement with Trimble and authorized by Trimble to do so. (5) You
may permanently transfer all of your rights under this Agreement, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the Software (including all component parts,
the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and this Agreement) and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement. If the Software portion is an
upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the Software. (6) You
may not use the Software for performance, benchmark or comparison testing
or analysis, or disclose to any third party or release any results thereof (all of
which information shall be considered Trimble confidential information) without
Trimble's prior written consent. (7) You may not directly or indirectly export or
re-export, or knowingly permit the export or re-export of the Software (or
portions thereof) to any country, or to any person or entity subject to export
restrictions of the United States, the countries of the European Union or other
countries in contravention of such laws and without first obtaining appropriate
license. (8) You agree to cooperate with Trimble to track the number of server
computers, computers and other devices with access to the Software at your
site(s) to ensure compliance with the license grant and installation restrictions
in this Agreement. In the event the compliance check reveals that the number
of installations at your site exceeds the actual number of licenses obtained by
you, you agree to promptly reimburse Trimble three (3) times the then current
applicable list price for the extra licenses that are required to be compliant, but
that were not obtained, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable penalty.
1.3 Termination. You may terminate this Agreement by ceasing all use
of the Software and destroying or returning all copies. Without prejudice as to
any other rights, Trimble may terminate this Agreement without notice if you fail
to comply with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In such event, you
must cease its use destroy all copies of the Software and of its component
parts.
License Agreements 1713
1.4 Copyright. All title and copyrights in and to the Software (including
but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music,
and text incorporated into the Software), the accompanying printed materials,
and any copies of the Software are owned by Trimble and its suppliers. You
shall not remove, cover or alter any of Trimble's patent, copyright or trademark
notices placed upon, embedded in or displayed by the Software or on its
packaging and related materials. You may, however, either (1) make one copy
of the Software solely for backup or archival purposes, or (2) install the
Software on a single computer provided you keep the original solely for backup
or archival purposes. You may not copy the accompanying printed materials.
1.5 U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with
"RESTRICTED RIGHTS." Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States
Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement, and as
provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-
7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR
52.227-14(ALT III), as applicable.
2 LIMITED WARRANTY.
2.1 Limited Warranty. Trimble warrants that the Software will perform
substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials (i.e.,
applicable user's guide or product manual) for a period of one (1) year from the
date of purchase. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, you may
have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. The above
limited warranty does not apply to error corrections, updates or upgrades of the
Software after expiration of the limited warranty period, which are provided "AS
IS" and without warranty unless otherwise specified in writing by Trimble.
Because the Software is inherently complex and may not be completely free of
nonconformities, defects or errors, you are advised to verify your work. Trimble
does not warrant that the Software will operate error free or uninterrupted, will
meet your needs or expectations, or that all nonconformities can or will be
corrected.
2.2 Customer Remedies. Trimble's and its suppliers' entire liability, and
your sole remedy, with respect to the Software shall be either, at Trimble's
option, (a) repair or replacement of the Software, or (b) return of the license fee
paid for any Software that does not meet Trimble's limited warranty. The
foregoing limited warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from (1)
accident, misuse, abuse, or misapplication; (2) alteration or modification of the
Software without Trimble's authorization; (3) interaction with software or
hardware not supplied or supported by Trimble; (4) your improper, inadequate
or unauthorized installation, maintenance or storage; or (f) if you violate the
terms of this Agreement. Any replacement Software will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is
longer.
1714 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
3 GENERAL.
License Agreements 1715
TRIMBLE INC.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Valid as of April 6th, 2006.
1717
Legal Notices
Release Notice
Create a Terrain Contour Map • 888 Create the Results • 332, 1517, 1524
Create a Topo Point • 769 Create Thumbnails • 271
Create a Video • 1593, 1620 Create/Edit Targets • 684
Create all Ortho-Images • 1134 Created TZF Scans • 291
Create an Extrusion With Holes • 1266 Creating 3D Points From Matched
Create an Ortho-Image • 1121 Targets • 774
Create an UCS • 250, 1469 Creating a Polyline • 1427
Create and Edit Samples • 1083 Criteria for Roundness • 1581
Create Beams • 1462 Criteria for Shell Settlement • 1576,
Create Colored Meshes • 1066 1581
Create Connected Ortho-Images • Criteria for Verticality • 1576, 1580
1121 Customize a Series of Colors • 374
Create Feature Sets • 862 Customize a Size • 94
Create Iso-Curves • 1064 Customize the Quick Access Toolbar •
Create Ladder Cages • 1484 117
Create Meshes • 927 Customize the Settings for a Mouse •
Create Ortho-Images • 110, 1102, 468
1133, 1156, 1157, 1588 Customize the User Interface • 112
Create Points • 768 Cut and Paste an Item • 230
Create Profiles • 852 Cutting Plane • 874
Create Railings • 1485 Cylinder • 1194, 1317, 1357, 1401,
Create Rectified Images • 1134 1408
Create Sampled Scans • 312, 648, 651 Cylinder Shape • 1009
Create Samples • 1084 Cylinder With Circular Torus • 1402
Create Scans from TZF Scans • 310 Cylinder With Cone • 1403
Create Stairs • 1501, 1506 Cylinder With Cylinder • 1401
Create Station Images from TZF Scan Cylinder With Sphere • 1402
Color • 273 Cylinder-Based Projection • 980, 982,
Create the Built Frame • 268 1000
Create the Contours • 898
Create the Extracted Cloud(s) • 1095
D
Create the Extracted Cylinders • 1447 Data Folder • 1710
Create the Fitted Geometry • 697, 701, Define (or Edit) a Grid • 1544, 1547
703, 708, 738, 742, 744, 749 Define a 3D Axis • 1424
Create the Measured Value • 1542 Define a 3D Direction • 1420
Create the Profile • 862 Define a 3D Direction Using Precise
Create the Profile and the Cross- Methods • 1282
Sections • 919 Define a 3D Direction Using Visual
Create the Railings • 1500 Methods • 1284
Index 1725
Define a Unique (or a Series of) Define the Center Point of a Limit Box
Measurement Rule(s) Below the • 295, 454
Top Weld of a Course • 1561 Define the Color of a Level • 420
Define a Vertical Face By Picking Define the Depth Parameter • 1130
One 3D Point, Then Four Screen Define the Dipping Plate • 1510, 1520
Points (Horizontal Direction, Define the Hoops • 1477
Vertical Direction and Depth) • Define the Horizontal • 1109
1259 Define the Horizontal Axis by Picking
Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Points • 641
Two Screen Points (Horizontal Define the Image Parameters • 1129
Direction) and One 3D Points • Define the Initial Station • 1548
1137, 1138, 1231, 1232, 1307 Define the Instrument Height • 731,
Define a Width • 908 734
Define a Zone of Interest • 1115, Define the Interval Between Two
1125, 1148 Consecutive Sections • 1514, 1522
Define an Area • 1584 Define the Intervals • 420
Define an Elevation Range • 890 Define the Ladder Length and Start
Define an Extruded Entity • 1265 Height • 1473
Define an Inspection Area • 1070 Define the Landings • 1505
Define an Inspection Grid • 1072 Define the Layout of a Publication •
Define an Interval Value • 892 1701
Define an Offset Value • 961 Define the Loop End • 1491, 1497
Define Automatically the Vertical Define the Moving Step • 794
Axis • 638 Define the Normal Direction • 955
Define Backsight Points • 730, 733, Define the Normal Z Direction • 1225
750 Define the Orientation of a Plane • 876
Define Courses • 1550 Define the Output Files • 1664
Define Measurement Rules Spaced at Define the Output Intensity of Points •
Regular Distance Between Two 1664
Welds • 1559 Define the Parameters • 1533
Define Parameters • 1428 Define the Parameters of the Body •
Define Principal Iso-Curves • 1063 1514
Define Regular Intervals • 414 Define the Parameters of the Sump •
Define Stations • 1548 1515, 1522
Define the • 1428, 1429, 1430, 1431 Define the Position of a Plane • 881
Define the Body Parameters • 1521 Define the Position of the Stations •
Define the Bottom Measurement 977
Rules • 1563 Define the Posts Along the Path •
1499
Index 1727
Define the Principal Contours • 896 Delete a Point (or Line) • 1174
Define the Properties of an Instrument Delete a Polyline • 830
Station • 730, 733 Delete a Single Polyline • 831
Define the Rendering by Elevation Delete a Target • 687
Interval • 434 Delete all Keyframes • 1606
Define the Rendering by Elevation Delete all Picked Points • 617
Origin • 435 Delete all Polylines • 831
Define the Rest of the Stations • 1549 Delete an Element from a Mesh • 942
Define the Settings • 975 Delete an Existing ColorBar • 418
Define the Shape of the Active Hoop • Delete an Existing Layer • 545, 547
1480, 1481 Delete an Item • 234
Define the Shell Measurement Rules • Delete and Connect Extremities • 1530
1558 Delete Items • 812, 813
Define the Start and End Positions • Delete Items and Prevent from Hole
906, 1499 Creation • 814
Define the Start/End Position When an Delete Samples • 1085
Alignment Stationing has been Delete Sections • 850
Defined • 987, 1002 Delete the Active Hoop • 1479
Define the Start/End Position When no Delete the Displayed Cloud • 1187,
Alignment Stationing has been 1437, 1457, 1466, 1488
Defined • 986, 1001 Delete the Extracted Cylinders • 1444
Define the Thickness for Outside Delete the Last Picked Point/Pair of
Scans • 1515, 1523 Points • 617
Define the Tolerance Parameter • 893 Delimit a Region on a Set of Points •
Define the Vector X Direction • 1224 323
Define the Vertical Axis by Picking Detach a Multi-User License • 63
Two Points • 639 Detect Edges • 343
Define the Vertical Straps • 1483 Determine a Resolution • 988, 1004
Define the Width of All Polylines • Determine a Resolution in the
126 Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection •
Define Video Parameters • 1616 988, 1004
Defining a Grid Resolution • 961 Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-
Delete a Bounding Polyline • 1395 Based Projection • 989, 1004
Delete a Feature Code • 865, 874 Determine the Height of a Dipping
Delete a Feature Code Library • 864, Plate by Fitting • 1513, 1521
872 Discontinuity-Based Sampling • 342
Delete a Feature Point • 867 Displace a Model Group • 225
Delete a Geometry • 365 Display • 97
Delete a Keyframe • 1606 Display (or Hide) a Sub-View in Full •
Delete a Node • 828, 1393 93
1728 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Display (or Hide) all Station Marker Display the Discontinuity of Points •
Labels • 398, 495 444
Display (or Hide) all Stations • 396, Display the Network Visuals of a
495 Station • 402
Display (or Hide) Specific Station Display the Network Visuals of all
Makers • 398 Stations • 405
Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals Display/Hide Images • 497
of a Station • 401 Dock a Window • 115
Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals DotProduct Files • 187
of all Stations • 404 Download Trimble RealWorks • 48
Display a Geometry • 390 Download Trimble Update Network
Display a Point Cloud • 388 License Utility • 49
Display a Toolbar • 116 Drag and Drop an Item • 229
Display a TZF Scan • 407 Draw a 2D Section • 1461, 1471, 1506
Display a Window • 113 Draw a Chain of Segments and/or
Display all Clouds of a Layer • 551 Arcs • 821
Display all Geometries of a Layer • Draw a Circle • 826, 931, 983
552 Draw a Circle by Defining its Center •
Display all Station Marker Labels • 1422
398 Draw a Circular Fence • 325
Display all Station Markers • 397 Draw a Circular Polyline • 1391
Display an Image • 393 Draw a Cylinder • 931, 983
Display an Inspection Map • 412 Draw a Fence (Lasso Only) • 324
Display and Hide a Limit Box • 303, Draw a Fence (Polygon and Lasso) •
462, 793 325
Display and Hide a Station • 792, 797 Draw a Fence (Polygon Only) • 324
Display and Hide Clouds/Geometries Draw a Line by Defining Two Points •
Outside the Limit Box • 304, 463, 1418
792 Draw a New Polyline for Bounding •
Display and Hide the Alignment 1386
Stationing from a Curve • 424 Draw a Path • 904, 912, 1489, 1490
Display Edges of Models • 447 Draw a Polygonal Polyline • 1387
Display or Hide all Objects by Layer • Draw a Polyline • 817, 820, 1124
551 Draw a Polyline in a Plane Parallel to
Display Points in HD • 540 the Screen View • 1215
Display Specific Station Maker(s) • Draw a Polyline in a User-Defined
399 Plane • 1216
Display the Contours • 897 Draw a Rectangle • 824
Display the Cross-Sections • 918 Draw a Rectangular Fence • 325
Index 1729
Export a Feature Code Library • 864, Extend to One Other Geometry • 1400
873 Extract all Points from TZF Scan(s) •
Export a Selection as a File • 1627 280
Export an Event Log File • 69 Extract an Initial Cylinder by Picking •
Export an Existing ColorBar • 418 1438
Export an Inspection Map • 1674 Extract and Classify Point Cloud
Export as a DGN Format File • 1450 Regions • 359, 362
Export as a DWG Format File • 1448 Extract Black and White Flat Targets •
Export as a DXF Format File • 1449 698, 739, 751
Export as a LAS Format File • 1635 Extract Clouds From 3D Inspection
Export Feature Sets • 1659 Clouds • 1091
Export Horizontal Slices • 1675 Extract Colored Meshes • 1065
Export Images • 1655 Extract Iso-Curves • 1060
Export Inspection Maps and Slices • Extract Point Targets • 702, 743
1674 Extract Point Targets (Corners) • 703,
Export Limit Boxes • 307, 466 744
Export Measurements • 1657 Extract Points from a Specific Area •
Export Object Properties • 1654 309
Export Ortho-Images • 1656 Extract Spherical Targets • 694, 735,
Export Pipe Center Lines • 1447 751
Export Sections • 1038 Extract Targets • 693
Export Station Registration Parameters Extract to a New Mesh • 942
to RMX Files • 778 Extrusion • 1214, 1321, 1374, 1407,
Export Station Registration Parameters 1409
to TZF Files • 777
Export the Quick Access Toolbar •
F
120 Face of Curb Point and Gutter Point
Export the Registration Report to a Pickings • 527
RTF File • 675 Feature Code Libraries • 863
Export the Results • 1518, 1525 Feature Codes • 865
Export TZF Images • 1660 Feature Points • 866
Export Vertical Slices • 1683 Fence a Set of Points • 923
Export with Advanced Features • 1654 Fence an Area • 696, 700, 706, 737,
Exporting Data • 1625 741, 747, 939, 967, 995, 1015, 1050
Extend (or Stretch) a Thumbnail • FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155) • 111
1167 Fill Holes • 968
Extend an Entity by Snapping • 1324 Fill Line Breaks • 816
Extend Between Two Other Filter a 3D Inspection Cloud • 1089
Geometries • 1408 Filter all Sections • 1526, 1573
Index 1731
Select an Initial Cylinder for Tracking Set a Slider to a Position by Drag and
• 1440 Drop • 1028
Select Data • 87, 513 Set a Slider to a Position by Picking •
Select Items • 809 1029
Select Items from a Section • 1529 Set a Thickness • 857, 913, 1097
Select Markers • 1167 Set a Tolerance • 913
Select No Projection • 928, 932 Set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan • 408
Select Points to Remove • 281 Set an Image Resolution • 1152
Select Scan Data Files • 1690 Set as Home UCS • 268
Select Stations for Matching Targets • Set Coordinates • 876
722 Set From Frame • 983
Select Targets for Matching from Set Over a Known Point • 731, 763
Different Stations • 721 Set Point Cloud Extraction Options •
Select the Center Point of a Limit Box 1694
• 296, 455 Set Scan Data Registration Options •
Select the Contents of a Specific Layer 1695
• 550 Set the Cloud Inside the Limit Box as
Select Two Clouds • 608 a Working Cloud • 330, 452
Selecting a Polyline • 1426 Set the Corners • 1106
Selecting and Picking Data • 511 Set the Head Always Up Option • 470
Selection List • 87 Set the Horizontal Orientation of a
Send an Entity to SketchUp • 593, Scene • 640
1588 Set the Interval Parameter • 908
Send to AutoCAD • 202 Set the Low and High Elevation
Set (or Edit) the Parameters • 1107 Values • 891
Set a Density • 1129 Set the Orientation and Numbering
Set a Direction • 1612 Conventions • 1550, 1565
Set a Display Mode • 870 Set the Parallel Mode • 501
Set a Duration • 1616 Set the Perspective Mode • 500
Set a Group as a Model Group • 223 Set the Preferences • 123
Set a Hoop as Active • 1479 Set the Section Size • 848
Set a Model Group as a Non Model Set the Unit of Measurement for
Group • 223 Length • 122, 129
Set a Navigation Mode • 471 Set the Vertical Orientation of a Scene
Set a Position • 1111 • 637
Set a Projection Mode • 500 Shift a Project • 238
Set a Resolution • 1118, 1129 Shift a Station • 1555
Set a Slider Position by Defining Shift a Weld • 1557
Values • 1030
Index 1743